M 3 81 «- i.Z THE GRAMMAR OF THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. SECOND COURSE. 1971550 HEBREW GRAMMAR. LETTER XLVI. My Lady Duchess, Sooner than I expected I am honoured with a summons to resume the course of my instruction. To have heard from your Grace that you have, since I last had the honour of addressing you, gone completely through the Elementary Work recommended to you in one of my former Letters (xliv. § 1), has given me the greatest pleasure, but has not caused the least surprise ; for after your having translated in so satisfactory a manner the detached passages of Scripture which formed the series of Exercises transmitted to you, it was but natural to expect that a little volume so smooth and easy of con- struction as that alluded to, would be read through by you, as it were, in no time. Your having read through the whole of this Elementary Work, instead of only part of it, as suggested by me, will be to your Grace a matter of the greatest self-congratulation, when you shall perceive, as you most certainly will hereafter, the great facility you have thereby acquired of entering into the criticism of The BIBLE; and particularly of that im- portant portion of it, that Fountain of Christian Truths, the fifty-third chapter of Isaiah, to read which in its YOL. II. B 2 HEBREW GRAMMAR. original purity was at the first your Grace's pious ambition, and which, under the blessing of Providence, will form a conclusion to the course upon which we now enter. The plan which I will endeavour, with your Grace's permission, to follow out is, as I mentioned in an earlier Letter, to go again over the ground we have already trodden, adding such things as may be necessary, and particularly having a regard to what may bear upon the Syntax of The Language. I need not stop here to enter into the Definitions or the terms of Syntax and its technicalities ; I must not forget whom I have the honour of instructing in Hebrew, and that your Grace need not learn from me what is meant by the terms Syntax, Proposition, Nomi- native Case, Subject or Agent, Predicate, and the like. There is, however, a feature peculiar to Hebrew which requires some peculiar technical terms ; I allude to the case of words in the State of Construction with other words. Thus, for example, in the case of D\*J7£ 121 [the] word-of GOD, 121_ (the Construct form of ")in a word) will be termed the Antecedent, and DN^P^ the Consequent. This being premised, I shall, before proceeding with the subject, only crave your Grace's indulgence to allow me occasionally to mention a second time things that may have been laid before your notice previously ; sucl? repetitions will sometimes be unavoidable, and sometimes will be purposely made in order to impress some import- ant observation more deeply on your Grace's mind. 2. We have seen already (Letter xvi. P.S. a) that the H which represents the Definite Article assumes some- times the nature of a Relative Pronoun, so as to be synonymous with ")$i$ who, or which. Now, in this LETTER XLVI. capacity the H with exactly the same punctuation as the Definite Article, may be prefixed even to Verbs ; and not merely to Participles, but to Tenses also ; thus we read [Gen. xviii. 21], "I will go down now, and sec whether according to the cry of it (ns % 3H) which iiatii- come unto ME," &c. ; and again [Ruth ii. 6], " It is the Moabitish damsel (HD^H) that hath returned with Naomi ; " the accent being on the Penultimate syllable in each of these instances, proves that in each of them the Verb is in the Past Tense (Letter xxxvi. § 3*). In like manner we find [Joshua x. 24], " And he said unto the captains of the men-of-war (8137'J'v) WHICH went with him," &c. ; K^i? being the 3 Plu. Past Kal of "«|7n with a Paragogic K anomalously added. The H , when used thus for the Relative Pronoun, may even be prefixed to a Verb having an Objective Affix ; this occurs chiefly in the case of the Participles; as I^DKSn | [Ucut. viii. 10] Who [was] causing thee to cat (Manna in the wilderness); ^n THS®H h#n [IV xviii. 33] The God who [is] girding me with might. 3. When the H , with the punctuation of the Definite Article, is used to mark the Vocative Case (Letter xvi. P.S. b), it may be prefixed even to words in the State of Construction; thus we read [Lament, ii. 13], "What thing- shall I liken to thee (D^ttfTP T\3.T\) O daughter of Jerusa- lem ? " In such cases the H cannot represent the Definite Article, as we saw at an earlier period (Letter xviii. § 4): the few instances that occur in Scripture where this great rule (viz., that the Definite Article cannot come before a word in the State of Construction) is infringed, must be considered as anomalies of an cxtra- * Page 316, line 8 from the bottom. t For ^Vowan . B 2 HEBREW GRAMMAR. ordinary character, and must not by any means be imitated in Composition (Letter xviii. P.S. b). 4. It can of course be only known from the context when the P! represents the Definite Article, and when it marks the Vocative Case ; thus in Ps. cxiv. we read, verse 3, " (DJH) The sea saw and fled, (IT]! 1 "}) the Jordan [saw and] was turned back ; ' and verse 5, " What [happened] to thee, (DV1) O sea, that thou shouldest flee 1 (HTH) O Jordan, that thou shouldest be turned back ? " in the first of which instances we see that the H in DVl and in H.T.n represents the Definite Article, whereas in the latter instance it marks the Vocative Case. 5. The n of Interrogation is sometimes used also to express Surprise ; when it merely denotes asking a question, it is termed by the Hebrew Grammarians n/KtWm the n of Interrogation ; but when it marks Astonishment it is denominated by them i"IDT\n"n the H of Surprise ; thus, when we read in Gen. xxiv. 58 of Rebekah being asked by her friends "O/00 " Wilt thou go with this man? " &c, we have a plain question to which an answer is expected ; but when, in Gen. iv. 9, Cain says, 02X ^ntt IDC^n Am I my brothers keeper? the H denotes merely Surprise, which is also the case in the Lamentations, where the sacred Elegist pictures the passers by, exclaiming at the sight of Jerusalem in ruins ('. . . . T#n riNtH), " Is this the city that men used to call the perfection of beauty ? " &c, where no question also can be supposed, since they knew well that this was indeed the city. 6. When one question closely follows another in the same strain, the Interrogative H is, in some few in- stances, given to each of them ; thus [Psalm xxx. 10], ^Pg T|\n IJJJ Tj-jvn Shall dust praise Thee? LETTER XLVI. shall it declare thy truth ? But more frequently the second question is preceded by the Particle DS whether f as [Jer. viii. 22] DB> P£ K*ft DN Tg^3 |\S nyn 7s Mere «0 foi/w zra Gilead? Is there no physician there? 7. In some instances the Interrogative H is not expressed but understood in the second question ; as [Job viii. 11] D)D ^3 "inK »|^ Hp *&3 K©ll HN^H TFi7/ [f//e] rwsA grow-up without mire ? will [the] fluff grow without water ? 8. In other instances the Interrogative H is omitted altogether, and must be supplied from the context; thus [1 Sam. xxi. 16] ^N DUJjBfeJ ipn ylw? 7 m want of madmen, &c. ? where "ipn stands for "lpnn : so likewise [Job xl. 25] nan? jn^V^^Dn Canst thou draw Le- viathan with a hook? where "^CH stands for ^|J^Dnn . 9. The Interrogative il is sometimes blended with the Particle DK , the compound word CKfl signifying Whether ? This however occurs but very seldom (see Numb. xvii. 28, and Job vi. 13). 10. With regard to the position of the Interrogative H in the sentence, the following few observations may perhaps be useful : — I. When there is not in the sentence any word particularly emphatic, the Interrogative H is in gene- ral prefixed to the Verb, or, if the question be negative, to the negative particle; as |j7 J"1K DriJL'Tn [Gen. xxix. 5] Know ye Laban ?— Djpfg WlCJJ VfrV] [Gen. xlii. 22] Said I not to you? &c. 11. When a Finite Verb is coupled with an Infinitive to denote Emphasis (Letter xxviii. § 0), the Interroga- tive H is prefixed to the Infinitive; as 1JZI "}Spri ^'/DH [Gen. xxxvii. 8] Shalt thou (m.) indeed reign over us? III. When, however, any word is peculiarly emphatic, this word will take the Interrogative H , whether the HEBREW GRAMMAR. question be merely Interrogative or negatively so ; as [Ps. lxxxviii. 11] K^| nfc>Jt/n DV^H Wilt thou show wonders to the dead ? — [Jerem. v. 22] 1KTTI N7 \nian Will ye not fear Me ? — [ Genesis xviii. 25 ] vzvd n&y^ tf? rnxn 72 tDZ&n shall the judge T V ^> I V T T T OF ALL THE EARTH not do right? It will be perceived that the word, to which the Interrogative il is prefixed, opens the sentence in each of these cases. 11. In a few instances K7 stands for N7H , the Inter- rogative H being understood ; as [1 Sam. xiv. 30] " Much more, if haply the people had eaten freely to-day of the spoil of their enemies which they found, surely now (rO-P nnan N7) would there not have been a much greater slaughter among the Philistines ? ' After the same manner should Prov. vi. 30 be rendered, namely, 3337 WU 1 K7 Do not [men] despise the thief? &c. 12. K/H though strictly a negatively Interrogative Particle, is sometimes used either to assert emphati- cally a positive fact, or to enjoin a command; as [Deut. iii. 11] " Behold, his bedstead [is] a bedstead of iron, ( fcOn K7H ) is it not in Rabbath of the children of Amnion 1 ? " i.e., it actually is in Rabbath, &c. Again [Ruth ii. 9] Boaz says to Ruth TP")¥ K7H « Have I not commanded the young men that they shall not touch thee 1 ? " i.e., I have indeed commanded, &c. In Josh, i. 9 GOD said to Joshua, (^WV fcftfj) " Have not I commanded thee ? Be strong and of a good courage," i.e., Mark well, I have commanded thee, &c. 1 3. The shades of signification of the Conjunction T are too many to be comprised in a Grammar; for these your Grace must rely upon a good Lexicon; a few, however, of its most peculiar uses it may not be improper to mention here. LETTER XLVI. 7 I. It is sometimes used to signify since, seeing that; as [Gen. x.wi. 27] "Wherefore have ye come to me (T»fc DJHK^ EJHSiJ seeing that ye hate\\\t., hare hated] me ? " II. Sometimes it is used in an explanatory sense; as [1 Sam. xxviii. 3], " Now Samuel was dead, and Israel had lamented him, and had buried him (iTJ731 nE"l3) in Ramah, that is in his city" III. It sometimes stands as a mere expletive, and may then be rendered by the English even ; as [Exod. xii. 1!)], " For whosoever eateth that which is leavened ( K\-)n fc^jn nrniprj), even that soul shall be cutoff" &c. IV. It sometimes stands for the Conjunction that ; as [Numb, xxiii. 19], " God is not a man (31?^ ) that HE should speak falsely." This is generally the case when- ever the 1 is used to introduce a dependent clause of the sentence. 14. The prefix 2 stands sometimes for in; as [Gen. viii. 1], " And GOD remembered Noah, and every living thing, and all the cattle that was with him (HDFQ) in the ark ; " sometimes it stands for on or upon, as [Exod. xiv. 29], " But the children of Israel walked (H^3^3) upon the dry-ground" &c. Again it is used to express Instrumentality, and may then be Englished by with or by ; as [Exod. xxii. 23], " And I will slay you (21.H3) with the sword ; " and again [Psalm xxxiii. 6], lfrjJi*D?9# np) 1212 By [the] word of JEHOVAH were the heavens made. Frequently, however, the 2 is used altogether plco- nastically, or (as I am inclined to think) as a mark of the Objective Case ; as [Prov. ix. 5], " Come ye, cat (?i2Ty]2) my bread, and drink ye (|?\3) [the] wine | which] I have mingled;" and so [Exod. vii. 20], ritpEZ D-YJ and he lifted up the rod. 8 HEBREW GRAMMAR. 15. On the prefix 3 I shall have to dwell at some length by and by ; for the present I shall only observe that care should be taken to distinguish between those cases in which its signification as, like, or similarly to, must be used, and those in which it must be rendered by according to : thus in Prov. xxvi. 4 and 5, " Answer not a fool (ilT?5$5 like) [or similarly to] his folly, lest thou also be like unto him " (i.e., speak not foolishly, as he does ; if he uses abusive language, return not thou the like to him) ; [on the other hand], " Answer a fool (ifi7^5) according to (i.e., in a manner befitting) his folly, lest he be wise in his [own] eyes " (i.e., give him a pointed answer, that he may perceive his foolishness). If not for the distinction thus pointed out, these two verses which so closely follow each other, would, as your Grace will perceive, appear to involve a contradic- tion. 16. In the case of the prefix 7 also, a little attention is requisite to distinguish the instances to which its significations to, for, with regard to, respectively belong ; thus [Gen. iii. C], "And she gave also (fit^N*?) to her husband;" [Deut. xi. 15] "And I will give grass in thy field ffiflZpn;! 1 ?) for thy(m.) cattle ; " [Gen. xvii. 20] (78 i7 , &c. ; as [Gen. xx. 5], "Said he not ( v) to me, she is my sister 1 " — [Gen. xx. 13] "Say ( 7) with regard to (or, respecting me), he is my brother ; ' [Ruth iii. 1] " Should I not seek rest (X)) for thee (/.)?" 18. The Preposition 7X likewise has a variety of mean- ings; as, [Gen. iii. 16] "IEN n^NH 7$ " to the woman HE said" &c. ; [Gen. xx. 2] " And Abraham said LETTER XLVI. (!"nii' 7N) with REGARD to (or respecting) tiarah, she is my sister " ; [Gen. iv. b] " And Cain rose up (7N) against Abel his brother " ; in the two latter instances /N seems to stand for 7J/ . 19. The prefix 7 is not unfrequently used, without any signification, merely as the mark of the Objective Case ; as [Levit. xix. 18], ?[i03 ^h ??L , §1 And thou shalt love thy neighbour as thyself ; [2 Sam. iii. 30] "13DS7 1J"in the ii slew Abner. In a few instances too • : - : : t J the preposition 7X is thus used to mark merely the Objective Case, being equivalent to the particle ntf ; as [Judg. vii. 25], |HO 7N IST]?] And they pursued Midian ; and so (according to the very proper rendering of the English Authorized Version) we have [Ps. ii. 7], ph 7N IT12)P§ / will declare the decree. 20. The prefixes 3,3, and 7 are, in poetical lan- guage and in passages of dignified style, turned into the particles 1D3 , 1^3, iD 1 ? ; as [Job xix. 16], "I called to my servant, and he would not answer me : ( "^ 1D3 for 1 ES3) with my mouth I must-make-supplication to him ; ' [Exod xv. 5] " They went down into the depths (|J« iD? 3 for 15»5) like a stone;" [Job xl. 4] 11 5 1«? ^ROty 'HI I have put my hand to my mouth, (i.e., I have made up my mind not to speak so again,) where '•S) iQ7 stands for ^1 . N.B. The particle 1C7 which, as in the example just quoted, stands merely for the prefix 7 to or for, should be most carefully distinguished from ID? to or for them (?«.), which stands Poetically for OH? ; as [Ps. xliv. 11] i£7 1D&' they have taken spoil to them (hi.) (i.e., have taken spoil for themselves). 21. The prefix D is sometimes used in a negative 10 HEBREW GRAMMAR. sense, as well before Verbs as Nouns ; as [Gen.xxvii. 1], rMTYQ TO"*!/ T ^n^ri] and his eyes were dim, so that he could not see (lit., from seeing) ; [Ps. lxxxiii. 5] "HUD DTPIDJ] 13 1 ? Come, and let us destroy them from [beinq] a nation (i.e., that they should not be a nation); [Job xi. 15] " Then shouldest thou lift up thy face (DIED) without a blemish." 22. The same prefix is also sometimes used in a partitive sense ; as [Gen. iii. 6] i'HSZ? H^l and she took of (i.e., some of, part of) its (m.) fruit ; [Job xxvii. 6] ifflD ^rn 1 ? syini $h my heart cannot blame any of my days. 23. It is sometimes used in a Causative sense to express by reason of on account of, because of; as nynwn nis 1-id^ei D3^« nirp *ron«D [Deut. vii. 8] I?j/ reason of JEHOVAH'S loving you, and because of His keeping the oath, &c. 24. The D is sometimes elegantly blended with the Prepositions fi8 wtfA, and Dj/ with ; as [Ps. cxviii. 23] n«T njrn nirp n«o from (\it, from with) jehovah has this come-to-pass ; [Ps. exxi. 2] fTifp Dj/E ^JJjJ ^ /^//; [w] from (lit., /rem wtM) JEHOVAH. Pleonasms of this kind, though by no means unfrequent in Scrip- ture, should not in Composition be too much indulged in, except in instances where the exact Phraseology of The Bible is imitated. I send herewith an Exercise for your Grace to translate into Hebrew, as I hope, with your permission, to do throughout the present course ; the assistance given, however, will be found to be much more scanty than in the former series of Exercises, but with my thus endeavouring to ascertain more fully your * This is the Infinitive of 2nS to love, with an additional H (Letter xxx. § 15, p. 236), which is ehanged into f"l to show that the Infinitive is in the State of Construction. LETTER XL VI. 1 1 power in The Language, I feel sure that your (irace will readily concur. The chief help which I shall furnish will be to give these Exercises, as far as I can, in Hebrew- English, — as I gave the preceding series. EXERCISE LXL (to be translated into bebeew.) " A house and wealth [arc the] bequest of parents, but from lin nbra rvhN t i t -: - T " JEHOVAH [is] an intelligent wife." Blessed-is [the] man [who] hath-found a good [thing], [viz., who] •• : - t t can-obtain favour from an intelligent wife. P-1S Fut Jliph. "?i-1 AVho [is] like-him perfect in his happiness rejoicing in his ■■ T V - ■ T lot? Vrfi T Hand-in-hand they walk both-of-them, like [one (///.)] t \wng iV« Fut. Kai Drn.?^ walking in a garden in-the-cool-of (Ileb., hi-tlic-brecze-of) the day. ibn Hithp. nr^ Whithersoever-may-be the mind of (Ileb., spirit of) the-one to nBitf rvrp n^ ; s b« n-n -rnsn-i- i t •' : ■ v -: v - t v t I 2 1 go, [thither] also will go the-other, for one mind (Ileb., spirit) [is] to both-of-them. * Withaff. ■nafy, &c. t Used abstractedly. X Inf. Kal with b of abD3 . 12 HEBREW GRAMMAR. Peace and quiet follow their footsteps (Heb., gently -guide-themselves OftgJ brf3 Fut. Hithp. 1 at their-foot), rejoicings and gladness are-before their-face. ., b ninety V»3 Dip Fut. PL io'ps . Like a steady fountain so [is] their love, from it (/.) they will draw waters-of gladness. _2 1 Great [things] their heart will not desire, for great-is their love. Plu. (/.) T»n Vi: Pastil/ (/.) Wealth and riches will not add [anything] to-them, for their love iob T is (Heb., it f. [is] ) their treasure. They will not fear for their house on-account-of snow, NT* Fut. Kal » for their love is for a shelter to-them. .3 npnn iob They will laugh at heat and drought, for with their affection they b oh n s s ...2 onvr* will refresh themselves. 01» Hiph. E$?3 All those seeing them will bless themselves by-them, for their n«i ■(■ ... ^ name is blessed. TO Partic. Pu. Blessed-of [The] Most-High shall-they-be-called, for they- Past Partic. Kal T^S ^ W3f. have-become a blessing in the land (Heb., in [the] midst-of the land). TV>n ^np. * A Plural Noun, f Partic. Kal with affix. (to be continued in the next exercise.) LETTER XLTII. 13 LETTER XLV1I. There are various modifications of the sense in which a Hebrew Noun in the State of Construction is connected with its Consequent, the word, that is, with which it is in Construction. I beg therefore to begin my Letter by noticing the following shades of meaning expressed by this connexion. The State of Construction is used — I. To denote that the Antecedent (Letter xlvi. § 1) belongs to, or is in the jwssession of, the Consequent ; as, for instance, — lil^j; ni^ [Gen. xxiii.17] [the] field of Ephron, Ephron s field ; njf-ja TV"! [Gen. xlv. 16] [the] house of Pharaoh, Pharaoh's house. N.B. The belonging of anything to any person may also be expressed by a Dative of the Consequent ; as [Ps. cxv. 16], " The heavens are ( HiiT^ D^C&' ) [the] heavens of JEHOVAH" (lit., [the] heavens to [i.e., belonging to] JEHOVAH); whereas in Lament, iii. 66, the State of Construction is used ; iTJIT W$ the heavens of JEHOVAH. II. To denote the relation in which the Antecedent stands to the Consequent with regard to family con- nexion, or to express any of the conventional relations of life; as ")im ]2 [Gen. xxix. 5] [the] son of Nahor ; *?$"#>: ^9 [2 Kings xxiii. 13] [the] king of Israel. 14 HEBREW GRAMMAR. N.B. These relations too may be expressed by the Dative of the Consequent; as [1 Sam. xvi. 18], " Behold, I have seen (w) ]3) a son of Jesse (lit., a son to Jesse) ; " and [Numb. xxii. 4], " Balak [the] son of Zippor [was] ( 2MD 1 ? ^D ) king of Moab (lit., king to 31oab)." III. To denote that the Antecedent is a means of leading, or conducting to the Consequent ; as |V>¥ ^3"H [Lament, i. 4] [the] ways-of Zion, i.e., the wags that lead to Zion ; D'w.n m_K [Prov. v. 6] [the] way of life, i.e., the way that leads to life; 1JV3 ni2^5 [Job xxxviii. 20] the paths of its (m.) house, i.e., the paths which lead to its house ; and again it is used to denote that the Antecedent is a means of imparting, giving, or producing the Consequent; as D^n \V.. [Prov. iii. 18] a tree of life, i.e., a tree imparting, or conducive to, life, njMtt'N'l MV/2? [Isai. xii. 3] the fountains of sal- vation, i.e., fountains imparting salvation. IV. To denote that the Antecedent is destined to, or intended for the Consequent, or that the former is simply necessary for or requisite to the latter ; as bSXD JN¥ [Ps. xliv. 12] lit., sheep-of food, i.e., sheep intended for food; nrntp |N¥ [ver. 23] sheep of slaughter, i.e., sheep intended for slaughter ; and again Dp\P3 ]"Ojn 12& [Gen. xlii. 19], [the] corn-of [the] famine of your houses, i.e., the corn requisite, or necessary for the famine of your houses. V. The Consequent, though really a Noun Sub- stantive, is very frequently used to serve as an Adjective to the Antecedent; as Jtfl'p Dp!? [1 Sam. xxi. 5] bread of holiness, i.e., holy bread; HD")^ ^tfD LETTER XI/VIL 15 [I'rov. xi. 1] lit., balances of deceit, i.e., a deceitful or false balance (see Letter xxi. § 9) ; so also ^03 rnj/p_ [Numb. vii. 13] lit., a dish of silver, i.e., made of silver, sis we say in English, a silver dish ; 7H3 &""UJ [Deut. iii. 11] lit., a bed of (i.e., made of) iron, as we say, an iron bedstead. N.B. When in such cases the Noun thus qualified requires a Possessive affix, the affix, instead of being given to the Antecedent, is always given to the Consequent; as ^lp r "in [Ps. ii. 6] [the] mountain of My Holiness, for My Holy mountain ; 1JJ7V J"HJ [Job. viii. 6] [the'] habitation-of thy righteousness, for thy righteous habitation ; or the Noun must be re- peated ; as HP^n j£Q| 11^3! [Gen. xliv. 2] my cup fAe c%p of silver, which stands for my silver cup. VI. Sometimes, but by no means frequently, the Antecedent must be translated as though it served as an Adjective to the Consequent; as 2il% pT [Gen. i. 30] greenness of herb, i.e., green herb. N.B. In such cases, too, the Possessive affix, when required, must be given to the Consequent; as JT|J3 1^D3 tygi?! [Prov. xxxi. 13] and she wrought with icillingness-of her hands, i.e., with her willing hands. VII. In some instances the Antecedent is qualified by the Consequent ; as C^"TJ3 f 1ED [Isai. lxiii. 1] dyed-qf garments, i.e., dyed as to, or with reference to, [His] garments ; |j?J l| 0yW [Jer. xli. 5] shaven-of beard, i.e., shaven as to [their] beard. VIII. In a few instances, a Verb or Participle must 16 HEBREW GRAMMAR. be understood after the Antecedent, to express the true force intended by the connexion ; as D^HPP Dm [Prov. ix. 17] lit., bread of secrets, i.e., bread eaten in secret. 2. In some instances some other Preposition than of must be used in rendering this connexion of Antecedent and Consequent into English ; as 3"in vj^n [Lament, iv. 9] slain by the sword; Dh "O^b [Prov. ii. 7] lit., walkers-of uprightness, i.e., those walking in uprightness. From all these instances, and very many others that might have been adduced, we see that the Antecedent cannot be any part of speech that is at all Definite ; it may, however, be an Adjective referring to a Noun understood or pre- viously expressed ; as "iNfl PT$£ [Gen. xxxix. (>] comely of form, Ppy H&'p [Exod. xxxii. 9] hard of neck ; or an Infinitive Constructive, as has been already seen in many instances. And again, the Consequent may be any word capable of denning the Antecedent: it may even consist of several words forming a clause of a sentence ; as Dip hlW tf^T? ^$ ^3£? [Lament, i. 14] The Lord hath given me [over] into the hands of— I cannot rise, — which stands for " He hath given me over into hopeless ruin, into a state of inability of rising again from my misfortunes." 3. In some instances the Constructive is anomalously used for the Absolute form ; as J/3^3 *$! [2 Sam. i. 21] [O ye] mountains in Gilboa, where "HH plainly stands for D^ri; and so TH ^ "O^H [Jud. v. 10] [Ye who] walk upon [the] way, where ^h stands for D^?h . An anomaly of this sort occurs in the second Psalm, verse 12, viz., i3 ^Din *?3 all who trust in Him, where \pin of course must stand for D'pin . It is almost to be wondered at that an anomaly occurring so early in the LETTER XLVII. 17 Psalms should have been unnoticed by such excellent commentators as Ben Ezra, Yarchi, Kimchi, Bril (the disciple of Mendelssohn), and also the Rev. George Phillips in his recent Commentary on the Psalms, who has the great advantage over other English Commenta- tors of having drawn largely from the latter. 4. On the other hand, we find sometimes the Abso- lute form used anomalously for the Constructive ; as piS! D^niD [Bxod. xxviii. 17] rows [of] stone, where DnitD stands for niCO ; and so &!}}& H^g [Ruth ii. 17] an ephah [of] barley, where PI^NI stands for 5. Two or more Nouns in Construction may follow each other ; thus, Jacob said before Pharaoh [Gen. xlvii. 9], " Few and evil have been f>TI ^ ^ ) [the] dai/s-of[the]years-of my life, and have not attained unto (TQS «H y& ^D)) [the] days-of[the] years-of [the] life-of my fathers ." 6. It has been seen (Letter xviii. § 6) that the Accusative Case of a Noun having the Definite Article may be preceded by nx , the mark of the Accusative Case ; this mark may also precede an Accusative Case defined in any other manner than by the Definite Article ; as, for instance, when it is defined by being in Construction with another Noun, or by a Possessive Pronominal affix; as Tip) IIP] HS STH [Exod.ix.20] the [one'] fearing the word of JEHOVAH ; Wl^h** \Tri3n [Gen. ix. 15] and I will remember My covenant. Proper Names, being the most defined of all Nouns, in general take Di* before their Accusative Case; as nj n$ DVfrS TJW [Gen. ix. 1] And G0JD Messed Noah. 7 '. I have now the opportunity of dwelling upon a VOL. II. C 18 HEBREW GRAMMAR. very remarkable feature of The Language, to which I crave your Grace's particular attention. The Subject of a Passive Verb being, in a manner, the Object of the sentence, the Case appropriated to the Object of the sentence (i.e., the Accusative) is, in Hebrew, some- times used to express the Subject, when the Verb is Passive ; though in other languages the Nominative Case is always used to express the Subject, as well when the Verb is Passive, as when it is Active. For example, when in Hebrew we say bDX2. "I^Zin the flesh is being eaten, we have the privilege of considering the Noun "l£^3 flesh, cither as the Subject or as the Object of the Verb, though in all the languages with which I know your Grace to be familiar, it could only be considered as the former. Hence we sometimes find HK , the mark of the Accusa- tive Case, placed before a Noun referring to a Passive Verb, where in other languages, the Noun would be considered as the Nominative to that Verb. Thus, we read [Exod. xxi. 28] " The ox shall surely be stoned, (Hfr? ntf h^W 8*71) and his flesh shall not be eaten; [Numb. xxvi. 55] " By lot (JHNH HK pSlT) the land shall be divided." 8. The mark HK is sometimes placed before a Noun to give it an Absolute sense ; as, [2 Kings vi. 5] " And as one was felling a beam, (D^H ^ btt ^n^H HN]) then [as for~\ the iron (i.e., the axe-head), it fell into the water!' This remark will be of the greatest possible importance, when we come to the exposition of the Fifty-third Chapter of Isaiah ; and as I shall then quote more examples in illustration of it, I must beg that this one may suffice for the present. 9. Much more frequently, however, the Noun is known to be used in an Absolute sense, by its being LETTER XLVII. 19 followed in the same sentence by a word having either an Objective or a Possessive Affix relating to it ; as, ft.ga D7;n IVjn [Deut. xxxii. 4] [As for] The Bock; His work is perfect ; DJVEVN HB^V [Ps. xviii. 41] and [as for] my haters (i.e., those hating me), I shall cut them off ; and sometimes merely by the context, as when Pharaoh said to Joseph, JJJQ ^UK ND2H pi [Gen. xli. 40] Only, [as to] the throne will I be greater than thee. 10. Enough has already been said in a preceding Letter (xviii. § 11) of the uncertainty which pre- vails in Hebrew with regard to the gender of Nouns representing Inanimate objects ; but a few observations upon Abstract Nouns may, perhaps, not be out of place here. These, when not terminating in quiescent H preceded by Kawmets, are for the most part Masculine; thus, of 10 riches we find vtyni "I1D# 10 [Eccles. v. 12] riches kept for the owners thereof where both the Participle "HCft' and the masc. Possessive Affix of Tv^? sncw that 10 is masculine ; so of |iil wealth, D^.D^l ^D s |i»"I [Prov. xix. 4] Wealth will add many friends, where H^ shews p"Pl to be masculine. l>ut Abstract Nouns terminating in quiescent H preceded by Kaivmets are generally feminine ; thus, of H 72 JH prayer we read i"G7 "THSril [Job xvi. 17] also my prayer is pure, where the feminine Adjective PI2T shews ilPSMjl to be feminine; and so likewise of HIIPJK love, HJOp jealousy, DWj? ViXr? HtfjP H^PJS njB? njJJ [Cantic. viii. 6] Love [is] strong as Death, jealousy [is] cruel as [the] grave, where the feminine Adjectives HJjL/ and n$f? shew that the Nouns HDHtf and HNZp, to which they respectively belong, are feminine. 11. In corroboration of what has just been observed, thesynonymous Nouns p"T.V and HjJ'llf righteousness, might ' c 2 20 HEBREW GRAMMAR. perhaps be quoted, of which the former, not terminating in quiescent H , is masculine, and the latter, which does so terminate, is Feminine ; as^IT VJ§7 p"T¥ [Ps.lxxxv.14] Righteousness shall go before Him ; but nVZD b^F\ Hpl^ [Prov. xi. 4] righteousness will deliver from death, where the Verb ^JV shews that p"!V is masculine, and the Verb 7 V ¥^ shews that Hp^V is feminine: In like manner of ph and Hpn a statute, we have NTH t 7S"]^ i ? pT\ [Ps. lxxxi. 5] lit. a statute to Israel [is'] it (m.); but ruSTH Hjjnn nN TpDVf} [Exod. xiii. 10] And thou shalt keep this (/.) statute. 12. Nouns may be used in the Singular Number in a Collective sense ; thus, of ~\Vd/ an ox, "liZDH an ass, |N¥ a flock, 73% a manservant, finipttf a woman- servant, we have [Gen. xxxii. 6] "And I have (nrtQBh Taji ]N¥ nioni ilcr) o^e^, a??d asses, awe/ flocks, and menservants, and womenservants." 1 3. The Verbs referring to Singular Nouns thus used Collectively are generally put in the Singular; as f1**3 311 WCH [Gen. i. 22] and the fowl shall multiply in the earth ; and of PPH a beast we find ^ np^JJ ni&rt rm\ [JobY 23] arcd Me &eas/ 0/ Me jfte/o' will-have-been-made-to-be-at-peace with thee: though sometimes they occur in the Plural; as, [Ezek. xxxi. 6] " In his boughs ( U)!2Wn *]ij/ 73 «U}p ) «// Me foivls of the heaven made their nest;" and D^ Ipnfr"! iTT^n r»T1 731 [Job xl. 20] and all the beasts of the field are-continually-sporting there. 14. Nouns of multitude, such as Djt7 (or DJtJ) a people, TH a generation, J$T$?\ Israel (as applied to the whole nation), D"HVP tyypt (standing for Me Egyptians), and the like, may have the Verbs and Pronouns which agree with them, either in the Singular or in the Plural LETTER XLVII. J I Number; as, Kin cpj/ n& ; p CJ/ HUm nm CJH r\tf T\\S"i [Exotl. xxxii. 9] 7 ftave seen this (m.) people, and, behold, it is a stiffnecked people, where the Pronouns Kin and ill are Singular ; and Trhy 3#*fl EJ/n [Numb. xiii. 18] fAe 'people that [is] dwelling upon it, where the Participle 3fl^ is Singular; but in HlH] JHN D^H IKTn in3g n& ; c;ri niiT? irpioi [Exod. Vv. 31] T A»Etf H [Gen. xix. 23] the sun rose upon the earth, where the Verb *^ agreeing with wp\p is Masculine ; whereas in HN2 W^WH s njH [Gen. xv. 17] And it came to pass when the sun set, the Verb '"'N21 agreeing with IDpV? is Feminine: so also of DTI a wind, we find 3?D3 TVC\ [Numb.xi. 31] a wind went forth, where the Verb agreeing with tyn is Masculine ; whereas in nnHt?;-n rn?37 rFni [Job xxxvii. 21] but-when a wind hath passed and cleared them away, both the Verbs agreeing with H 5 ! - ) are Feminine. In one instance we find pTrn n/17^ XVn [1 Kings xix. ll] a wind great and strong, where one Adjective agreeing with nV" 1 is Feminine, and the other Mascu- line ; this, however, ought not to be imitated in Composition. LETTER XLVII. 25 EXERCISE LXIL (TO BE TRANSLATED INTO HEBREW.) (A continuation of Exercise lxi.) As the water [which shows] the face to the face, so [is] the heart of the one to the other (Ileb., the second). As one looking into a mirror will see his image in it, so to2D* ...2 n£na(«t.) cbi'-j- as-for-both-of-them, each-one of-them [has] his [own] likeness before him continually. 2 12 3 When the one will be cheerful, also the other (Heb., the second) ns nnw Fut. Kal i will smile opposite-to-him. 2 The-moment his eye shall-shed-a-tear, also the eye of the other *T] (/.) V121 Fut. Kal (Ileb., the second) will run-down [in] streams of water. TT> Fut. Kal 2 1 3 "When joy shall enter their house; in-proportion-as the hearts of ■•3 (/) Si2 "1#£?3 both-of-them shall join (Ileb., mix themselves up) in it, so will 4 3 J_ 2 their joy also be to them double (Heb., for double). 2 1 2 1 "When mourning shall pass over them, they will bear it together : >3 p)bn 3 1 2 3 therefore will its-weight not be-heavy upon them. iEDS 1 2 1 Thus will they both-of-them enjoy-themselves all the days of their lives : thus will they delight-themselves until the light of life be gone (Heb., until t1ic~bci> l g-tal Hiph. Tnq« By-reason-of-his-knowing that by his seed after him his name ...2 1 will-be-perpetuated : and that the glory of their parents will be to them [for] an inheritance. nama T T [And that] also they will teach their practices Pron. expressed mpV.p 1 3 1 2 to their children : so-that glory will-be their possession, even-to . ..1 tins nbqa [the] latter generation. 1 2 1 Then will the other (Heb., the second) pour-forth (Heb., give) his voice in weeping : a mourning will he make for him, ■ga ba« a-bitter-lamentation. D'Hsnari ispn A _!L His flesh upon him will-have-pain : because-that he also nH3 1#H ^V p ron . expressed 2 1 [himself] lies not in the sepulchre with [the] flesh of his flesh. Fut. Kal DV ...» Yea his soul within him (Ileb., upon him) will mourn : because 3 1 2 that his bones rest not with [the] bone of his bones. (m.) ni3 Fut. Kal * Inf. Kal with E of E vD2 and Possessive Affix. LETT lilt XLTIII. 27 LETTER XLVIII. Your Grace will have perceived from one of my former Letters (xxi. § 2), that the Adjective in general follows the Noun with which it agrees. The Adjective CDjPP a little, is, however, generally placed before the Noun; as D^D COJEJD [Gen. xviii. 4] a little water; this is particu- larly the case when several things are mentioned follow- ing each other ; as ^31 cy_Cl nV CVJ2 [Gen. xliii. 1 1] a little balm, and a little honey ; and so 22$h d?t pan tojt/p rri»i:# 'cv.'o m*i# vyn [Prov. vi. 10] A little sleep, a little slumber, a little folding of the hands to lie-down. In a few instances only this Adjective follows its Noun ; as DJ/q m^D [Eccles. x. 1] a little folly, PJt/2? J2Hpp [Ezek. xi. 16] a little sanctuary. So, on the contrary, the Adjective 21_ , which mostly follows its Noun, sometimes precedes it ; as D" 1 ^' D\SH [Ps. lxxxix. 51] many people ; 11133 HiS"] [Prov. xxxi. 29] many daughters. 2. Likeness and similitude have been seen in an earlier Letter (xxi. § 10) to be expressed by the prefix 3 ; they are, however, sometimes more strongly expressed by the omission of the 3 ; as 3HJ v^>| VT [Cantic. v. 1 4 J his hands are rolls-of gold, on which Wolfsohn and Ihil, in their Commentary, very well observe that the omission of the 3 of Comparison adds force to the sentence, 2S HEBREW GRAMMAR. which does not express merely that his hands are like rolls of gold, but that they actually are such; in like manner we have inn 1 ? nvyn pa ")#« &x nnln pa nwiz ly [Prov. xxv. 28] [As] a city broken down, and without a wall, [so is] a man who hath no rule over his spirit, where- the 2 is again omitted to give the greater force, and to express that the one is exactly like the other. 3. We have seen (Letter xxi. § 11] that the Com- parative Degree is expressed in Hebrew by an Adjective followed by D prefixed to the following Noun, or by its equivalent, the Preposition ]D . But the Adjective sometimes (when no ambiguity can exist regarding the Predicate to be supplied) is omitted, by which ellipsis the two things under comparison are brought into much more distinct and forcible opposition ; thus fr iyr$Q VV^ n ? [Prov. xviii. 19] lit., A brother offended — than a strong city, where the ellipsis is well supplied in the Authorized English Version by is harder to be won, so that the full translation is, A brother offended [is harder to be won] than a strong city. 4. Ellipses of this sort impart great strength and elegance to the Hebrew Language in which conciseness and vigour are so admirably united, — and as so re- markable an instance of elliptical expression has just been adduced, it may perhaps be allowable to mention here a few more specimens of the same class of Hebrew Ellipsis, though they do not exactly fall under the same head as that just mentioned (viz., Comparison). We read in Psalm cxviii. 7, LETTER XLVIII. 20 Vtifctt n«"J8 OKI f t : : v : v • -: - / JEHOVAH is for me among my helpers, Therefore shall I see — upon my haters. i.e., of course, / shall see what I would wish to see, or as it is very properly translated in the Authorized English, I shall see [my desire] upon my haters. So again, in Psalm xcii. 1.2, t : t i . - : • ■* *• : - t • It - J And mine eye hath seen — on mine enemies, Mine ears are-continually-hearing — on those who rise up against me [the] wicked. where the ellipsis, in each hemistich, is again properly supplied by my desire. So again in Psalm vi. 4, : t -: ; * : - : \n£ iy niiT nnw - t - t : t - : And my soul hath been exceedingly troubled, But, as for Thee, O JEHOVAH, How long— ? i.e., How long wilt Thou suffer matters thus to go on ? or, (as given in the Prayer-book Version,) How long wilt THOU TUNISH ME ? But of all such instances, one of the most beautiful is that which occurs in the 137th Psalm, verse 5, where the inspired bard, lamenting his captivity " by the waters of Babylon," when summoned to sing " one of the songs of Zion ' before the insulting foe who had laid the Sacred City waste, pours forth his plaintive 30 HEBREW GRAMMAR. strain, " How shall we sing the song of JEHOVAH in a strange land," and utters then the warm ejacu- lation, — ww nu^n D^&hT "nrG&te dk . . _ . • t T : • •• t : v If I forget thee, Jerusalem, let my right-hand forget — Forget what? — her power and art, of course, to sweep those thrilling chords that used to wake such raptures in the hearts of those who worshipped in the now desolate and ruined Temple of The MOST HIGH. 5. But just as Ellipses frequently occur whenever the sense of the passage cannot fail to supply the omitted word or words, so on the other hand Pleonasms are often used, with great elegance, to repeat an idea, either in different words or by the negation of its converse ; as ■>t^K 1-10*1 ^8 niftbx n&X [2 Sam. xiv. 51 lama widow • • TT-'T T T : - T • L J woman, and my husband hath died; ^03 ptf D2n PWyjl [Exod. xxi. 11] Then she shall go-out for nothing, without [paying] any money; irnr\ tf7] nruS TM2 \p [Isai. xxxviii. 1] For thou art dying, and shalt not live ; and [Lament, iii. 2] " Me hath he led and caused to go ("litf 871 "^H) [in] darkness, where [there is] no light." 6. The Superlative Degree is expressed (see Letter xxi. § 13) by the Adjective being followed by 3 prefixed to the word of which the excellence is predicated ; there are, however, various modes of expressing exceed- in n ^ [1 Kings viii. 27] [the] heaven of heavens, i.e., the highest heavens. 7. The emphasis produced by repeating a word is sometimes employed to impart exclusiveness to the idea expressed by that word; thus, sp"in pi¥ pf.V [Deut. xvi. 20] Righteousness, righteousness shalt thou pursue, i.e., righteousness only shalt thou pursue ; "^lV N1H ^n "'H [Isai. xxxviii. 19] A living, a living [man] he can praise Tfiee, i.e., a living man only. 8. When two ideas are used — the one to illustrate, or exemplify the other, — the idea which forms the illustra- tion usually occurs first, and — I. If the sentence conveying it begin with a Noun, this Noun has the 3 of Comparison prefixed to it : — II. If the sentence begin with a Verb, — this Verb is preceded by the full Particle 1^3 as ; the sentence expressing the second idea being, in each case, con- nected with the former one by means of the Particle ]3 so : For example we have, (I.) [Prov. xxvii. 8.] ioippp t?1j &x p nap IP rrni: liav? As a bird wandering from her nest, so [is] a man who- wandereth from his place ; but again (II.) [Isai. lv. 10, 11] LETTER XLVIIT. 33 T ■ ^K 2V6* iS ;t 7 ''BQ »>P "l#8 "nm JTPP 13 t • i -- *• v -: • t : v : . ' *• .... DP"n As goetli clown the rain and the snow from the heaven, and thither returneth not, &c So shall My Word be, that shall go-forth from My mouth, it shall not return unto Me void ; &c 9. Similes of this kind arc however sometimes ex- pressed in a more elliptical form ; as, 7Jtf 31DJ1 inS^f! iflBJQ by h^jT] nTV [Pro v. xxvi. 14] The door is-wont- to-turn upon its hinge, and \_so~\ the sluggard [is wont to turn] upon his bed, where 31D? must be supplied in the second hemistich. But as Ellipsis is so common in Hebrew as to form quite a feature in The Language, it will be necessary to bring many various instances of it before your Grace's notice ; and as a few ellipses of a particular class have already been touched upon in this Letter, it may perhaps be allowed me to introduce now a more detailed and general view of this important subject. 10. The Substantive Verb to be, which in the Present Tense is always omitted in Hebrew, is sometimes, in the Past Tense, expressed (viz., by the Past Tense of n\"J to be) ; but it is far more frequently even then omitted, and, consequently, the particular Tense of it, to be supplied in an English rendering, can only in many instances be determined from the context ; thus, * I shall hereafter have an opportunity of shewing the true Construction of this verse ; but, though the translation will be some- what different, I see no objection to quoting it here in its usual acceptation for the purpose of illustrating the point we haw now in hand. VOL. II. D 34 HEBREW GRAMMAR. !2 Dinj; iljH t^nani. [Gen. iii. 1] And the serpent was more subtle than, fyc, (where the Substantive Verb, in the Past Tense, is expressed) ; iSE D2T\ &>\S 3131*1 [2 Sam. xiii. 3] : t t tt : I And Jonadab [was] flNI in the second parallel is instead of "Hitf r^pi , the D being understood from the word 1$D in the first parallel. 12. It sometimes even happens, though not so fre- quently, that a word or prefix occurring in the second hemistich is, by a kind of anticipation, understood but not expressed in the first hemistich ; as, [Prov. xiii. 1] T ~ T T I •' A wise son [hath hearkened to] the instruction of [his] lather, But a scorner hath not hearkened to reproof, (i.e., the former is wise because he received the instruc- tion offered, but the avowed scorner is a man who has hardened himself by not listening to the well-intended rebukes of his friends), in which passage we see that the Verb VD& is understood in the first hemistich, while it occurs in the second. D 2 30 HEBREW GRAMMAR. Similarly the prefixed Preposition 3 in the second hemistich is by anticipation understood before the word TV3 in the first one in the passage [Prov. xv. 6], msj/a j/&h nxiannil vt : v t t - : • 1 [In the] house of a righteous [man there is] much treasure, But in [the] revenue of a wicked [man is] trouble. We have again a remarkable instance, in which the repetition of a word — which would occur in two con- secutive clauses — is avoided, in the well-known passage [Exod. vi. 3], *j# b$2 2py^ bm pnw bx dt-qk *?k k-i*n — ... I *-: - v : I t : • •„■ t t : - v I •• t nnb wria sib nim wi v t • T - t : • : And I appeared unto Abraham, unto Isaac, and unto Jacob by [the Name of] GOD ALMIGHTY, But [by] My Name JEHOVAH have I not been known to them, where there is an ellipsis of the Noun D& in the first clause, on account of its occurring in the second ; and again an omission of the prefixed Preposition 2. in the second clause, because it occurs in the first. 13. In a great many instances, however, words and prefixes must be altogether supplied; and such, of course, are the cases to which the term Ellipsis more strictly applies than to the one just mentioned, where the word or prefix omitted was in a manner implied by its appearance in the alternate member of the sentence ; thus, for example, we read* [Ps. xiii. 4] V T - I - • I V - ~- T • T Lighten mine eyes lest I sleep [the sleep of] death (lit., the death), where the full expression would be HJZpn [ rO^ { ] j^N |2; LETTER XLV11I. 37 so also i]J$n IVI bSN [2 Sam. xiii. 39] (which stands for TH ttfttf < 7?^] ) -^«rf [the soul] o/* David the king longed (to go forth to Absalom) ; and [Ps, xvi. 2] nlrrt £1?$ (which stands for HliTO ^M Jp")P» ) Z%00 [O my soul] fcasf sa&d unto Jehovah, &c. Again, we find [Gen. iv. 25] that Eve called her son's name Seth, — 1H8 jn| D\i7K ^ H# *5 For [she said] GOD hath appointed to me another seed, where HnpK she said must be supplied ; Similarly too [Ps. ii. 2, 3] we have an ellipsis of lbN7 saying, when we read of the kings and rulers taking counsel together irv^q 'jjn ftp) 7£ Against JEHOVAH and against His Anointed, [172x7 saying ] . . . IID^jllDiD n^ nj^na^ Let us break-asunder their bonds, Sgc. Again we find [Ps. iii. 5], khpk nim 7« ^ip t ' : v t : v • I [With] my voice I cry-continually to JEHOVAH, where the prefixed Preposition 3 must be supplied before the word vip: So likewise either the prefix 7 , or the Preposition 7X must be supplied before the word ]"P3 in [Gen. xliii. IS] HD^ rva wain ^ D-tfwn wt*i l •• •• • • t -: t : ••* And the men feared because they were brought [into the] house-of Joseph. In highly poetical and energetic language, the prefixed Conjunction 1 and is not unfrequently omitted ; thus [Hab. iii. 11], Tpy 0T W12V [the] Sun [and the] Moon stood still, for nT T 1 &W i 38 HEBREW GRAMMAR. And so also [[Job xxxvi. 5], 37 H3 T22 mighty-of power [[and] wisdom flit., heart), where the 1 must be supplied before 3 1 ? . In sentences expressing periods of Time, the Numeral sometimes occurs alone without the Noun representing the part of Time; thus, [[Gen. viii. 13] Vlhb "TrhXG \WX-\2 In the first [[month], on [the\first [[day] of the month, lit., on [the dat/2 one t° t ne month, where itflh month must be supplied to '|i& ; Nl and UV to THX , so that the full expression would be u/ihh ins lv2 \Wvnn tfVna. V TV I • T 14. It lias been already observed (Letter xxiv. § 7) that the Relative Pronoun ")$*? is very frequently omitted, but in language of lofty strain not merely "l(^tf , but the phrase LW "I&'K where, lit., which there, is some- times to be supplied ; as, }-n N7 IHh? q0£!! [Job xii. 24] J.wd ITe toA cow** ^e»i to wander in a wilderness [[where there is\ no way, where D$ 1#N is required before ^YJ tih; So also, Gh$ N/ jng 7# TLp^H^ [[Job xxxviii. 26] To cause-rain upon [the*2 earth [[where ffortf w] «o »kZ%, where C^ -|£tf is required before B^K tih . 15. Sometimes, though rarely, a Personal Pronoun is understood, instead of being expressed ; thus, when king David asked of Ziba [2 Sam. ix. 2], " Art thou LETTER XLVIII. 39 Ziba!" he answered ( ^Zlj/ ) thy servant, for ^X 5p!3y I am tin/ servant ; And so when Jacob at the well asked of the herdsmen respecting Laban (1*7 Dityn ) is he well? (lit., is there peace to him ?), we read [[Gen. xxix. f)j that they answered,— { DlW ) peace, for ([i^ Di^tf) peace \js to him], i.e., Ae is well. So again Possessive Pronominal Affixes arc vm/ /'/r- quently omitted ; as, 3N m)ff) Dpn }3 [Trov. x. 1] A wise son will gladden [[Aw] father, where 38 stands for VQN ; . . . v\y nvj>n nirpiri ghg [Trov. xxix. 13 J. »»» / reproofs (i.e., a man often reproved J, hardening £hts^\ neck, £c, where *]"]}/ stands for iSIJtJ . Objective Pronouns too, whether full or in the form of affixes, are often omitted ; as, TJfiJ KiUfil Nfcrn [Ruth ii. 18] 4nd s/;c> /ooA- [it] wp, and came [into] the city, where K&im stands for either 1ni» Nfc*m or IfTRfettll 16. On the other hand we sometimes find Personal Pronouns repeated, to give great emphasis; as, W V W$ nr\b 81,1 v?JK v?J8 psai. xliii. 25] I, I, am blotting out thy transgressions, (See P.S. b), i.e., I only can do it ; and again, Kin TIN r\ypt$ RIO CJ NlfTI [[Gen. xx. 5^ And she. yea she (i.e., she herself) said, 71c is my brother. 40 HEBREW GRAMMAR. As we happen now to have Pronouns under our con- sideration, it may perhaps be well to take this oppor- tunity for making a few remarks, which are yet necessary, upon them. 17. We have seen (Letter xlvii. § 8, 9) that a Noun is sometimes used in an Absolute sense ; this is also sometimes the case with the Personal Pronouns ; as, . . . . j^Sp ^22 "ON] £Gen. xlviii. 7J And as for me, on my coming from Padan, &;c. TpnK spTi 1 HtfK rTjIiT [Gen. xlix. 8] Jadah, as for thee, thy brethren shall praise thee. 18. The Personal Pronoun, as was seen in an earlier Letter (xxiii. § 8), is sometimes for the sake of emphasis placed after the word in immediate connexion with it; but sometimes to give still greater force, it is placed quite at the end of the clause to which it belongs ; as, wru» D">nK TIM "W D W i Gen - xlii - 13 3 We % twelve servants are brethren. 19. Personal Pronouns are sometimes used pleonasti- cally ; as, [Trov. xxii. 19^] " That thy trust ought-to-be in JEHOVAH, (HJJK *\X Di'H Tfl?"tf n ) I have caused thee to know this day, even thou," where the HF\& *\R cannot be translated in intelligible English, unless indeed we suppose HFIN to stand in the place of ^jniK , when the two words might be rendered even thee ; The same is the case also with NIH C3 in the passage |3 IS; Kin C5 n^l [Gen. iv. 26] lit., And to Seth, he also, there was bom a son, where the words Sin C2 scarcely admit of translation, unless we assume them as equivalent to 1/ D3 also to him, when the passage would be rendered (as in The English Version), " And to Seth, to him also, there was born a son." LETTER XLVI11. 41 20. The Verbs ijhfj and "fy" to go, and S ; )T to (jo forth, arc sometimes coupled with a Dative of the Personal Pronouns, by means of which they assume a Reflective sense ; thus, [[Gen. xii. I] (iOD said to Abram, (f/ ^7) Betake thyself away, lit., (jo to-thee ; so [Cantic. iv. 6] I will betake myself to the mountain of myrrh ; and, [Cantic. ii. 11] The rain hath passed-off, hath betaken itself away ; and so too, [Cantic. i. 8] Betake thyself forth in the foot-tracks of the flock. This however is not the case with 'ih MHH in the T • first hemistich of the verse last quoted [[Cantic. i. 8[] where ^b ^i/in S7 CiS cannot well be rendered in English, except the word j7 be considered pleonastic when the words would of course signify, If thou (f) knoiv not. 21. The Noun US$2 signifying soul or person, some- times, on taking the Possessive affixes of the First, Second, and Third Persons, assumes respectively the force of the Reflective Pronouns Myself Thyself Him- self and their Plurals ; thus Job declares [chap. ix. 21] >#93 jna S ; 7 ^JS Dn [Am] I perfect ? I myself must not know it (i.e., A man, however perfect, must not think himself so; — or, according to our Saviour's precept, must own himself an unprofitable servant who had only done what it was his duty to do — ), where "•Jt'Di? I myself is used as the Nominative Case to the Verb >"7tf . 22. A Noun is sometimes used where a Pronoun would be sufficient for the sense ; thus we read [Gen. 42 HEBREW GRAMMAR. ii. 20], " And Adam called names to all the cattle, and to [the] fowl of the heaven, and to every beast of the field, (1*033 "TO Ni'E & DIN^I) but for Adam he {i.e., ^ V " T T T T : S V x Adam) found not a help meet-for-him" where, instead of DTK?! , we might have expected 17] and for him (or himself). David again in his anger against Nabal exclaims [1 Sam. xxv. 22] "HI ^K? D^7g H^ H3 #0 may GOD do to [the] enemies of David, &c, where, as he speaks of himself, we might have expected him to use , Q?«? fo MY enem ^ es -> instead of Til "Q^S? *° ^ e enemies of David; so also in Gen. ix. we read in verse 15,'nsn PIT] ^3 "108 MT13 fiK "THST! -4wrf I ' J V T T I •• • •• v -: • • : v • . - t : will remember My covenant which is between Me and the earth, but in the very next verse (16) we have ovrtg ps vhty rp-33 "isf? rprvini ijjtfj ri^n nn^ni mn B»ba Tl ?3 rhi T " V V T I - awfZ ifAe &ow s/m?Z be in the cloud, and I will see it, to remember [the] everlasting covenant (lit., covenant of eternity') [which is] between God and every living thing, where, instead of D\*l7.£ ]^3 between God, we might have expected "O^ between Me, as in the former verse (15). 23. It has been said (Letter xxiv. § 11) that the Relative Pronoun ~)£'N is sometimes used as a Conjunc- tion, when it is almost synonymous with \D that; on the other hand, the Conjunction Mp sometimes usurps the function of the Relative Pronoun Ij&'S ; thus [Gen. iv. 25] Eve called her son's name Seth ; " For [she said], GOD hath appointed me another seed instead of Abel (\:p_ 13V] ">3) whom Cain slew," for ])£ 13V] ")#§ ; so also Mendlessohn, in order to avoid tautology, trans- lates in na ^3 iftrnin DPr#tfa 213 [Ps. v. 11] Om account of the multitude-of their transgressions cast LETTER XI.V11I. }.") out them who have rebelled against Thee, on which the Commentary remarks that " "O here stands for l&'tf, as it frequently does." 24. The Demonstrative Pronoun HT this is sometimes used quite by itself to express clliptically this is the fashion, way, or mode; thus, when the command was given to Noah to build the Ark, the description of its form and dimensions were given in the words, — FJnfo n^J/n l^g nn [Gen. vi. 15] And this [is the fashion after which] thou shalt make it (/".), See. ; and in the same way too would imrDN Di¥ JTiT HTDH [Isai. lviii. 5] be perhaps more correctly translated, " Whether according to this [fashion (or manner) ] ought [the] fast to be [which] I might choose ? " 25. This same Pronoun HJ is sometimes used in a Descriptive rather than Demonstrative sense, i.e., as defining rather than as pointing to ; a very beautiful instance of this occurs in Cantic. v., where the female companions of " The most beautiful of women," sur- prised at her adjuring them so earnestly to deliver her message to her love, and in consequence demanding of her, " What is thy love more than [any other] beloved, that thus thou hast adjured us \ '' receive for answer [verse 10 — 16], '* My love is pure and ruddy," &c. ; and after a lengthened description of his manifold graces, she concludes by exclaiming in triumph, in the latter half of verse 16, (D^EJIT F23 ^T) Hfj "Hil nf) such [is] my love, and such is my friend, [O] daughters of Jerusalem ! i(). It has already been mentioned (Letter xxv. § 5) that the Feminine Demonstrative Pronoun J18$? is used to express this thing ; as [Gen. xx. 6] " T know that in 4-i HEBREW GRAMMAR. the integrity of thy heart ( HKT IVfetf/ ) thou hast done this thing : " this is the more unaccountable from the fact of "IZH being the only word in Hebrew which signifies thing, and that whenever this word actually occurs coupled with the Demonstrative Pronoun to represent this thing, the Masculine T\\ is always used ; thus PlirP HIV ~*W$ ^1D n 5 [Exod. xvi - 1d 1 This is the thing wAicA JEHOVAH hath commanded; D-TH 121*1 n« JVfSttJ "1116*8 IV [Gen. xxii. 16] Because f/^fl^ f/iOM te* (?0W£ THIS THING. 27. The Interrogative Pronoun "»£ JF/*o ? refers properly to persons, and TO What? to things; but we find [Judg. xiii. 17] that Manoah said to the Angel (^Elf* N!?) lit., Who [is] thy name? which plainly stands for (?\QU} TO) What [is] f% wflwrae .? We find again [Ruth iii. 16] the question of Naomi to her daughter-in- law, on her returning early in the morning, (^3 JpN VJ) Who [ar(] fAott, wry daughter ? as given in The English Bible, in accordance with the explanation of Ben Ezra, to which translation two difficulties have been objected, First, that Naomi should not know her daughter-in-law, though at the same time she styled her ^3 my daughter ; secondly, that Ruth returns not the slightest answer to this question, but proceeds at once to relate what had happened to her. To remove these difficulties Ben Ezra remarks, that the question, " Who art thou, my daughter," was probably asked by Naomi before she opened the door (the ^r\2 my daughter, being merely a general mode of address) ; and, in the second place, that the want of the answer, " I am Ruth thy handmaid," may be owing to the concise usage of Scripture, which, in narration, frequently indulges in ellipses of this kind ; as when Moses helped the daughters of the priest of LETTER XLVIII. 4 ."> Midian, and the father said, " Call him that he may eat bread," the narrative proceeds |~Exod. ii. 21], "And Moses consented to dwell with the man," &c, without mentioning that they went to call him, and that he went with them. Others, however, say that ''P stands here for HD , — quoting, as an instance of this, the passage which has just been given from Judges xiii. 17, — and so take r)$ ^D as representing elliptically, What [tidings hast] thou [brought] ; or as equivalent to ■«|7 i""Pn 7112 what hath happened to thee? I will not trespass further now upon your Grace's valuable time, but will conclude by furnishing you with an Exercise to be translated into Hebrew. P.S. (a). It lias been said above (§7) that the repetition of a word denotes emphasis ; it sometimes, however, is used merely to express an exclamation of pain or woe; as ''tpNl ^Wtkl [2 Kings iv. 19] My head! My head! "Iff? ">#!?. [2 Kings xi. 14] Treason, treeisofi ! P.S. (b). The Personal Pronouns N^n and "U or H^H very fre- quently stand for the Substantive Verb ; as C?pri3p K^in "CDS "obs [Isai. Ii. 12] /, / am comforting you ; TOSH fe HT K?in ^ [P s . xxiv. 10] Who is this King of Glory? ^HyriW *)? EH n^N [Gen. xxv. 16] These are (he softs of Ishmael ; and so [Zech. i. 9] "I will show thee (H>?N HEn np) what these are." P.S. (c). It has been seen above (§ 13] that the prefix 2 i s some- times omitted; owing to this omission w r e find "H^nSM ^ [Isai. Ii. 19] by whom shall I comfort thee? where "'P stands for "'P? . P.S. (d). The Interrogative HE } when coupled with a Dative, stands sometimes for " What hath happened?" sometimes for " What right is there ? " and sometimes for " What common concernment is there?" as DSJ3JTI ^3 D*n 7J 1 ? TV? [p s . C xiv. 5] What [happened] to thee, sea, that thou shouldest fee? *»? 1»?*V] =?b* np [Isai. * These two words are given according to the Marginal reading, instead of the Text reading = ?^P . 4G HEBREW GRAMMAR. iii. 15] What [right] have ye (lit., [is there] to you) that ye should crush My people f trribwn BPH Tjbl ^ n» [l Kings xvii. 18] What [common concernment is there'] to me and thee (i.e., what have I to do ivith thee) [0 thou'] man of GOD? EXERCISE LXIII. (TO BE TRANSLATED INTO HEBREW.) Be wise, [O] my son, and gladden the heart of thy father by the wisdom of thy words. V ■• T * For [there is] a time to be silent, and a time to speak ; a time to hold-back words, and a time to distil words as rain upon [the] "1^27 f . t\vnmph. mown-meadow and as [the] showers on [the] grass. 2 1 I_ 2 The heax*t of thy father will rejoice, and the reins of her-that- bare-thee will be glad, on thy mouth's speaking (Heb., on [the] speahing of thy mouth) excellent-things in counsels and knowledge t ; * in the ears of [the] congregation and assembly. What profit [is there] in a treasure to-be- desired when it [is] hid 3723 1 in the heart of the earth ? and what will wisdom profit when she shall conceal herself in secret [places], and when she shall not utter her HEN words in the wide [places] of [the] city. cnEN rrnp * Plural &hn . f Construed with 3 . $ In Construction ni^S . LETTER XLYIII. A 7 [As for] a fool concealing himself and a simpleton hiding himself, for wisdom will it be accounted to them; but a man of intelligence stealing [away] from the midst of the assembly shall not be 232 Hithp. praised in the city. 8_ 1 For the fool knew that [there was] no answer in his mouth, and 1 2 1 [therefore] betook-himself-away : and tin' simpleton also knew that j_ i he [was] naked, and [therefore] hid himself (Heb., www Pron. expressed D'lTV. hidden). snn 2 1 _1 2_ 1_ But as for a wise man, why should he be like a ...1 EZsn ~ 1 ^2 Pron. expressed man perplexed? and why should he sit at-a-distanee, and not open □ma rims t : • ■ t •• his mouth ? For not a man like him will be ashamed, when he shall speak in the gate [of the city] : and why-[then-is] it that he should-steal [away] from the midst of the congregation, as the people steal (Heb., stcalcth) [away] on their fleeing in the battle? Fut. Ilithp. D*J * With a Personal Pronoun, see § 20. (to be continued in the next exercise.) 48 HEBREW GRAMMAR. LETTER XLIX. As my last Letter closed with some few remarks upon the Pronouns, I beg leave to introduce now some further remarks upon the next subject in order, viz., that of the VERBS. The Hebrew Verb in general precedes the Nominative Case, except when any emphasis is attached to the latter, as then it generally precedes the Verb ; as ITIS ~)EN [Exod. xv. 9] "[The] enemy said, I will pursue, I will overtake;" ^ "IE? [Prov. xxii. 13] " [The] slothful-man hath said, There is a lion without," &c. ; 3213 l^n [Numb. xxiv. 17] "There shall come (lit., there hath stepped [forth] ) a star out of Jacob." In the instances here quoted, there being no emphasis on the Nominative Case, it comes after the Verb ; but in Job xxviii. 14, "HSJ7 TN 1EK D^f [The] deep Lath said it ["is] not in me, And [the] sea hath said it-is-not with me. The Nouns Dinfl and D^ in parallel with each other are, in consequence of the emphasis put upon them, made to precede their Verbs ; and similarly [Prov. xxvii. 12], ir\D2 run n*o ovy/l w:yi ray DTWiai LETTER XLIX. 49 [The] prudent [man] hath seen evil [coming, and] hath hid himself (lit., was hid) ; [But] simple men have passed on, [and] heen punished ; "where the emphasis imparted to UMJJ and D\SflS by the Antithesis in which they stand, causes each of them to precede its Verb. 2. What has been observed here is particularly the case when the Verb and its Nominative Case happen to stand in the midst of the sentence, for then the Verb will almost uniformly precede its Nominative Case unless there be some emphasis laid upon the latter ; as Ehrfttf KH3 rrtrK!3 [Gen. i. 1] In the beginning GOD created, &c. ; i"nfc> pnyftl [Gen. xviii. 12] And Sarah laughed (where the Verb and Nominative Case are con- sidered as being in the midst of, i.e., as not opening the sentence, on account of the prefixed Conjunction 1); Pjna n§ 3pjt£ TJ??] [Gen. xlvii. 10] And Jacob blessed Pharaoh ; ,l ?ip3 DHn^S J/»tt? 1^8 3j?J/ [Gen. xxvi. 5] Because that Abi'aham hearkened to My roice. In all which instances, as there is no particular emphasis laid on the Nominative Case, it follows the Verb. But this is not the case in the examples now about to be quoted, viz., [Gen. iv. 2] " And Abel was a feeder of sheep, (np"TJ* 12V iTH pp.) but Cain— ivas a tiller of the ground," where the name ]\p_ precedes its Verb to shew the stress laid upon it, in marking the difference of the occupations of Cain and Abel ; and so [Gen. xxv. 28] " And Isaac loved Esau .... (3J3J£ n§ HJijtf '"^l]) but Rebekah— [was'] loving Jacob," where the stress laid on Rebekah in placing her in Antithesis, as it were, to Isaac, causes her name HJ^Zl") to precede its Verb. In like manner we read [Gen. xxxvii. 11] that when Joseph related his dream, " His brethren envied him, VOL. II. E 50 HEBREW GRAMMAR. Mim riK lEttf V3S1) but his father — marked the matter" where the emphasis given to the father in marking the difference of the view which he took of the matter from that taken by his sons, is sufficient to make 1\3N stand before its Verb. And so again [Pro v. x. 2], " Treasures of wickedness (i.e., treasures obtained by wickedness) will not avail, (niBZ? ^fl ^TP) hut righteousness — ivill deliver from death" where the emphasis put upon righteousness, to show its infinite superiority to mere wealth, is the reason why nj31¥ precedes its Verb. 3. Your Grace will doubtless have observed that I have not been sparing in examples ; but I hope that this may be excused, since it is impossible, otherwise, for the minute particulars relating to the Arrangement of words to be duly appreciated, upon the due appreciation of which the force and vigour of a sentence so frequently depend. As an instance of this, I will quote the very second verse in The Bible 1.131 l.lh .1JT.1 flN?! [Gen. i. 2], which if one should translate thus, And the earth was formless and a-conf used-mass, he would not do justice to the sentence ; for, had this been intended as the sense, the Verb ought to have preceded its Noun, and so the Hebrew to have been 1131 Lift JHIJI \1P1 just as in [Gen. vi. 11] JH^'I nn$fi1 And the earth was corrupt ; but as the verse stands, the 1 of JHKPn. (as Mendlessohn well remarks) must not be taken merely in its Con- junctive sense, but rather as serving to connect this sentence with the last word of the preceding verse, so that after the announcement that " GOD created the heavens and the earth," our verse proceeds, Now the earth — was formless and a confused mass. In accordance with the stress thus put upon the word LETTER XLIX. 5] earth, we have the Nominative Case fl^H preceding its Verb ; and as for the 1 , it will be perceived that not here only, but also in the several instances quoted above, in which the Nominative Case precedes the Verb, it is not merely Conjunctive, but serves to point out the emphasis which the arrangement produces. As another instance of the great importance attaching to the arrangement of words in a sentence, we may take the orders issued by Benhadad, king of Syria, [1 Kings xx. 18] D^n Difran lav di^ 1 ? dk • - : • t t t : : • - tt t t : • : • : If they have come-out for peace, — take them alive : — And if they have come-out for battle, — take them alive (///., alive take ye theni) ; where, as Mendlessohn well remarks, the words express- ing the command are intentionally inverted, — the stress being in the first case laid on D1^5^ , If they have come out for peace, (yet) take them (make them prisoners) alive (of course), but in the second case the stress is on D^n , If they have come out for battle, (yet do not kill them, but) take them (make them prisoners, keeping them) ALIVE. 4. We find, however, . . . TEDr? HjiT] [Gen. xix. 24] And JEHOVAH caused to rain, &c. ; 3npn nJnai [Exod. xiv. 10] And Pharaoh drew near ; T]b]) Hl^DI [Exod. xix. 3] And Moses went up ; Ben Zev indeed remarks, that in cases like these, the Nominative Case precedes the Verb from respect paid to The Deity, or to great persons ; but I think that even in these and such- like instances it will be seen, on closer observation, that some emphasis belongs to the Nominative Case. 5. When there are two Verbs referring to the same e 2 52 HEBREW GRAMMAR. Nominative Case, the following Rules should be ob- served, — I. When neither the Nominative Case nor the first Verb has "I prefixed, the Nominative Case may either precede the two Verbs, — as, 1*7 "^n f\hn D#2n [Cantic. ii. 11] The rain hath passed- off, hath betaken itself away ; DJP1 HST P&1 [Ps- cxii. 10] The wicked shall see, and shall be-grieved, — Or may come between the two Verbs, — as, "^ta 1J# fi*?9 [Job vii. 9][The~] cloud hath wasted away and is gone ; inD'OT D'p^.V INT. [Job xxii. 19] The righteous shall see and shall rejoice : — II. The Nominative Case when it has 1 prefixed, must always precede the two Verbs ; as, jrYUl pin p^VI [Ps. xxxvii. 21] 6w£ £fo righteous [is] favouring and giving ; t^TI H^DI "iHil [Job xiv. 11] And a river will dry up and become dry : — III. When both Verbs (whether they be in the Past or the Future Tense) have 1 prefixed to them, the Nominative Case must then be placed between them ; as, infill D-TUN DJJJ [Gen. xxiii. 7] And Abraham arose and bowed himself; -)iD*n HMD jj^n [Exod. iv. 1] And Moses an- swered and said ; tltyWQ lifc^l VJ5 ! J3 t ?01 [Job i. 4] ylwd 7«s sows used to go, and used to make a feast ; LETTER XLIX. 53 t£^"irjni naMjt J/C£h [Numb. xxx. L2] Awd her hus- band shall hear and shall hold his peace 6. When the Verb follows the Nominative Case it must agree with the same in Gender and Number ; as, 2V DrnrhS-l [Gen. xviii. 33] And Abra- ham returned ; H»a ^riTI [Gen. xxix. 9 ] And Rachel came ; Onrf] □% D^g ^Vfrn £Gen. xxviii. 12] Angels of GOD ascending and de- scending ; rrtiy rvhns; rvh§jn.B> nzn] £Gen. xii. 3] And behold seven other kinc coming up, 7. In some instances we find the Nominative Case in the Plural, and the Verb in the Singular Number, but in such cases the Verb refers to each one of the individuals expressed by the Plural Noun; as Tlttf ^jg iTJJJV T\)22 [Gen. xlix. 22] [As for the] branches, [each one of tlicm~] hath over-stepped the wall; H&'tfE ITDiDhl [Prov. iii. 18] And as for those-laying-hold-of-her, [every one of them is] blessed; npD O 1^3 [Job vi. 20] They were ashamed [each one of them] because he trusted. 8. When the Verb precedes its Nominative Case, it may, but need not necessarily, agree with the same in Gender and Number; as D1S *&) Wl^l [Gen. v. 4J And the days of Adam were, where the Verb agrees with its Nominative Case; T^n ^ ^3 \T] [Gen. v. 23] And all the days of Enoch were ; njSog VT VPl [Exod. xvii. 12] And his hands were steady, in both which latter instances the Verb does not agree with its Nominative Case; and again in ^n$ltf N*?? ~>^ 54: HEBREW GRAMMAR. [1 Sam. xxv. 27] which thy handmaiden hath brought, the Verb is Masculine though the Nominative Case is Feminine ; while in the passage . . . MIq; 0^3 Kypj K^l [Job xlii. 15] And there were not found beautiful women, &c, the Verb is in the Singular Number and Mascu- line, whereas the Nominative Case is in the Plural Number and Feminine. Examples such as these should not, however, be imitated in Composition. 9. When a Verb is connected with two Nominative Cases, the one Masculine and the other Feminine, if the Verb be in the Plural Number, it will generally be put in the Masculine Gender; as D">10 ifi^iO ni3D1 [Judg. xiii. 19] And Manoah and his wife were seeing ; \* D\h#"! D^OK spjpfayi TJ? pobi. 133 Thy sons and thy daughters were eating, and drinking wine. But if the Verb be Singular, it will agree in Gender and Number with that Nominative Case which is nearest to it; as inif\Sl DISH ^mri [[Gen. iii. 8] And the man and his wife hid-themselves ; PlGtfl nTltf H£N V 1 •J * T • : T * T V ~ [Gen. xxiv. 55] And her brother and her mother said ; PQ81 C^fl 1310] [Numb. xii. 1] And Miriam and Aaron spake; WiT) K"n toKJTI [1 Kings xvii. 15] And she and he ate. 10. The Hebrew Verb, as will have been perceived from the Tables, involves within itself, in both its Tenses and in the Imperative Mood, the Person referred to by it, of which Person it can never be divested : we sometimes however find the Person additionally exjtressed by a Pronoun, but this always denotes great emphasis upon the Person ; thus, When GOD appeared to Jacob, and bade him fear not to go down into Egypt, HE gave to him the encouraging promise ("=]£# T1§ ^~^$) [Gun. xlvi. 4] I will go down with thee; and so our first LETTER XLIX. 55 parent Adam said [Gen. iii. 12], when endeavouring to palliate his guilt in having eaten of "that forbidden tree," " The woman whom Thou gavest [to be] with me, (P8J ]9 ^ Haw Kin) She gave me of 'the tree," *.3$ [Isai. li. 12] J, I am comforting you. 12. The third Person of a Tense, whether Singular or Plural, is sometimes used in an Impersonal or Indefinite sense; as . . . "I S3 1 ? »*JB 13 ty [Gen. xvi. 14] Therefore was the well called (lit., one m. called the well), &c. ; 3j?j££ i,DE> K^jJ "OH [Gen. xxvii. 36] " Is it because his name was called Jacob that he hath sup- planted me this twice 1 " lit., Is it because one called his name Jacob ? &c. ; so [Gen. xlviii. 1] " And it came to pass after these things (^Di^? IJpK*]) ^ iat lt was to ^ Joseph (lit., that one said to Joseph), Behold, thy father is sick;" "liK fej/? \®\ TMph [Job iii. 20] Why should light be given to one in misery? (lit., Why should one aire? &c); VVffr £ h% [1 Sam. xix. 24] Therefore they (or men) are in-the-habit of saying, &c. ; and 33|^ 1T13J ^ [Prov. vi. 30] " Do £% wo* (i.e., rfo not men) despise the thief though he steal to satisfy his soul] " (see Letter xlvi. § 11). 13. The Third Person Singular Masc, of the Con* . verted Future Kal of iVH to be, is in numerous instances used in an Impersonal sense to represent and it ivas, and it came to pass, and it came to jiass (is (or when) ; as cnx D^yifl} '•fl?! [Gen. xix. 17] And it was (or it came to ptass) on their bringing them out ; D«T|?k> D^piip DH N'T] [Gen. xlii. 35] ylrcd ft cawie to ^«5.9 as (or when) they \were\ emptying their sacks. In like manner too !Tm , the Converted Third Person Singular of the Past Tense of the same Verb, is in some instances used Impersonally ; as ]2}J ^JS?? ^1*1) [Gen. ix. 14] And it shall come to pass on My bringing on a cloud; WQIpQ &U> DX iTHI. [Dent. xi. 13] ylwd ft shall come to pass if ye shall diligently hearken. LETTER XLIX. 57 14. A Transitive Verb generally precedes the Accusa- tive Case which it governs ; as inxn nsi trErn ns dti 1 ?** *n3 n^Kia TGen. i. 11 I v t t •• • - t - " • V; T T • " ; L J In the beg in it ing GOD created the heaven ami the earth ; DT«n nx nfetf/ DVftfl D^S3 TGeri. ix. 61 •t t t t t • v: 9 ? L J Iii [the] image of GOD made He man. Excepting when particular stress is laid upon the Accusative Case, as then it precedes the Verb ; thus we read [Gen. xv. 10] that Abraham took the quadrupeds and birds " and divided them [the former] in the midst, ("inn iS i£ 7 Ifeyn nsi) but the birds (lit, bird) he divided not," where the stress laid upon "ibV to mark the difference of treatment of the birds and the quadru- peds, causes the Accusative Case to precede the Verb ; and so when Jacob feared to send his son Benjamin into Egypt, Reuben said [Gen. xlii. 37], . . . rVEH >22 \:# rig " My two sons shalt thou slay if I bring him not back unto thee," laying particular emphasis on ^22 ^$ my tico so?is, to show that he was ready to give the strongest possible pledge for his brother's safe return. In like manner, when several individual articles are mentioned as disposed of in different ways, the Accusative of each of them is placed before its Verb ; as Tn§3 D&> P12H] ^E>3 CJ£> "iff^n [Judg. vi. 19] the flesh — he put in the basket, and the broth — he put in the pot ; [2 Sam. xii. 9] t6 r\r\?b inaft* nsi mn3 jT»3n \nnn nms na \ I t : I - t : • v : v v - t • • • • - T • my ^3 3in3 njin inki ntato? I - •• : ■: v : t : - t : t • : Uriah the Hittite — thou hast smitten with the sword, An#1 [[2 Sam. xvi. 13] And he kept on pelting with dust (lit., and kept on dusting with the dust). Again, Verbs are sometimes formed from Nouns to express the performing the action, or making the thing represented by the Noun; as 7H|fJ3 [Gen. xiii. 12] And he pitclted-his-tent (from 7H& a tent) ; DZ^ril £2 Sam. xiii. 8] And she made cakes (from ^12*2"? a cake). But, on the other hand, we find sometimes that the Verb thus formed expresses the removing or destroying the object represented by the Noun ; as in the descrip- tion of the altar to be made by Moses, it is said £Exod. xxvii. 3], " And thou shalt make its pans ( fat^T? ) to liEMOYE-its-ashes " (from |t£H ashes) ; and it is said of the foal of an ass pExod. xiii. 13], " And if thou wilt not redeem it (^SP^l) then thou shalt BREAK-its-neck" (lit., neck it) (from ^"U r a neck). It should be observed that very often a Verb is coupled with a kindred Noun for the sake of elegance alone ; as n~i~P 1p*1 [Ruth ii. 3] And there fell to her lot (lit., and her chance chanced) ; SJTJJ ^P^? "^H [Ezck. xix. 3] And he learned to catch prey (lit., to prey prey) ; such cases, where the Verb is one of common occurrence, must be carefully distinguished from the above, in which the several Verbs seem made for the purpose respectively. 60 HEBREW GRAMMAR. 19. As to the different Cases governed by the several Verbs, I cannot think of eking out this Letter by a detailed account of them, and especially so, since this is the province rather of a Lexicon, and in any complete Lexi- con all these may be found. I will only, in conclusion, observe that the signification of a Verb is sometimes varied by the several Prepositions with which it is construed ; thus the Hiph-el of the Verb jDN when construed with a b signifies to believe a person, or to give credence to a report, or a fact stated ; but when construed with 3 , it signifies to have confidence, or faith, in a person, or thing ; as when Moses, endeavouring to decline his mission, said, ^ WQ$1 N ;t 7 \D) [Exod. iv. 1] But, behold, they to ill not believe me ; and on the other hand ■naj/ rwoni nlrra irp^i [Exod. xiv. 313 And they believed (i.e., had faith) in JEHOVAH and in His servant Moses. In like manner the Verb 12}J in the Kal, when construed with J1X (the mark of the Accusative Case), signifies to serve, or to work for, one ; as £Gen. xxxi. 6]] " Ye know that with all my strength (]T2$ ng W^J / have served your father ; " but the Kal of this very same Verb, when construed with 2 assumes a Causative sense, coinciding exactly with that of the Hiph-el; as try; rQDlg la I2£r\ tih [Levit. xxv. 39^ Thou shalt not make-liim-serve [the] service of a slave (i.e., a slavish service). P.S. (a). We find an instance [Exod. xxi. 4] viz., rrahsb rpnxn rp-rVi nttfsn T " '.' S T V T ' T - T The woman, and her children, shall he to (i.e., shall belong to) her master, where there are apparently two Nominative Cases to one Verb, and yet the Verb is in the Singular Number; the only LETTER XLIX. 6] moans of explaining which passage appears to be to consider the word rjPTlfl a s altogether Parenthetical, and the whole passage therefore to stand thus, " The woman — and her children (if she have any) — shall be her master's." P.S. (b). The Verb Tl^Jl which in the Kal signifies to kindle up, to burn (with reference to anger), is sometimes connected with a Nominative Case ; as ^PT. *\$ "TO [Gen. xxx. 2] And the anger of Jacob kindled up; — and is sometimes construed with ?, becoming then Impersonal ; as Til? ^D*] [Gen. iv. 5] And Cain zvas angry, lit., and it kindled to Cain. This is also the case with the Verb 2^ which in the Kal signifies to be good, ivell, or pleasing ;— as, n^D ^372 n^n SB*?] [Gen. xli. 37] And the thing was good in the eyes of Pharaoh ; — but, 7jb ntt^ npS3 [Gen. xl. 14] When it shall be well with thee (lit., to thee), in which latter instance the Verb is used Impersonally. It may be here remarked that "I? and ""IE (which may be either the Third Persons Singular of the Past Tense Kal, or the Present Participle Kal, of the Verbs ~ n - and ""^ respectively) assume, when construed with A an Impersonal sense; as V n V [1 Sam. xxviii. lo] / am distressed, or it is distressing to me; and V "'P [Ruth i. 13] i" am grieved, or it is grievous (lit., bitter) to me. But by some these are taken to be the Nouns "l? affliction, distress, and "ftp bitterness respectively, and so V "">? would mean literally affliction or distress [is"] to me, and V "10 bitterness [_is~] to me. EXEPvCISE LXIV. (a continuation of exercise lxiii v Behold the lily of Sharon hath not withholden her rhznn (f) rhtf Def. fpn splendour, nor will she conceal herself from the eyes of those who praise her beauty (Ilebr., the praisers of her beauty"). 62 HEBREW GRAMMAR. 2 1 1_ 2 The rose hath not covered her head with a veil, and hath not put a covering 14)1111 her face. n]DQ 2_ _J Hath she not [rather] adorned her head, so-that she was exceedingly 2t^ Hiph. ) 1 2 1 j beautiful ? and her good scent also she withholdeth not from the HS" 1 (m.) 23ft Fut. Kal. children of men. 1 2 _i Neither hath the olive [tree] given-up its fatness wherewith Nb (m.) btn Hiph. [men] honour GOD and men : and the fig [tree] hath not given-up (/) its sweetness and its good fruit. roun t : The vine hath not given-up its wine that (/.) tftri?] (m.) . . . . n cheereth (Ilebr., \_is~\ cheering) GOD and men : and the pomegranate 2 1 [tree] hath not given up its good fruit, by which a land is praised. ^1? (m.) 1 2 1 The Sun is not ashamed to rule in an unclouded day : neither nan (/) ni237 T ^b 2 1 hath the Moon blushed to shew forth (Ilebr., to cause to sec) her beauty at night (Ilebr., in the night). T : • And [so] a man of intelligence (Ilebr., intelligences), why should he be like [one] withdrawing [his] hand from giving to Pron. expressed ^tt? Hiph. the simple prudence, and to the youth knowledge and discretion ? nmi? nam t : t t • : LETTER XLIX. . G3 Why should not he distil his word upon t! Pron. expressed H*M Fut. JBiph. nbp n thirsting for his words : and wherefore should not he pour [forth] his W M Fut. Hiph. doctrine to those waiting for his speech ? n,? 1 ? . . . . n 1 _2_ _1 For in the speeches of his mouth will [the] people delight ; SWSWHithp. and by his doctrine they will be made-intelligent. pa Hithp. As a land of dryness {i.e., a dry land) [thirsteth] for [the] early-rain n>2 mv and for the latter-rain : so do men thirst for his words, and for his ttfpba D s ttTN Fut. speech they wait. bn> Fut. PL And if so, why then (Ilebr., this) doth he not open his mouth, (m.) Fut. like a dumb [man] : and [why] should he be like a man 2 1 in whose tongue there is no speech (Ilebr., word) ? T - Why then (Ilebr., this) [is] he* hidden among the (>«.) »Sn Partic. Niph. *?£ stuff: whereas JEHOVAH hath chosen him, to appoint him chief cbs 1 ^nn | ms \ T»aa over His people ? * Pron. expressed. f Construed with 2 . \ Inf. It with b of D^-a and affix. 64 HEBREW GRAMMAR LETTER L. When a Verb is found in each of the three Voices, Kal, Pi-dl, and Hipk-el, it in general has a distinct and some- times even a different meaning, in each of them ; thus, for instance, the Verb ptn signifies in the Kal, to be stron3^P [1 Kings xix. 11] Breaking-in- pieces rocks {i.e., breaking rocks in pieces). 3. In a few instances the Pi-dl takes a Causative sense ; as, — LETTER L. . 65 1*5 H§ ^?fe» [Gen. xlviii. 14] He guided his hands wittingly i (lit., he made his hands wise, so that /2p would seem to stand for ^9JW1) ; iEipO "intfn ]J#T [Job xxxviii. 12] Has* $0« liJP 1 ? W015 [Job xl. 8] Wilt thou make (or pronounce) Me wrong that thou may est be just? 5. A Tense of the Hiph-Sl is sometimes coupled with an Infinitive to qualify the action expressed by the Infinitive ; as, — IJ&fi n^pn [Gen. xxxi. 28^ TAom Aas^ acto/ foolishly (where ijfjtj stands of course for nttfjyi ; see Letter xxxviii. P.S. e) ; ^arjn/ fir^n £1 Sam. i. 12] She prayed much (or a long time) ; hiXy 1 ? rr>#j?n 12 Kings ii. 10] Thou hast asked a hard thing ; niKl 1 ? n?^n per. i. 123 Thou hast seen well. 6. We have seen (Letter xxviii. § 5) that the Ilithpa- al, besides its Reflective sense, expresses also sometimi s feigning, or pretending ; thus we read, — VOL. II. f CG HEBREW GRAMMAR. iS3 ^3iStnn [2 Sam. xiv. T\ Feign thyself a mourner, I pray [thee] ; ^pHOI !p3$P bjl 25$ [2Sam.xiii.5] Lie [down] upon thy bed, and pretend to be sick. But the Hithpa-al sometimes expresses the behaving oneself like, or acting like ; as, — HSnipi!) \np "TJ/ [1 Sam. i. 14] How long wilt thou behave-thyself like a drunken [ivoman~\? "tyj VJft&n) nr nS DflfcQn \£ [1 Sam. xxi. 16] That ye have brought this [mail] to act-the-madman with me? 7. Again the Hithpa-al is used sometimes in a Mutual sense ; as, — 1 k S"irn fifth [Gen. xlii. 1] Why should ye look one at another ? ITjani Xbl nsSrv [Job xli. 9] They take-hold- one-of- anotlwr, and will not separate-from- each-other. 8. The Niph-al is sometimes used in a Reflective sense ; as, — *QHN1 [Gen. iii. 10] And I hid myself (lit., and I was hid) ; 12£P "inp»] b^n ty \S^^p & [Ps. lv. 13] [It was] not one hating me [that] magnified [himself] against me, or I should-have-HiBBEN-MYSELF from before him. On the other hand, we find sometimes the Hithpa-al used in a Passive or Niph-al sense ; as, — ^nnn *Ofl Hi.T nXT. n^X [Prov. xxxi. 30] A woman fearing JEHOVAH, she shall be praised ; Wip ^38 nj^n^J? [Lament, iv. 1] [How] are [the] sacred stones poured-ont ! LETTER L. 67 9. The Ilithpa-dl of the Verb 121 is, on some occasions, used to express the supernatural utterance by which The Voice of GOD was heard, in order (as remarked by Mendelssohn) to represent that Voice as speaking of itself without the agency of the usual organs of speech ; thus, — Vbto "lin.P Vipn n» JJtt^] [Numb. vii. 89] And he heard The Voice speaking (lit., s J tea kinq-of -itself) to him ; ^H iSttB ft$ $ D#K1 [Ezek. ii. 2] ^rcd J Wd [7//wz tl Kit was] speaking (lit., speak ing-of-Hi?nself) to me ; (in both which instances "IBI.P is, of course, instead of "Q^-HP , as seen in an earlier Letter, xxix. P.S. c). 10. When the Infinitive is in Construction with a Noun, ambiguity might arise from a literal English translation; as D'Ctfl p» DNi^K PJliT rritW/ DV3 • t t : I v v • v: t : -: : [Gen. ii. 4] lit., on [the] day of [the] making of JEHOVAH GOD earth, and heaven, where, to re- move the ambiguity which exists in the English with regard to the Object of the Verb making, either the Saxon Genitive, as it is termed, must be used — on GODS making, &c. ; or the sentence must be expressed by periphrasis, as follows: — On the day when JEHO- VAH GOD made earth and heaven ; and so too in the passage tJtopfrft £b# W2 [Ruth i. 1] lit., in[the~\ days of [the] judging of the judges, the English may express that the judges were judged, quite as well as what is really meant, viz., that they judged ; to avoid which ambiguity, either the Saxon Genitive must as before be employed — In the days of the judges' judging, — or peri- phrasis must again be used, and so the passage be rendered, In the days when the judges judged. f 2 68 HEBREW GRAMMAR. When the Infinitive has the 3 or the 2 of the letters D b 2 2 prefixed, a point of time is often referred to, in which case the Adverb when may also be used with an English Tense to express the signification peri- phrastically ; as [Gen. ii. 4], " These are the generations of the heaven and the earth ( DN % ~|3n3 ) when they were created" (lit, on their being created); C& ; ?0 ^fil^n? [Lament, ii. 12] When their soul was poured out (\\t., on the being poured out of their soul), where the Hithpa-dl stands of course for a Niph-al, as mentioned above (§ 8); "ityj/ VfoV2 [Gen.xxvii. 34] When Esau heard (lit., as, or on) "[the'] hearing of Esau ; IH^X n§ 3KHN nitf-p [1 Kings xviii. 17] When Ahab saw Elijah (lit., as, or on [the] seeing of Ahab Elijah). 11. The Infinitive Absolute, as seen before (Letter xxviii. §8], is sometimes used for an Imperative; as 2\3Kn ttflh ns HIE^ [Deut. xvi. 1] Observe the month ofAbib/'C^'nizn ri$ "liny [Numb. xxv. 17] Vex the Midianites [see " Guide of the Hebrew Student," page 34, Note 7]. Even the Infinitive Constructive is found to stand as an Imperative; as ^nfcn nn^ "T£J/ [Judg. iv. 20] Stand [at the] door of the tent, where lfoj/ : must necessarily be the Infinitive Constructive, for (since the person addressed is Jael the wife of Heber) if the Verb had been in the Imperative, the Feminine form H.2?# must have been used. 12. The Infinitive Mood sometimes stands for a Past Tense ; as [Jer. xiv. 5] " The hind in the field ( Dltin i"n t 7) ) hath calved, and hath forsaken ; " T18 TP1 ^V T HhfJ [Job xv. 35] They have conceived mischief and have brought forth iniquity. This use of the Infinitive for the Past appears to have been particularly frequent in the later Hebrew, occur- LETTER L. ring very frequently in Esther ; as . . . 13 JO DHl.Tn Uii [chap. ix. 12] The Jews have slain mid have destroyed, &c. . . . ; and so [chap. ix. 10] — ...DrPWfcG jiim D.T^kB ni:i Dtfaa hy icjn iSiw ...... . T . v ..... _ . t : - - "t : -: ' : • They were gathered-together and stood for their life, and iiad-rest from their enemies, and BLEW among those hating them, &c. ; where the Verb 13K of the first example, and each of the Verbs 1EU{ , niJ , and Jiin of the second, are all Infinitives used for the Past. 13. Again, as the Infinitive is thus used sometimes for a Finite part of the Verb, so, on the other hand, is a Finite part of the Verb used sometimes for an Infini- tive; as 1"13in 13"!^ ^S [1 Sam. ii. 3] Speak not so much, for l^lb liin 'h& :— - TPNTI ^IS H33W* [Esther viii. 6] How shall I be able to see ? for m'K'O 731N. 11. When an Infinitive Mood is coupled with a Tense to give emphasis (see Letter xxviii. § 9), the Infinitive ought properly to precede the Tense and be in the same Voice with it ; as, DJfl§ Ipp) ip2> Dy#R3 [Gen. 1. 24T] And GOD will surely visit you ; iSinn w^n msn m3n rxumb. xv. 311 That soul • - V V - " T • ■• T • U ~> shall be utterly cut off ; lfr#fl l&y [Deut. xiv. 223 Thou shalt truly (or scriq)i(lously) tithe, fyc. ; ^533 32 J \J) [Gen. xl. 15] For I was indeed stolen ; "OB TrpN Ippn OiSI £Deut. xxxi. IS] And I ?/•/// surely hide My face ; We find however instances in which this general rule is not followed ; as, 70 HEBREW GRAMMAR. HTJ! Hi; TN ^pD? VipD [[Exod. xix. 13] he shall surely be stoned, or shall surely be shot, where we have at once two instances in which the Infi- nitive is Kal, and the Tense Niph-al ; *\DV *\~\& *ptg [[Gen. xxxvii. 33] Joseph hath surely been torn-in-pieces, where the Infinitive is Kal, and the Tense Pu-al ; IM2V HID [[Exod. xix. 12] he shall surely be put to death, where the Infinitive is Kal, and the Tense Hoph-al ; n$ fiyriaiV! "^ psai. xxiv. 19] The earth hath become utterly broken-down ; where the Infinitive is Kal, and the Tense Hithpa-dl. Again, in Gen. xix. 9, we read that the inhabitants of Sodom said of Lot, "This man came to sojourn, ( Di2^ Cablf^'j ) and will he indeed judge ? " And so again GOD said to Jacob [[Gen. xlvi. 4], " I will go down with thee to Egypt, ( rftjt/ D| 5|^K OJSf] ) and I also will surely bring thee up again ; " in both which instances the Infinitive follows the Tense instead of preceding it. 15. When an Infinitive thus coupled with a Tense to produce Emphasis occurs in a negative clause, the Negative Particle precedes the Infinitive, except when some Antithesis is intended between the clause in which it occurs and some other clause in the sentence ; thus, jIApri fiiD $h [Gen. iii. 4] Ye shall not surely die ; ttfn* PPJp! iT72 )kh r\X [Ts. xlix. 8] A man cannot by any means redeem [his'] brother ; but on the other hand, when JEIIO VA II passed before Moses, He proclaimed Himself [Exod. xxxiv. 7] as LETTER L. 71 One " Taking-away iniquity, transgression, and sin, ( np.2") N7 n|531 ) though clear — He would by no means" where a marked Antithesis is introduced to shew that though GOD is Long-suffering and of great Mercy, yet on the other hand lie will not, cannot, alter the dictates of Inflexible Justice ; and so Balak exclaimed to Balaam — lipinn N7 "H3 DJ 13Jj?£ tih np D| [Numb, xxiii. 25] Neither curse him at all, nor bless him at all, where each member is in Antithesis with the other. 16. The Infinitive is sometimes also coupled with the Imperative Mood to express Emphasis, and then it generally follows the Imperative ; as, unn 7*1 ian ikii irnri b&] j;i2^ wny [isai. vi. 9] Hear ye indeed, but ye will not understand ; and see ye indeed, but ye will not know ; "lilN TIN [Judges v. 23] Curse ye bitterly ; :in RJ^JJin [Numb. xi. 15] Kill me I pray-Tiim altogether. 17. It has been seen [Letter xxviii. § 12] that the Participle is used sometimes as part of the Verb, and so may govern an Accusative Case ; and sometimes as a Noun, when it may be put in Construction ; thus, for example, iljn has for its primary meaning One (m.) feeding, as we see in "^N njtpn C\"J7Nn [Gen. xlviii. 15] The GOD who [hath been] feeding me ; but as one-feed- ing may be termed a. feeder, we find ]K¥ HjL/h 73H \TT [Gen. iv. 2] And Abel was a feeder-of sheep, where iljtn is in Construction with |Ni* . 18. By noting carefully when a Participle is to be taken in the capacity of a Verb, and when in that 72 HEBREW GRAMMAR. of a Noun, a seeming difficulty of Construction may sometimes be cleared up; as, when the Psalmist says in the Hundred and Thirtieth Psalm (verse 6), " My soul [waiteth] for The Lord ( l$ah Dnpfr Ipg? D^lIp'^D ) more than men -watching for the morning watch for the morning" where the first D^DStf should be taken as equivalent to a Noun, men-watching, or watchers, but the second as used in its Participial capacity to express the Present Tense. P.S. (a). The Past Participle too is sometimes used in Construction ; thus from "P^ we have the Past Participle Kal "H^S one(m.) blessed, which we find used in Construction ; as nVTj Tjsp? T\P\V HF1M [Gen. xxvi. 29] Thou art now [the] blessed of JEHOVAH ; CW bp> nSrp m\ [Prov.xxii. 14] [Owe] abhor red-of JEHOVAH shall fall there-into. P.S. (b). We have seen (Letter xxx., § 15, page 236) that the Infinitive Kal with D 7 2 2 may take a Paragogic n • — this causes, sometimes, an Infinitive to assume exactly the form of a Noun, as nnrtMb f or 2ns 1 ?, ns-pb f or tf-pb in the passages njrp ns nnns^ [Deut. xi. 22] to love Jehovah, and V^M nvrfh [Deut. iv. 10] to fear Me ; where the two Verbs can be distinguished from Nouns only by their governing the Objective Case. This Paragogic i"T is changed into T\ t when the Infinitive to which it is attached is in actual Construction with another word, as E^O» ""t^I ^H^P [Deut. vii. 8] by reason of Jehovah's loving you, — or when it takes an Objective Affix, as 1HN VlS^a [2 Sam. hi. 11] by reason of his fearing him, — this causes these Infinitives to assume exactly the appearance of the Constructive or Inflected forms of H2nM love and HS - "^ fear, from which they can only, as before, be distinguished by their governing an Objective Case. Such Infinitives have actually been by some Grammarians mistaken for Nouns ; which is the more remarkable when we consider that this is by no means the only instance of a Paragogic H being changed into i"l when the word to which it is appended receives an Inflected form ; — for thus we find roitt Tfj-isisn [Job xxii. 21] good will come upon thee, LETTER L. 73 where ^tfMfbfl is deduced from Miafl (3 Sing. Fut. Kal of Mia lo come) which on taking ParagOgic n , becomes HMtafl ( and this on receiving th<- atlix for thee (in.) hecoraes ^TO^a^l 5 the H being changed into ^. EXERCISE LXV. (TO BE TRANSLATED INTO HEBREW.) It-is-not for a fool to put-forth a riddle : and it-is-not for a TBI 2_ 1 simpleton to open his mouth with a parahle. Lo, even a wise saying (Heb., a word of wisdom) will the fool i Bpoil: for as [the language of one] slow of speech (Heb., nnw Hiph. heavy of mouth), and as [the words of] a man of faltering tongue 2 1 ( Heb., and as one heavy of tongue), so is his language unintelligible ; yshlVxr&cNiph. and the-noise-of his voice is like the sound (Heb., voice) of the thorns beneath the pot. "TO (m.) "TO Sweetness of language (Heb., lips) will multiply friends : for as the dropping of honey so [are] pleasant speeches (Heb., speeches of _2 1 pleasantness). — [The] fool hath said, Lo, I have no friends (Heb., a friend hath failed) : one-loving [me] there is not. 2 1 Every-one hearing him will answer him to his shame : affix affix 2 1 Becausc-that thou [art] a fool, and [because] folly is with thee, 74 HEBREW GRAMMAR. therefore hath happened (Ileb., hath been) to thee such-a-thing-as- this (Ileb., like this thing). Will not [men] surely despise a man like him? they will surely m# make-sport with him, every-one hearing [him] will laugh at him. pns-j- Definite V n ^\ A laughing-stock will he be to the men of his [own] city : every- one knowing him will pour out contempt upon him. There is [one] delighting in glory and [yet] he || [is] slighted and Von it rrbp f despised by (Heb., of) [the] people : and there is [one] loving humility, [scarcely] raising up from [the] dust his head, but with the nobles of ...1 [the] city will he sit in the gate. There-is-no [thing] better than wise instruction, and there is none better than [one] hearkening-to reproof. 2 _j He will not know any sin, and in an evil [matter] he will not 2 1 tarry : therefore evil shall not come to him (Heb., notshall-touch onhim), 172V raa . . . n and harm shall not approach to his tent. S3? . . • s All those knowing him (Heb., his knowers) will say unto him : [0 how great is] thy happiness (Heb., happinesses), thou blessed of JEHOVAH ; thou art now a prince of GOD in the midst of us. • T * Constr. with 7 . f Pi., Constr. with 2 . J Kal, Constr. with ^ . § IJiph. with affix. | Pronoun expressed. % Partic. Niph. LETTER LI. 75 LETTER LI. I may perhaps be allowed now to take a retrospective view of the Tenses. As these are incontestably the most important part of The Verb, it may perhaps appear to you that these ought to have formed the first subject of our re-consideration of this part of Hebrew Grammar. Such doubtless would have been the course pursued by me in the Letters which I now have the honour of addressing to your Grace, were it not that I wished to delay my remarks upon them as long as possible, in consequence of my having the misfortune to differ on this head from men of our own day who have deservedly gained the highest reputation for Learning and Ability, — compared with whom I cannot but feel myself an absolute Nonentity. The love, however, of truth, and a deeply-rooted sense of the great responsibility resting upon me in consequence of the almost sacred trust con- fided to me by your Grace's condescension, compel me — however reluctant and unwilling I may be, and however much my mind may shrink from the due performance of so painful a duty — compel me, I say, to use my utmost efforts to prove to you as forcibly as possible, how utterly untenable are their theories, which are but of yesterday ; and, by using the strongest language I am capable of, to place before you in the clearest light the immense injury which must infallibly result from these theories, not merely to the student who is misled by them, but even to The Sacred Volume itself, that most precious Deposit of Truth Divine, transmitted to us from the ages of old, and 7G HEBREW GRAMMAR. the worthy Precursor of The New Revelation which completes our knowledge of GOD'S dealings with our race. That the Hebrew Language has neither Conditional nor Subjunctive Mood, nor any Auxiliary Verb corresponding to the English shall, should — ivill, would — can, could — men/, might — ought, must, &c, and that the Past and Future Tenses admit all these shades of sense, as the Context may require, has already been seen on an earlier occasion (Letter xxviii., § 13 and 14). Thus, — TO? *tffo IB^ ^? [Gen. xl. 15] That they should (or ought to) have flit me in the dun- geon ; •urinW Djrn nrij/ ^ s h rvn .... ^$ \jbtf "to*? [Gen. 'xxxi. 42] Except [The] GOD of my father . . . had been for me, surely now thou wouldest have sent me away empty ; D:D#a n? kiv njn;/ 13 ijnpnpjnn nhh [Gen, xiiii. 10] Except we had tarried, surely now we might have returned this twice ; H£j/ rvwy 1^j; # l tih 1VX Dtyj/£ [Gen. xx. 9] Deeds which ought not to be done hast thou done with me ; mE3 fiiD ^3 [2 Sam. xiv. 14] For we must needs die ; ^bihy xh nimr\ %^ trc^ri n$n [i Kings vin. 27] Behold, the heavens, yea the heaven of heavens, cannot contain Thee. 2. It has been also seen (Letter xxix. § 1] that in the case of events of continual occurrence, or of habitual action, the Future Tense is used in Hebrew, although referring then to time past. Thus Ben Zev tells us, — LETTER LI. 77 -as D1pB3 TfiS ni-ib Ni3 s Tan nvnb Vnn 13*73 imonn bs nmnb " In a matter that is wont to occur often, the Future " will for the most part be-used (lit., come) in the place " of the Fast, to point to its continuance (ox frequency) ; " thus, — Dni^H ipf* Mnn IS^n "ft [Gen. xxix. 2] From that well they usED-To-wATi.u the herds; )2QS\ I3J7H TZpjn HJT |3 [Numb.ix. 10] So it used-to- be continually, the cloud used-to-coyer it; urp njrn ^ ^n ^Nnfr) ^3 w. nlrp, ^ ■$ [Numb. ix. 1 $]At [the'] command ofJEHO VAH the children of Israel used-to-journey, and at [the] command of JEHOVAH they used-to-encamp ; D^j/q margin f)®n nij| njtf^j? 15 ^ [2 Sam. xiii. 18J J y or £Ams r$e king's daughters that \_were] virgins used-to-wear robes (i.e., Such robes the king's daughters that were virgins used-to-wear). 3. And as the Natural FuturcTcnsc may thus be used to express Frequency, so also may a Past Tense converted into a Future by the 1 Conversiuum ; thus [Gen. xxix. 3], • *- •■ I v v t v "ii! • t -: T T T T V V : And all the flocks used-to-be-gathered-togetiiei: thither, And they used-to-roll-away the stone from [the] mouth of the well, And they used-to-avati.k the flock, And i'SED-TO-rUT-AGAiN the stone upon [the] mouth of the well ; and so [Job i. 4], 78 HEBREW GRAMMAR. iktjfi in^i iev ta^s rrg n£#p tfsy] F33 i:ftrrj And his sons used-to-go and used-to-make a feast [in the] house of each-one [on] his day, and used-to-send and call for their three sisters, on which Jarchi well remarks, 7'PP p )'DW VPD " For they were doing so constantly." 4. A Future Tense, when preceded by the Particle TS: then, may, and frequently does, refer to time past ; as, — n&ft intfj M [Exod. xv. 1] TAm sang Moses; jtfttMiT -|2'T TS [Josh. x. 12] Then spake Joshua. 5. It has been seen (Letter xxix. § 11) that The Hebrew Language has no Present Tense, but that this Tense is supplied by the Participle ; as, — Crftg XT \? [Gen. iii. 5] For GOD is knowing (i.e., doth know) ; nnj; TjSin v}3Kl [Gen. xv. 2] ^Lrcd I [am] going childless (i.e., and I go childless) ; nrn.in OJS 1jyi3| nfr ^f$ [Gen. xvi. 8] From fo/bre Sarai my mistress I \_am~] fleeing. 6. The Verb JLTT to &tt0«0, is very frequently used in the Past Tense in the signification of a Present, somewhat like the Latin novi ; as, when GOD asked Cain, " Where is Abel thy brother 1 " he answered [Gen. iv. 9], ( ^Jrtj **7 ) I know not ; and so too Jacob said to the herdsmen at the well [Gen. xxix. 5], LETTER LI. 79 ui/t rafti lim p p 1 ? nx dtbhvi Know tb Laban [the] son of Nuhott And t/icj/ said, We know [kirn] ; And likewise when Joseph would have had his father to remove his right hand from the head of Ephraim to that of Manasseh, saying, " This is the firstborn," Israel replied — \T\I/T ^3 \nj/T [Gen. xlviii. 19] I know, my son, I know, in all which instances the Past, as your Grace will perceive, is used in the sense of a Present. 7. The punctuation of the T which converts the Future into a Past, and of that which converts the Past into a Future Tense, has been so fully discussed already (Letter xxix. § 2 — 7) that I should be trespassing too much on your Grace's time and patience were I at all to touch upon it again here ; I have only, therefore, now to state that Rabbi David Kimchi makes the following remark in his Michlol upon the latter 1 — c-rnyn bv t un im£3 a s :m ft crnn) T\h Tnbs rrirp 7T3?£") ntoyi bsp *p idd "rnsb niia narHi psn FpDinb tci pT (23 rf»BT») nnttft b?s Kibn tpaw (s£ " And when thou shalt add a servile 1 to the Past " Tenses, it will point to a Future [time] (i.e., it will " make the Tense Future), as ( "IDB^I ) ' Then will "JEHOVAH thy GOD keep for thee, &c.' [Deut. " vii. 12], and many like it: but there is a 1 [added] " to Past Tenses to add (or join) to the subject (i.e., to " serve as a Conjunction), and which docs not point "to a Future [time], as (Hipjtn ^2 "'D ) ' Who huh l< i 80 HEBREW GRAMMAR. " ' wrought and done? ' [Isai. xli. 4], ' As for thy father ( nn&H b^ ^i^n ) did he not eat and drink?' [Jer. xxii. 15], and similarly many [others]." On the concluding part of which passage from Kimchi, viz., on that referring to those cases in which the T does not convert the Past into a Future Tense, we have a marginal note by another eminent Rabbi, as follows : — ;wro ii> vzv) pi p;:d iif» im ivb 13V iup ii P7P'do f>prc pm v : t t : ' PDi>i 3jP qov pp 3pf> ifnB'i vj?5 3ip:d 'pi ">3r> ]id5 fnpD P'op tt : '•• -t "t: •: ir ivb 13D bv? V5P5 1'P o -]1P'PP i f"P pp-oi PDU PDfo Dpi pip- t t v -:- v t -r : " But this (viz., that the Tense remains unconverted) is " exclusively [the case] when another Past Tense pre- " cedes it, as [in] these instances which he [Kimchi) has " mentioned ; and so [Gen. xxxvii. 3] ( Hifi^/I ) ' And he " ' made for him a coat of pieces,' which is a Past " Tense, because there is written before it, ' And Israel " '(2HN) loved Joseph;' but [in the passage Deut. "xxxi. 4] (HiiT njpjtpj "And JEHOVAH will do " ' to them according as He did to Sihon,' the 1 is " Conversive, because there is not before it another Past " Tense." Much as we are indebted to the very learned Rabbi for most judiciously modifying thus the words of Kimchi, it is in my humble opinion much to be wished that he had restricted his modification to saying that the Conversion of the Past Tense into a Future is not effected by the prefixed 1 only and solely when it is immediately pre- ceded by another Past Tense, in conformity with the LETTER LI. 81 instances which Kimchi mentions, viz., flfc^l 7#9, and t t : - r ' As to the passage quoted by the learned Author of the note from Genesis xxxvii. 3, it appears to me that H^l actually is there a Past Tense converted into a Future, and so used in a Frequentative sense, as intended to express that Israel usED-to-make for his son Joseph such a coat as that mentioned, for had it been intended that he only once did so, the proper form would then have been t'Ull an d he made, as we actually find in the mention of GOD'S clothing our first parents, lip rri:ro W*$i ens'? DTi 1 ?** nirn feign [Gen. iii. 21] And JEHOVAH GOD made for Adam and for his wife coats of skin. And so we find [Gen. xviii. 7], lp2 \2 np_?1 DPI!}** p "Igan ^1 ^"d Abraham ran to the herd and took a young ox ; and likewise — #dx rg1*i Dvftg n*o "»|3 jpj; na] ^ ns % [Gen. xxxi. 4.2] Aft/ affliction and [the] labour of my hands hath GOD seen and hath rebuked [thee] yesternight ; and — in&9#S 10* n ^ D^^SH "ifr "l?J Nih [Gen. xl. 23] But the chief butler did not remember Joseph, but forgat him ; in which three instances we have the converted Futures npn , rOV") , inDptfi*?] (though preceded respectively by the Past Tenses JH , H«*3 , "DJ) because no idea of Frequency is here to be expressed, as would be the case if instead of them r\p_)} , nDini , inrDtpi , had been written. VOL. II. G 82 HEBREW GRAMMAR. 8. The observations made upon the Tenses, as well Simple as Converted, in this and the preceding Letter, hold good only in Narrative language; in Poetry and in the exalted strains of Prophecy no regard to Tense either is paid, or ought to be expected; — The Prophet by Inspiration, and the Poet in glowing thought, see both the Past and the Future pass before their mind as Present ; and the Laws which regulate the use of Tenses, and consequently the true idea of the Times to which those Tenses respectively refer, cannot therefore be supposed to hold good in, much less be decided by, the lofty, unfettered utterances of Prophet or of Poet. Thus too writes Ben Zev, — nan mrf ^ s d Trra Dipaa nova ^-\n bv nan> s^nam ♦ nw22 ib«3 nvnb -prism ^iss b^n v:sbi na " But the Prophet speaks for the most part in the " Past-Tense in place of the Future, for the Mouth of " JEHOVAH spake by him, and before HIM every- 44 thing [is] seen, and that which is to come to pass is as " though it had [already] taken place." So we find Isaiah foretelling our Saviour's Birth, ages before that mighty Event, in the words, — ft) 1^ rfe v?) T V v> I [Is. ix. 5 137 \P\2 13) L J : • - t : • - • : - For a Child (lit.) hath-been-born to us, A Son {lit.) hath-been-given to us, And the Government (lit.) hath-bcen upon His shoulder, where TyJ is Past Pu-al, \F\2 Past Niph-al, and VJfll Future Kal Converted by the 1 into a Past, the meaning of which passage of course is, LETTER LI. 83 A Child lei/l-be-born to us, A Son trill be given to us, And the Government shall be upon His shoulder ; and this same Prophet describes in his Fifty-third Chapter the Sufferings and Death of the same Holy Being, in Past Tenses, but these need not be quoted here, as this Chapter will, I hope, be fully laid before your Grace by-and-by. The Psalmist likewise in the Ninth Psalm, after praying in the Fourteenth and Fifteenth verses, " Have mercy upon me, O JEHOVAH, see my affliction," &c, breaks out in the Sixteenth verse, with exultation at the calamity which he foresees about to fall upon his foes, — D^iJ IIDCD . . . [The] heathen have sunk [down] Ityy nn^3 ... In the pit [which] they made, IJDCJ irrUr"Q ... In the same net [that] they hid : D^l H13^ . . . Hath their [own] foot been taken ; it : - t : : • Pl1fP ,lHi2 . . . JEHOVAH nATH-BECOME-KNOWN, t : m nfett/ l2E&'D . . . He hath-executed judgment, T T : ' VB3 7>'D3 ... In the work of his [own] hands PWl U)02 . . . Hath [the] wicked-man been-snared : I H7D ]i\3n . . . O the grand thought! (0 des groszen Gedanken ! as translated by Mendels- sohn.) And so again, when in the Sixth Psalm he changes the plaintive strain of the preceding verses by the joyful prediction (verse 10) of GOD'S favour, which he foresaw would be vouchsafed to him — TOnfi Hirr VfcU/ . . . JEHOVAH hath heard my suppli- • T • T r - T cation, np' 1 \rfen nirv . . jehovah will receive my prayer ; G 2 84 HEBREW GRAMMAR. the Verb in the first hemistich is in the Past Tense, while that in the second is Future: on which Kimchi observes that T"lj2\ He will receive stands for T\pl He hath received. Moses, too, in his Song uses frequently the Future for the Past, as in the passages [Deut. xxxii. 10] 1310 V">^3 IHSVO^ . . . He found him in a desert land, t : • I v v •. •• t : • ]0^"! Tp. lil-H?! . . . Even in the waste [in the] howling wilderness ; 1P13513? 11333b^ ... He led him about, He instructed him, 1r# llw^iO IHjiy^ . . . He guarded him as the apple of His eye, where all the Tenses are Future. And on the other hand we find sometimes in Poetry the Future used for a Present ; as [Job xxviii. 24], BD^ YU$} ^Vp.i MR S 5 • • • For He looketh to the ends of the earth, fWP D'0^1 b$ nnn . . . [What is] under the whole heavens He beholdeth. Innumerable other instances could be quoted, were it necessary, to shew that we cannot make use of Prophecies or Poetry to derive from them the Laws of the Hebrew Tenses, and I have therefore taken good care to select from the Narrative portions of Scripture, and from these alone, the instances that I have quoted for the purpose of illustrating to your Grace my remarks upon those Laws. Had those, who have in our day so mercilessly distorted and disfigured the Laws of the Hebrew Tenses, sought to deduce and establish their Theories solely and exclusively from the Historical LETTER LI. 85 Language of Scripture (from which alone those Laws can at all be derived), they could never have conceived, much less have given to the world, that which it will be my painful duty to expose and refute in my succeeding Letters. P.S. (a). The Particle 'N then, which, generally in Narration, affects a Future Tense immediately following it, — as we have seen above (§ 4), — seldom does so in Prophetic and Poetical Language ; thus we read, iSM? itt^bs -)2-p TS [Ps. ii. 5] Then will He speak unto them in His to rath ; np? Vn3 3v>T TW [Isai. xxxv. 6] Then siiall [the] lame [man] leap like the hart; in both which instances the Future retains its Natural force. P.S. (b). The Persons also, as well as the Tenses, are often used in Poetry with a total disregard of the strict rules of their usage in Prose, the Poet frequently, in one and the same strain, changing suddenly from one Person to another with the utmost freedom, though all the time referring to the same subject ; thus, Job exclaims [Ch. xvi. 7], ^Nbn nr\V TJ« . . . Surely now He (GOD) hath wearied me out, ^niV. ^3 niBttfq . . . Thou ( GOD) hast made desolate all my company; And thus the Song of Solomon begins (verse 2), WB nip s tt72p " , 3j?Q^ . . . May he kiss me with [the] kisses of His )nouth, V s tt VT>— rVj c^ita ">3 p or better is thy love than wine, on which the Commentary of Wolfsohn and Bril observes, 35pm ps?; 00 "otp pvb tow 13 5dppi p pros>3 c*or> pr? tb PO'OT P"-.m WW Tffl PVpil ?P^ pD'O PIPPJI iptf PTOpfol P31pf> T37J1 Pl?91 PDMS 737P DJ» vin P3Hp PtfPl »P» pp^P") 6'P or? ,P3U1 PPD; pc5p 3*)U?fl PiPB PIP TB3 pfafl ")BP3 P»3Pi 7PUJ lifo 1PD " This Song ends at verse 5, and the figure in it is [that] a certain 86 HEBREW GRAMMAR. " damsel speaks with herself and praises her beloved, and by reason " of her loving him she wishes that he might kiss her, and that " she might be continually with him ; and she imagines [that] " she is sometimes far from him and sometimes near to him, " sometimes she speaks to herself, and sometimes she speaks with " him as though [he were] standing before her, as you will " perceive in this Song which is mixed up of the Third and Second " Person." EXERCISE LXVL (TO BE TRANSLATED INTO HEBREW.) Pour not out thy heart before every man : lest he deal-altogether*- tSUS subtlely [with thee]. Go not in [the] way with a bold man (Hebr., with [one] strong of face), lest he be a trouble (Hebr., for a bitterness of-spirit) to thee : nn rnb for after the desire of his soul so will he do, and by his folly thou ... 2 rm thyself also wilt perish with him (Hebr., thou wilt perish with him even thou), 1 2 What will a churl and a man of grudging eye (Hebr., a man evil ^? i of eye) profit thee though he give thee [something] (Hebr., on his giving thee) ? — Will he not be unto thee like a creditor ? and will he not ask of thee (Hebr., from thee) sevenfold for the donation of his hand ? Lo [even] that which he may have (Hebr., which urill be to him) 1 2 1 with his brother will his hand not remit, much less that which ns (/) ttttttf Hiph. * Emphasis expressed by coupling the Infin. Kal with Fut. Hiph. LETTER LI. v 7 he may give thee on credit (Ilebr., he will credit thee) : for 71W2 IHph. constr. with 3 as a stranger and as a foreigner wilt thou be accounted in his eyes. "it "haa t ■ : t Contend not with a powerful man (Ilebr., man of arm) : lest thou shouldest fall into his hand ; and fret not thyself with a rich [man] lest he overcome thee : for many hath gold slain (Ilebr., '^ ffopk. constr. with ' many slain hath the (/old caused to fall), and even the heart of kings will it pervert. ^D Pi. Rejoice not in the death of thine enemy : Shall we not all of us die ? Yea [we shall all of us be] as the waters that [are] ... 1 (m.) poured out upon* [the] earth, and [which] can never (Hebr., "^3 Partic. Niph. 2_ 1 not for ever) be gathered [up again]. Despise not the words of wise [men], but-rather learn diligently ... 1 Future their sayings (Ilebr., parables) : that thou mayest have (Ilebr., in-ordcr-that there maij-hc to thee) good doctrine, and in order ivrf? Future that thou mayest know [how] to find favour in the eyes of the princes • T of the congregation. Forget not the words of thy elders, for they also have Pron. expressed learned from their fathers : and from them shalt thou learn, even thou, to know wisdom and to return a word in due-season. V3CN bs t : t * Expressed by affixing <"T to the Noun. 88 HEBREW GRAMMAR. LETTER LIL In a preceding Letter (xxix. § 9), I observed to your Grace that, were the distinguished Originators of the new Theories to translate publicly any portion of The Hebrew Bible, they would be compelled, in order to give sense and meaning to their translations, to use the Tenses after exactly the same manner as do the Hebreiv Gramma- rians themselves. In corroboration of this statement, I beg to adduce the simple fact that the very learned and dis- tinguished Grammarian, who first ventured to deny the ex- istence of a Future and of a 1 Conversivum, has, through- out the narrative portions of his subsequently published Translation of the Book of Job, — a poetical book which, as your Grace is aware, is preceded by two narrative chapters, and closes also with a short narration, — trans- lated the Future Tenses that are preceded by 1 Conver- sivuni exactly as if he had never seen or heard anything of his own Grammar, and in precise accordance with the rules laid down by ancient and modern Rabbinical Grammarians. Thus in CHAPTER I. Veree 2. 1 ' ^75— W by Wm 6 and [there'] were born to him; 3. ?l! "'?r?P ^H;! „ „ his substance also was ; mnn tj^sn ">nji j? n and that man WAS . 5. s n^1 M n an d it came to pass ; BSfa?^ 2"W nbtpn „ M that Job sent and sanc- tified them ; 6. EWjbgn s a? lte»! Oi*n *n?\ „ „ and it came to pass [as it might be~\ to day ( ? ), that the so7is of GOD came, „ V$m C2 Hi^p. n „ and\that\ Satan alsoCAUE. &c., &c, &c. LKTTElt LI I. 89 CHAPTER II. Verse 1. BVfWH >2? WW Ci*n ^1 "g^ff"* <""* « came to pass [as it might be] to day ( ? ), that the sons of GOD CAME, tfckn ca wtan M M a „rf [//,«<] Sato* a foo CAME, 2. njrp. iprf*1 „ „ and JEHOVAH said ; M -nsfrj rrjrp nw itoton jsn „ „ aw a« njm.TQ*] „ „ that JEHOVAH said ; 9. W?*3 T ?^ ^Vt „ „ so Eliphaz, fyc, went and did ; mn}H»n „ „ and JEHOVAH ac- cepted, fyc, io. nvwb -ib?s bs n« nii-p p]p*i „ „ a *? and jru he rightly admits the application of this principle ; but why does he stop short at the next two Verbs ^HFH (the Future Kal of rpn converted into the Past by the 1), and N7£?] (the Future Kal of Sip converted also by the 1 into a Past) ? On what grounds can he deny that "'W] and 8"1j^1 are Past Tenses like 1^ and ]Fi2 % What right has he to assume, for the mere object of supporting his theory, that the Prophet should just drop, in the midst of his sentence, the principle in accordance with which he had spoken the first half; and, besides throwing the Tenses into confusion and disorder, should lay aside the high tone of Prophecy with which he had just begun his mighty Prediction ? This surely can only have been done from a de- termined resolution to deny at all risks the force of the T Conversivum. 7. To the ] Paragogic too, as well as to the 2 Epcn- thetic (as he calls it), he assumes the unwarranted power of expressing " strong asseveration, with futurity of LETTER LII. 99 action," or, in other words, of giving to a Present Tense a Future or an Imperative force. It has been seen in the Table of the Objective Pronominal Affixes that the form lp2) takes the Singular Affixes, both Masculine and Feminine in three different ways, viz., nrrp=y. nipy, mp^ but no Grammarian has ever before conceived the idea of giving a different meaning to these several forms. Our learned Grammarian is the first to do this, and in order to support the doctrine, he gives * the following very lucid translation of Exod. xxiii. 10, 1 1 : — " And I siv years (JH*^ ) sow thou (Imper.) thy land, " (ri£pN1) and have collected (pret., i.e., prophetic (?) " fut.) its income, but the seventh (year) (n2ip£i£*ri) thou " shalt dismiss it (Epenthetic form), (Pii'^;"!) so thou " (shalt) have left it, (17281) and the poor of thy people " shall (surely) eat : and their excess (i.e., leavings) " the wild beast of the field (p28F\) shall eat (pres. or " contingent future)." Here we have jntfl in the first place made an Imperative all at once, without the slightest reason being given for it, though, according to his theories, it is a Present Tense ; next we have r\£DX1 most absurdly denominated a Prophetic Future, where there is nought else but plain command, merely from the determina- tion to deny the force of the T Conversivum ; then we find n3C9D#in taken as a Future Tense, not because it really is so, but because there is a 2 Epenthetic used in affixing the Pronoun ; after this comes the Converted * Page 355. — The English Parentheses are here given as in the Grammar. H 2 100 HEBREW GRAMMAR. Past Fltt^M') , which he is forced to translate by a Future so thou (shalt) have left it, though he does his best to save himself from yielding his point by putting the shalt within brackets, and by introducing a have ; the similar instance l/DJJI he endeavours to get over by rendering it and they shall (surely) eat, without telling us whence he gets the surely, or why he allows to the Con- verted Past its proper Future sense ; and, last of all, comes the plain Future Tense /DKFl which he rightly translates it shall eat, and then endeavours to account for his allowing this unquestionable Future sense by placing afterwards within brackets (Pres. or Contingent Future). But what is the consequence of these shifts, and of such catching, as it were, at straws ? It is this, that the learned Writer cannot avoid contradicting himself continually. Thus he quotes * [Deut. xxxii. 10] injTO? IH^in; inj^D'l which he translates, He accord* ingly turns him about, He instructs him, He keeps him, making no distinction whatever here between those forms which have, and that which has not, the 2 which he calls Epenthetic ; and again he quotes [Job ix. 14] *\BV nm mmN MiyX "gJK \3 *]K , which he translates in his Grammar,* Nay, (supposing) that I may really answer him, (then) let me, I pray, select my words (for use) with him ; while in his translation of Job he is obliged to render the same passage, " Much less then should I " answer Him ; should I choose out my words with Him" The latter is, of course, as it should be ; — -in that given in the Grammar I can see no meaning. And as we touch on Job, it may be well to observe how, in the third * Page 355. — The English Parentheses are taken from the Gram- mar in the latter instance. LETTER LIT. 101 chapter, the very opening of the Poetical part of the Book, he is obliged to translate, — CV "Tils' 1 (ver. 3) Let [the] day perish ; hftg iriBHT 7K (ver. 4) Let not GOD regard it ; rnn:i v)y r ^aln bW) ( Id. ) Neither let [the] light shine upon it ; Jiip^'l IJ^n in7Sr_ (ver. 5) Let darkness and the shadow of death pollute it; njj# V7J7 l$$fl ( Id. ) Let a cloud dwell upon it ; DV nnpp 5n^3] ( Id. ) Let fAe blackest [terrors] of day affright it ; with many others too numerous to quote, all of them rendered exactly as they would be by the strictest follower of the Ancient Grammarians, viz., as Imperatives, i.e., Futures, from which, as was seen (Letter xxviii. § 10), the Third Persons of the Imperatives must always be supplied ; and yet we have here no Prophecy, we have here seldom or never an Apocopation, we have no Epenthetic 2 . But can it be believed that after he has, times out of number, been compelled to allow the force of the 1 Con- versirum in his translations, and after he has passed over in his Job (without the least mention of them in the Notes) instances innumerable that are altogether at variance with his theories on this as well as other points, — can it, I say, be believed, that in a Note on HICK X7 TM2h in the eleventh verse of this third chapter of Job, he remarks, as it seems, triumphantly, — " Here we have no " T Conversivum — the Leviathan of the modern ( \ ) " Jews, and of their admirers ! " — It is a literal impossi- bility that a "I Conrers ic urn should be used here: — ■ 2TIDN1 would mean of course, and I died, and no Con- junction of that kind could possibly be introduced here! 102 HEBREW GRAMMAR. Besides, there is no want whatever of a 1 Conversivum or of anything else Conversive. It has before been said that in poetry the Tenses are used without a fettered restriction to their strict Prose use ; but independently of this, the Yerb is used here in a Subjunctive, or rather Optative sense — Why should I not have died? Indeed the learned Author would be much more puzzled to deduce a reasonable sense, in conformity with the context, from his " Why die I not? ' as he renders it in his Note. 8. The il Paragogic may occasionally, as has been admitted above, give emphasis to the Verb ; but there is a vast difference between (jiving Emphasis to a Verb, and completely changing its nature ; thus, for example, '138 •> which every orthodox Hebraist would translate by I will make great, might, perhaps, on its assuming the form n^J^ , be rendered by I will indeed (or certainly) make great : but our learned Grammarian, who would translate 713$ Dv I make great, wants the addition of the Paragogic H , which produces the form HTIJK , to convert his Present Tense into a Future, and so to give it an Imperative sense, Let me make. This appears to be the process by which he arrives at the following transla- tion (given in his Grammar,* as an illustration of his assertion to the above effect) of Gen. xii. 2, where he actually makes it appear that GOD says to Abraham, " ptyj/KI) And let me make thee a great nation, " ('"v"^^.]) an d LET me U- P ra y] ma ^ e thy name great, " and become thou a blessing;" — of which translation the eccentricity is such that I feel it necessary to state that it is quoted verbatim from his Grammar (not even the parenthetical [_I pray] being excepted) ; and as it is THE ALMIGHTY to Whom such supplicatory lan- * Page 355. LETTER LI I. 103 guage is imputed, I cannot dwell upon it in detail with- out being- guilty of irreverence. 9. I cannot conclude without mentioning also how the distinguished and learned Grammarian above alluded to translates the passage, T\§f} DNH/tf fi£P [Gen. ix. 27]. We are told by the Sacred Historian that Noah, indignant at the conduct of his youngest son, pro- nounced upon him as a curse— that he should be " a servant of servants (Vntf/) to his brethren (Plu.) ; " now, as these were only two in number [Japhet, namely, and Slicm), this proves at once that their father must have been satisfied with the conduct of both of them; and, consequently, he pronounces upon them the blessing D# ^n»? P#y| r\$:b D\"#g ft*£ GOD shall enlarge Japhet, and shall dwell in the tents of She?n, in which it is observable, as Mendelssohn well remarks, that Japhet is promised Temporal blessings, a numerous progeny and wide-spread sway, while Shem is blessed witli the Spiritual Promise that GOD Himself shall dwell with him. Now the learned Author in question, in his Grammar,* renders n^. 1 ? DV^K ttffl by " Let (or may) GOD stul- tify (?) Japhet," upon which he improves in his Lexicon j- by giving '-''May GOD declare Japhet foolish (i.e., idolatrous) "(!!), turning thus a father's blessing into the most terrible of curses, yea, infinitely more terrible than the curse actually pronounced upon that son who really deserved it ! How it is that renderings such as these have not long ago been noticed and exposed, is, I must say, not a little surprising to me. It Mould seem that the dazzling name of the Author has completely blinded the readers of his works. As to the great name * Page 347. t Under the Article nnD Page 506. 10-1 HEBREW GRAMMAR. and venerable person of the Learned Author, these cannot possibly be held in greater respect by any one than they are by myself; but again, as regards the manner in which he, in accordance with his new Theories, would have us read and understand the Original of The Old Testament, I frankly confess that had I been taught to read The Hebrew Bible in such a manner, I should have considered that to be the most unfortunate of my days on which I first learned the Hebrew Alphabet. P.S. (a). That a Present Tense cannot possibly supply an Impera- tive Mood, will, I hope, be as clear to your Grace as it is to myself. Some languages may indeed have several shades of Imperative, some to express the Commanding an action to be done immediately, others at a more remote time, and others at an Indefinite Time ; and again others serving to express the Command that an action shall have been performed by a specified time: and to these several shades of Imperative distinct Technical names, such as Present Imperative, Indefinite Imperative, Past Imperative, may have been applied. But still each of these, whatever may be its particular shade of meaning, and whatever its Technical name, must necessarily, as expressing a command, refer to an action not yet performed, i.e., Future. Again, other languages may have for the Imperative Mood a word of exactly the same form as one of the Persons of the Present Tense (as in Latin, Es, thou art, and Es or Esto, be thou ; Monere, thou art advised, and Monere, be thou advised) but it would surely shock reason to say that in such instances the Present Tense is used to express an Imperative ; it must appear at once to every one that two distinct parts of the same Verb happen to have the same form. P.S. (b). With regard to the passage ri?^ Cn'bN f-lp^ mentioned above, it may be observed that Onkelos in his very highly-esteemed Chaldee Version of the Pentateuch, renders the Hebrew $?? by the Chaldee s ^r1, and again he uses the very same Chaldee word to express the Hebrew ^TH! in the passage T 1 ??? flN TvT^fej TTJT1) 3TT£ >3 [Deut. xii. 20] When JEHOVAH thy God shall enlarge (or make wide) thy border, the first three words of which he renders t ; .* " " "'. * An abbreviation for nirP. . LETTER LII. 105 Now since here -TH1 incontcstably expresses maldng-ioide or enlarging, and since to express this word ^fTP in his Chaldee Version Onkilos makes use of the very same word ^Pl which he employs in Genesis ix. 27 to express J? 1 ?., we have at once his high authority for taking ^1 as equivalent to 3TH1 i-e., in the sense of making wide (or enlarging). This is the sense in which it is also taken by Jarclii, Aben Ezra, Kintchi, Mendelssohn, Ben Zcv, and others of like name ; and it is in accordance with this interpretation that the passage is rendered in the English Transla- tion, the well-known words of which are so deservedly dear to every one who from it has x'eceived his knowledge of THE WORD OF GOD. EXERCISE LXVH. (TO BE TRANSLATED LNTO HEBREW.) Forsake not thy old friend (Hebr., thy friend from-of-old) in order T " to go after a friend whom thou knowest not : Who would exchange 2T Past Kal TIE Hiph. old-wine settled (Hebr., quietly-resting) upon its lees for new-wine in which there is neither its taste nor its scent ? Is it not WfT'Fl (,„.) UVp_ (,„.) folly ? Exchange not thy friend for all the pleasant-things of [the] ...2 v?n piu. C2Eq world : nor a faithful brother for the fine-gold of Ophir. an? There is [one] destroying his soul by his accepting-the-person of nnw Hiph. every man : for he will be accounted as [one] flattering-with (Hebr., rat/sing to be smooth) [his] tongue, and as a man in whom there is no faith. To pour contempt upon a poor [man that is] intelligent (Hebr., 106 HEBREW GRAMMAR. knowing) [is] not good : and to accept-the-person of a sinner [is] folly and disgrace. t • : Keep-at-a-distance from a man of power (Hebr., arm) : Why pm Hiph. shouldest thou throw [away] thy life from before thee ? for only T33 with aff. as [it were] a step will [there] be between thee and death, and thou shalt be as [one] walking upon traps, and as one standing Past with 1 Convers. ns (m.) upon the top of a tower in a day of storm and whirlwind. T The poor [man] as well as the rich [man], the servant as well as his master (Hebr., lords) : Will they not all of them glory -themselves in the fear of JEHOVAH ? My son, there is no glory like humility : even among the princes of if-) T ^ [the] people will it cause thee to sit. affix Will not an intelligent-man be honoured even in his poverty ? much-more on his acquiring wealth and riches. \p pin nwv Delight thyself in the conversation of wise [men] : and thou shalt-meditate in the law of The Most High. Past with 1 Convers. And let righteous [men] be* among [those] eating at thy table (Hebr., eaters of thy table) : and in the fear of GOD thou shalt glory. ">NS Hithp. Wisdom will raise-up the head of the humble-minded man Definite CD Hiph. (Hebr., [one'] loiv of spirit) : and will cause him to sit among princes. • T The bee is the least of all winged-things (Hebr., owners of wing) : * Past Converted. LETTER Ell. 107 and [yet] her produce maketh-she-sweet above every rn^j/i pnn Fut. Hiph. sweet [thing]. There is [one] toiling and wearying [himself], and hastening buy w v& • T - "T » T in his way, and [yet] he cannot-corae to the place of his desire : Future. and there is [one] walking very-slowly (Hebr., slowly, slowly), [leaning] upon his stick, weak and [in] want of strength ; and [yet] T " the eye of JEHOVAH upon him, and his latter-end [shall be that] honour shall-come-to-him. Kill Fut. Kal, w. aff. « For from JEHOVAH come poverty and riches, disgrace and Future, honour, death and life. The gift of JEHOVAH abideth with [the] righteous : and by Future. H^ His favour they make-prosperous (Hebr., cause to prosper) their Future, works. There is a churl [who is] acquiring riches by craftiness : and thi3 will be his portion of all his toil. He speaketh within his heart, saying, Behold I have found a resting-place, now will I surely eat of my good, I will also enjoy life : T but he knoweth not that death is as-a-lier-in-wait for him ; yet ../I Past. Definite. ^is 1 ? a little [while] and he will leave all that [belongeth] to him, and to another shall he give it [as] his portion. all', so Stand in thy covenant, even in thy old-age depart not from it, (,».) n^T ana then shalt thou prolong thy days. 108 HEBREW GRAMMAR. LETTER LIII. Your Grace has condescended to ask whether the Dis- tinguished Author alluded to in my last has not also quoted Rabbinical authority in support of his new doctrines. My answer is, — Indeed he has, and from the highest Rabbinical authority imaginable. For he has quoted* from Rabbi David Kimchi a passage which the latter quoted from Aben Ezra, which runs as follows : — cDnn unm ntoa •va?* tw ie3 my nipE3 rnsi • T T ' ■•a nroi bw&w iir&bn ££t£>an 73 "o s-ns ps cm3N "ai w^*5 Vas n$3l "j-ns Mini "nairn }a*b Dm -aib pni p ia i-a-p "»rsDW ptb p^D i^bn ^« ^3 113373 'd^dh nis« is -orb ieiv ]t? sim nw/ha tub pi»33 rnsi -oi> fit&bs *rvrob ieto ptb sim nana Now your Grace will reasonably expect me to give a translation of this passage ; I wish that the Learned Lexicographer who quotes it had done this for me ; as for myself, I am sorry to say that I cannot but feel some slight hesitation in attempting to do so. Aben Ezra is indeed universally acknowledged to be one of the most eminent, if not actually himself the most eminent, of Hebrew Commentators ; but, on the other hand, he is also well known as a very obscure and puzzling Writer, almost, in fact, enigmatical ; so much so, that it is proverbially said of him amongst Hebraists, — that is, " A Comment is requisite to his Comment.''' Now as in the passage before us he brings forward in illustration of his point two words, probably Spanish, in Hebrew cha- * In his Lexicon under the Article \ — Page 164. LETTER LIII. 109 racters, this, of course, renders him doubly obscure to those who are not practised in reading Spanish so written. I must therefore beg your indulgence for the apparently rough and unpolished manner in which I attempt to render the words of the ancient Hebraist. Before doing so, however, I must be allowed to produce a feu- lines of Kimchi immediately preceding the passage in question, in order that his train of thought and the object for which he quotes Aben Ezra may clearly appear. Kimchi begins the paragraph thus: — -ns 12 BmntBnb t^-rpn pt&ba onaisn anao ■o j^IH] •mn "*a nra nwiaaa rrn ]n\s nvms inw Tns E"ipc2 >TN 1E2 -OS UVpBSi THDl '1T23 "123 "O "1237 CS "1E2 Tn2 crsi tdti nt nans rwro -nyiba '•aia^a Dipoa -rnn Tnsi nns bs -ran p»n ^bi en D*a-i *2 D-rcamb rDna ts 12:3 -tnv Diptaa TH5 m-n Ntr 1 ts nbs 221 >2n2 S-1TU pS CH-12S "2-1 C3nn 2H3T . . . . , rttt?2 "VBTJ &c., &c, as quoted above. "And you must know that it is the custom of the " Tenses in the Holy Language to be used — " A Past in the place of a Future, that is [the Tense " which takes the] letters jiTN , and this is for the " most part in Prophecies, because the matter is as "clear as though it had already passed, seeing that it " has already been decreed : — " Again, A Future in the place of a Past, as [with] " M then :— T " And-again, A Future or a Past in the place of " a Participle, as if to say that one was doing such- " and-such [an action] continually, and there is no " need to mention them, for they are very numerous, and 14 by the context you may know every one of them : — " And with the Particle *X then, a Future most gene- " rally comes in the place of a Past, as HUSO TB^ *£ " [Exod. xv. 1] then sang Moses" 110 HEBREW GRAMMAR. Here follow several more quotations of passages with TK followed by a Future for a Past, and then comes immediately the citation from Aben Ezra, as given above, of which the following is the translation : — " And the wise-man Rabbi Abraham Aben Ezra " wrote that so is the custom in the language-of Ishmael " (Arabic), and he moreover wrote that so it is allowable " to use them (the Past and Future Tenses) in speaking " of a Present time in the same manner as [we read] " V32 '*")£Oi [Isai. vi. 2) he was covering his countenance « D^SDH niSX IJJJJ] [Id. verse 4] and the foundations of " the thresholds were shaking ; for seeing-that there " is not in The Language a mark (or form) for " the INTERMEDIATE Time (the Present Time that " is, as Intermediate to the Past and Future), they speak " of it (the Present Time) in a Past or a Future Tense ; ir "as, in a foreign language fWlD, which is a Tense " standing for a Past, or-again flJOlD which is [used] " for a Tense standing for a Future." Now in this passage from Aben Ezra there is one sentence as clear as the sun in the heavens of an un- clouded noon, and that is that " there is no Intermediate " or Present Tense in the Hebrew Language, and conse- " quently that sometimes a Future Tense and sometimes " a Past Tense are used to express the Present Time : " yet this is the passage quoted to show that there is no Future Tense in Hebrew, but that the Tense usually taken as such is nothing more nor less than a Present ! — To prove that there is a Present Tense in Hebrew, a passage is quoted which, in plain terms, denies the very existence of a Present Tense ! But let us attend to the train of Kimchis ideas, and thus observe the reason for which he quoted the words LETTER LIII. 1 1 1 of the elder Rabbi ; for as we shall by this means obtain a clear view of the general drift of the whole passage, and of the connexion of its several parts, so shall we also gain the best possible guidance to the true import of Aben Ezras words. Kimchi, after telling us that a Past is used sometimes in the place of a Future, goes on to say that a Future again is sometimes used for a Past, as in the case of TJJ ; and then again, that sometimes a Future and some- times a Past are used instead of a Participle (i.e., for a Present Tense), when an idea of frequency or continuance of action is to be expressed. In illustration of the former of these two remarks, he quotes several examples — PJ$0 T#J fJJ , &c. ; the latter he does not illustrate by any examples, saying that such instances are of so frequent occurrence as to need no illus- tration, but he quotes the passage in question from A hen Ezra, in which there occur two examples from The Bible that exactly exemplify this remark, in the first of which — l\ja Hp?'! — we see the Future HgO^, and in the second one— D^DH nlBK WJJl— the PAST IJW] (con- verted too from the Future into a Past by the ^ Conversivmn), used each of them in the sense of a Present Tense expressing Frequency or Continuance of Action. This, then, being the drift of the passage, it seems that, so far from denying the existence of a Future Tense and of a 1 Conversivum, Aben Ezra himself, in the very passage adduced to prove so marvellous and gratuitous an assertion, — In the first place, tells us how the want of a Present form is supplied in Hebrew, saying expressly that there is no such form as that of a Present Tense in The Lan- guage : — and, In the second place, — in order to shew that sometimes a 112 HEBREW GRAMMAR. Future Tense, and sometimes a Past, is used in the sense of a Continued Present (the object for which Kimchi cited him), — he brings forward for a Past Tense, not an actual or rather a natural Past Tense, but, instead of that, a Future Tense changed into a Past by the influence of a *\ Conversivum. It is really most surprising that the Learned Lexico- grapher should have quoted such a passage in support of his Theories, a better than which could scarcely be wished for effectually to refute them. 2. But in addition to all this, we are told by the dis- tinguished Lexicographer* that — " The modern Jews, " with their very learned and laborious follower John " Buxtorf, and others, had the misfortune not to under- " stand Kimchi. " " Buxtorf' — the man who has proved to the world that he had the Talmud at his fingers' ends, as it were, — to say that such a man did not understand Kimchi — " Kimclii" the easiest of Rabbinical Commentators! — " The modern Jews ! " — This term comprehends of course such men as Luzatti, Mendelssohn, Wessley, Eichel, Wolfsohn, Bril, Ben Zev, &c, &c, &c. — But if the Learned Writer should be askedf whether he has ever read Luzatti s nhnn ant^V , Wessieys mtfan nw , — the omja of Mendelssohn on The Pentateuch, Eichel on the Proverbs, Wolfsohn on Job, Bril on the Psalms, Ben Zev, on The Lamentations, &c., I should hope for his own sake that the answer would be in the Negative ; for otherwise, how- would it be possible that men, who have left such lasting monuments of their Hebrew learning, should be so dis- * Lexicon, page 164, under 1. t The lamented and distinguished Author was still living when this, and all the other Letters bearing on this subject, were written and ready for Press. LETTER LI 1 1. 113 paragingly spoken of by one who, however great in fame and learning, has never favoured The Public with one line of Hebrew from his own pen, and who, moreover, by the manner in which he sometimes spells the most common Hebrew words, evidently betrays a want of training in Hebrew Composition. In the very Lexicon, in which the misfortune of Buxtorf and the modern Jews is so much lamented, the first word treated of begins with " 3K in Construction ^3N (! !) . " Mispri?its do not often occur in the second word of the first Article of a Book ; and besides I could quote very many instances of similar false spellings ; but far, very very far, be it from me to impute such things as these to a want of knowledge of The Language ; I only say that it proves a want of Practice in Composition. And how then can it be that one so little acquainted with Hebrew Composition should speak so slightingly of those whose Hebrew Writings will command the admi- ration of all succeeding generations ! 3. As I have thus translated that part of Kimchi quoted by the learned Lexicographer, and of which he ought, properly, to have given a translation himself, it may perhaps be permitted me to cite now another passage of Kimchi, namely, from his Comment on ^ajp] *Oj?K flliT h§ ^ip [Ps. hi. 5] [With] my voice I will cry to JEHOVAH, (lit.) and He hath heard me, &c. . . . , where he observes — o iiwdjo ftp in ,p':n snroi 'SR wo rw P^pru iso 'v&a 122 O jOJD ftpl ,p tfHiJ ^ WW D7p PH IP »Pf3 ?'^ P1D3 PlPD PI PJW pft3JP 3VT31 ,pnnrp i3 OPPJ D7pD pi")3 O UBTP D7pP PH3 P"}PfoC JV3 137? PDW li'fo ftpD 7'PU Pip~3 13U ")37P 11 ^J3#!l -4w^ -He hath answered me, A Past [Tense] " instead of a Future, as [though it had been] ^3££] VOL. II. I 114 HEBREW GRAMMAR. " And He will answer me, and there are many like " it : Or it may be according to its plain meaning ( i.e., " it may be taken in its proper Past sense) because " he was confident in this [matter] : or The Holy Spirit " thus shone forth upon his tongue, which is the right " [way of taking it], for we have already explained that " all the Psalms were spoken by The Holy Spirit, and " mostly, in Prophecy (lit., in the most of Prophecy), this " is found that he {i.e., the Prophef) speaks in a Past " Tense instead of a Future, for it is as though the " matter had already been done, since it is spoken by « The Holy Spirit." Such, my Lady Duchess, is the literal translation of this passage; I have only supplied the Points to the two words "O^ITl , in order to enable your Grace to enter fully into the sense. Now you will see at once that the "03J//H of the text is plainly stated by Kimchi to be a PAST Tense, but as the sentence appears to require a Future he observes : — I. That this Past Tense (a FUTURE, be it observed, converted into a Past by 1 Conversivum) may stand instead of a Future (TAtf DlpD3 "QJ/), for which Future the form would be V3!£1 : — II. That the Past Tense 'ODJ^H may perhaps have been used by the Royal Psalmist to express better his firm confidence that an answer would be given him (in accordance, as it were, with the subsequent precept of our Saviour, " When ye pray, believe that ye receive "). III. That David, speaking by The Holy Ghost, fore- saw that the answer would be given to his prayer, and used therefore the Past Tense, in the forcible language of Prophecy, instead of the Future which might have appeared to give a mere assertion. LETTER LIU. 115 It must have been remarked that ^Mgl is treated by Kimchi as a Past ; and whence, it may be asked, can it be so if not from the influence of the 1 Conversivum? Docs this look as if Kimchi had an idea of there being no 1 Conversivum? Docs such an idea seem, even for one instant, to have crossed his mind ? If the 1 could have been imagined to drop even in this single instance its Conversive power, all difficulty would have vanished from the passage. Yet he appears to have never con- ceived such a thing as possible. What then could Kimchi say, what could he think, could he possibly at this day see his own name quoted as one who believed not in the existence of a 1 Conversivum? How can any person venture to make such an assertion of a man, than whom no one can more distinctly assert the truth, or more diligently enter into the minutest details, of this most fundamental article of the Grammar of The Hebrew Bible? 4. But the truth is that Kimchi does not merely to the fullest extent admit, and in the strongest terms assert, and in the most satisfactory manner prove, that the 1 Conversivum has the power of changing a Future into a Past Tense : he goes still farther than this, showing, as he docs in the following passage, quoted from his Michlol, that it has the further power of making a Future Tense refer to a Past Time antecedent to the Time referred to by another Verb preceding it : — in *)ED vaab -kbn brcn nnp -ns -marc ^;n rniBfi? t bpi nssp p bs i3KEn 1331 -lEib nsn Ntanai piqsp nns tcbm niB s t& crip *a »bn -nm tfbn s i nw -nai o^by t v: v- t v v : nbvp -n*] f DJ^i csn bs v-o ns iSns s*o?n "1 . nbn^i -. v •- l -: t : - t t v tt v ' -: - t • - J nwsa ttw ins *a tt< -1331 Dnpbnbr) nVfrm nwfcnn •t:-: t t : t ~ - n>ntp -ins >3 r\y -osi nb»i np*l H*"H VWV\ . ana nVwn T 9 11G HEBREW GRAMMAR. >no v i mis nnona w^in sbT imparts nvia sm t* si5n3»i ro->nb c s n ns ct9»i . t»sn -nai ir ? S2 s i n^bin m s i I : T • - T T T V T - V V T" " ! * " T ST - in»n*t» m-inb c^n ai» -p nnsi n^n \spsa "oai Qian nnn " And there is a 1 which points to a time that has " already past before [the action expressed by] the Verb " that is before it, ' Behold, Thou (jnaVj?) hast been wroth " (K£>021) because we [first] had sinned ' [Isai. lxiv. 4], " meaning to say, For we had previously sinned [and] " therefore Thou hast been wroth against us: — 'But a " man (HID^) will die (&'7C-.--) when he hath [first] been " ill* [Job xiv. 10], [meaning to say] 'when he hath "previously been ill, for before that he will die he will "be taken ill and be sick: '— ' [ (pnx Rfe»] ) And " ' Aaron lifted-up his hands towards the people (Ornrpi) " ' and blessed them"] (TVH) when he had [first] come down " ' from offering the sin-offering, and the burnt-offering, " ' and the peace-offerings ' [Levit. ix. 22], [meaning to " say] When he had previously come down, for after that " he had come down from offering the sin-offering [then] " he blessed them : — ' And he (Sisera) (D"1"li3) was fast- " ' asleep, (^JT'D/or he had [previously] been [very] tired, " ' so he died' [Judg. iv. 21], [meaning to say] Seeing that "previously [to going to sleep)] he had been [very] tired; " for after that he was [very] tired and weary he went " fast to sleep by reason of his weariness, and-so he did "not perceive her smiting him, and died : — ' (D"J3) And t (the Manna) bred worms (C#X3M) after it had [first] become corrupt' [Exod. xvi. 20], [meaning to say] "that it had previously [to producing worms] become "corrupt: — ' (Cfc^) And He turned the sea into dry " ' land (DVpn l^pS?]) after that the waters were [first] " ' i a '. LETTER LI II. 117 "'divided [Exod. xiv. 21],' [meaning to say] that the "waters were first divided, and afterwards 11k turned " the sea into dry land, for the wind dried it up." Had the learned Lexicographer who, as seen above, quotes Kimchi as denying the existence of the 1 Conver- sivum, had he, I say, turned over only two leaves from the passage which he adduces in proof of his assertion, he might have found the words just quoted verbatim from the Michlol. Had this passage fortunately caught his eye, he might perhaps have hesitated to say that Buxtorf and the modern Jews did not understand that justly celebrated Rabbi. P.S. The Author of the S SV blbstt n the passage ^1 BT13 *WT| [Judg. iv. 21] uses very nearly the same words as Kimchi has done in the passage above ; which shews that he perfectly agrees with Kimchi. The Hebrew words in this same passage from Kimchi, which appear above in square brackets, form the first half of the verse [Levit. ix. 22] of which the latter half alone is given by Kimchi; it was found necessary to introduce these words, in order that the Author's meaning might be more clearly perceived. EXERCISE LXVIII. (TO BE TRANSLATED INTO HEBREW.) Some Hebrew Words are given without Points, in order that more practice in using the Lexicon may be gained. Blessed is (Ilebr., the blessedness of) the man who hath not PL stumbled by his tongue : and the yoke of whose transgressions hath not become-bound [upon him]. Blessed is the man against whom the multitude of his trans- gressions do not testify : and whose sins have not pushed-him ni3 Hiph. with all', [away] from confiding in his GOD. 118 HEBREW GRAMMAR. The blessing of JEHOVAH is upon the reward of [the] righteous : ...a Vnaa(m.) and like a leaf in a flourishing olive [tree] will He cause it [the aff. « reward] to spring up. Eejoice, my son, in thy portion which GOD hath allotted unto thee in the land of the living : and also unto GOD shalt thou offer [up] thy offerings, and to pay thy vows thou shalt not delay. Say not in thy heart (Hebr., Say not in thy heart saying) what benefit [shall I derive] if I shall serve my God : and what good will [there] be to me in the end ? T —.' t Say not, I have (Hebr., there is to me) plenty : also I have acquired wealth and riches, therefore shall I never be moved, I shall nby . . . i not know evil, (m.) For on a man's dying [it is an] easy [thing] in the V?p Partic. Niph. eyes of JEHOVAH to repay him (Hebr., to him) according to his deeds and according to his ways. For when distress cometh (Hebr., on the coming of distress) the good [times] will be forgotten as-though [in] a moment : piu. (/) ias and all the deeds of a man will be known in his latter-end. For in the day of prosperity forgotten-are the evils that have mitt Future (/.) passed [away] : and in the day of calamity also the good [times] Plu. (/.) shall-be-in-oblivion. nttfa Niph. Thou shouldest surely remember that not many are the days of H2nn LETTER LIU. 119 i thy life which thou livest upon this earth : Although death Partic. Kal. nms Def. 1 may delay his steps, he will surely come at last ; for who hath ins n* nnnwa escaped in the day of death ? or who hath made (Ilebr., cut) a fcba Ni r it. covenant with [the] pit ? For like a garment, so will all flesh fade-away : did not God nbn ordain for thee death on His saying unto thee, Thou shalt PffiS b? w ith aff. Def. surely die ? As the leaves of a flourishing tree fade [some] of them bm Future. [away] and fall to the earth, and [some] of them shew-forth Future. V 2 Fut. Htph, a bud and put-forth a blossom : so are the offsprings of the Y"»2 mQFut. Hiph. n-iD D^NSNE sons of men ; a generation goeth, and a generation cometh. Partic. Kal. Partic. Kal. For every work-of the hands of man shall wither and be-consumed bsb bn2 nbD with its worker together : the maker as well as the thing-made, the worker as well as that-which his hands have wrought. Blessed is [the] man [who is] thinking good thoughts, and enquiring-after good in his wisdom : and whose (Hebr., his) eyes are upon the saints that are on the earth. bw nsrr T •• For [one] enquiring-after wisdom shall find her secret : and * No Compensation for Dagesh. 120 HEBREW GRAMMAR. [one] loving intelligence shall know the mysteries thereof (Hebr., her mysteries). Therefore shalt thou diligently search-for her, as for tEDn aff. H2 hidden -treasures : and upon every road, and upon every path, shalt ptsia mis nvia thou seek her. And thou shalt watch at the doors of her temple day and night, Tpw * bv 2 1 and from the threshold of her house thy foot shall not depart : perchance thou mayest find favour in her eyes, and [so] shalt thou be Past w. 1 Convers. among the number of her guests (Hebr., her invited). ...a vnp Like a nail in a sure place, so shalt thou stick to her pwa ...a palace : until she shall take thee unto her into f the house, *)DH Affix. bMw.aff. and [then] thou shalt find a blessing. Past with 1 Convers. And thou shalt pitch thy tent on her territory : and 3?pfi Past with 1 Convers. 71D3 on the sides of her field thou shalt abide all the days of thy life. Tt 1 ? Hiph. And also thy children shall take-shelter in her shadow : and under her branches they shall find refreshment for their soul. And she shall be unto thee and unto them for a shade Past with 1 Convers. v!J in the day time from [the] parching-heat : and for a shelter and for a hiding-place in a day of cold. -iron mp * Past Kal with 1 Convers. f Expressed by affixing H . LETTER LIV. 121 LETTER LIV. After having seen how the Learned and Distinguished Originator of the new Theories manages with the Future Tense and the 1 that converts the Future into a Past, let us now attend for a moment to what he does in the case of the Past Tense when preceded by the T which had ever before been supposed to convert that Tense into a Future. Here, too, we shall find that his practice con- stantly clashes with his theory, and moreover that the very passages which one might expect to be quoted to refute his theory are by him quoted in support of it. Thus, for instance, he remarks,* — " Another leading principle, by which the Tenses are " regulated, has arisen out of the circumstance, that the " Hebrews, in common with some other nations of the " East, often represent events, — of the future occurrence " of which they have no doubt, — as having already taken "place." This is very true as far as regards Prophecy, as we have seen in preceding Letters, namely, that things future are by the Prophet spoken of as though they had already taken place ; and this he has elucidated by a very good example *£. lffl 15 Wj 1^ "6j ^ [Isai. vii. 18] For a Child hath been born to us, a Son hath been given to us, &c. But in the very same article, and in the very next paragraph of that article he tells us, — " Upon the same principle the Preterite Tense is often " used as an Imperative, which may therefore be termed * Page 356. 122 HEBREW GRAMMAR. cmphatical, e.g." He here quotes Deut. vi. 5 — 9, which he thus translates : — "(Mn$1) And thou sHALT(surely) love JEHO VAHthy " GOD with all thy heart, and with all thy soul, and with all " thy might, (DVH ^0 ^X "lEte H^H DniPn yifl)) " And these ivords which I command thee this day shall " be upon thy heart : (Dtt33£H) and thou shalt dili- " gently impress them upon thy children : (FHSTl) and " thou shalt talk of them when thou sittest in thy " house, and when thou walkest by the way, and when " thouliest down, and when thou risest up, (DJTHt^pl) And " thou shalt bind them for a sign on thy hand, (VH1) " and they shall be for frontlets between thy eyes. " (DFQrQI) And thou shalt write them upon the posts "of thy house, and upon thy gates." This translation is admirable, and had Aben Ezra, Kimchi, or Babbi Elijah been called upon to translate this passage into English (supposing them to have been acquainted with the latter language), they would, I have not the least doubt, have given it, so far as the Tenses are concerned, in very nearly the same words. But had any one of these celebrated Rabbins been asked to account for his rendering as Futures these several Past Tenses, his immediate answer would have been both simple and clear, namely this, — that each of these Tenses is Con- verted into a Future by the T that is prefixed to it. Not so the Distinguished Originator of the new theories, whose translation of the passage is before us. With him the *\ goes for nothing : with the exception of its Conjunc- tive sense, it is a mere nonentity, a " little troublesome particle," " the leviathan of the modern Jews." On what ground then, it may fairly be asked of him, does he make all these Past Tenses Futures ] As for his LETTER LIV. 123 saying " upon the same principle " as that just mentioned in the preceding paragraph, I must be allowed, with all deference to his Learning and his Person, to say that this principle is altogether inapplicable, nay inadmissible, here. 'What was that principle, — so far at least as regards Prophecy, and so far only he attempts to prove it? It is this, that the Prophet in his Vision sees Future events as though they were passing before his eyes, and speaks of things to be as though they had already been ; and to this his first example well applies. Isaiah beheld, in Prophetic Vision, the Newborn Saviour, born to take away the sins of man, and at the wondrous view of that Mighty Event he exclaimed in raptured ecstacy, — " [See] a Child hath been born to us, " A Son hath been given to us, • • ■ • • • " The Mighty God, " The Father of Eternity, " The Prince of Peace." Now where, in the passage just quoted from Deuter- onomy, does there appear the least semblance of aught that may bring it into comparison with this magnificent outpouring of Prophetic Spirit ? Moses there is not speaking in Prophecy, there surely he sees no Vision. No, indeed, 'tis the language of Command, of pure Com- mand alone. And who can say that such language has aught in common with the highest strains of Inspired Prophecy'? And it cannot be said that Moses foresaw that all the things here mentioned should surely come to pass, and did not so much command them as speak in sure confidence of their future occurrence; for the history, alas ! of the Israelitish nation forbids at once sucli an 124 HEBREW GRAMMAR. idea. So far from acting in accordance with the sacred precepts here enjoined, we know how grievously they did the contrary from generation to generation. But why does the Learned Author seek out, for the purpose of establishing his theories, such lofty strains of Prophecy, or the highly finished language of such majestic commands 1 Why does he so studiously avoid, as it seems, the ordinary Narrative language, by which alone the ordinary usage of the Tenses can be de- termined ? Why does he not endeavour to ground his assumed principles upon the innumerable instances that occur in the narrative parts of Genesis alone, to which his new theories would have to be applied, if they could indeed be applied at all 1 Perhaps I may be permitted to quote a few of them for him. Thus, — " Chap. iii. 5 ] " For GOD doth know that on the day " of your eating of it ( DJPJPJZ injp^l ) " then your eyes shall be opened, " (OJT^rn) and ye shall be as " gods," &c. [Chap. iv. 14 ] " Behold Thou hast driven me out this " day from the face of the earth ; and from Thy face I shall be hid, OC^O!) an d I shall be a fugitive " and a vagabond in the earth ; (iTPn) " and it shall come to pass, [that] " every one that findeth me shall slay " me." [Chap. xii. 12] M (njJT) And it shall come to pass, " when the Egyptians shall see thee, " ( VipjO) that they shall say, This is u his wife ; (Ul.ni) and they will slay " me, and thee they will save alive." LETTER L1V. 125 [Id. verse 13] "Say, I pray thee, thou [art] my "sister; that it may be well with me " for thy sake, Q&$2 nJTI ^m) and my " soul shall live because of thee." I stop here for fear of tiring your Grace, but I beg to call your attention to the fact that I have not gone beyond the first Twelve Chapters of Genesis, and that I have limited myself to passages in which I can see neither Prophecy, nor Command, nor Emphasis. Had I not purposely omitted all passages that are spoken by GOD, I could have produced avast number more within the same limits ; but to all passages, in which GOD speaks, he would say (for he seems ready to assert any- thing to save his theory) that here the matter is foreseen by The Speaker, and therefore the Past may be used instead of the Future. Such would be for instance — [ Chap. i. 14 ] " (nh*6 WIT) And they shall be (or " and let them be) for signs, and for " seasons," &c. [Id. verse. 15] "(rniKD 1 ? WTT) And they shall be (or " and let them be) for lights in the fir- " mament of the heaven," &c. [Chap. iii. 18] " (H^^l) And thou shalt eat the herb "of the' field." [ Chap. vi. 3 ] " ( VOJ ^?1 ) And his days shall be a " hundred and twenty years." " Id. verse 14 ] " (iTlBDl) And thou shalt pitch it " within and without with pitch." [Id. verse 18]"Cnbpni) And I will establish My " covenant with thee, " (ritfin) and thou shalt come into the " ark." 126 HEBREW GRAMMAR. [Id. verse 21 ] " (fl£D81) And thou shalt gather [it] " unto thee, " (Tijril) and it shall be to thee and to " them for food." [Chap. vii. 4] u pn^/pi) And I will destroy (lit, " wipe away)" &c. [ Chap. viii. 17] "(IVI^I) And they shall swarm, &c., " ( ! 0"il llpl) awd shall 6e fruitful, " and shall multiply upon the earth." [Chap. ix. 13] IC (nnVTl) and it (the how) shall " be for a token." [ Id. verse 14 ] " (iTHI) ^wd ft shall come to pass on " My bringing a cloud over the earth, " (n^j?n nriSt")]']) that the bow shall " be seen in the cloud." [Id. verse 15]"0^1?Jl) And I will remember My " covenant," &c. [Id. verse 16 ] " (T\tjn fttvhX) And the bow shall " be in the cloud, " (CPtf^TO a nd -^ will see it" [Chap. xii. 8] "(13 ^13?5) And in thee shall be " blessed all the families of the earth." Now I have no doubt whatever that every one of these Past Tenses would be rendered in a Future sense by our Learned Grammarian. I say that I have no doubt of this, because it is perfectly impossible for any one to render them otherwise. But then he would do this not on the broad and comprehensive, and at the same time very simple, principle of this being the effect of the 1 which each and every one of them has prefixed, — but on some pretence or other for this one, and on the strength of some assumption or other for that one ; some would LETTER LIV. 127 be said to be " Prophetic " Futures, others " Emphatic " Futures, and so on ; but still, be it observed, each one a Future. But I should very much wish to see the Learned Author produce, if he can, some instances from the narrative part of the Book of Genesis in which Past Tenses, not having a 1 Conversivum prefixed to them, arc used as such Futures. Did it not occur to him as a strange coincidence that whenever a Past Tense is used as such a Future, it always happens to have this °\ before it? Your Grace will have observed that I have not pro- ceeded beyond the first twelve chapters in selecting the above instances, which amount, I should think, to more than a score ; I might even say that they are selected from the first ten chapters only, for the fifth and the tenth, consisting for the most part of names and numbers, have not been touched. Now I say this (and would say it even publicly if required) that if the Learned Origi- nator of the new theories could produce from the Whole Book of Genesis, — yes, from all the Fifty Chapters — as many instances — nay, even half as many — in which a Past Tense without a 1 prefixed to it is used in such a Future sense, I will embrace his theory. 2. It would seem indeed that our Learned Author was fully aware that a Book written in such pure Hebrew, and one in which the laws of the Tenses are so well observed, as that of Genesis, was not the one by which his theories, and especially that particular one of them with which we have now to do, couhl afford to be tested: and this perhaps may account for his referring so seldom to that Book for examples on this head. Scarcely, in fact, does the Book of Genesis appear to have been consulted on the matter, — but of the very 128 HEBREW GRAMMAR. few passages which have been selected by him for this purpose from that Book of The Bible which of all others has the highest claim to authority as regards The Gram- matical structure of The Hebrew Language, it may perhaps be well to quote here one, as a specimen of the success which the theory meets with when applied to this Touch-stone, as it were, of every asserted Principle of Hebrew Grammar. Thus, for instance, let us see what he makes of Gen. xxviii. 20 and 21, where Jacob, after his dream of The Ladder which reached from Earth to Heaven, vowed a vow and said, — (in the unexceptionable words of The English Authorized Translation) — "(DTi^S* nw DK) If GOD will be with me, " ( ^l^^l ) and will keep me " in this way that I go, ( |njl ) " and will give me bread to " eat, and raiment to put on, " ( "THiJtt'l ) so that I come-again to my father's " house in peace ; ( HiiT] JTrjl ) " then shall THE LORD (JE- " HOVAH) be my GOD : "— In the place of this translation he gives * the fol- lowing — "(DV^K n\T. DK) As assuredly as that GOD is " with me ( ^IDttM ) and hath " preserved me in this way in " which I am [now] travelling, " ( |0J1 ) a nd hath [hitherto] " given me bread to eat and " clothing to put on: (7-lJMtfl) " so assuredly shall I return • Page 362. LETTER LIV. 129 " to my father's house in peace: " ( n T in • 'T\H ) and JEHOVAH " small assuredly continue my " GOD.'' I feel that it must appear to your Grace so utterly impossible that any one could have ventured to give publicly such a rendering as this, that my assertion of such being the case must seem almost incredible : I beg, therefore, to assure you that I have the printed book lying open before me from which I have copied, word for word, this rendering which he gives as the true translation of the passage. Jacob, as I need not observe, has just left his father's house; not one night has he passed, probably not one meal has he taken, since he set out; the journey just commenced lies as yet before him ; and yet it seems that our Author imagines him at his journey s end, — at least, if the rendering which he offers has any meaning at all. Alas ! to what extravagancies, to what inconsistencies, does a determination to uphold at all risks untenable theories, lead again and again their unfortunate Authors ! 3. I must confess that the attempt to deny the Conversive power of the 1 which changes the Past Tense into a Future, appears to me more extraordinary, and certainly more inconsistent, than the attempt to deny that of the 1 which converts the Future into a Fast. For in the latter case the Tense being called a Present, the 1 is supposed to have merely a Conjunctive force, and so to let the Tense remain unaltered; <•._<;., 1\"P means, according to the new theory, they are, and so too, JVIEJ means he dies,- — and consequently G( n. VOL. ir. K 130 HEBREW GRAMMAR. v. 1 1 would be translated thus,—" (. . . Bh'jg *Q) *?| ViJ$) so all the daj/s of Enos are a hundred and ninety and five years, (nfojl) so he dies:" — This certainly is rather uncouth language, and not very suitable for The Bible, but still it is at least consistent with the theory. But in the case of the *\ which converts the Past into a Future Tense, all consistency is discarded ; thus, for example, the Past Tense TQttf is acknowledged as a Past Tense, and would be rendered by / have returned, whereas the VfO^I which occurred in the passage quoted just now [Gen. xxviii. 21] is translated by him as a Future, So assuredly shall I return : — And yet the Conversive Power of the 1 is altogether denied. — Would he have us believe that the Past Tense ^fi^UJ , without a 1 preceding it, may be used in Narrative Language in the sense of I shall assuredly return? Before we can assent to his mere assertion on this point, let him first shew us by other examples from Genesis, as was said above, that such an assertion is admissible. 4. I need scarcely say what great pleasure it gave me to learn from your Grace's last communication that you have just gone through the Original of the Book of Ruth: — I am sure that you must have derived equal pleasure and advantage from the perusal of that short but highly interesting Narrative. — Perhaps, then, as you have so lately been reading- this purely Historical Book, I may ask whether some few passages in it did not present themselves to your Grace's notice as serving to shew the utter impossibility of doing without the 1 Conversivum of which we are now treating. For instance, [Ch. ii. 9] when Boaz says to Ruth: — "Thine eyes shall be (or let thine eyes be) on the " field which they shall reap, (i?5/fjl) and thou shalt LETTER L1V. 1 8 I " (jo after them, .... ( DEVI ) and when thou SHALT " be thirsty, (JJQ/iJ]) then tliou shalt (jo unto the " vessels, ( JVW'l ) and thou SHALT drink of that which " the young men shall have drawn." Or again, when he further says [Id., verse 14] "At " the time of the meal draw-near hither, ( 1^0X1 ) and " thou shalt eat of the bread, ( fl?301 ) and thou shalt " dip thy morsel in the vinegar, &c. ..." Now, Is there here any Prophecy? it may well be asked — Is there here any Emphasis ? — Is there here any Certainty to be expressed that the thing said shall surely come to pass ? — And so again, in the Third Chapter, Naomi, directing her daughter-in-law as to the course she must pursue, uses constantly Converted Past Tenses instead of natural Futures, saying : — "(JjWfJTJI) Therefore thou shalt wash [thyself], "(jpppl) and thou shalt anoint [thyself], ( &??&}) " and thou shalt put thy raiment upon thee, (JTTV1) " and thou shalt go down into the floor, &c, &c." More instances might be quoted, but I think that, for so short a Book, the above will be considered sufficient for the purpose. 5. I have many times wearied myself to find a reason, or the shadow even of a reason, that could have led any one into so glaring a mistake, as a denial of the existence of the 1 Conversivum, that changes a Past Tense into a Future, must needs be allowed to be : but the only thing that appears to me to afford a means of guessing at the cause of the error is this : — • First, — All the best Hebrew Grammarians shew that a Past Tense is changed into a Future by the influence of a 1 prefixed to it : — k 2 132 HEBREW GRAMMAR. Secondly, — They shew that every Future Tense may be used in a Frequentative or Habitual sense: — But from these premises they omit to state in express terms the evident conclusion, viz., that, — Consequently every Past Tense converted into a Future by the 1 may also be used in a Frequentative sense : — A conclusion, surely, as evident as that of the follow- ing Syllogism, — All Philosophers are human beings, Every human being is liable to error, Therefore every Philosopher is liable to error. The conclusion indeed appears so plain, that an express statement of it seemed to them quite unne- cessary : — yet, from this conclusion having been over- looked, and from the occurrence of such instances as " ngB^n.l and it used to water all the face of the ground " [Gen. ii. 6], " yfl-l\ and they used to roll away the stone" [Gen. xxix. 3], " V23 W'"?! an ^ ^ s sons USED to go T^jtn and used to make a feast" [Job i. 4], and others like them, (where, from a want of observation that these are Futures used in a Frequentative sense, it may have appeared at first sight difficult to allow to the 1 its Conversive Power), the Originators of the New Theories were, it seems, tempted to question the fact of the 1 having really such a Converting Power, and so by degrees to deny it altogether. It gives me, however, great satisfaction to be able to quote the words of a Hebrew Grammarian, and of a very eminent Hebrew Grammarian too, who, — from his having perhaps foreseen the mischief that might arise from the conclusion (evident from the above- LETTER 1,1 V. 133 mentioned premises) being left to the judgment of the reader, instead of being plainly stated to him, — has himself supplied in his Grammar the term that was wanted to complete the syllogism, by shewing that the Past Tense, when Converted into a Future by the 1 , is sometimes used in a Frequentative sense, exactly as is the case with the Natural Future Tense. I allude to a Manuscript Grammar to be found among the Treasures of The Bodleian Library at Oxford, written in so clear and elegant a style of Hebrew as cannot be surpassed by any one. The Manuscript bears the Title DHi#n "^Q The Onyx Book (lit., book of the Onyx) by R. Moses, the son of R. Isaac, to which is added RTj/ertjaK wide iwx nwv:n p j/mn Who is known as (i.e., who goes by the name of) the son of the English Lady-of-rank. From this most valuable Manuscript I beg to tran- scribe the following passage : — nbnsn n^s kiss r\\r\\ yyvj, dlpaa mVQ rrm en ibp (n£. "b . attvo) pbb D^Qto^n nyrj (&. 5b. rn»t») .D^sasn rrm pi, sm hsv nwa srnt» '•sb vbs -rnsb : natm roe? bon rrn -73 " There occurs also in The Pentateuch a HJil] [some- " times] instead of \*T1 (i.e., where the form YP might " ftawe 6c«w expected); [as] '(HJiJI) arad ft wsed /o be " ' [that] as Moses entered into the Tabernacle ' [Exod. xxxiii. 9] ; w ( D^pJJH iTPIl ) awd the feeble used to be 'Laban's' [Gen. xxx. 42]; every such instance (lit., all of it) [is equivalent] to a Future to him (the Sacred " Writer), because Moses was constantly going in and " out ; and so [in the case of] D^LU'il fTiJI , so it used " to be year after year." i< a 134 HEBREW GRAMMAR. Had this most valuable and elegant Manuscript been published to The World, the Hebrew Language might perhaps have escaped the injury it has suffered from the modern denial of the existence of a 1 Conversivum. P.S. We read in Genesis xxiii. 13, that Abraham said to Ephron rnt^n rjD3 'VFinS t which should be translated / should have given \thce~] the money for the field, as Mendelssohn has it in his trans- lation, — " So hatte ich das Silber fur das Feld gegeben ; " the connexion being " Would that tliou hadst hearkened to me, I should [by this time] have given thee the money, &c. ; " so that \Firo } in this instance, by no means stands for a Future, but as a Conditional Past. So Jarchi observes on this passage — "WD "]i VJ?W 'f>lip1 '5if> fr? pw " It {the money') is ready with me, and ivould that I had already given it thee" EXERCISE LXIX. TO BE TRANSLATED INTO HEBREW. GOD Most High, dwelling [above] the Cherubim, hath created all-things (Hebr., the whole) out of nothing : and everything that was formed He formed out of nonentity. Righteous is JEHOVAH, exalted, and exceedingly awful : There is no Rock like Him, and beside-Him there is no God that-can-help tt : • or save (Ilebr., helping or saving). And He [is] ruling over the work of His Hand (Hebr., palms LETTER LIV. 135 \_of the /iati ...b "Who can declare (Heb., speak) His Might : and the whole of V?E Pi. His Praise who can proclaim ? Do not all the generations continually-fear Him ? but [as for] Fut. Affix. his enemies, dust shall they lick, and like dung on the face 2 1 of the field shall they be ; which of them shall stand ? Not one ! "Who can declare the might of His Power, and His "Wondrous C2V rrroa [works J which He hath done from generation [to] generation ? to Him silence only [is] praise. "FN How great-are His Works, and how numerous-are His Wondrous Past. Past. [things] that He hath wrought and done. To them there is nothing to add, and from them there is nothing to bSw.aff. (m.) take [away] : for to Him Wisdom [is] for a Line, and Intelligence Definite, for a Plummet ; and His Mysteries who shall understand ? nbpwn rnaVsn But the son of man, What is he ? Short of days, and full of 136 HEBREW GRAMMAR. trouble : his end [is that he come] to the dust, and as a potsherd that Bn ann ...n [is] broken so will he be. Partic. Niph. Lo, like a drop from a bucket, and like the dust of a balance : so are the number of Lis years before GOD [who] liveth for ever, and "Whose years will not come-to-an-end. con Niph. Lo, The Heavens are His Throne : and the earth His foot stool (Heb., stool of His feet). Lo, the host, of The Height are like nothing before Him : even TO with aff. [the] Sun and [the] Moon tremble at His Word ; at His Command by (Hebr.j Month) they rest, and at His Command they move. mn Fut. (as before.) »D3 Fut * * Lengthened by Pause. LETTER LY. I 37 LETTER LV. I feel that I should not do justice to the cause E am endeavouring to defend, — the cause, namely of the T Concersict/m, — were I to omit stating to your Grace that in a concise Hebrew Grammar lately published by an eminent Linguist and a highly-distinguished Hebrew Scholar, we read * the following Article : — " If a clause of any sentence is the consequence of " a previous clause, the verb in the second clause " may be expressed by the apocopated present, a 1 " being placed between the two clauses. This 1 may " generally be translated by so, and the Hebrew present " may be translated by a past tense; that is, the " Hebrew idiom requires the present tense, though the " English idiom prefers the pasty The Grammar alluded to forms one volume with a Hebrew Lexicon, from the pen of the same Learned Author, arranged on an altogether new plan, in which is displayed not merely a profound knowledge of The Language, but also great ingenuity and originality of thought. I hope and trust that the World may be favoured with more, many more, useful Works from this Distinguished Author, but I am sure that he will never be able to surpass himself by shewing a greater amount of tact and ingenuity than is displayed in the Article just quoted from him. By reducing the point at issue to a mere matter of Idiom he has apparently set the Controversy at rest : he has, in fact, yielded the point to The Old School, * Page 80. 138 HEBBEW GRAMMAR. without offending The New School in which he was trained. I should, however, very much wish to ask him most respectfully, — Whether it is merely the English Idiom that requires in such a case the Past Tense'? — Let us use an illustration: — for instance, T18 \T1 [Gen. i. 3], an instance to which, as it seems to me, the Article quoted exactly applies : I would beg to ask here whether it is only in the English Language that a Past Tense would be required for this passage, the English rendering of which is admitted by the Article in question to be, " So there was light ? ' Would not a Past Tense be also required for ^TV\ in a correct French rendering 1 — Would not a Past Tense be required also in German ? — Would it not be required in Italian? — In Latin 1 ? — In short, in all the many lan- guages, Ancient and Modern, without exception, with which I know the Learned Author to be familiar'? — If this be so, then, what makes the Tense \T (no matter whether it be Present or Future) what makes it, I say, a Past in the passage adduced ? Is there anything else to make it so, than the 1 prefixed to it? And is not then that 1 termed properly 1 Conver- sivum ? — Next to this I might, perhaps, be allowed to ask the Distinguished Author, Why he limits his remark (as expressed in the Article produced from his Grammar) to a Consequent or Secondary Clause, and to Apocopated Presents (as they are termed) ? How would matters stand in the case of a Future (or a Present, if that term be preferred), not in a Secondary Clause, and not Apocopated, but with this same 1 prefixed to it ? For instance, how would the Learned Author translate nbjl T\U) V2] hi Vm [Gen. v. 8] 1 Could LETTER LV. 1.19 it be rendered in English otherwise than: — And all the days of Sheth were [nine hundred and twelve years], and he died ? Could it be translated otherwise than thus in any other language? 2. Your Grace appears to feel some hesitation with regard to the proper rendering of the passage : — rrjDt" niiT arjjjj ")#H ng \3 [Proy. iii. 12] given in one of the Exercises. Now, it appears to me that, if we take the Verbs as Futures, and consider them to be used here in their Frequentative sense, the passage is very clearly and truly rendered by : — " For whomsoever JEHOVAH shall love, He will continually- cliasten ; " i.e., As long as He shall in His Mercy love one of His fallen creatures, so long will He constant!)/ chasten and correct him, in order to bring him back into the AY ay of Life from which, by reason of his depraved and fallen nature, he is continually straying : but a man who by " his hardness and impenitent heart " has provoked The Almighty to withdraw His Grace and His Warning Spirit from him, is either cut off in the midst of his days, or is left to follow the unchecked dictates of his own corrupted will, which only tend to sink him deeper, and still deeper, in perdition. This passage forms the first hemistich of the verse, of which the second is, — . . 1 .. v T . " Even as a father [dotii chasten] a son [in whom] he alway-delighteth," alway-delighteth : — whose motive principle, that is, is always, always, Love, although to the son the chastise- ment requisite for his correction may, and must, " for the present appear not joyous, but grievous." Ml) HEBREW GRAMMAR. This, in fact, is but an instance of a strict and legiti- mate, and at the same time very important, function of the Hebrew Future Tense, — and one very common in the higher Books of The Bible, — which is, to express Frequent, Continued, Habitual Action ; and care should always be taken to distinguish between the Future thus used, and the simple Present Tense, which in Hebrew is expressed by the Present Participle ; as, for instance, — [Deut. v. 1] " Hear, O Israel, the statutes and judgments " which (121 "OJX) I speak (lit, / am " speaking) in your ears this day ; ' : where no Frequency or Continuance is intended, but in — [Prov. xviii. 23] " (foh ")3T D^nfi) A poor [man] " speaketh- alw ay (or is alway speak- " ing) supplications, but a rich [man] " ( 'T^. ) answer eth- aim ays (or is ever- " answering) harsh-things," each Verb expresses Continuance, and Habitual occur- rence ; and so again — [Prov. xxiv. 24] " (")EK ) [As for] one saying to a wicked " man, Thou art righteous, him will " people curse, nations will abhor him," where there is no Frequency ; but in — [Prov. xx. 14] "It is bad, it is bad (fljipH 1DW) " is-woxT-TO-say the buyer" Habit and Continuance are implied; as, too, is seen to be the case in — " Isai. i. 11 ] "To what purpose [is] the multi- " tude of your sacrifices unto Me? « (nirr : id* ) saith jehovah,"— i.e., saith continually JEHOVAH, while ye are con- tinually offering such multitudes of sacrifices. LETTER LV. Ill [ Isai. xl. 3 ] " ( *Op bip ) A Voice crieth (or is " crying)" [Prov. xviii. 6J " The lips of a fool (1ST) are co " TimtJALijY-entering into contention, " and his month (Nlpl) is-EVER-calling " for blows ; ' [ Prov. viii. 1] " Is not Wisdom (Nlptt) continually- " crying Y and is [not] Understanding " ( \r\T\ ) coNSTA.NTLY-KWm»^f her " voice? " 3. But again, the Future Tense is used to express not merely Frequency or Continuance of Present Action, by which it is distinguished from the simple Present Tense expressed by the Present Participle, — it is further used to express Frequent, Continued, or Habitual Action in times Past, and must be distinguished in such cases from the simple Past Tense; thus, e.g. t [ Gen. vi. 22 ] " According to all that GOD com- " manded him, so ( Hfc^) he did," [Judg. xvii. 6] " Each man ( Hk'.P) used to do that " which was right in his own " eyes : — |~ Gen. xliii. 2 ] " The corn which (W30) they " brought from Egypt," [Exod. xviii. 26] " The hard cause ( \W2)) they used " to bring to Moses, and every small "matter ( 1B12I^> — for MD^.) they " used to judge themselves:" — 142 HEBREW GRAMMAR. [Numb. xxi. 12] "From thence (tyCO) they jour- " neyed" &c., Id., ix. 20 " At the command of Jehovah " ( tyD) ) they used to journey : " — [Gen.xxxii. 11] " With my staff ( W?j^ ) I passed " over this Jordan," Ps. xlii. 5 " These [things] I have-constantly- " in-remembrance, and pour-out- " continually my soul within me, "[namely] how ("13^) I used-£0- " pass-along with the multitude, " &c. ; " On this last passage Bfil well remarks : — Wfo !>3P ,'JJTSU M» nii?D1 ")3I> Pipr>3 7'PP PIP P'DIPPP PD75 ,ppfi pi?p h? li'pfi inb> wo >d ,i)jvbb >Di2v p m d")PP c pp? i3)v w? op ")Pib , wpi tm?}3 3viip di>p pip imb ppd 53f> .(l?Wl?ipP "|'P) PPIP P^PpJ P7PVP WD D» »MBf» ]io53i , PPP *)p6 " According to the opinion of the interpreters, it (viz., " Ti3jt$ ) is a Future instead of the Past, and its " meaning the same as ^fVQji/ (I have passed along) ; " but in truth there is a vast difference between TnDj/ " and "li^X , for "tf^niljtf might be said even of one- " single time, but the meaning of ~li3#N is somewhat " compounded of the Past and the Present, as if to say " — ' I was passing-along time after time,' — and in the " German language there is a word appropriated to this " Compound [Tense] ich pflegte (I used)." 4. It will indeed generally be found, with a little attention, that, whenever a Future Tense is used apparently requiring to be translated by a Present, a far richer and deeper meaning will result from apply- LETTER LV. 143 ing to that Tense its import of Frequency, Continuance, and Jfahifual Actio// : and of this your Grace may rest assured, that, — by a careful attention to the several shades of sense which the Future Tense is used to express, and by bearing- in mind likewise that the Auxiliary Verbs may, might, could, must, &c, are not expressed in Hebrew, but must be supplied as the Context requires, — the Language of The Hebrew Bible will, in general, be easily understood, without recourse being had to any new Theories, that would entirely sweep away every trace of the principles by which The Sacred Volume has, for ages and ages, been interpreted. But should there, in a few instances, occur a Future Tense altogether even at variance with these principles, — yet, surely, it would be on all hands admitted as most unreasonable, in consequence of those few in- stances, to deny the existence of any Future Tense at all. As well might the existence of a Past Tense be denied, for certainly we find numerous Past Tenses standing very awkwardly ; as, for example, [Isai. lv. 9] " For [as] (D^ TOJ) the heavens are " (lit., were) higher than the earth, so " (^T! !,n ?l) AKE ptt-j were) My wa y s " higher than your ways," &c. ; — [Ps. xcii. G] " (V?7J HD ) How great are (lit., were) Thy « Works, O JEHOVAH, (ippj? 1SQ) " [houi] exceedingly deep are (lit., were) Thy " Thoughts \ "— * [Ps. xlii. 3] " p#5>3 niJPV) My soul is (lit., was) athirst " for God, "even for The Living GOD ; "— and many others might be quoted. It may indeed be said that the Past Tense is used here to express 144: HEBREW GRAMMAR. has been and still is, or have been and still are; but this does not remove the difficulty, for in Hebrew this is not an acknowledged use of the Past Tense, and to those who, from their not knowing Greek, are not familiar with this usage, it must appear a striking anomaly. Nay, the existence of Genders in Hebrew might more reasonably be denied than that of the Future Tense, if the occurrence of anomalies might be allowed to furnish grounds for such a denial; for, even in the Books of purest Hebrew, instances of anomalous Gender occur. Thus,— [Exod. ii. 17] " And the shepherds came ( DlfcH^l ) and " drove them (m.) away" where I'll&'IJ?] would have been the correct form, as the daughters of the priest of Midian are referred to ; and so again the extraordinary anomaly, — [Numb. xi. 15] " n ; m Thou art doing" where HttK would be the proper form, since Moses in these words addresses God, and uses too the Masculine Participle T\'tV to agree with the Pronoun ; — [Cantic. vi. 9] " [The] daughters saw her (nntWl) " and they (m.) blessed her ; [yea] the " queens, (O^'^H) an d ^ ie V " (m.) praised her," where we have Feminine Nouns with Masculine Verbs, the correct forms being nTI^Kfi] and HT^lM?!; — Let us see how many anomalies of this kind we have in the very first chapter of the Book of Ruth : — [ Verse 8 ] " May GOD deal kindly (DDBJ?) with you "(»?..), according-as (D£P{PJg) ye (m.) have " dealt with the dead and with me ; " LETTER I.V. 115 [ Verse 9 ] " May JEHOVAH grant (DjS) to you (m.) 11 that ye may find," &c. ; where Naomi is addressing her daughters-in-law ; and so too — [Verse 11] " That they should be (D^) to you (m.) for " husbands ; " [Verse 13] " (ID^fJ) Whether for them (/.)," speaking of (D^3) sons, " would ye wait? " " (10!?L?) Whether for them (/.) would ye " stay ; " " Nay, my daughters, for I am exceedingly " grieved (D^D)for you (m.) ; " [Verse 2.2] " (HSHI) And they (m.)," i.e., Naomi and Ruth, " came to Bethlehem," &c. Now will any one on this account venture to say that there are no Genders in Hebrew 1 5. But independently of the manifest absurdity of the denial, and the utter impossibility of showing any ground for the denial, of the existence of a Future Tense. in Hebrew, — and especially of that function which it performs of representing Frequent, Continued, and Habitual Action, — that fundamental error is also of the most serious importance in a doctrinal point of view, as it strikes formally at one of the most essential principles of The Old Testament Revelation, namely, the Never- ending Eternity of GOD — as expressed in that Compre- hensive, though Ineomprelieusible, Name by which JEHOVAH was pleased to reveal Himself to man. When Moses asked what Name he must attribute to HIM Who had commissioned him, if the Israelites should demand of him, " What is His Name ? ' The Almighty declared Himself to be, VOL. II. L 14G HEBREW GRAMMAR. " I EVER SHALL BE THAT I ALWAYS AM,"— The Self -existent Being, * Unchangeable to Eternity; — and commanded, " Thus shalt thou say unto the children of Israel — iTn$ I EVER AM — hath sent me unto you" i.e., He Who alone can say, "I EVER AM," He it is Who hath sent me unto you. It need not be here said that the sense of Continuance is a main feature in the true import of these expressive words ; and this same sense will be seen to give a three- fold vigour to the words of our Saviour (which the unbelieving Jews of that time so well understood as an assertion of this Name Divine), " Before Abraham was, " I EVER AM." But perhaps the extent of the mischief caused by denying the existence of the Hebrew Future will appear in a stronger light from the consideration of the manner in which that denial will affect The All Sacred NAME niPP JEHO VAH Itself. This word, as I need scarcely remark, is compounded of the three words, rpfl He was, nin One that is, n\T He will be — and, as within itself involving the Self-existence of HIM THAT IS, The o aw, — and, besides this, comprehending likewise all ideas of Time, Past, Present, and Future, — This Name, of Length, and Breadth, and Depth, im- measurable, may well commend itself to our feeble minds, scarcely capable of rising to the contemplation of Its Fathomless Meaning, — may well commend Itself, as The Worthy NAME of That Almighty and All Glorious Author of our being, « Who WAS, and IS, and IS TO COME,"— * Malachi iii. 6. LETTER LV. 1 17 as That Sacred Name is itself explained to us by Authority no other than Divine [Rev. i. 8]. But, if there be no Future Tense in Hebrew, the Tense that has ever been considered such, being instead a Present, — i.e., if PINT no longer mean HE will be, but HE is, — Then what, alas ! will be the result, but that the idea of Eternity of Future Being will be lopped away from this Most Sacred of Names, — and That Name Itself But I forbear ; I feel that all language must be too weak to treat such a subject as it deserves ; I grieve to feel that no language can be strong enough to denounce with becoming earnestness so fearful a result. For the Learned Author, who by his theories has caused this, I have too high a respect, to imagine for one instant, that he could have refected on what would be the effect of the new doctrines which lie asserted ; but I also cannot help feeling that all considerations of personal respect must give way, when duty of so urgent, so peremptory a nature, as that of exposing such doc- trines, calls for the sacrifice. r- * * * It has always appeared to me very extraordinary that not one word is said by this Learned Author on that most important function of the Future Tense, namely, its representing Frequent, Continued, and Habitual Action : we have seen that this function is assigned to that Tense by such men as Jarchi, Aben Ezra, Kimchi, Ben Zev, &c. ; and the question therefore arises, — Has the Learned Author read the writings of those men, or has he not? If he has not, it must to every one seem very strange that he should attempt to prescribe new laws for the regu- L 2 148 HEBREW GRAMMAR. lation of the Tenses, without being aware of the old established laws. But if, on the other hand, he has read the words of those men, and has found to be faulty the laws which they with one consent have given, then why, we may well ask, did he not quote and refute them % But enough. The subject, on which it has been my painful duty to dwell at so great length in my last few Letters, has, I hope, been handled faithfully, and treated of perspicuously ; I trust sufficiently so to make it evident to your Grace that no warmth of expression could be too warm for use in so important a cause as that which I felt it incumbent upon me to vindicate. I only fear that an apology is almost due from me on account of the extent to which I have, in dealing with this matter, trespassed on your Grace's valuable time ; though, perhaps, I ought even still more to apologise for my having taken the liberty of introducing at all such a discussion into the series of Letters which, by your Grace's kind permission, I have had the high honour of addressing to you. Permit me, my Lady Duchess, to say that my only object in bringing before your notice (whether in this last matter, or in other parts of my instruction) those Authors of high note, with whom I am compelled to differ, has ever been to furnish your Grace with some few of the weighty objections to their disputed statements, should their Works happen to fall into your hands ; but never has it been my intention, nor even my ivish, to lower or depreciate the high repute, the distinguished celebrity, which they enjoy. The name indeed has never once been mentioned of any one of those Distinguished Persons whose opinions I have felt myself called upon to combat, which is in itself, I hope, LETTER LV. 149 sufficient proof that it is from no ill feeling, nor from any- thing the least approaching to such, that I have spoken at times in such strong terms of what appeared to me to call for such treatment ; and as for the subject which I am now about to close, — the new theories, namely, that have in our day been advanced with regard to the Laws that regulate the Tenses — I am sure that your Grace will feel that if a subject of such vital importance was to be touched upon at all, it could not be dealt with slightly ; evil enough has been done in our day by the endeavour to explain The Language of The Hebrew Bible, and to regulate its Laws, not from its own pure self, but from the Arabic, the Persian, the Coptic, and many other lan- guages, and by some even from a reference to Hiero- glyphics — but all that has been done by any other means or endeavours whatever vanishes in comparison with the mighty evil consequences of The new Theories upon the Tenses: by other inventions, passages of The Bible have been often rendered in Translations (so called) for which a truer name would perhaps be Tra- vesties of That Sacred Book ; but by this last, and most serious error, the axe is aimed (if I may say so) at the very root of the tree, The Language of The Hebrew Bible is sapped to its very foundations. I have yet, however, to make another apology — it is for having introduced so much Rabbinic, with the style and nature of which I must know that your Grace is not yet familiar. This — the nature of the subject sometimes com- pelled me to do, either in order to show my authority, or to show the misapprehension on the part of others. But my mam object in doing so has rather been to show who and what manner of men those are who have written on Hebrew Grammar, and also what a hardihood those must have who will venture to dispute the opinions on that 150 HEBREW GRAMMAR. subject of men who have written Hebrew in so MASTERLY A STYLE. EXERCISE LXX. (TO BE TRANSLATED INTO HEBREW.) Good [are] the works of JEHOVAH, and right to the intelligent [man] : generation to generation shall declare His wondrous-doings. 2 1 His Righteousness, and His Might shall His saints declare and i recount : they shall not be faint, and shall not be weary, for in His praise shall they glory themselves. Those fearing (Hebr., the fearers of) JEHOVAH shall praise Him together: for exalted is His Name, His glory is Affix 22» Partic. Niph. Tin above earth and heaven. For The Wisdom of JEHOVAH [is] exceedingly great, and to ^TJ Past the Might of His Power there is no searching : there is no thing concealed from before His eyes. His eyes are watching over those fearing Him : and He will surely (/) n P 2 * give to [every] man according-to his ways, and according to the fruit of his actions. For [there is] a balance to JEHOVAH, and scales of justice (Hebr., judgment) : all His Works are righteous together, and all Past * Past Partic. Kal. LETTER LV. 151 His judgments arc [from] the beginning, from the former-ages of [the] world. He hath created man from [the] beginning : and hath given him Expr. Def. liberty (Ileb., hath left him) to guide himself in the counsels n^ * bna nuhp.\ of his [own] heart, and according-to-the-pleasure-of his [own] soul. 2 1 [Yea] life and death have been placed before every man (Ileb-, Def. Def. man and man) : that which he delighteth in let him choose for him- [self]. 1 2 1 A burning fire and living waters, even both of them hath GOD set before him : therefore thou son of man, stretch-forth thy hand, and ... i ribw lay-hold of which- [ever] thy soul may please. Say not in thy heart, saying, " In a place of concealment, there " shall I be concealed, and there shall I be hidden from before GOD. -ino Nan " For who will mention my name before Him, and who will visit "me (Hebr., upon me) from His High Dwelling (Hebr., from the " height of His dwelling) ? " Are not His Hosts numerous ? yea to the works of His hand there ...1 "is no number : and what [then] is a worm like me, that He should " mind him, and that He should put His eye upon him ? " — * Hiph. with ail'. =in . -f- No Compensation for Dagcsh. \ Construed with 2 . 152 HEBREW GRAMMAR. For before GOD are tlie ways of frail-man : and the deeds of a man are not concealed from Him. Z\>V Past For behold [the] heavens, and the heaven of heavens, the earth and Def. (/.) the fulness thereof, the abyss, and the depths of [the] sea, will be shaken and will tremble from before GOD : on His rising [up] for sna tn the purpose of judging the earth. The lofty mountains and the elevated hills, the uttermost-limits of K) (/) DD « [the] earth, and the foundations of the habitable-world, shall tremble b=n Tin and shall-be-astounded at His rebuke in the day of the fierceness nan Kai. m»a of His Anger. Who can understand the ways of GOD : and who can come to the Perfection of [The] Almighty ? An eye of flesh cannot see His Way, and a heart of flesh cannot understand His Works : for they are hid from every n^V FsiStNiph. living [thing], and a thing-that-is-hid who can bring-forth to light ? n»brn N5P Hiph. Who shall declare (Hebr., utter) His Righteousness, and who shall V?» Pi. proclaim all His Praise ? for His Covenant is from everlasting, and 9Bt» Hiph. from the days of old : and His Judgment He will bring-forth into light at the latter-end of days. nnns p e f. LETTER LVI. 153 LETTER LVI. The Hebrew Language has been seen (Letter xliii. § 1) to have the privilege of expressing Objective Pronouns by means of letters affixed to the Governing Verb. In a few instances, we find an Objective Affix plconasticaUg given to the Verb, before the Objective Case to which that Affix refers ; as iSjil HK inKlttl [Exod. ii. 6] And she saw him, the child ; HilT HDHH DK H^T [Exod. xxxv. 5] He shall bring it (/.), [the] offering of JEHO VAH. 2. On the other hand, where no ambiguity can arise, the Objective Pronoun is sometimes altogether dispensed with; as [Gen. ii. 19] "And JEHOVAH GOD formed " from the ground every beast of the field, and every "fowl of the heaven ; (N3*]) and brought [them] unto the " man to see what he would call them," where NITT stands for DniK NTT; [Judg. vi. 19] "The flesh lie " put in the basket, and the broth he put in the pot, " (S^V]) and he brought [them"] forth unto him," where NVi*! occurs instead of CniK K^i"] . 3. In some few instances an Objective Affix occurs, where plainly a Pronoun governed by a Preposition ought legitimately to have been used; as [Gen. iii. 17] " Cursed is the earth for thy sake ; in sorrow (Hifcsn) " lit., shalt thou cat it," for (fi|8D [K£ "1#§ fltfffetffl) thou shalt eat [that which shall come forth] from it; [Gen. xxxvii. 4] " And they were not able (i")"3"l) lit., " to speak him" for (inN 12^1) to speak with him. 154 HEBREW GRAMMAR. 4. On the Particles (or, as I prefer to call them, the Impersonal Verbs) W* and pK , mentioned in a pre- ceding Letter [xliv. § 2], I beg to offer the following few remarks : — Sometimes &\1 $b and f^.1 P$ are used where pK by itself would seem to be quite sufficient; as n\piD WTO &l tih [Job ix. 33] There is not between us an arbitrator ; DiT9| DTI tf± p$ [Ps. cxxxv. 17] There is no breath in their mouth. With prefixes, P# forms the following phrases : — VH/Tin ni^hri pK3 [Prov. viii. 24] When there were no deaths I was produced ; Dj; %) nl^anri pX? [Prov. xi. 14] Where there are no counsels [the] people will fall ; "ISDZp pfrw [1 Chron. xxii. 4] Without num- ber ; 2U/V pNft [Isai. v. 9] Without [ox from there being no) inhabitant ; DipO ptfE [Jer. vii. 32] For want of a place. 5. pN , in pause pK (though strictly a Noun signify- ing nothing), is sometimes used in the same sense as pS , but then it follows the Noun, instead of preceding it as |\S most frequently does; thus nim 122b pot pm naian pai. naan ps rprov. xxi. 30] There is no wisdom, nor understanding, nor counsel, in opposition to JEHO VATI, where ptf is seen to precede the Nouns to which it refers ; but in |H$ C£ ; -?.1 HIT] W?'m [Prov. xxv. 14] Clouds and wind when there is no rain ; LETTER LVI. 155 }?K-2J1 [Prov. xvii. 16] Seeing that there is no heart, i.e., no understand- ing ; rr\r\wh |\Nt D?D1 [Numb. xx. 5] And there is no water to drink ; it is seen that j^K follows the Nouns to which it refers. We find several instances, however, in which ptf too follows its Noun ; as — JH«rj ^3 p(J DH^I [Gen. xlvii. 13] And there was no bread in all the land ; Tp T3 |^ 3"l.ni [1 Sam. xvii. 50] And there was no sword in the hand of David ; n|"|^ P8 ^)0 [Prov. xxx. 27] There is no king to the locust. Instances such as these latter, while they serve to strengthen the supposition of pX being a kind of Impersonal Verb (Letter xliv. § 2), serve also to point out the manifest absurdity of supposing with some modern Lexicographers that |\^t is the Constructive State of the Noun ]?tf , for how could a Construct Noun by any possibility follow the Noun with which it is in Con- struction ? 6. The distinction between pst and N7 is clear enough, for while |^tf (signifying there is no, and sometimes merely no) is connected with Nouns and Participles, ^ (signifying simply not) can only be connected with Verbs, or stand by itself. We find, however, ptf also standing by itself instead of X 7 ; as — 7J-15PP NJ \3nZ5 |\s D^l [Exod. xxxii. 32] And if not, blot me, Ijwaj/, out of Thj/ book. 7. The Substantive Verb ITn to be, when construed 156 HEBREW GRAMMAR. with *7 , signifies the having, ox possessing anything, and the belonging of anything to a person ; as — lpy\ |*& 1*? V)1 [Gen. xii - 16 ] And he had sheep and oxen ; TliD ]3 tifr^h *iyyi ^5 [Deut. xxi. 18] When a man shall have a rebellious son ; CnnS DVf?K ^t? n\T fcA [Exod. xx. 3] Thou shalt not have [any] other gods, &c. ; jnS 1 ? D^^tjn \VTV\ [Gen. xxx. 42] So the feeble always-were Labans, i.e., belonged to Laban ; mitih Wnn iT^l ntixn [Exod. xxi. 41 The woman, and her children [tvith her'], shall be (i.e., belong) to her master. 8. Very frequently, however, the Substantive Verb is altogether omitted, and then the having, or possessing, or the belonging to is expressed by the 7 merely ; as — ]Tfa3 *>£)# ] $7^ [Gen. xxix. 16] And Laban had two daughters ; rPH.VP nn^t^ PlVl. [Gen. xvi. 1] And she had an Egyptian handmaid ; fTJflBhn Hi IT 1 ? [Ps. iii. 9] Salvation belongeth to T JEHOVAH; Tffy rf? *W D ^ I*? [ Ps - lxxiv - 16 ] r ° r ^ e °elongeth [the] day, also to Thee belongeth [the] night, i.e., [The] day is Thine, and [the] night is Thine. 9. In instances where the Substantive Verb is omitted, the Negative Particle $h may have to stand before any Part of Speech ; as — 1. LITER LVI. 157 niOT "?8 BhU tf^ [Numb, xxiii. 19] GOD [&] wo/ a >// a a th a t IL sh u Id lie ; *}2H Rvjj ]2 tih) ^2$ »^5) N^ [Amosvii. 14] I [was] not a Prophet, neither [was] I a Prophet's son ; 13 DIN* & 121D &$ & pK hy_ Tippn) [Job wwiii. 26] 2o cause [if] to rain upon [the'] earth [where] no man [is] : upon [the] wilderness wherein [there is] no man ; 13 nrhyi tih] niif [Ps. xcii. 16] [fli? &] my Pock, and [there is] no unrighteousness in Him ; HJ/E'f n rn1C0 Ki*7 [1 Sam. ii. 24] 7%e report [«] not good ; i 1 ? »3fr ^ WiT) [Deut. iv. 42] 4wd Ae [iwm] wof aw enemy to him ; CH 1 ? 8*7 JHK3 [Gen. xv. 13] In a land [that is] not theirs ; D\D tih ini MO*] [1 Chron. ii. 32] And Jcther died without children ; where either S7 stands for N73 , or the full phrase would be D\J3 [^ PiJ] rf?l . 10. But besides the signification that was mentioned above (§ 7) of the Verb PPJJ when construed with ^ , it sometimes signifies also, the becoming, the turning, or being changed, of one thing into another ; as — D'aSs'? ft) vn ft3 lin rrjn b% [Lament, i. 2] All her friends have dealt treacherously with her, they hare become her enemies ; U¥2 Mfl] [Gen. xix. 26] And she became (or was changed into) a pillar of salt. D*T ! )M. V ] [Exod. vii. 19] And they (the waters) shall become (or be changed into) blood ; 11. It has been seen (Letter xlv. § 2) that Nouns are sometimes used Adverbially ; we may take as additional examples, — D\^2 T}£n [Lament, i. 9] Therefore she {Jeru- salem) came down wonderfully ; -)&op D">E>;/ E0£^n vj [Ps. lxvii. 5] For Thou shalt judge the people righteously ; DV)£*£3 "}-MJT [Prov. xxiii. 31] [When] itmoveth- itself ARIGHT. 12. The Preposition pS between, when used with Affixes, is always repeated with the Affix expressing the second thing, or person, referred to; as [Gen.ix. 15] " And I will remember My covenant which is (D.p\P51 " 1 2"5) between Me and between you (m.)," (i.e., between Me and you ; [Ruth i. 17] " Death only shall cause separation (^rin ^3) between me and between thee (/.)," (i.e., between me and thee). When |\3 is used with Nouns Defined, either by being Proper Names, or by having the Definite Article or Pronominal Affixes, or by being in Construction with other words, then too the ]"3 is (with very few excep- tions) given before each of the Nouns to which it refers ; as [Exod. xi. 7] " JEHOVAH shall separate (?$!$*. T?" 1 EHVP P3) between Egypt and between Israel (i.e., between Egypt and Israel) ; [Gen. i. 4] LETTER LV1. I "J9 "And GOD made separation H^TH pni Titfn pjj) between the light and between the darkness " {i.e., between the light and the darkness') ; [Gen. iii. 15] " And enmity will I put (PJJtnt P31 tjaHT p31 ntisn pzn ^3) tafweera thee (in.) and between the woman, and between tlnj (in.) seed and between her seed," (i.e., between thee and the woman, and between thy seed and her seed ;) [2 Sam. iii. 6] " And it came to pass while the war was flYl JV3 pZTI VlNtf JV3 p3) between [the] house of Saul and between [the] house of David " (i.e., between the house of Saul and the house of David). When the Nouns to which the p3 refers are not defined, the prefix 7 is generally given to the second Noun instead of another p3 ; as [Gen. i. 6] " Let it be making separation (D?E? D^D P5) between waters and waters (lit., to waters, the Kawmets beneath the 7 being merely Euphonic) ; [Dcut. xvii. 8] " If there shall be a matter too hard for thee in judgment (V2jb J/JJ P31 H 1 ? PI P3 D-T 1 ? CI p3) ^/ttw// /,/oorf ^W blood, between plea and plea, and between stroke and stroke " (lit., between blood to blood, between plea to plea, and between stroke to stroke), the Kawmets beneath the 7 in V^p y being also merely Euphonic. 13. The Preposition \?57 before, when connected with a Verb can only (in general) have an Infinitive Mood after it ; as — ftp) nn^ ^ph [Gen. xiii. 10] before JEHOVAH'S destroying, Szc. ; *7m& *tt ^ [1 Sam. ix. 15] Before [the] coming of Saul. On the other hand the word D"|.y before, when used 160 HEBREW GRAMMAR. with a Verb, must have a Tense of that Verb after it; as — rZpJT DHlD [Exod. xii. 34] Before it could leaven ; 1S"ip: D"}§ [Isai. lxv. 24] Before they («i.) shall call. 14. The Verb 2V\u [Letter xlv. § 6], when immediately preceded by another Verb, gives the following phrases : — 2W] KiVJ KV?3 [Gen. viii. 7] And it {the raven) went- forth TO AND FRO J 3t£^ "^H TJTl [1 Sam. xvii. 15] And David went BACKWARDS AND FORWARDS, (lit., [was] going and returning) ; 31^1 Ki¥H HVnrn [Ezek. i. 14] And the living-creatures [were] running to and fro. The Verb T?n (Letter lb.), when immediately pre- ceded by a Tense of "[V 1 , is used to express going-on- continually ; as — ^lA T^O "^fa T^en. xxvi. 13] And he went on continually increasing ; 3"lpl "i^O "^fc- L 2 ^am. x ™' ^ 5 ] ^ n ^ ^ ie WENT 0N continually drawing-nearer ; **32TO 1^0 "^ife [1 Sam. xix. 23] And he went on continually prophesying. 15. The Verbs ^ to go, and 3iT to give, are some- times used in their Imperative Mood as Interjec- tions ; as — nr\£U/2 rOD3S$ K2 n? 1 ? [Eccles. ii. 1] Come now, I will prove thee with mirth ; LETTER LVI. 161 Hjrrt n^l2 ID 1 ? [Pg. xcv. 1] Come, fed ?/.y «« to JEHOVAH; Tj/ 1^ HJ33 H3H [Gen. xi. 4] Go to, let us build for us a city ; ■Tin} niin [Id. ver. 7] Go to, let us go down ; in which two latter instances H2H , being used precisely as an Interjection, is seen to have the Singular form, though the Verbs connected with it are in the Plural: — but when it is used naturally as a Verb, it of course must agree with the subject referred to ; as — nnaip^H ^3n [Ruth iii. 15] Give thou {/.) the veil; H$y Si) Un [2 Sam. xvi. 20] Give ye counsel for you, i.e., give ye each one his advice. 16. In a former Letter (xlviii. § 10, &c), I dwelt at some length upon the Ellipses that occur in The Hebrew Bible ; I will now quote a few examples of the transposi- tion of ivor ds, and even of sentences, which is sometimes absolutely necessary in translating a passage. We read [Gen. ii. 19], — " And GOD formed from the ground every beast "of the earth, and every fowl of the heaven, and "brought it to the man to see what he would call it; "(iE;: 5 Kin nri tf^j cran ^b kij^ -j^k ^bi) ; " which must be construed as though written — ia^ Kin Disn i 1 ? snj^ -i^\s; , njn ^5 bb) lit., So-that [as for] every living-thing, whatsoever the man should call it, that [might be] its name, i.e., So-that whatsoever the man might call every living thing, that might be its name ; VOL. II. M 16:2 HEBREW GRAMMAR. jV^g PJH T£1 DPPBB 3nnp ytf*1 [Job v. 15] which must be construed as though it were — p'll TBI DJT30 TITO \V2X VW^ And lie hath saved ' T t - • v • • V V •• I : V - /// 1N3 p«n ^IVV by\ And all the inhabitants of T | V T T T ; V the land came ; as Onhelos has it, inn *y/-iK n«i hy\' t "> : - •• t - t : * D^t^n |nj| n§ HI) »in Hltf [Kuth iii. 2] instead of— 1133 Dnif^H n§ ITlt wn n^.n Behold, he is winnow- ing the barley in the threshing-floor : rvi^>£ 1flt>K ^3^] [Esth. v. 1] lit., And Esther put on royalty {i.e., put on royal apparel). 18. Words and sentences sometimes occur which are plainly Parenthetical ; as [Gen. xix. 20] — -ipyo aim na# di:*? mip mtn Tyn ns run Ww wn (sin -tf/yD tihn) tmzv *o nBtea Behold now, this city is near for [one] to flee thither, and it [is] a little one : Oh, let me escape thither, — [Is] it not a little one ? — and my soul shall live. [Jer. ii. 11]— tot '■©gi (D\tftg tih nzsni) D^rftg "na TOTn ^jz-p Ki^i iTi'35 Hath a nation [ever] changed [their] gods — though they are no gods? — Yet my people have changed their glory for that which cannot profit. [Gen. xxxv. 18] — s :iK |5 i£^ KTP3! (nna ^) n^ nay? \ti And it came to pass as her soul was in departing — for she died — that she called his name Ben-oni. 19. As there are not in Hebrew any marks, like our inverted commas, to show where a train of thought is in- terrupted by a quotation, — as when a speaker introduces abruptly the words of another person, or of himself at a previous time, — passages sometimes occur in which it is requisite to supply such marks in a translation ; and so at times a dialogue will be found without anything to m 2 164 HEBREW GRAMMAR. point it out as such in the Hebrew Text, but the alternate members of "which must, in the translation, be each enclosed in inverted commas ; thus [Numb, xxiii. 7] Balaam says, " Balak the king of Moab hath brought " me from Aram, from the mountains of the east," I -:- • t t t : •• t : • t -: t : " 'Come, curse me Jacob, " ' And come, defy Israel." " How shall I curse? " &c. [Prov. xxiii. 34 and 35] " And thou shalt be as one " lying in the midst of [the] sea, even as one lyiug on " the top of a mast,— • "i -t :• t-: • ■ t " * They liave stricken me, [yet] I felt no pain ; they have beaten " ' me, but I perceived it not,' " &c, where it will be observed that the words enclosed in single inverted commas are supposed to be uttered by the drunkard ; [Cantic. iii. 3] " ^aa narratf ns" tid ffaa&n D'na&n wmn t -: T v " • t • : • : - t : The watchmen that go about the city found me — " Have ye seen him whom my soul loveth ? " (i.e., to whom I said, " Have ye seen" &c): [Cantic. ii. 1, 2] P^nlnn rS n^i^3") ("4s the rose among the f \ thorns, "T\)22i7 P3 ^rPj/"1 |3 " ( ) " So is my love among the ) \ daughters ; " ip*rr ^j/a roan?" "D^an panto p" which is clearly a dialogue. " As an apple-tree among the trees of the wood, " So is my love among the sons." LETTER LYI. 1G5 [Cantic. v. 8, 9, 10, &c 3 and vi. 1] UbtiiV nij3 *DDn^ W3ttfn"\ ("ladjureyou,0 daughters K — :"»:« nana roin&> o/" Jerusalem, " If ye shall find my lore, " Whut ye sliall say to him, " — Tlmt I am sick with love:'' — Tii/p Till no 1 d^33 navv ■<*Wtf3#n naa#" " What is thy beloved more than [any other] beloved f " O thou most beautiful of women, ™Ii"HD 'SITi^J TV2 " ) (^ ^' af *' s fty oelovt d more than [any I J other] beloved t " That thus thou hast adjured us : "— Diisi ny nil " t : &c, &c. ruddy, " Conspicuous - like - a - banner above ten thou- sand" — fyc., §c. IV hit her hath gone thy lore f " O Mow wos£ beautiful of women ; Whither hath turned thy hue f " That tee may seek him with thee : "— 1'2 J^ T"p "Hil ""I f" M't love went-down to his \<\. &C. J I * Here again we see instances of wrong Gender ; comp. Letter lv. § 4 yar den, To the garden-beds of spice" — 166 HEBREW GRAMMAR. [Isai. lxiii. 1, &c] ... •• T •.• 1aha^ Inn nj", "in'3 3h3 nj;"^" " 777*0 is 7%«s coming from Edom, " Z) € ?/ef7 as to His gar- ments, from Bozrah f " This [That is} Glorious in Mis apparel, " Moving in the greatness \ of His Might?" npf¥3 13TO "ON"! {"t 1 * ^ 7 ' mi ° am s P eaMn 9 in righteous? -» y I «[J, JFXo ■j^in 1 ? an- usness, am] Mighty to save. " Wliy [is there} redness to Thine Apparel " And [why are] Thy garments like [those of] one treading in a icinefat ? " nn^ "to-h mis"' • - • - T T • • • i •• • — &c, &c. f" The winepress have I trodden alone, y < And of the people there teas none with Me," 8fC, fyc. 20. In some instances the want of such marks as inverted commas, to point to such an interruption as that just mentioned in the train of thought, causes apparently a confusion of ideas in a Hebrew sentence, and con- sequently in such cases the true sense of a passage is often endangered ; thus, for example, — LETTER LVI. 107 [Ps. xxvii. 8] T T I : - • • - t I : trpnx nim ?p;ja ns [It is] for Thee — hull* my "heart — [to say\ " Seek ye My Face ! " Thy Face O Jehovah WILL lank. And I cannot but think that the use of inverted commas is equally necessary for the true understanding of the history of Solomon's first recorded judgment [I Kings iii. 16 — 28], after the promise of " a wise and an understanding heart ' : which GOD Almighty was pleased to vouchsafe to him ; that judgment which, we are, it seems, to understand as a kind of index to the people, and an evidence, of that " wisdom, and under- standing, and largeness of heart, as the sand upon the sea-shore," wherewith their king had so lately been endowed. The history of the two women who appeared before the king, each claiming as hers the living child, is too well known to need recapitulation here. The king called for a sword, we read, and gave command to cut ( Tn "T/'n fiN ) [verse 23] the liviii/riac, Arabic, &c, in each of which we meet with vowelled and unvoicelled writings ; and the power of reading any one of these languages ivithout vowels, depends wholly on the extent of a person's familiarity with that language in connexion with its vowels. And so, doubtless, had this mode of placing the vowels above and below the line of consonants prevailed in the English language, we should have voiceUcd and unvowelled English, the latter being used whenever quickness might be requisite, but being only intelligible to a person who, from his knowledge of the language with its nurds, should be able to supply to the lifeless forms, as it were, of the words represented only by their consonants, the moving principle that would give them lite. 172 HEBREW GRAMMAR. I pip jna Bhfc >niwn "jinn msaa ^jno .jprfe mis'? irnSna ^ inn tpw— "una "inn nam -in waai imi pi to •inn rcna -id i^k p-nca rap mjao >tke> ♦ n^aa vmj/rta ypm i^na ^NDDa vzj"ia-DnaD pipe "id nw oa n x ty Kin ca -)Q-iDn^-Di^ i 7^ ^iftriE ^ saw sifn .•):££ irapj nnp ji/e^ vanpa innarn .t^Sn cip^x nvnn f?E n? o irn*na— nan; Do-mcn lxte »Dan in bbynnbi Trus pny^ idv an nan -v;; mvza nn&6i >apj/ v^ onn'? ,*on Da vb» nvib in^ .i^a-i pp 1 ? ddid omaaza ox-iy^n v^ -ieni ipm nava vn pa '•aipa ^ en )n ,r»sr ^a w*?a nb» mzanaa dki ;^p nip \di ^ "uste ^a vjuno dvtm twbo v^a st£>8 »n«nan n^in -pft oa ntn ova oaox nj yng Dj/an vraa o % tok^ hen xbn — nonai : naj nifeg ^pab pint^a LETTER I.VII. 173 LETTER LVII. Your Grace having done me the honour to request of mc some account of the nature of Hebrew Verse, I cannot but feel it a most imperative duty to use my best endeavours — though my best endeavours will, I fear, prove to be but little worth — to attempt to comply with your Grace's wish. It is indeed impossible that I should not feel extremely diffident of my ability to undertake the treatment of such a subject, for to treat of Poetry in a manner at all approximating to the requirements of so high a theme, demands necessarily the mind and the pen of a Poet, to which distinguished title I dare not, and cannot, arrogate to myself the slightest shadow of a claim. My best endeavours, however, though they be but poor, I shall be most proud to use in a task so pleasing, upon a theme so sublime ; the few remarks that I shall offer, will be selected from the Hebrew writings of the very highest Authorities upon the subject ; and if I could but hope to render the few Specimens of Hebrew verse, which will be quoted from The Sacred Scriptures, in language at all befitting the energetic poetry of the Original, I might then feel confident that your Grace would reiterate the sentiment expressed by those Authori- ties that, " As the heavens are higher than the earth, so is " the Poetry of THE HEBREW BIBLE higher than " the highest strains of all the Poetry in the world " besides." 2. In Hebrew a great distinction must be made between Poetry m Verse, and Poetry not in Verse ; to the latter class belongs most of the Poetry of The 174 HEBREW GRAMMAR. Hebrew Bible ; as, for instance, the greater portion of the Prophetical Books, and some passages in Historical Books, as the Parable of Jotham [Judges ix. 8—17], &c. Poetry in Verse is to be found here and there scattered throughout The Bible, chiefly in the Poetical, but, in a few instances, also in the Historical Books ; it is especially to be looked for in Songs, Elegies, Blessings, Prophetic Odes, Prayers, Parables, and Maxims. Diverse and different as are these classes of Poetry in which Hebrew Verse is chiefly to be looked for, and especially diversified among themselves as are some of the specimens of the several classes (as, for instance, Psalms arranged in various styles to suit the various instruments by which they were respectively to be accompanied), yet all agree in this one distinguishing feature of Hebrew Poetry, as it also is of Hebrew Prose, — Sublimity unequalled consisting in unequalled Sim- plicity. What Poet, what man, could venture, in the plain and simple words liK N'T] TiK V) E\iH* iptfl And God said, — Let there be Light — And there was Light, to describe so great, so wonderful an event as that whose only record is contained in these few words 1 But again, what highest strains of language could have equalled, could have borne the least comparison with, this Simple Grandeur ! 3. Not less simple are the Pules by which the Inspired Poets of the Hebrew Bible governed their Verse. We see here no counting of syllables, we see here no reckoning of Short Vowels or of Long, we see here no bondage to llhyme or to Cadence, but simply this: — LETTER LVH. 1 ', 5 I. Tliat the sentences arc divided into members con- sisting some of two, some of three, and some of four words, which may be termed Binary, Ternary, and Quaternary members respectively. II. That the sentences consist, some of Binary mem- bers entirely, some of Ternary members entirely, some of Quaternary members entirely ; and some, of Binary, Ternary, and Quaternary members intermixed. III. That it is considered a peculiar elegance to express one and the same idea by different words in two consecutive members, — a figure of speech which by the Hebrew Grammarians is called maw rvfen payn rfraa A double-expression of the idea in different words. IV. That a word expressed in either of these parallel members is often not expressed in the alternate member, — a figure which the Hebrew Grammarians denote by saying that this one word M2V -iron ievj; "i&no Carries itself and another with it. V. That a word without an accent, being joined to another word by Mahkiph, is generally (though not always) reckoned with that second word as only one. 4. Guided by these few and simple Rules, the Sacred Poets needed not much licence, reserving merely to themselves the privilege of sometimes not counting a short word, especially when it is closely connected with the next word. It need scarcely be mentioned as one of the laws of Hebrew Poetry, that the higher the style of Verse, the more freely are Copulas, Conjunctions, and even Con- ductive expressions (such as \T] and it came to pans, ■JCN"] and he said, &c), dispensed with: we shall, 176 HEBREW GRAMMAR. indeed, soon have to note an instance, where "lEK^, though actually occurring, does not count among the words composing a member of a sentence. 5. These preliminary observations having been made, I beg to offer a few examples in illustration of them. I begin with examples of BINARY VERSE. [Exod. xv. 9,10] T0K -)DX v [The] enemy said — I will pursue, I will overtake, I will divide the spoil, My lust shall be satisfied upon them : I will unsheath my sword, My hand shall destroy them. — [breath, THOU hast blown with Thy [The] sea hath covered them, They sank like lead, In mighty waters. [Ps. xxx. 12] 'aspp roan 1 j Thou hast turned my mourning Into dancing for me, ^> Thou hast loosened my sackcloth, And hast girded me with glad- ness. [Ps. ix. 16J ^T - - . &c, &c, [See Letter li. § 8 ; vol. ii. page 83.] J The heathen have sunk down In the pit they made, &c, &c. LETTER LVII. 177 [Ps. lxv. 11] ^11 'TP?^ "I Her Arrows water THOU, •nun: m: ' - t i t : • Lower her ridges; With showers mayest THOU soften her, Her budding-produce rnayest Thou bless. [Judg. v. 3] " t : • " v: r Hear [ye] kings, Hearken [ye] princes: I to Jehovah, [To Jeiiovah] I will sing ; I will sing-hymns to JEHOVAH [The] GOD of Israel. [Judg. v. 25] Water he asked-for, Milk she gave : DfH^K ^03 I I" lordly dish flNDn nyipH She presented [to him] butter. EXAMPLES OF TERNARY VERSE. [Isai. i. 3] VTJP llV J/T •> [The] ox knowethf his owner, 1^3 DT3K "llCni I And [the] ass his master's crib: JFP ifo bX!& [ Israel doth not know, |!ll3nn N*7 Vf 1/ J My people hath not considered. VOL. II. * For nnTU, t See Letter li. G. N 178 HEBREW GRAMMAR. [Isai. lv. 6] "US ¥£13 Him. IBhl-i Seek ye JEHOVAH while He may be found, nlig InlNia in^ij? 1311 y#i atop : - t t -. - t : : - lv t * : incnTi nl.T-^ afc^i Call ye upon Him while He is near ; Let the wicked forsake his way, And the unrighteous man his r thoughts, And let him return to Jehovah, and He will have mercy upon him, Even to our GOD, for lie will abundantly pardon. [Habak. iii. 3] XT IT ID^ft n'^X^ GOD came from Teman, n^o pwnno 't*w Even The H0LY , 0NE ta T •• ' T T " " ,T - [ Mount Paran, Selah : iTin &£& HD3 f His Glory covered the Heavens, PINil JIN^O in^iini And the earth was filled with His Praise. [Ps. civ. 33—35] v>ri3 ffirrt htwk- T - : T - T • T •>Hj/3 vfttfS niE?tf • : - •• t : — : ^irfr v^ air t t i v:v nlpps ri£^N "oja t - i V • T or» ilj/ D^^n t '" • t : t : v ■ : - • : t nn^.i I will sing to JEHOVAH as long as I live, I will sing-hymns to my GOD while I have my being : — O may my meditation be pleas- ing unto Him ! — I will rejoice in JEHOVAH. May sinners be utterly-consumed from the earth, And [the] wicked be no more : Bless thou JEHOVAH, O my soul : — Hallelujah. LETTER LVII. 79 [Prov. xxi. 23] l3it^7l V2 1Q& ) He that keepeth his mouth and > his tongue, i& ; »}3 JThVO ~\D& J Keepeth himself from troubles. [Prov. xxx. 25] *T *S • t : - orva y^Dn wivi iv>3 pfn kv.ii j^anji d^T3 rpootf ■• - : • -t : • t : The ants are a people by-no- means strong, And yet they prepare ' in the summer their food ; The conies are a people by-no- means mighty, And yet they make in the rock their habitation ; A king there is not to the locust, And yet they go forth in-divisions all-of-them ; *The spider with [the] hands thou mayest catch, Yet is she in the palaces of a king. [Job XVI. 12] n-Mvb if? WBTi me in pieces, Yea, He hath taken hold of my neck, and hath dashed me to pieces, Yea, He hath set me up to Him for a mark. * To give point (it might almost be said,Ar»se) to this passage, we must take the verbiisnn as the 2 Sing. (»(.), instead of the 3 Sing, (f.) as it is taken by BOine; the marvel is, that such a little, insignificant creature, armed with no Bting, x 2 ISO HEBREW GRAMMAR. [Job xvi. 18] O earth, cover not thou my blood, And let there be no space for my cry ! (i.e., let my cry be so loud that all space may be more than filled with it.) [Job xxix. 14— IS] • •• t : •- : - t i v v -Mb wn dtj; : V T T T t^ ^ : - : t : : t I V t ' • : - T • • d^d" 1 nans Virtoi Righteousness I clad me with, and it clothed me [well], As a robe and a turban [I clad me with] justice ; Eyes have I been to the blind, And feet to the lame was I ; A father was I to the needy, And a cause that I knew not — I searched it out : — And I brake the grinders of [the] iniquitous man, And even from his teeth cast- forth-often the prey : Therefore, said I, I shall die in my nest, And as the sand I shall multiply [my] days. Here the word ^$$21 , expressed in the first line, is in idea carried on to the second line, which would be, if complete, Np^fflE? [^?S] rpj^J ty?^ nor provided with wings or other means of quick escape, but which any one may easily, and without danger, catch with his hand, — a little insect which every person feels abhorrence for, and disgust at the very sight of, should yet be everywhere to be met with, yea, that it cannot even be excluded from the palaces of kings. LETTER LVII. 181 [Job XXX. .09—31] D^nS T^H nN"l A brother to dragons have I ty® in^ nij; t t • : - : nil? ^n^ vtji coin bivb raajn become, And to screech-owls a compa- nion ; My skin hath become black upon me, And my bone hath become burnt with heat : And my harp hath been turned to mourning, And my lute to the voice of weepers. [ Ps. li. 0] T • • T -: T . •• T O mayest Thou purge me with hyssop, that I may be clean, Mayest Thou wash me, that I may be whiter than snow ; Mayest Thou make me to hear joy and gladness, That the bones which Thou hast broken may rejoice. [1 Sam. ii. 1] H1.T3 ^ yty rrima rpp npi T - • :'- T T ■^iK-ty ^ am - : "a • - t My heart hath rejoiced in JEHO- VAH, My horn hath become exalted by JEHOVAH; My mouth hath been opened- widely over mine enemies, Because I have rejoiced in Thy salvation. 18.2 HEBREW GRAMMAR. [Gen. xlix. 11] rimD D"a3j/ cni 1-jnS binding to the vine his colt, Even to the choice-vine the foal of his ass ; r He hath washed in the wine his raiment, Even in the blood of grapes his vesture. [Numb, xxiii. 21] •• t : • : t ^r t t : isy vrih* ni.T *» t t : i3 f?D njmm HE hath not beheld iniquity in Jacob, Neither hath He seen wickedness in Israel ; JEHOVAH his GOD [is] with him, And the shout of a king [is] in [the midst of] him. QUATERNARY VERSE. [Exod. xv. 15, 16] DH$ ^S ^'333 t$ Tin 1orn#> 3KiD ^k ^ t •• -: t •• •• -rn-n nno\s on^y fen |a*ja IDT Tj^int ^3 &c, &c. Then were confounded the chiefs of Edom, The mighty of Moab — trembling shall take-hold-of them ; All the inhabitants of Canaan melted away. There shall fall upon them terror and dread, By the greatness of Thine arm they shall be still as a stone ; &c, &c. LETTER LVII. 183 [Isai. lx. 1] m? vby mrr -liasi TT ' • *"» T Arise, shine, for thy light hath come, And the glory of JEHOVAH hath risen upon thee. [Cantic. iv. 1 1] rfci Trnnafr naa&n n&n n vith ] hone y th >' %> dr °p c° my] bride, "^.ittf 1 ? rinr) qSiII I^TI I Honey and milk are under thy tongue, pSri 1 ? JT"|3 l^O^ 1 ?^ fTT! And the smell of thy garments is like the smell of Lebanon. [Prov. xxvi. 27] hb] 13 nni^ iTlS ") He that diggeth a pit shall fall ( into it, 2VVF\ Vhlt UN bb'n \ And he that rolleth a stone— it t t " ' v v : J shall return upon him. [Eccles. xi. 4] He that obscrveth the wind will never sow. And he that regardeth the clouds will never reap. [Eccles. x. 20] Tfcty b bpr\-bs ?p3& 5 E mnm i2i t-p D , »a33 to") r Even in thy thought curse not a king, And in thy bed-chamber curse not a rich man ; For a bird of the heaven may cany the voice, And a winged thing may tell the matter. 184 HEBREW GRAMMAR. Here the short words ^fy ^3 count as one (see above, §4). [Prov. xxii. 5] l&PJJ 1"113 D^nS D^3¥ 1 Thorns ' snares [care] in the way ( of a froward-man ; DH/P PPI"P i&'D3 ID'iltf \ Hc tnat kee P eth ms soul wil1 be far from them. [Ps. cxviii. 25] S3 i"UP#in nin" 1 83 K^ Wepray thee, O Jehovah, grant- ( salvation now, S3 nn^VD HiiT S3S (we pray thee, O Jehovah, grant- prosperity now. MIXED VERSE. [Exod. xv. 6—8] niiT sra^ T : I : • : ni^ ms3 • f : v T9S ^W H^l ^^ D^-nS^ flibhfl wag r Thy right hand, O JEHO- VAH, [Who art] glorious in power, Thy right hand, O JEHOVAH, will dash in pieces [the] enemy, And by the greatness of Thy Majesty Thou wilt destroy Thine adversaries, Thou wilt send forth Thy fierce anger, It will consume them like stubble. By the blast indeed of Thy Nostrils The waters towered-up, Flowing-waters stood up like a heap, The depths were congealed in the midst of the sea. LETTER LVII. I S3 It may be well to observe here that the word H^M (a Poetical form for TJ^J) * s Masculine, and therefore cannot be meant to agree with the Noun pDJ , which the Verb ^Jtnn , in the third line, shews to be Feminine ; it must therefore be considered as forming, in connexion with 71311 , an epithet to JEHOVAH. [Numb. xxiv. 5 — 7} T • • t : • T t " -: - : m'm ym vshrw® t : - t • t "S - • t "-: • T-: - : t • ■ ~ -" D^ai D^D3 i;nn ia^O JJKE DTI : - — : ■• t : j How goodly arc thy tents, O Jacob, Thy habitations, Israel ! Like vales [that] are extended, Like gardens by a river's side ; Like the aloes JEHOVAH hath planted, Like cedars by [the] water's side : Water ever-floweth from his buckets, And his seed [is] where there are abundant waters : Yea, his king shall be higher than Agag, And his kingdom shall be ex-, alted. 186 HEBREW GRAMMAR. [Deut. xxxii. 1 — 4] : — myr»i D\2& ; n irrxn Tip 2 ? "Kp5>3 *)1jt£ then to V?n • t : • - - - • xipx nirp d^> ^ tI: v t : T itya o^n "ran •i : • t t : t ' ./t I •• ; t v: Kin -itf;i p^v Give ear, O ye Heavens, and I will speak, And let Earth hear the words of my mouth ; My doctrine shall drop as the rain, My speech shall distil like the dew, Like gentle-rain on [the] grass, And like showers on [the] herb. When I shall invoke The Name of JEHOVAH, Ascribe ye greatness to our GOD. As for The Rock — His work is perfect, For all His ways are Justice ; A GOD of Truth, and without iniquity, Just and Eight is HE. [Ps. xix. 1, 2] :— ^"lin? Dn^DE bys&n iQb }p3± nv) D1> nirrmm nW 1 ? nWi The Heavens are telling the glory of GOD, And The Work of His hands The Firmament declareth ; Day unto day is-ever-pouring- forth speech, And night unto night is-ever- showing-forth knowledge. LETTER LVII. 187 [Id. vers. 8 -10] :— n^nn rrtrp min t • : T : tfaa n:rttfo vt • : mow niiT nnji T T v: V T : via riDrsno • t : T : ■• I • ma nini myig tt t -: • mino rriir n»T t : t - : • [The] law of JEHOVAH is perfect, Refreshing the soul : [The] testimony of JEHOVAH is faithful, Making-vise the simple : The Statutes of JEHOVAH are Right, Rejoicing the heart : The Commandment of JEHO- VAH is pure, Enlightening the eyes : The Fear of JEHOVAH is clean,* Enduring for ever : I'hc Judgments of JEHOVAH are Truth, They are altogether righte- ous. It will be perceived here that the Makkiph, in the sixth and eleven lines, does not cause the two words which it connects to be counted as one. * i.e., the Fear of JEHOVAH is a tube Religion. IBS HEBREW GRAMMAR. [Ps. xxiii. 1 — 5]: — iih ni.T *• T t : v ^^531 n ™£ ^j; vt : t " : ' " •' • T*» T - • T T • \3£nr nan • \ -:- : t •• t : v v •»#*h ]D^3 rg^n tt : JEHOVAH is my Shepherd, I shall not lack ; In grassy pastures -will HE cause me to lie down, By placid waters will HE gently lead me ; My soul HE will refresh, HE will guide me in [the] paths of righteousness, For His Name's sake. Even though I walk through the Valley of the Shadow of Death, I will fear no evil, for THOU art with me : Thy rod and Thy staff, They shall give me comfort. THOU wilt prepare before me a Table, In the presence of mine ad- versaries ; THOU hast anointed with oil my head, My cup [is] full-to-the-brim. LETTER LVII. 189 [Jobxxviii. 12—15]:— •• t • I • - •• t : t - : nr? Dipo nt \si D*nn H$? R WO ^1 HD]/ P» IDS DJ1 t v : - : ' - \ Hut as for Wisdom — where can it be found ? And what is the place of Under- standing ? Frail-man knoweth not the value thereof, Nor can it he found in the land of the living: [The] deep hath said — 'Tis not in me — And [the] sea hath said — 'Tis not with me — [The] finest-gold cannot be given for it, Neither can silver be weighed out [as] its price. [2 Sam. i. 22—24]:— • r —. - • jrijiiT n^j? T T Vik^ mm t v v : Dp'H 31$n fcft It " t DiTTO Dpiyani D^rrgjn him art nm'Dm t : • t : (- • t : • From [the] hlood of slain [heroes], From [the] fat of mighty [heroes], [The] bow of Jonathan Was not turned backward, And [the] sword of Saul Used not to return empty: — [Alas ! ] Saul and Jonathan ! Who were lovely and pleasing in their life, And even in their death were not divided, Than eagles they were swifter, Than lions wore they stronger. 190 HEBREW GRAMMAR. [Lament, i. 1,2] : — TT3 mt^ HD\S T T T : T T ^ • T - *» T naoSso nrvn t t : - : t : t - * T - • : - • T t dd^ nmn - T t : T n^v»3 nann 1aa t : v : • t rrnb ^ nnycni tv: v - t *t : • : tv-: t - " - : t i •• T : T T V " T 0^*6 n 1 ? vn [Alas ! ] how hath sat solitary The city [that Mas] full-of people, She hath become like a widow ! [The] great-one among the nations, [The] princess among the provinces, TIath become tributary. In the night she weepeth bitterly, And her tear [is] on her cheek ; There is to her no comforter from among all her friends : All her companions have dealt treacherously with her, They have become her enemies. [Id. ii. 1 3] :— frns-TK nn ^Tj/K-na I T v - -: t i •• • -; t vhu/^T nan • - t : - - ji^-n? rfpins ' t t : • What can I compare * to thee, what can I liken to thee, O daughter of Jerusalem ? What can I equal to thee that I may comfort thee, O virgin daughter of Zion; For great like the sea is thine injury, Who can heal thee ? * The English Bible gives, " What thing shall I take to witness for thee ? " the meaning of which must be, What shall I compare to thee? LETTER LVII. 191 [Id. iii. 21—29]:— *ab bx n^» rust • • V • T : T • t : • - t -: - t •It : - • t -: i#aa mas rriiT ^n lip 1 ? niiT Tito t' : t : cam ^m nico t : • t : t ^ : • t d'ti "nn 3^ ■ : t t " •" T T - T T*T V I " • rnpn ^ : : ^Sis * «B0 either for "•:-? or f° r , ' 3 '- , : Simchi and Ben Zeo. f The root Dm is used to express the being STILL or QUIET not only in a Physical sense, with regard, i.e. f to Motion, but also in a Moral sense, with regard to the Mind, as denoting calmness and resignation : thus, when Moses had. explained to Aaron [Levit. x. 3] the cause of the destruction of his impious sons, we read of the afflicted father fin« d^ then Aaron was iai.mi.y RE8IUNED. This recal I to my mind, — Therefore will I yet have hope — viz., " That the Mercies of JEHOVAH have not been^ exhausted, H That HIS Compassions have not-come- to-an-end, "They are new every morning: " — Great is THY Faithful- ness : " — " JEHOVAH is my portion,"— my soul hath said, — "Therefore will I hope in HIM ; " Kind is JEHOVAH to those waiting for HIM, To the soul [that] ever- seeketh HIM. 'Tis good that one should wait, yea [wait] f in-calm-resig- nation, For the saving of JEHO- VAH : 'Tis good for man That he bear [the yoke] in his youth ; Let him sit-solitary, and j- be calmly-resigned, For HE hath laid [it] on him ; Let him put his mouth in the dust, Peradventure there may be hope. L92 HEBREW GRAMMAR. Can tic. v. 2, 3] : — "»• • • : t •• : • -: p^in nil ^ip • t : - • "J * • : • ■•nan Toi" 1 " • T - ' T t t : * t:t ■• • : - v: "•runa-riK borate " • : t •% v • : - r tv t : V T T - : - v • : - t I • T - T • ■pty ion ynyi T*T T *^- " I [was] sleeping, but my heart was awake, [When I heard the] voice of my beloved knocking, " Open to me, my sister, my love, " My dove, my perfect-one ; " For my head is full of dew, "My locks of the droppings of night." (Answer.) " I have taken off my robe, " How can I put it on [again] ? " I have washed my feet, " How [then] can I soil them ? " My love put forth his hand through the hole [of the door], And my tenderness was ex- cited towards him. 6. In some instances a word must be carried on in idea from one line to another, in order to make up the full number of words in a member of the sentence. Thus [Cantic. i. 2— 4]: — LETTER LYII. 193 1.TS fHp^ft ^EjM Oh! may lie kiss me with the I v t : - •• ; nynj Tinx ^aato T T )■..-;_ . .. . T imn irSsn ^wan t t -: iv v - • - • -: 1 t t : : ■ : t • t i • - • I v t • : - Tjianst unuhQ kisses of his mouth — For far-more delightful is thy love than wine : For scent, thine ointments are delightful, Like ointment [that] is poured out [is] thy name; Therefore virgins love thee. Draw me : — after thee will we run ; Had the king brought me into his chambers, [Yet] would we be glad and rejoice in thee : We would mention amid wine thy name, [the] upright [who] love thee ; where, by thus considering the word HT3J3 , of the last line but one, to be implied in the last line, we see that the whole forms a beautiful piece of Ternary Verse complete ; and by this means also we perceive the true strain of the last few lines, — " Were even the king to li bring me into his chambers, yet amid the wine and " festivity we would rejoice only in thee, we would " mention thy love, we would mention the upright who "love thee." And so [Ps. cxviii. 28] : — TjlKI rWjS "fyj ) THOU art my GOD, and I will praise Thee; ipD'htt \i'?N ) my GOD, I will extol Thee; where, if we consider the word HJJN to be implied in VOL. II. o 194 HEBREW GRAMMAR. the second line, we have two parallel members each forming a Ternary Verse. 7. Sometimes, a word occurring historically, as it were, in the midst of the train of poetry, is not counted in the member to which it is attached (§ 4) ; as, — [Deut. xxxii. 18—20]:— • v 1 : t : yxw nipp kti vro;n vj| dj;?p ona ^a n-pnoa ps^i) Drvnritf n» n$ix nan roann in ^ D3 tCK"^ D^n THE ROCK [that] begat thee thou wast putting-al- ways-out-of-mind, And so thou for- gattest GOD Who produced thee ; Then JEHOVAH saw it, and was angry, On account of the provocation of His sons and His daughters : (And He said), " I will hide My " face from them, " I will see what will " be their end, " For a perverse ge- " neration are " they, " Children in whom " is no faith." 8. Sometimes, in order to heighten the effect, the words of a member are repeated with a slight variation in one or more consecutive members ; as, — [Ps. xciii. 3]: — nin^ ni-inj wfcu t t : : t oSip ninna wfco t ' t : : t D^n ninna wfc^ > The rivers have raised, O JEHOVAH, The rivers have raised their tumultuous-voice, The rivers are-raising-continu- ally their dashing-waves. * Tifn (root nc3) for ntSFi . LETTER LVII. 195 [Ps. xciv. 1] : — GOD of vengeance ! JE- IIOVAII! GO]) of vengeance, Bhlne forth ! [lb. ver. 3] :— nirr D^&n \no-T;; t : ■ t : - t How-long shall [the] wicked, O JEHOVAH ! How-long 6hall [the] wicked exult ? [Cantic. iv. 8] : — With me from Lebanon, [my] bride, With me from Lebanon, must thou come. 9. Sometimes the members of a sentence are so inter- woven with each other, that a transposition of the words is almost requisite for obtaining a clear apprehension of the ideas intended to be expressed; thus, — [Cantic. i. 5] : — njKjl ^ Irving T "Hi?. ^Q?? Black I am, yet comely, — O daughters of Jerusalem, * — As [the] tents of Kedar — — As [the] tapestries of Solo- mon; where the third member refers to rp In ttf "I am dark as the tents of Kcdar " (the tents of the Nomad Arabs being dark from being made of goats' hair) ; and again o 2 196 HEBREW GRAMMAR. the fourth member refers to HJ831 " [Though I am dark as those hairy tents], yet am I beautiful as the tapestries of Solomon." So that the sentence, if given in full, would read less poetically thus : — \3N rnin# ti" •' t: t : Black am I, Daughters of Jerusalem, Like [the] tents of Kedar ; Yet comely am I, Daughters of Jerusalem, Like [the] tapestries of Solo- mon. Thus, too, we may see more clearly the true meaning of [Prov r . xxix. 9], where, by referring the tJm in the second line to the Dpn B^K in the first, and the pnfcn in the second to the T1$ t&^N in the first, the meaning will easily be seen to be, that while the fool will rage, the wise man w,ill laugh ; the following is the passage : — • . ... . ... t : • T T rim pat] pnfr] ?j-n A wise man contending with a foolish man — Y The [one] will rage, and [the other] will laugh, and there will be no peace. In like manner [Deut. xxxii. 42] : — I will make drunken Mine arrows with blood, — DIE ^n T3BW t • - • • : - nfca bzxn •mm t t - • : - : rpattfi bbn did t : • : t t And My sword shall devour flesh :— With [the] blood of [the] slain and the captives, From [the] uncovered skull of the enemy ; LETTER LVII. 197 where the third member is seen to be a continuation of the idea given in the first one, and the fourth a continu- ation of the second ; so that the intended sense would be expressed by the less vigorous arrangement, — I will make drunk Mine arrows with blood, DID ^Tl T3#K iT3#i bbn did t : • : t t - • t t • : - : tin ni^ia tfjnp With [the] blood of the slain and the captive, And My sword shall devour flesh, From [the] uncovered skull of [the] enemy. 10. Very frequently we find a Play upon words used, to give elegance and energy to the sentence ; as, — [Gen. xlix. 8]: — Judah, as for thee, thy brethren shall praise thee. ?pn» ^nv nrux: mjn) [lb. ver. 16]:— [lb. ver. 19]:— v : : T i~ t v.t : Dan shall judge his people. Gad — a troop shall overrun him, But he shall overrun them at the last. [Isai. v. 7] : — nz'vn nam Goa^D*? ipyi nwjy mr\) ngiy? And He looked for judgment, but behold * corruption, For righteousness, but behold a cry. * nEirp being derived from the root ncir or nao , which implies a loathsome disease denominateil scab [see Isai. iii. 17], — and nn», derived from the same root, signifying also that disease, or a corrupt putrefying sore or boil, — it seems most proper to take ^'^r? here in the kindred sense of corruption, especially as this produces the most striking contrast mtii judgment (t3BtiD),with which, in the Hebrew, nBtoo forms the Paronomasia, 198 HEBREW GRAMMAR. The words that form the Paronomasia in the several instances here adduced, are marked with a horizontal line placed over them. 11. But independently of connected strains of Poetry, we find scattered instances of poetry in Verse occurring here and there in the midst of a Narrative ; of this we find a remarkable instance in Gen. ii. 23, where the ancestor of our race, — filled with admiration of her whom, formed from his rib, The Almighty brought to him as the partner of his lot — in his ecstacy exclaimed, — D#an hkt \ tms now [is] ^DYUD DV# I Bone of my bones, "HliQID HJiQl ( And flesh of my flesh ; • t : • T T . \ n$8 Xlp *PSP I She shall be called Woman, n^T'Hnp? lj^nq "o \ -For fr° m man natn sne Deen ' taken. Another remarkable instance occurs Gen. iv. 23, in Lamech's ecstatic speech to his wives. Lamech, we must remember, belonged to the outcast family of Cain, who was cursed with a curse which Lamech, by his words, proves to have been still in remembrance. This cursed family, driven out from intercourse with their fellows of the human race, fugitive and vagabond, fleeing from the face of their brother-man, felt, doubtless, continually that same terror which the first of murderers himself experienced when he said, " Every one that seeth me shall slay me." But though expelled from human society, and from the presence of GOD shut out, yet Cain and his family were not to be exterminated; The Decree had not as yet been promulgated, " He that sheddeth Man's blood, by Man shall his blood be shed ; " and though the * Lit., To this (f.) it shall be called, Woman; i.e., to this the name Woman shall be given. LETTER LVII. 199 wretched offspring of the fratricide were cursed with " trembling heart and failing eyes," though their " life hung in doubt before them, and day and night they had none assurance of their life," still The Almighty by His mark preserved them from utter destruction ; and when, from the corruption of the other families of man, the will of their Maker, thus declared, might have been disregarded, then Divine Providence gave to them the means of defend- ing themselves from those who might seek their life. Lantech's son, Tubal-Cain, was the first to discover the art of polishing iron, and thus the outcast race was furnished with weapons which might well give them confidence in resisting any attack that might be made upon them. Lamech, now probably advanced in age, would doubtless feel doubly fearful and apprehensive ; and the females of his household may well be imagined to share, in no slight degree, the sense of danger which continually disquieted the fugitive family. Well, then, can we conceive the ecstacy* with which the old man, on his becoming first aware of the unexpected good fortune, and bearing in his hands perhaps one of the newly-made weapons of his son's invention, would exclaim in rapture to his fearful wives, — ^Ip \VD\& H^'l Hltf \ Adah and Zillah, hear my voice ; • ' •--: t • :. TT \ THEN njTNn ID/ HBfa I Yc wives of Lamech, attend unto my / speech : ^V? 1 ? ^J"in J^S "O I Surely any-man would I [now] slay on \ his wounding me. THIin^ "T^l / ^ ca > a young man [even] on his hurting me ; Pp'CP^ D^rU'Qtf/ ^3 \ If Cain is to be avenged seven-fold, i"lU3&H DM'niy ID 1 ?*) Lamech surely [shall be avenged] ' seventy-and-seven-fold. * It will be observed that this raptured exclamation follows imme- diately upon the mention of Tubal-Cams being "the instructor of every artificer in brass and iron." 200 HEBREW GRAMMAR. 12. Again [Judg. xiv.] Samson puts forth his riddle in the words [ver. 14], — 72Nft NV 1 ^D^niQ \ From the devourer came forth ( food, p"\Pi?2 SV^ TJ/01 ( And from a strong-one came forth ) sweetness. His companions answer him [ver. 18], — U/2r]D piriD \1D ) What is sweeter than honey, "1 Wl "HND U7 HOI C And what is stronger than a lion? To which he replies [ver. lb.], — Wh^pS Dfi&HH sSl7 ) Had ye not ploughed with my ( heifer, "TITO DilNi'P K7 \ Ye would not have found-out my J riddle. The same distinguished champion said somewhat later, after his slaying a thousand Philistines with the jawbone of an ass, — [Judg. xv. 16], — llDnn ^75 \ With [the] jawbone of an ass D?rnfon li^n ( Heaps, heaps; iibnn ^1172 ( With the jawbone of an ass &^J? ^1 7^ " l, 0^5 l "? I have slain a thousand men ; where the play on the word liDn an ass, and also a heap, is very conspicuous ; and it will also be seen that the Verb "•JTSH is implied in the second line, though not expressed till the fourth; so that the passage in full would be — liftnn TI73 1 With the jawbone of an ass D?rHfon "li22n \iT30 ' I have slain heaps, heaps; TlEnn ^ri73 With the jawbone of an ass fc^S *]^K VTJH j I have slain a thousand men. LETTER LVII. 201 13. Again, Samuel rebukes Saul [1 Sam. xv. 22],— DTOP ni^-l PllTP^ Y^Qt) \ Is there pleasure to JEHOVAH in burnt-offerings and sacrifices, nirP Vlp? #££'? As in L tn <-'] obeying of the voice I of JEHOVAH? ISehold, obeying is better than sacri- fice, And attending— than the fat of rams. And to Agag he said soon afterwards [ver. 33], — ^Sin D^J «"H2L^ "1 &$ 3 "J As thy sword hath bereaved women, *|JSJ$ D^ J 2D ^I^JI |3 > So let thy mother, more than [all] ) women, be bereaved. 14. Some Psalms, as your Grace doubtless has observed, are arranged in Alphabetical order, though now and then a letter is passed over without any verse commencing with it being given. In the Hundred and Nineteenth Psalm, there are, as every one knows, Twenty-two stanzas of Eight verses each, all the eight verses in each stanza commencing with the same initial letter, and the several stanzas being arranged in Alpha- betical order. In some Psalms the Hemistiches have the Alphabetical arrangement, as the Hundred and Eleventh and Hundred and Twelfth (where, however, the Ninth Verse in each Psalm includes Three letters, viz., 3 , V , and p, because the Verse consists of Three lines instead of two). We have seen (Letter xv.) that the Commemoration of the Virtuous Woman [Prov. xxxi.] is arranged in an Alphabetical order of verses. In the Lamentations of Jeremiah, the First ( lhapter is regularly arranged with its successive verses beginning 202 HEBREW GRAMMAR. with the successive letters of the Alphabet, and so the Second and Fourth Chapters also, excepting that the V and S change places ; the Third Chapter consists of Twenty-two groups of Three Verses, having each the same initial letter, these groups of Threes being arranged in Alphabetical order, excepting that the V and 3 again stand in inverted order. 15. When, after the lapse of ages, Poetry, had in other languages become subject to more refined laws and more regular metre, the subsequent Poets of the Hebrew nation, forsaking the simple elegance of struc- ture which characterizes the Verse of the Sacred Books, introduced into their Poetry more precise and regular Metre, and also Rhyme. The origin of the introduction of this latter we need not here inquire into, but from the high antiquity of some manifestly rhyming compo- sitions, which we possess, we see that Hebrew was by- no means the last of the languages in which the simi- larity in the sound of words concluding similar members was adopted as a Law of Verse. We find Hymns in "Rhyme supposed to have been written by the celebrated Moses, son of Maimon (generally known by the name Maimonides), who lived more than seven centuries ago, which are to this day occasionally chanted in the Syna- gogues ; for instance, — nij/3 ''fhxh rrami n-PtrK • : - •• t : - -; - T • T •nii/D mis ruhn Durban • •• • :• t • v: -r ■>T3 mpmn run nvn ny •t : t »: - -: v v - ■*TfiBJ rriuy TDm D^n • T • T " T V V T • - &c, &c, &c. LETTER LYII. 203 But not merely Rhyme, but different kinds of Feet also, reckoned by counting the vowels, were introduced by these Hebrew Bards. A Syllable, whether Simple or Compound, commencing with a Consonant bearing Moving Shvah; received the name IT}]* (signifying in Hebrew a nail or stake), and the Metre was reckoned by the "TiT 1 and the number of vowels following it ; for example, the very first hymn of the Jewish Liturgy (a hymn of antiquity much higher probably than the one last quoted, and which must indeed have been composed very many centuries ago), is framed to the Metre of mjn:n *r»&n im mjn:n T&n itv i.e., a *TrP and Two Vowels, and repeated; so that if a "TiT be represented by ( u ), and a Vowel by ( - ), the Metre in it would be (since each line consists of two Feet), — . - U - - o The second lines of all the couplets unite with each other in a Rhyme that is continued throughout the piece, the sound of N"J and !"P being considered equiva- lent. The hymn is as follows : — T\bn -)£ ; k shy liis l t t v -: t i -: K-H3 Wte D1C03 ■t : • • : t v v j R-»pa izv f?£ vk bbn nihil nnai nin wm .th Kim : t t : maana mm sim t t : • : v : • : * Or rather liT.j perhaps; this word, the Constructive form of "KT* i may possibly have been adopted for this purpose, on account of its &etno a Monosyllabic word commencing with a Consonant bearing Shvah. It occurs Judg. iv. 21. 204 HEBREW GRAMMAR. ^ pw mx sim m^anr^ ib h^nnb t : - ; : - : mfram tin f?i t : • - : ^ t : ,nv nm ^an m^i »ip» DV3 ^Di3 niD t>: v : • t : Tin Tpa» Its vw| Tm Din *tpk *&i ^ niiT t * : t : M It need scarcely be observed that Quiescent Shvahs do not enter into consideration in reckoning the Feet ; but, to assist in tracing the structure of the Verse, it may be necessary to note the few instances where the strictness of Grammar has been sacrificed to the Metre. In the syllables to which an Asterisk (*) is here attached, Chateph-Pathachs occurring in the midst of a word are treated as though they were Quiescent Shvahs ; in those, above which an Obelisk (-f) has been placed, a (Quiescent Shvah is treated as though it were Moving (I) ; while, in the place marked with a Double-Cross (J), the Conjunctive Prefix 1 is reckoned to help in forming the TrP by being considered to bear its natural point Simple Shvah, although on account of the Labial letter 1 It would seem that in the two instances thus noted, viz., TJ7!p") and "H??*? , they reckoned the Metre by separating the prefixed letters from the bulk of the word, so reading "JpE " " 1 and T|"? " M . LBTTEE LTII. 205 with which D"0O commences, the 1 is necessarily here changed into 1 . There is another hymn, standing in the Prayer-book before this, but usually chanted after it, in which the Metre is — m;n:n \n&n "rm mm:n vw tti mi/un tic^ beginning thus: — - _ v __v/ ._ inwy»"^K rw pai kvdj iT))T3 TIT p»1 Tltf mwn»^ *po p« dji dS^j &c, &c, &c. 10. Many specimens might be quoted of the sub- sequent, but yet early, Hebrew Poetry ; but my due limits have, I fear, been already somewhat overstepped : I hasten, therefore, to pass on to the more refined Poetry of later ages. The great Hebrew Poets of modern times, such as Luzzati, Wesley, Ben Zev, &c, were far more attentive to the strictest Rules of Grammar. Wessley, dismissing the iri' 1 , counted in each of his lines either Eleven or Thirteen Vowels, making always the lines to close with a word having the Accent Penultimate {i.e., Vj/^D ), whether the Verse were in Rhyme or not. In this style it is that this far-famed Poet wrote his well-known and justly-celebrated nns^n "»t# of which the Egress from Egypt is the subject, — a Poem of which it may be said, that any one on the Continent professing himself a Hebrew Scholar, who had not read Wessley's rTHSDn HHfP, would be at least 20G HEBREW GRAMMAR. as little thought of, as an English Scholar here would be who should say that he had never read Milton's "Para- dise Lost," or as one professing himself a German Scholar who had never read Klopstock's " Messiah." As a specimen of this beautiful Poem, I may offer to your Grace's notice the following stanzas : — Speaking of the time when Jochebed felt herself unable to hide her child Moses any longer, he says, — innravn nm d^ w nuhuts : - • : t • • t " :* : n^by b*n rritf "ins isn -)& ; *o T V T - t •• - - - •••-;- 130CD ft naE ify iravn rto xb t t - • • : - t : t nbv i 1 ? nriD nvnn ^ T mvp \a ^ xb$ yg\* fjt£ 15 ]i^ niv 15 1» roana ^rm bx nnrafr nnv ds 'ra T T : V V " V T t : • - T * # * * n^ioa ^ m»D wip wt^ ■sjk • t : • •• : • v t - • : stravK na^a ! ^ "na— Dii/itfj/ttf ib^ Tj]JT B^g D3 Bh PS P« ft^S 1^1 Dl^n rhiu; b$ iia^f* "ritff? ?l^?s ■nfr niona pa "la^O ^S IfT :- T V T - -qp n-na ^^n rrntf rftro IT iron ^nitt n->N3 Diy&ha ^ Tin ]irv *& |g{ -n?r *& jrjh ehfl -Da rurah ^8 n 1 ? ni*nn r^n 1 ? b£ rp LETTER LVII. 207 \nyjr 2vo xh ? Rav jio^n bt$ \ no ^s v ^pvi laso m ^ ^ni^ una ex •tanp^ na dv dv ^trp na ^ jng nio niao lb ">r»R¥a ! '•tfaa Tinir-irn no t ' t *tt *:"* ' "* " ~ nb .Y-SnRi ^"ot Dnpo d^ •; f : • t v: •.• ? - V : ■ ' - D^O ^aoa ^un CD^O WIS? • t -• ••■• -:• ■ : — T wyb *h irrp r\: bx b$ mva • T - T • VI*- v •• - : • " -153 nasi bx *[tvy\ fins Ria" sjrqE ^r Ria nns ca ^ Tp? |a nnn;/ nns d->o ^an en -icota • V X—. T - ". - " " " J ' nab tirvo np# iiau "?« nna*- *a • T T v - ■• v : • I T The following Stanzas from the same eminent Pen . have always pleased me much, in which the Metre is Eleven Vowels and TJ770 (Penultimate) : — 1 j/fc'ao 'sit nio mo Rnp TO • yah aniR t^R ^n xip;. f $ 1r ■wrjn en nio rna ^r ^ ^n -i^di nino— ? irtan v>n no nj/3 D3 PT £21 D^no ^3 *= T - ll"l - • •• T •.. 1 W!& Vlb) it aha |inir noi lap^n nst ex WRnaa Ria6 ex i:vp Ra ny nir»a> pi teg pn nap Rvp- ^ ^aa 1200 aio v It t : • v v v ■ Wffl H*jK D^an )i-i^ ; 3 tjr ww-ian wtw; aiB ni ^aS •• t - • t - • : -132 nTir Din iths napt nosn ^3 208 HEBREW GRAMMAR. 17. I very much regret that while writing this I have not at hand such Poems as the fTD/D "lf)3 by Eabbi Solomon Ben Gveril, Pl-fPUl Dn^ by 'the incomparable M. C. Lazzatti, ]iDV TX&)X ^ ' Dip. ">#&£ by Solomon Cohen, and many, many others, from which I could have quoted passages out of number which must unquestionably have elicited your Grace's highest admiration; Poems which must ever rank high in the Literature of The Hebrews, so long as the world remains. I may, perhaps, introduce here a couplet written upon the great and learned Moses Mendelssohn, who was the first to bring within the reach of his, at that time, uneducated fellow-Israelites the means of under- standing That Sacred BOOK which they more than any other people reverence, and which they more than any other people have a right to look upon as their own peculiar Blessing. After the death of this national benefactor, these lines were written : — -itn nil ^n teta tto mi m ; p : t tt : : i The greatest Continental Hebrew Poets of the present day are unquestionably M. Letteris, the Editor of JTTBtfn and of Ben Zevs DWIVD ")2flK, and J. Eichenbaum. The Poem, entitled 3Hj?H 5 of the latter has been read by many Hebrew Scholars of The University of Cambridge, and has been pronounced quite a masterpiece. His Collection of Poems, TVV2\ *7ip , — in which he has translated, I hear, several of Schiller s Poems, — I have heard spoken of in equally high terms ; I much regret that all my efforts to procure a Copy of it have hitherto been fruitless: should your Grace endeavour to obtain one, I earnestly hope that you may meet with better success. LETTER LVII. 209 I feel sure that your Grace will be delighted with the following Epigram by Rabbi Solomon Ben Gviril, com- posed on a rather peculiar occasion. The days of Purim are, as is well known, set apart by Jews to feasting and gladness, The Talmud expressly prescribing that they should live quite freely, and indulge to their hearts' content in making merry. The Poet, having been invited by a rich but miserly man, of the name of Moses, to the grand D'Hia fHU'p , and being supplied with very little wine, but plenty of water, is said to have taken in his hand a goblet filled with that liquid not inebriating, and to have spoken extempore the follow- ing lines : — DID \^§ , CD \fta Dniaan nzn cjhtf Dnfr ci'trfi DHWI tnti '•a ">3 CTttf irattf ■ T . • . T CD i^D , D^D jAd rri; inn ^ nr^pa d:d \fra , d^d \Aa era 11 row* teiK—DnS T • ' T •• ** '■"*." c\p ;rv; , &n jrn ■»rj/ Tin ^ ni^a d;d "o^a , c?p \j^a * The numerical value of ]'.. = 10 + 10 + 50 = 70. t The numerical value of D73 = 40 + 10 + 40 = 90. VOL. II. P 210 HEBREW GRAMMAR. t^Kan nyn onyp "liK"! d^ \£a , D^p '•Aa into vsh itit tjj irn jtjt aan ma t v : • t " •• : • irpa "sai v:a ot 13^ Tig ^ rii^a trip \f?a , d^ \fe P.S. I have not given any translation to passages that are not taken from The Bible. I consider your Grace fully competent now to do this for yourself, and doubt not that you would prefer doing so for the sake of the good practice it will afford you. To the few Specimens of Hebrew Poetry given above, I may LETTER LVII. 211 perhaps add the following (in Lines of Eight Syllables each) supposed to have been written by the celebrated Aben Ezra: — Vt; dk nnri hx Da riii/nn D2 m'niBii ^ p 2 212 HEBREW GRAMMAR. LETTER LVIII. I cannot but feel in the highest degree gratified by the kind assurance of your Grace that my last Letter was interesting to you ; but at the same time I am deeply conscious that the interest you so kindly express is owing to no merit of mine, but entirely to the beauty and sublimity of that grand and delightful subject, of which I fear that the sketch I have drawn is but a very poor and feeble representation. I wish, however, that I could hope to render my present Letter otherwise than uninteresting — for uninter- esting I feel that it needs must be from the dry, barren nature of the subject of which I have now to treat. It is my intention now to give a little further attention to the Norms, and also to the Accents ; both of these being subjects to which I promised in earlier Letters to return at the close of my instruction. With regard to Nouns, it will merely be my object to present you, at the foot of this sheet, with the classifi- cation of them according to the first Hebrew Gram- marians, and under each Type (if I may so denominate it) of a Class, to give an example or two of Nouns of that class, together with the manner in which those of the several Classes are declined. As to Nouns of one Class differing arbitrarily from each other in their respective inflexions (and consequently also from the particular example given in the Table), this being a matter of fact, and not a subject admitting the applica- tion of rules, it is rather the office of a good Lexicon LETTER LVI1I. 213 than that of a Grammar to render the requisite assistance in this particular. But in order that your Grace may be enabled to enter into and understand the Table, it will be necessary for me to make the following prefatory remarks. 2. By far the greater number of Hebrew Nouns may be either reduced, or traced up, to three radical letters. The Hebrew Grammarians have therefore agreed to represent Nouns also, as we have seen that they represent Verbs, by referring them all to one standard Formula ^J/^ ; which general Formula is made to express the several Types of the respective Classes of Simple Nouns (i.e., Nouns in which there arc no more than the three radical letters), by attaching to it the Vowels which serve as the distinguishing characteristics of the several Classes. Thus, for example, "III"! a word, is said to be of the form 7J/D , because the first and second radicals have each of them Kawmcts, which may be thus represented by figures 3 2 i ; n^p a book, where the first radical has Tsayre, and the second Segol, is said to be of the form 7J/3, or in figures 3 J }. ; 7p# a servant, of which the first aud second radicals have each a Segol, is said to be of the form 7£2) , or in figures 3 2 J ; similarly, -)3S a husbandman, is of the form '%'% ( 3 ; !); 3jj a thief „ „ ty T 2>(3 2i)j D^D a ladder „ „ ty§ (3 2 l j . IX an eye „ ' „ ty£ (3 a \) } nj? fine-gold „ „ fe (3"2 i) ; 013? a garment „ „ ^U'b ( 3! )2i). hV3 a fool „ „ ^(Siaj)! and so on. 3. In the case of Nouns in which either the second 214 HEBREW GRAMMAR. or the third radical is one of the quiescent letters with- out a vowel, and, consequently, is not heard in pro- nunciation, this quiescent letter itself is substituted in the Formula ^D (in deducing from it the required Type) instead of the V or the 7 , as the case may be ; e.g., — "I'D a pot, is said to be of the form TS ( 3 "* }); Di3 a cup ,, „ ,, 712 ( 3 i 1 ); 111 a pot „ „ „ 712 (3 11); and so on. N.B. A Furtive-Pathach not entering at all into the consideration, nin a thorn, is said to be of the form 712 ( 3 1 ! ) mb a table „ „ „ 712) (3 1 1) Vr'Vaplant ,, „ „ Vfc ( 3 •> }) nn scent „ „ „ ^2(3^1). Again, — TV)f& afield, is said to be of the form H#£ (H 2 l) nj^ayw „ „ „ nja (nji) DM pride „ „ „ Hj/5) (H 2 1) and so on. [Grammarians give also the form TS as the Type of such Nouns as JV3 a house, JYf an olive tree, &c, where the ^ having a vowel, is consequently not quiescent, but heard in pronunciation. It might perhaps have been more correct to represent such Nouns by the form 7J/2 , were it not that in the Inflections the "• becomes quiescent, and so (being no longer heard in pronunciation) falls under what was mentioned above as the principle for the introduction of the quiescent letters into the Type-form]. 4. Nouns, in which the H of the Feminine termina- tion is affixed to the three radical letters, have HTl/D for LETTER LVIII. 215 the Formula from whence their Types are de- rived ; e.g., — npTj righteousness MSJS Ftyfi (H^i ); Pin^ a handmaid „ „ Tlty* (D J 2 I) np^ a garment „ „ P1^2 (H J 2 1) H^T| robbery „ „ H^g? (H J § }) form 5? 5> nrpj/T! an abomination ,, ,, PlJJ/sa (H J.p); and so on. 5. Again, Nouns having one or more of the For- mative letters l\T"ODRn prefixed, or affixed, or both, to their radical part, have the same letters added in like manner to 7J/2 , in the Formula from which their Types are derived; e.g., — fy??$ ( 3 ; \ $) ^« (3*2 i 4 SJ ^rj- (3 1 1 y ^•pP (3 2 1 jp) ^0(3*2 1 O); H^Q (H J 1 £) nj;?p (H2 1 p) ^•pfl (3121 n) n^a (n 3 2 ij toe (1 J 7 I) t t : • \ t t : • / nSj/spii (nf2ijn) nSj^-pn (ns2Jr») 33 ^ ; « T ■ V a window (■•■ 21W) is f ; ■?3^§ a cluster (•■• faff) Dlp^ substance (r. Dip) W? a dwelling (»•• |D») jbcpo a hid treasure (r. npb)i * nj?bo booty (>'• f i * deceit ('•• noi) rtjPP cattle (r. n:p) Tp^n a disciple ('•• nnb) ntt'y. dry-land (••• BfT) ii"R an offering (••• nnp) lifjt^ madness ('•• W) T T >beauty (••• ■wa) note"?!? a garment (r. Bab) t *• : - a deep-sleep (>•■ Din) r-iDipn a rising-again (r. Dip) * See $ 3, N.B 216 HEBREW GRAMMAR. 6. When the first radical (being 3) is dropped, on a formative letter being prefixed to the radical part, the Formula for giving the Type is obtained by dropping the D of ^2 and prefixing the Formative letter to the remainder ; thus, — *££" tyo ( 3 \ ») gift (r. pa) * Win a fountain (r. ^33) „ ^O ( 3 1 2 B) n^D a plague (r. ^3) „ n^D(n;2p) x „ ru/a rn 2 o) 1 ; „ n#jp(n 2 $) 7. When the first radical is ^ , it is sometimes alto- gether dropped on a Formative letter being prefixed to the radical part; sometimes it remains, but becomes quiescent ; and sometimes it is replaced by i ; and, again, it is sometimes dropped even when there is no Formative letter prefixed. In all these cases the Formula producing the Types is obtained by substituting ^ for the £ of 7J/E , and treating this ^ exactly as the ^ of the root is treated in the formation of the Noun. Thus, — JHQ knowledge (r. W) I'&D a plane (r. "IB") Dtfifl an inhabitant (r. 3^) HJLH knowledge (r. J/T) 8. Nouns having *\ quiescent for the second letter of their root frequently drop this 1 altogether; the For- mula for the Types of the several Classes of such Nouns is obtained by dropping the V in iVZ : thus, — I* stranger (r. 115) *«** b$ (3 i); Dill a testimony (r. TiJ/) „ rh§ (p 3 T l); * See § 3, N.B. is of the form ^0(3 2 p). J» ^\P(3-2^) ; 5> tyin (3 2 t i n) ; 5? njK(n 5 2 ); LETTER LVIH. ^17 9. Noims having il for the third letter of their root, sometimes drop this H , and sometimes change it into "■ ; the Types of such Nouns are given hy either dropping the H of iiya (§ 3), or by changing this H into *; e.g., — . 3St a father (r. TOK) "£*■ JPJ ( « 1). lg a Zwie (r. mp) „ jite ( 2 1 ) ; 13 a son (r. 1133) „ #£ ( 2 l ) ; ^ fruit (r. ma) „ u?? ? !); |V$ri a vision (r. Htri) „ ji^a (|i« 2 1 j. 10. Nouns having the same letter for their second and third radical often drop the second radical, the omission being supplied by a Dagesh inserted in the third radical whenever this letter has a Vowel: the Types of the several classes of such Nouns are derived from < 2 ; as, — ph a statute (r. ppn) •■&£• ^(3*1 ) \W a tooth (r. ]2V) „ % ( 3 .! ) ]| a garden (r. \22) „ "?S( 3 1 ) n^3 a ooit'Z, a spring (r. ^J) ,, HvS (H J 1 ) nnnq terror (r. nnn) „ n^p(n-3i^) ir^ni-l praise (r. ^H) „ H^(nji^). There are, however, many Nouns consisting of more than three radical letters (such, for instance, as lp~\D a brier, 7p.3 irow, and others), of which no notice will be taken in the Table. 11. The remarks here premised will, I hope, be sufficient not merely to enable your Grace to go through the Table without trouble, but also to show you the great importance of tracing words to their real roots, as, 218 HEBREW GRAMMAR. otherwise, the similarity of form of two Nouns of different natures might produce serious mistakes ; thus, for instance, HTpn hope, and H^fi absurdity or folly, appear to be of one and the same form, but on consider- ing the respective roots, it will be seen that the former (of which the root is Hip) is of the form Hj/^n (H 2 1 n), and that the latter (of which the root is ^DH) is of the form H^2l (if J 2 l). Again \2 a son and |n favour, also appear at first sight to be similar in form, but, on considering the respective roots, we see that the former, having the root D:3 , is of the form j-'D ( 2 ?.), and gives, with the Possessive affixes, ^3 , ^33 , &c. ; whereas the latter, having for its root pn , is of the form 73 (3 ]_), and gives, with the Possessive affixes, ^n , ^3n , &c. Lastly i"H# a testimony, and Hlj/ a congregatioji, have precisely the same appearance, but a consideration of the respective roots shows that the former, having for its root "111/ is of the form nSa (H s i), and, therefore, gives, with the Possessive affixes ^7# , ^?7# j & c - '> whereas the latter, having the root IP , is of the form n7j/ ( n s 2 ) a nd gives with Possessive affixes TH^: j ?jmjt7, &c. "With regard to Nouns of any one class which may differ in declension from the particular example or examples declined in the Table, under the particular Type, as a specimen of the Nouns of that Class, I beg again to refer your Grace to any good Lexicon for the requisite information: I may also remark, in passing, that a great number of useful Nouns, with the manner of their declension, may be found in " The Guide of the Hebrew Student," which your Grace some time back obtained on my recommendation. LETTER LVIII. 219 When I had the honour of instructing your Grace in French and German, I took good care that, with the Nouns, you should also learn their respective Genders ; your Grace no sooner knew that there were such words as bras, wain in the French language, than you also knew that le bras is the arm, and la main, the hand ; your Grace no sooner knew that there were such words as Uaffel, Messer, Gabel, than you knew at once that der Lojfel is the spoon, — das Messer, the knife, — die Gabel, the fork ; in like manner, the Hebrew student must learn to know at once that "=|7^> a king, on taking Affixes, gives ^D , ^fi/ft , &c, and that 1J21 a garment (though of precisely the same form), gives ^JZl , ^\122 , &c. This I have always found to be by far the best way for a learner to get up the inflexions of the Hebrew Nouns; to give, as some Grammarians do, Thirteen Declensions, and then to be compelled to make an immense number of exceptions and irregular Declensions, cannot, I should think, be a pleasing, or even satisfactory, mode of proceeding to cither Student or Teacher. Thus I conclude the few remarks I had to make upon the Table of the Nouns which will be attached to this sheet, — a subject which, in a former Letter, I promised to treat of more fully at the close of my instruction, at which we have now almost arrived — (the chief use of this Table will appear to your Grace when you begin to read the Hebrew Grammarians and Commentators). I must, however, before closing, turn my attention to the one remaining point of Grammar to which 1 have yet to return, according to my promise given at an earlier period — viz., the Accents. My observations on these will fall under two distinct divisions, — the 220 HEBREW GRAMMAR. first division embracing the rules for the position of the Accent with reference to the syllables of a word, will form a subject of the very greatest importance, involving as it does some of the great principles of Grammar: the second division, on the other hand, comprising a few remarks upon the Accents generally, with a notice of those not mentioned in my previous Letter on this Subject (Letter ix.), and also some few remarks upon the Laws which regulate the order of the Consecution of the several Accents, will have but little importance in a Grammatical point of view, in accordance with what was observed to your Grace in my previous Letter. 12. With regard to the Positions of the Accents, I beg to premise the following general rules : — I. In Hebrew, a word can only have the Accent either on the Ultimate or on the Penultimate Syllable ; in the first case the Accent is said to be JH^D , and in the second case to be ^J/^Q ; II. Circumstances may sometimes shift the Accent of a word from the Ultimate to the Penultimate Syllable, and vice versa ; III. No letter bearing either a Shvah, whether Simple or Compound, or a Slight Vowel, can ever have the Accent; also no prefix can ever have the Accent, except in the case of HE 1 ? why, where the Accent stands beneath the h when there is a Dagesh in the D ; but, when there is no Dagesh in the D , the Accent is, as it should be, Ultimate. IV. A word ending in a quiescent Shvah, whether expressed or understood, and having a Long Vowel in its final syllable, takes the Accent always upon that Long Vowel ; LETTER LVIII. 2 M V. A Long Vowel followed by Dar/esh, or by a Quiescent Shvah, must always have the Accent of the word; as, 13^ they (m.) shall encompass, 1;hn j/e (w.) shall celebrate a feast; , i?7?2 I was able, ^^3 thou (in.) wast ashamed ; VI. Whenever, owing to the Pause, a Short Vowel is changed into a Long one, or a Shvah into a Vowel, this Vowel must always have the Accent; as, — HPS tliou {in.), in pause . . . ""N?8 T\T\]3 now ""T^ MDZ' then kept 1")Cttf l-lEirn ye (m.) shall keep . . . MbpF\ jyU! thy (m.) song ?Q?Ur Except when it would happen that, in doing this, the Accent would be taken away from a final syllable involving a Long Vowel followed by a Quiescent Shvah expressed or understood, which must necessarily (llule iv.) have the Accent ; as, — l^niT [Ps. civ. 29] they (m.) will be troubled; lli/ir [Ibid] they (m.) will die (lit., expire). VII. Nouns in the Dual Number, and those nouns, and numerals also, of which the termination is 0)~ like that of the Dual Number, have the Accent on the Penultimate Syllable ; as, D?T hands, U]DV tiro days, DW# two years, D\D water, DJJtfD scales, D?J0 (and U)F^) tiro, UTtfJlW sevenfold, &c; VIII. Nouns having the Feminine termination H— , have the Accent on the Ultimate Syllable, and retain it even when, in the state of Construction, H— is changed into H— ; e.g., — Hj"T:> righteousness, .... Hj5"TV righteousness of; nnattf a handmaiden, . . . HnSJttf handmaiden of. The Accent, too, is always Ultimate in the Construe- 222 HEBREW GRAMMAR. tive forms of the Plural Masculine and the Dual of Nouns ; for instance, — D^pSp kings, "07^ kings of; D^ji feet, ^m feet of IX. The Accent of words, to which the H , denoting towards or into (Letter xix. § 1), is affixed, is always Penultimate; e.g., — D" 1 [the'] sea or West, .... PJEjJ towards the sea or West; JT3 [the] house of . . . *)& nJT3 zwfo [£/«e] house of Joseph ; car ffore, nsttf ^tVA^r. X. All words terminating in a Furtive Pathach, whatever Part of Speech they may be, have the Accent Penultimate ; as, 1TJP a plant, i-O^n to cawse to £e high, #!")£ fom, FQ3 A2V7/?, H3 strength ; N.B. When in Verbs the Furtive Pathach, for the sake of shortening the word, supplants the Long Vowel preceding it, the Accent, remaining where it was, becomes Ultimate ; thus, — THW\ he will send away, * nj?J^ . XL In the case of the Possessive Pronominal Affixes, words with in— , 13— , or IT- affixed have the Accent Penultimate ; as, for instance, — 1PIT# his song, 'TjT^ ner songs ; Those having ?| , preceded by Shvah, have the Accent Ultimate; as, — but those having ^ preceded by a Vowel, have the Accent Penultimate ; as, — * See Letter xxx. §11. JITTER LVIII. 223 Tpy$ thy (m.) songs ; When "?! is preceded by a Long Vowel, the Accent is necessarily Ultimate (llule IV.) ; as, — T\yu} thy (/.) song, !1j$ witli thee (/.) ; but in the form "sp— the Accent is Penultimate ; as, V^V thy (f.) songs ; D— and \— have the Accent Ultimate ; as, — T I T DT# their (m.) song, |T>ltf their (/.) song ; D3— and |J— have the Accent Ultimate ; as, — DZTPttf your (m.) song, ]yy# your (/.) song, Dp;T^ your (m.) songs, I5?T^ y 0Mr (/•) sora^s ; DH— and |H— have the Accent Ultimate ; as, — DiTTttJ their (m.) songs, I5TY# 'Aw (/•) songs. N.B. When instead of DH - , the Poetical form V2— is substituted, the Accent becomes Penultimate ; as, iQ^T$ their (m.) songs, iDvtf to them [m.\ Vyty upon them (in.); All the other Possessive Affixes, which are not mentioned here, viz., Vi i~ > ^~ V, "P— , have the Accent Ultimate ; It should be borne in mind that the above remarks hold as well for Feminine as for Masculine Nouns, and also for the Prepositions that take the Possessive Affixes (Letter xix. § 23). XII. In the case of the Verbs — In the Past Tense, forms having the Affixes ]J , "tf-l , and M , have the Accent Penultimate ; as, — nips , \rvrp2 , nips , 224 HEBREW GRAMMAR. but those forms that have *H~, ft , *1 , Dfl , or \r\ affixed, have the Accent Ultimate ; as, — *mpD, mps, *npa, Dnipa. imps. In the Imperative and Future, only those forms which have the Affix HJ have the Accent Penulti- mate ; as, — njlpa , nnpan , in all the other forms the Accent is Ultimate ; With the Objective Pronominal Affixes IH (or, its equivalent, 1 attached to F), H , ^ , 12 , 13—, H3— , D— , the Accent is Penultimate ; as, — wpz , inm?z (or tan;?) ," inj]$ , irop^. , nips , nnp^ , ^■rpa. TO. ^ip^, ,a 3i3? » !)3 7-)??> ^7.^:, wtpsJ». naVp'a, nrrpa\ Dmpa. But with i, n- ?j, t|, d t , i- fDr, tlT.D?, |5, the Accent is Ultimate ; as, — lips , Tips , Hpd: , prTOJ, &3P*. &3RS. !TO». TO?:, 17P9, to?:, B3W, I3PJ?, D3W. OR, B3UK, np^, D2ip2 , pips , DD"TpD^ , plpi^ ; * In Verbs which drop the second radical, the Accent in such forms as these is Penultimate, as, ^^p,, n ?5 > *"^p T 5 ^9 • t In like manner with the Affixes EV and M— the Accent is Ultimate, as, D^p? , D-VT^S, EVrpp"!, DVjftSi-1. LETTER LVIII. 22o N.B. When the Affixes D— , and D— assume the T J "7 Paragogic 1 , so as to become i£— , and ID— , the Accent (remaining where it was) becomes Penultimate ; as, — XIII. Infinitives, as well as Participles, when de- clined with Possessive Affixes, follow the same rules as the Nouns with regard to the position of the Accent : as regards the Participles, it should be borne in mind that, in their natural form, without any Affixes, and when no Furtive Pathach interferes, they are uniformly accented on the Ultimate Syllable, excepting only such forms as rnjjp (and, when the third radical is guttural, n^gitf ) where the Accent is always Penul- timate. XIV. Imperatives and Futures with a Paragogic H preceded by Kawmets have the Accent Penultimate, when there is a Vowel preceding that Kawmets ; thus, Dip arise thou (m.) becomes HDIp, 2U/pn attend thou (ni.) becomes HlP&'pn , "1TDS I will turn aside becomes rniDS: — but when a Shvah precedes that Kawmets, the Accent is Ultimate; thus, 1!2& keep thou (m.) becomes rnottf , "IDitftf / will keep becomes mo#N . XV. With regard to Nouns — When the last syllable has a Short Vowel followed by a Consonant with a Quiescent Shvah (expressed or understood), and is preceded by a Simple syllable, whether formed by a Short or by a Long Vowel, the Accent is Penultimate ; as, ^7E a king, J/&H wickedness, * We find, however, f^P sometimes with the Accent T'ltimate. VOL. II. Q 226 HEBREW GRAMMAR. rhz; a sword, "l#$ a gate, ")$D a book, B^Jj holiness, YH an eye, T\"}^T\ glory, rn£DJ[ a crown, Sec. ; ' But when the syllable preceding the last is Compound, the Accent is Ultimate ; as, — *7P3 iron, IP 2 aw axe ; When the Noun ends in quiescent H preceded by £070/, the Accent is Ultimate ; as, — &c, and the Accent remains Ultimate in the Constructive forms of such Nouns (in which the Segol becomes in variably Tsayre); as, — r\2pD cattle of, Hj^gD work of; Excepting, however, Nouns of the form n#§ (H 2 1) ; as, — H53 weeping, HJH a thought, a breath ; indeed, all Nouns of the form hy§ and tyg have the Accent Penultimate ; as, — N&H arass, ^Sa wonder. XVI. Nouns ending in Long-Cherik (or in Long- Vherik followed by K quiescent) have generally the Accent Ultimate; as, ^ scarlet, ^jj parched corn, Wjh a lion, K'QJ a prophet. Those ending in Chowlem (or Chowlem followed by N quiescent) have likewise the Accent generally Ultimate, as ij?S (a certain quadruped so named), Ni2DD provender. Those termi- nating in 1 generally have, .011 the contrary, the Accent Penultimate ; as, ing marsh-grass, *\n'Fi a formless mass, inl3 emptiness. XVII. Adjectives terminating in Long-Cherik, and LETTER LTIII. 227 likewise Patronymics and Ordinal numbers, have the Accent on the Ultimate ; as, "HpK cruel, "HHi/ childless, n^y a Hebrew, V3"£K an Ephrathite, ny)l a Gileadite, \)# second, HB^7# third, &c. XVIII. Words with ^ Paragogic generally have the Accent Ultimate; as, "HPN [Gen. xlix. 11] for ")DK one (m.) binding, ^WD [Ps. cxiii. 9] for ^BHO one (in.) causing to dwell, V?DD [Cantic. i. 9 J for HCHD a mare. We find, however, a few exceptions, as, "Op.U; [Ps. ciii. 3] for \3ijJ $y (/.) iniquity, and a few others. After having thus taken a general view of the matter, I beg now to dwell on the following particulars : — 13. Of the Personal Pronouns, the following only have the Accent Penultimate: — "ON (the Pause form of \}*j), Wry$ andWp., nj£« (which represents J£K with H Paragogic), HSn and HSH (which respectively represent DH and ]H with Paragogic H) ; all the others have the Accent Ultimate. Of the inflected forms of the same Pronouns, — ft , ^ , Oj , ft , ift , &c ; Vritf, 5fn1», ^18, inix, uniK, &c; and ^3 , >I3 , 13 , 13 , UJ , &c, follow the same rules with regard to the position of the Accent, as, ^T^i TT^» ^ c -' as 8'i ven above; The Poetical forms iD|7 , IDS , of course, (Rule xi. N.B.) have the Accent Penultimate; Of the Ablative forms,— W2D , KftD and 130, H3SO, have the Accent Penultimate ; all the others have their Accent Ultimate, excepting HEHO and HZnn (which respectively represent D^)D and ]HQ with H Paragogic) in which the Accent is Penultimate. Q 2 228 HEBREW GRAMMAR. Of the Comparative forms, only "5IJb3, DDE?, |3&5, Dpb$, 10b?, have the Accent Ultimate; in all the rest it is Penultimate. 14. Of the Prepositions, those declined with Singular Possessive Affixes (Letter xix. § 23) follow the same rules as "HV , TT# 5 & c -> w ^h regard to the position of the Accent ; and those that are declined with Plural Affixes (Letter xix. § 23) follow vy#, ?pT# , &c. 15. The Demonstrative Pronoun H^N has the Accent Penultimate. 16. In the Tenses and the Imperative Mood of Verbs in their natural state, without any Objective Affixes, the Second Radical, whenever it has a Vowel, always bears the Accent, excepting only the Second Persons Plural of the Past Tense, to which the Formative Affixes Dtt and \F\ are appended, since these always have the Accent on the last syllable. In those Irregular Verbs, in which the Second Radical is dropped in forming some of the Persons, the First Radical takes the Accent : thus, — In the yp V} — cj? T , J??R, i?9&, ^Wfc* &c - > In the D^ia? ,~ 2D , D2D , 120 , &c. ; excepting, of course, forms ending in DJ^ and ]T) , in which the Accent is always Ultimate ; and excepting, also, forms in which the first radical is in the Ante- penultimate syllable; as T)20 , \nnD . In forms in which the final syllable is Compound, and involves a Long Vowel, the accent is, of course, necessarily Ulti- mate. 17. Numerous and somewhat intricate as these Rules must needs appear to be, they are, nevertheless, I LETTER LVI1I. 229 can assure your Grace, of the very highest importance ; and this not merely so far as regards the writing of correct and elegant Poetry, in the style of Luzzatti, Wessley, Eichenbaum, &c, but also as furnishing some- times the only means of distinguishing between words altogether different from each other in meaning, though the same in appearance with the exception only of the position of the Accent ; thus, for example, in ^T2 "Hfttt [Prov. i. 2] words of understanding, the Accent upon n^3 berns* Ultimate, this word is of course a Noun with the il of the Feminine termination (§ 12 Rule viii.) ; but in MWH nr3 [Ps. v. 1] consider my meditation, the Accent on H3\3 being Penultimate, this word is at once known to be an Imperative of the Verb pa with H Paragogic (§ 12 Rule xiv.). In like manner, in [Jonah iii. 10] " ( . . . 13$ "»? ) that they returned from their evil way," the Accent on ttW being Penulti- mate, this word is known to be the Past Tense of the Verb 2V2/ to return, the Second Radical of which being dropped, the first then takes the Accent (§ 16); but in ITT] 13t£/ [Gen. xxxiv. 29] they took captive and spoiled, the Accent on ^2$ being Ultimate, we see that this word is the Past Tense of D2W to take captive, the Second Radical of which, since it bears a Vowel, takes, therefore, the Accent (§ 1G). 18. It has been already stated (§ 12, Rule ii.) that circumstances sometimes shift the position of the Accent of a word ; that the 1 which converts the Future into a Past shifts, in certain cases, the Accent from the Ultimate to the Penultimate Syllable has been observed at an earlier period of our study (Letter xxxv. § 1), and that the "I which converts the Past into a Future sometimes shifts the Accent from the Penultimate to 230 HEBREW GRAMMAR. the Ultimate Syllable has also been mentioned (Letter xxxv. P.S. a). There is, however, another case in which the Accent is shifted from the Ultimate to the Penulti- mate Syllable, not through the influence of the *\ Con- versivum, but owing merely to Euphony, viz., — When of two successive words the first one (that is, the one to the right), has a Conjunctive Accent on its final syllable, and the second one is a Mono- syllabic word with a Distinctive Accent (or a Dis- syllabic word with a Distinctive Accent on its first syllable), then, in order to avoid the concurrence of two Accents, the Conjunctive Accent of the first word is in general drawn back to the Penultimate Syllable, the Distinctive Accent of the second word remaining where it was; thus [Gen. i. 5] H^S Sift "(The darkness) He called Night" where the Second Radical of N"1£ having a Vowel, the Accent of this word ought properly (§ 16) to be on that Second Radical, i.e., Ultimate; but in consequence of ni'b having a Distinctive Accent on the first syllable, the Conjunctive Accent of K"l£ moves back from the Ultimate to the Penultimate Syllable. And so, ... ^ nt^j/l [Gen. xxxvii. 3] And he used to make for him, &c, where, for the reason just mentioned, the Accent of Hfe^l ought (§ 16) to be on the Second Radical, i.e., on the final syllable ; but on account of its too great proximity to the Distinctive Accent Tifcha [Letter ix. § 9] on the word 1/ , the Mercha of ntf^l moves back from the Ultimate to the Penultimate Syllable. This shifting back of an Accent for the reason just explained, is by the Hebrew Grammarians denominated D^oj/con mTp laso Tina :id: A drawing back on account of the proximity of the Accents ; LETTER LVIII. 231 and in such a case the Accent drawn back is degraded to the level of a Metheg (Letter ix. § 14), and therefore can- not be followed by either Dagesh or a Shvah quiescent [Letter xi. § 9, and xii. § 2, Rule iv.]. But when the Accent of the word to the right is Distinctive, then, in consequence of the slight rest occasioned by itself, its proximity to the Accent upon the following word, when Monosyllabic (or upon the first syllable of that word when Dissyllabic), is not felt so much as to require the shifting of the first Accent; as, J ^K /^-*HD [Numb, xxiii. 23] What hath God wrought? where the Tipcha (being a Distinc- tive Accent, Letter ix. § 9) remains upon the jinal syllable of ty§, though the following word, a Mono- syllable, has a Silluk. That two Conjunctive Accents should thus stand together, is a thing of very rare occurrence, and their proximity would not be perceived enough to require the first one to be drawn back. 19. In the following cases, the Accent upon the final syllable of the word to the right, though not Distinctive, does not withdraw, although a concurrence of two Accents is the consequence, — I. When the word to the right is a Noun or an Adjective, having in its last syllable a Long Vowel * Some say that whenever the word upon which the drawing-hack should take place is preceded by a word which is joined to it by Mahhiph, the lirst Accent is not drawn back, as, HvS S"jn -> » [1-ai. xl. 26] Who created these? but there are so many instances in which this does not hold good, that I think it a rule not to be relied upon ; thus we have (to quote two of the many instances that present themselves), — *pfe bD^-lV [Xumb. xxiii. 24] Until he shall eat [//«>] pre//, :^na ^n-bv [Cant. ii. 17] I'poti [the] mountains of Bcther, in both which instances the Conjunctive Accent is drawn back in spite of the Makkiph. 23:2 HEBREW GRAMMAR. followed by a quiescent Shvah, whether expressed or understood, as, Klft hlV [Levit. xxv. 12] it is a Jubilee, Kin "liHD [Levit. xiii. 37] He is clean ; II. When the Penultimate Syllable of the word to the right is a Compound Syllable, i.e., when it is formed by a Vowel followed by quiescent Shvah or by Dagesh- forte ; as, : h nSpj] [Levit. iv. 26] and it shall be forgiven him, tt^K ")3T "^? [Exod. xxxiii. 11] as a man ivould speak, &c. ; III. When an accent would, if thus drawn back, clash with, or come into too great proximity to, the Accent on the preceding word; as Niri RjfeP 8 1 ] [Deut. xix. 6] he [was] not hating. IV. When the accent that should be drawn back is upon any one of the syllables DJ? , ]J1 , Dp , or |J) attached to Verbs, as these cannot, under any circum- stances, be without an Accent. 20. In a very few instances the Accent is drawn back to the Antepenultimate syllable, which commonly, however, is only the case when the Vowel of the Penultimate syllable happens to be a Slight Vowel; as irP rnDV2 [~Isai. 1. 8] Let us stand together, where -at t : ->- L. -1 miDj/3 being the form produced by affixing Paragogic 7\ to TiC#3 , the Pathach beneath the V is consequently a Slight Vowel. 21. We sometimes meet with a word having two Accents, as Dyflpig [Numb. xv. 21] your dough, D^Iin^pn [Esth. i. 10] Those that were serving ; in such cases the first Accent has merely the power of a Metheg. 22. Having thus completed the remarks I had to make upon the Positions of the Accents (a subject which I must again press upon your Grace's notice as of the utmost importance), I have now to fulfil my LETTER LV1II. 233 promise of presenting to your Grace a full Table of all the Accents, which I cannot help regarding still as a matter rather of curiosity than of sterling utility to the Hebrew Student, since, as far as Inter-punctuation is concerned, the few accents which I gave at a very early period (Letter ix.) are in general amply sufficient for practical purposes. That the Accents admit of two grand Classes of which the one is composed of Accents which are called Distinctive (as causing a rest or pause), and the other of Accents called Conjunctive (as causing a word, to which any one of them is attached, to be read in close connexion with the word or words following it), your Grace already knows. You are also aware that of those called Distinctive, there are various subdivisions with regard to the degree of rest or pause which they severally represent. The fancy of the ancient Hebrew Grammarians led them to dignify the Distinctive Accents generally with the name of DV&D rulers, and to assign to their several classes or subdivisions the titles of D'HQp * emperors, D^07D kings, D v "]t£f ])rinces, and D^TpS officers, which serve respectively to point out the several shades of their power and influence ; while the Conjunctive Accents, admitting of no distinctions in their several powers, are all classed under the one title of DTTU^Q servants. • : t : From a deep sense of the deference due to those Legislators of Hebrew Grammar, I beg leave to repre- sent the Accents here, in accordance with their classifi- cation of them, in a Table showing their names (in Hebrew), their shapes, and their positions ; the arrange- ment in each class of the Distinctives being in a descend- ing order of value. * Lit., C C ■ •ft 13 s a a= m z tr D •y— G7 Of D fo- ri Z:- C Z:- c- m c- z D:- •r- D z 3 cr cr «^»- CJ.. z r- r> z sujjoj | 00 ^j H> c ; W D l/J . — i U « fc. to •J- r r i M' r,i^ n. p •£.. . '9: M " B? p, zz §► s a r C" ,T- r c •BOXJO^ CP ,4 ** a o CO « S o c fe^s •o 5 0-0,5 :> — 0) ta-'S 3 i /- o ° f--.s fe fc a bT smioj w-: p- #-: p? To: T -P- • Spt r z •#- n -r- Z" J?:. '&.. fc«- r s ^ p.. § P ° •o £■ -P? t-.. .? I— r-_p. r - r- }-> L m r fc- * r z z "9n z r PI:- m c .2 •eujjoj t» ai to IS ^1 ^ *tPH o s « sj J3 E- ■G p- ^ f- rf ^ O 0) £< "3 rG 3H si F o o o % > CO .^ > eg O 05 » s "2 £ C QJ cd «> oa OT ^ — s TO b-J <& ~2 QJ ^ r— < C m ^ a S3 P> > 0) o +; c u •-P ft § g-3 £ -5 S a; u u cc • — '.is ■5 as « ^ &£* 3 X! 05 0) O ■5 O +^> O « "SlSi-s S> ►* ^ oj c »■£ Bl rS ■" OS +- o ... « r i S * I • - ^T fe ^ c -" -S ft'g S o o CO -r- 2 8 ^* C P- OJ r-H a> C C 5 CU QJ « 2 fe CO CO p- CD QJ •- c -^ S Jh ^ QJ a is . o cj-l • < X 2 0' QJ ^ O e S =« -^ ^ a t pS-5-fi C3 ^- > O r— ^2 "° » _ co g g ? f: |l hi. (h J? QJ fc.JS ci Z QJ co »J S -= co Q. QJ O c "3 to "S ft LETTER LVIIF. 235 It will here be perceived that of the Distinctive Accents there are Of the First Class ... 2 ,, Second ,, . . . 4 „ Third „ . . 6 ,, Fourth „ . . G In all . 18 And of the Conjunctives . 8 Altogether . . 26 They are by the Hebrew Grammarians termed some- times ni3^5 , and sometimes D^EJ/u) ; the former (from ]j32 to produce musical sounds) because each one of the Accents corresponds to a certain Musical Note [Letter ix. P.S. (a).] ; and the latter (from C£p taste, also sense) because they help us to arrive at the true sense of a passage. That their positions and relative arrange- ment are altogether Irregular in The Books of Job, The Psalms, and The Proverbs, has already been ob- served to your Grace [Letter xv., page 7GJ ; these three Books are by the Hebrew Grammarians designated by the Memoria Tecfmica TON H?P ^ ie Books of Truth, the word rtEN being formed by the initial letters, N of ni\S Job, D of ^ITD Proverbs, and n of D'fy'TJjl Psalms. With regard, however, to the other books, the order of construction marked out by the accents should always be strictly adhered to ; and no Commentator, however great his name and credit, who might construe in a manner at variance with the arrangement and connexion of a sentence as defined by the Accents, ought to be attended to : as indeed we are enjoined by that mighty master of Hebrew lore, Aben Ezra, in those significant words, — 236 HEBREW GRAMMAR. riDNTi s 1 ? tfDtfcon rxrnn ^ ^ irKtt> tan-pa te Any interpretation which is not in accordance with the arrangement of the Accents, thou shalt not consent to it, nor listen to it. 23. Interpunctuation, as your Grace is well aware, is chiefly a matter of taste, — one author of undoubted authority may place a Comma where another author of equal credit may not : — and, again, it must depend very much upon the style and nature of a Composition, whether spoken or written, since the more solemn and impressive the subject, the more will pause and resting be employed ; while, on the other hand, the livelier the strain, the more rapid and unbroken will be the flow of its expression. Now The Hebrew Bible being of all books the most solemn and sublime, and its language of all languages the most dignified and impressive, it hence results that one great and fundamental principle of Hebrew Inter- punctuation is this — to pause wherever it is possible — i.e., that wherever the flow of ideas will admit of a Pause being made without any injury to the sense, there a Pause must be made, of greater or less duration, according to circumstances. Thus, for example, if in an English translation, the first two verses of Genesis should be given in accordance with the Hebrew Inter- punctuation, they would read thus : — Ver. 1. "In the beginning GOD created " the Heavens | and the earth. Ver. 2. "And [as for] the earth it was without " form | and void | and darkness [was] upon the " face of the deep | | | and [The] Spirit of GOD | | " [was] moving upon [the] face of the waters." LETTER LVIII. 237 If your Grace will read these words aloud, you will feel that additional solemnity is given to them, but that nevertheless the sense is not at all injured by the frequent Pausing. 2 I. In the University Examinations for the Hebrew Scholarships at Cambridge, the candidates are required not only to write Hebrew Composition, but also to supply the Vowels and Accents to passages selected from The Hebrew Bible given to them without points. This is as it should be, since this is undoubtedly the most sure method of ascertaining the respective merits of the candidates ; for should one get up by heart The whole Hebrew Bible, so as to be able to repeat it from beginning to end, and yet be unable to write a line of Hebrew correctly, or even to supply the Points regularly to a passage from The Hebrew Bible set before him without the points, he certainly could not have the least shadow of a claim to the very lowest degree of Hebrew scholarship. Now with regard to the Vowel-points, the Examiners doubtless expect, and have a right to expect, that they should be supplied precisely as they are given in The Hebrew Bible (except, of course, in the case of anomalies, where the scholar would naturally give the more correct form), since the principles of Grammar are herein involved : but not so with regard to the Accents ; in their case it is merely required that the candidate should show a know- ledge of the several Distinctive powers of the D"»7fHO , and the proper CTHJ^P to serve as Conjunctives to them, and, by correctly dividing the sentences into their parts, should show that he understands the true bearing and sense of the passage. To require the Hebrew scholar to assign exactly the same accents as occur in The Bible would be indeed 238 HEBREW GRAMMAR. most unreasonable, since this is the province merely of the Chanter — who, in the Synagogue, chants from a Roll of Parchment, without either Vowel-point or Accent, in accordance with the Accents as they are given in our accredited Printed Bibles ; and who, therefore, is obliged to get the exact Accents off, like the Musical Notes belonging to a song, so as to be able by the ear to chant in proper time and tune ; but who, in nine cases out of ten, might be found to be utterly innocent of a know- ledge of Hebrew Grammar. — All that the scholar can be expected to do (provided he be not also a chanter) is that he should, as said just now, give an interpunctuation consistent both with the proper consecution of the Dis- tinctives with their respective Conjunctives, and also with the drift and meaning of the passage ; thus giving, as it were, to the picture, those finishing touches of light and shade which a skilful hand knows well how to employ with much advantage. The following few rules may serve as a slight outline of the principles to be observed in the Interpunctuation of Hebrew sentences, should your Grace feel disposed to give your attention to the subject. In the case of a verse consisting of only two Clauses (Verses of only one Clause being comparatively but very few) a Silluk ( : - ) will, of course, close the second Clause (being at the end of the Verse), and an Ethnach (-) will be attached to the final word of the first Clause. This being done, it is best to go through the verse backwards, i.e., from the end to the beginning ; then, if there be a word or words before the Silluk (i.e., between it and the Ethnach), upon the word, either next before or next but one before the Silluk, on which the idea can LETTER LVIII. 239 first rest, there must be a Tipcha ; and similarly in regard to Ethnach, if it have a word or words before it ; whence we have the great Rule, — I. Either next or next but one before Silluk, and before Eth nach, there must a Iwai/s be a Tipcha, pro- vided only there be a word to receive it. When the Tipcha stands upon the word next but one before the Silluk, the intervening word must have Merclia, which is the legitimate n~}VQ to the Silluk ; and when the Tipcha before the Ethnach is next but one from it, the word intervening between these must have Munach, the legitimate T\~\t&Q of the Ethnach ; whence we deduce this Rule, — II. The proper Conjunctive Accent for connecting a word with Silluk is Mercha, and the proper Con- junctive Accent for connecting a word with Ethnach is Munach. It follows necessarily from Rule I. that when between the Silluk and the Ethnach there is only one word, this word must have the Tipcha, however intimately it may be connected in sense with the word having Silluk ; and so if there be before the Ethnach only one word, this must have the Tipcha, however nearly it may be connected in sense with the word having the Ethnach. N.B. It must be borne in mind that words united by Makkiph are always reckoned as one. If there be a word before either the Tipcha of the Silluk or that of the Ethnach, and it be connected in sense with the word having Tipcha, the Conjunctive 240 HEBREW GRAMMAR. Accent to be given to this word is properly Mercha, this being the HTJ^Q for which the Tipcha has the predi- lection. But if there be not this connexion in sense between the word having Tipcha and the word before it, this latter will have a Zakeph-Gadowl or one of the slight Distinctives, as Reviah, Tevir, or Pashta. Bearing in mind these few remarks, let us now con- sider how many cases we can have in the Second Clause. I. Two words, II. 0> Three „ f 1 8- P a < III. - Four „ ~ either : pV?D Nn^CD *O"10 or Ip^D iSpiD Nn2tt as the case may be. ( either : p'te 821D NHSED Kp"lD -j or : p)o khdei jqho ^:n (a) (. as the case may be. Next let us consider the cases we can have in the I. Too words, II. Three 51 III. Four c< First Clause. mn» Nnaco (either mflK NnDtD X21D J or mnx mia xnaco ) " -i ». ( as the case may be. either mr»K miD NHD^) *OHD or mn« NHtiLD tflHD ^21 (B) as the case may be. a Or Zakeph-Gadowl, or Tever, or Pashta, as the case maybe. LETTER LVIII. 2 1 I Should either the first or the second clause have more than four words, any one of the following- forms, suitable to the number of words and to the sense, may be intro- duced : — bVD r\2M2 tfpT *1P? njia KBtato lana upzn s s! ?tk $6ip •vnn wn We have hitherto considered only Verses of Two Clauses, and these last formulae serve for the minor divisions of greater or less importance in such Clauses. But we sometimes have Three main Clauses in one Verse, in which case we may have two Ethnaclis and a Silluk in the Verse, and the above rules and formulas for the first clause hold equally then for each of the first two clauses. To the case of a Verse consisting of only one clause the laws and formula? given above for the final clause of the verse must be applied. I must observe, that we have the privilege of uniting a short word to another word by Makkiph, provided no VOL. II. R 240 HEBREW GRAMMAR. pause or rest is required upon the first of them, which word, when so united, of course requires no Accent. I might, without much trouble, have entered much more fully into this matter, and have given a far more detailed and particular account of the Arrangement of the Accents, and the Laws of their Consecution, but I think that the rapid sketch I have here traced out will be sufficient for the purpose I had in view, namely, to give your Grace a slight introduction to these principles : and I cannot help thinking that even in The University Examinations for Hebrew Honours, a Candidate who should have a thorough acquaintance with these few rules, and a facility and readiness in applying them, would be well able to give ample proof to his Examiners that he was not unacquainted with the system of Hebrew Interpunctuation. I am proud to hear that the few specimens of Hebrew Poetry in Verse by Wessley, G'verol, &c, given in my last, have so pleased your Grace that you do me the honour of requesting some more. In answer to this request, I may, perhaps, offer the following Epigram to your Grace's notice, which I am the more tempted to give here, from the hope that, should its style not be insufferably bad, it may, perhaps, serve to relieve, in some measure, the tedium which I fear that the dry matter of this long Letter must have produced. LETTER LVIII. 243 I ... T • • t v: ■• : : • t sp^ra cps^ aa ^ ahi ^n nHfiQ ^riqj^o n 1 ? Dn 1 ? Dfe6# Da ^iDfl paa ^pnp Di*n ?pja n$ nftn pb -". mn *»vdx na nna p\D3 nniaa ^ run - ... t : v t - - ' v '•• - -: • urh ••nna t: J j?aq pop ijW npN na Drnp D\i^ tjj fyan \j.nb K^a ■?« . nam rfta nna moan \n imna - ... - - - t t - l • : • : mcton nka "rise ova te^ — ?*pa miaa \y onty naan ^as— D^a d^ nan — ".r» KVin noa 1 ? nam— saaK-^K I • t t I v v - •• • : " t v • -: jraann ntfNS nann \m n dj ^ : rjyyi |tq» #53 ex'sn sa njw — ■"• 1^3y ^ ; 55 W nnK nia^j? ^ nafi qy-i Vlpa tfaan Kifra inay— " ! nshn ib — " . qyan $ ins s 1 ? nBtyj? ca ! hd \ti " T^nn ?p^ nan \? PT1NHJ " — "• Tfa nap 1 ? n^ ^a nna nna narn bj;aa ^yatfa nns in—nBiap k 1 ? *|« — ". *7J73 ^infc nin Dinp ova \m jha dk R 2 244 HEBREW GRAMMAR. ?ian nan niTiDn vh$ i «a ^»^ *h " ^nny ^ to uvn jrisy )% to ^ " r»V»in rf? rnn n?^ ino nn Da dk " 7 - nSvs ^ nni« ifcn— ^ sjra-g sa T nan : 5prfrg Vs ^ina ^ip? »np Dip nn£ ahn — " . 51135? tfs>a dh-p "tya f p" ^rm " rw nio D^nbai ■as *p3i D'aico ' ? PVDn "»3 nSi ^ no — ^3E hds & ; p.3 ' t : - t ' t : • - • v ■ v • d^sk nna nms — *h trw nans ^ ■ T - - - t t : 1 : 1 •• v t t . t^P JttDg ^ ^3n3 3^5 ^ fi« " D\T)3 to VD^7 ns 17"»3 Di^n mp \n nt^a ' — ". 5pnnn ^a ^2^2) ^b bk&W niDj^ 1 ? ' rbx *h inn nty i nfrn tjh sa nns : 5p*r vp$ *)$ Din paan nb) nb iv : ^£# \t9n3 ^« *&rr D#an ^rpnn " Ttapn n^ ^t nnj; ^ nya ^ ; I? 1 ? ^ngi ron? nr6 pn dk ]n : 5|T ppn li'os 1 ? r^inoi : nnB# n 1 ? m Es&to dk nason ni dn ' t : - t > : :• t : • • t : - : • 5yy#3 1^5 yx Tynp-izi ">$ ;hk ^n ' 5|ri2nn 5^ nnj£ nyi pn ^ ^ ' nine Di^ r»n nniN ^ ■b ! ^aa ^n : t : - • - •• T • ■ T 5|ahT to k^k WDJ/ jjp nijy " " ^rons ca *]$ ^"7 \njrn i nr n^.n tra LETTER LV1II. 245 ^2 CO H O W >-? P < W H W « Q O o p Si ss <0 •J «*P ^ 3 ^ SS S5 o ?5 c r r" r r* r> rr- rv n- n r> r> rr r r r* rv n^ n>- n -Of- £, o ^ r\ *\ r. r r r r r> n- rr- n • r . j— r . r : r^ i_L rn- n : r r r" r n*- n« rr- n r r r r rr- n : - — a n a r r r r- rl 1 - r> rr- rr- r~ r : r« r : r •*— ^* rt n.. r> r- u c r r a 3 D 1 C- n i l±: o 3 O $1 S *s 5^ 9* ^ ^» rn-- #— •• § 5 § 5 r m , «-^. O r • ph a Hi nil niL - ^ ■^ *> »< s II ni- r n J e • »\ BW" iS: «"« r\ rs #•1 r- #— *• #— .•• #— -*• #— ■ r * "' m nil Hii n^ • »-i * _ 1H 0-%t- *" 1 : '*~ n r *N a p«'" mi *** #> r\ r- r\ n #— •• #— " #— ... #— • U ^ nil »■■»' nu- • ^h »~w o 1^ rv 0- 8 49 e a #— t- ^ CN #N £1 nil nil nsc Til n • rr- Or- r~ 0- /ili- fJ rr- n- i* : a ^-^ #N «^ »N rs *— •• #— ." # — •• #— -■• ru m nil m *^' r\: *-»! r-%: r *-% r •soxijjv 'HIAV 246 HEBREW GRAMMAR. O W o o > U td »-s Q fa H fa « o o o Q Jz; S> a ^ p p 7* i F^FF -v ^ J> r 1 "- a p- H: a »-v. #-!•■ #-v- »"!•• *-i- «-v »-|. «T r r r r, r i- r 1 *" : ^ 2: rV n= #-v- »""»•• /-»•• #""»•• »~i. t »-v «-i. r r r r r— r r- r- r- n: C_ p,.. ,J a rs rs #\ p. p. r t- to p • ^ r« r : r r ~V" o ~e •*- s O , , u <-> o c^ S^- ^ > .{^ «o Sj P' a 5 § *S^ "8 S 9 ^ ■ a •69X W y T^IAl .2 v 52. .r r 6 5C« P. r — ■-—■ r** rv n rv ~$ Stf t*i t\ Oh rih r-iy r-\- n rv rv rv *~ ° S- r, a © #■» rv c* ar r\.. t^» r|: rv rv n. ^ F~ rv- /- . r e i=- rv- ^v «-it. ** »* c r* n Ssff ' s n rv rv n fit rr- r> a IT" r r> fj ^— - #n ^ #t r> =v £V £V £\i *"~lh r-\+ •"»>- ni- rv rv rv rv CO P-i 1 -v ' •eaxiyy i 1)!AV D a r- O r- 0- a © GY: r §5 © «» D Q £ £ q. d rv n a- ex f>\* a : > A r* r* r £ a f- r= a r* *^ »* *"* D Q D £ rn.. r,T Clp CI; r r r r r- rv fv n r\ r* r- r r r *- n: f^ h : rj fj D D D Q CX f.\- 61- Clf r r r 1 r* •sdxiuv xiiiAV 1 c — t< c tc o > S||| t r: ^ - ■§ T « C3 -S .fa <£ *. i ^ t R fci *" Cm "5 rt -S ed «i d O « « j •• g t.^ * — •-> 33 a 3 - 9 5 ^- ° 2 « r « *5 — »-■ ^-< o £*-i r3 -*-i -o °.S, | s |1 CS 3 2 3 C O 3 o 3 ^ ^ > = "S *" "tc 8 *S .S p» ^ - a u * % s ° fa *2 rt C ^ 2 g ^ n-l ^ H +-> 3 >^» ^ in C>5 5 * g « o 8 i n 1 jf *. a * .2; -S _E *^' 05 248 HEBREW GRAMMAR. Q P P fc i—i fc O o P H O P p < p H P PS O fc O u p a CS co CD £1: ►48 OcS 5 c5? £9 e Hf n>- *> H: 11 H- IT: n F|»- /!»" O: a *"* *N *"* •> n- q, a o. ~ H:. |s- n: Q. J3. Q- Q« ..r--_r-..--C;K_r- n n« J> r> *"* •"» «N CS _r-.._r*».-r«i-_r-t- /H F|: 0. O: (^ •saxiyv WAV CQ ^3 o 03 CO s b CO ,B co CD .a .2 £ rv PlV r- r 03 t- n:- S-c co t- ■to ■"d a u 6 ^ <3 a n: r : r a 03 O g co -t-> O *-> CO El- Pi- 5« o3 n pt r n_ IT u co co r CO to 1 5^ Pl> r CO 03 o B c3 CO w co c co El CO Ti u El: I- CO a n co c3 Fh C o co co CO co r0 c3 c3 CO co B S3 03 n- co fr- 03 c3 a s CO Fh CO h- 1 CO O CO B 3 O co a o c3 •"3 CO t> co CO O CO o CO > 03 CO a a o fc CO a a 03 #\ CO a a o fc e2 CO > 03 a «B co El: Pt: 03 CO t3 03 Fh nd a o CO CO co CO o 55 co CO 03 03 ^ o CO 03 S3 CO 03 co a o H3 S3 S3i S3 Fl:- ri:- • »* co CO ro J> CO -* «B CO Pli- r CO 'ft 3 ^4 co ■S fc 03 S r-. -a t> o co 03 £ D CO 3 fee a CO a o CO 03 CO > CO CO CD CO CO o ^4 03 03 CO 03 a o co CO co CO bo a .2 S e+H .a-"- o r> 73^ CO t3 03 .CO ^3 03 03 ni Pii co co r" a co J— p to F o co a co CO a Pn 03 o CO X m 03 CO > co CO CO CO CO O S3 Ph co 03 03 CO • f-« 03 CO «B O CO 'os ^2 4 03 co CD 03 r0 ^ ^ r. «a CO o a & | c 03 2 ^ g .15 5 CO t> CD a CO ^1- aci- r 53 NO r r pq fc* LETTER LV1II. 249 d 03 ,3 s +■> ... a X •— •#- «*■! M« r CO a -^ f— C*_i «2 O ■u CO o d d 3 — O . to s fc n o O 3 n o +J n= ,d o9 r +-> r3 -4-> 6 03 > 03 03 03 CN ~* J n 03 •n B» 03 n > t-i CD r ■g CO a o , ^ 6. e n n 3 x •~ r .n n IJ t3 1 5= d q> H^H: r liJ: rir r^i: r r" r ^»- t^t- fj: a ^ ^- : a DJ: cjr lit I— r h i"" '&■■ •&, "S: t~X.- r • r - r r r* r- u ^a rxr n^: hlt nj- P r-rrr ^ ^ ^ 43 a Q J ? - ■: u CO '/. O d -sK O o to d OS ,3 c o ^ o p o to d "3 c "* 5.. .2 <£ 5 -5 ~ < S 5 ^ 5 o - © 3 CO — i 3 " o ••> 03 O co *=!•• d r>- eg g d J te CD o s ^ O co ,3 co 99 O d o • — ■— ; i— i o x P u o P T3 to 3 eS rd o B rt -4-- CO CD O CO o co -73 rt rl 3* cu s- n cu *» -d /^>- a!8 -X * x^ co > ". — , =Si a- a r r ^ o SI co 3 T3 fll- CJ c !■-<§> 02 .22 c?5 .5 5 t V. 3 2 £ d - P-i r-l ^ > i •> cc r «h CO ° co CJ CO CO o Ph to 03 i — I 13 Z 3 -Ti r n. CO ■« rt ^3 ,; *- J .2 ^ rt 3 O I 03 ■S8x©v WM 35 rt P co »-i .2 -d ••> rt a d . *r do d ^ i •S O ,id ? H 2 ^ o c rt 03 .3 250 HEBREW GRAMMAR. [A brief notice of the following Forms will be sufficient.] (7J/1B) 3}tfJ an organ, w. aff. "»3JV ; fyjlltf a /©#, Plu. D^ttf* (7j£2) 3P3 rt writing. Most Nouns of this form are declined exactly like those of the form 7J^S ; thus DH? , i.e. HP? , gives Vjn3, TjZin:? , &c. ; Plu. D'gn? , i.e. '^nn:? . Some, however, in the Plural, and with Affixes, change the Kaivmets into Pathach followed by Dagesh ; as 1^ time, w. aff. "•$»?, &c. ; Plu. D^PT. (7J/3) 3KT « wo// [the same in construction], w. aff. and in Plu. it is declined like Nouns of the form 7#2 ; as vjg? , &c. ; Plu. &y&\ . 1S2 « pfe, or ice/7, gives Plu. ninS2 , i.e. Hl"IW? and HhH3 . (/1J/S) TllD a lord [the same in Construction], w. aff. and in Plu. declined like Nouns of the form TJL'S ; as "IT53 , &c. ; Plu. D"»T?| • Since Nouns of this sort are the same in the Absolute as in the Con- structive, it is doubtful whether the Absolute state of those which occur only in the Inflexions is of the form ^Vr 1 or '"^p , since both these forms give the same Declension ; thus, with regard to the Absolute form of the Noun whose Constructive state is TH^ beloved of, there is doubt whether it should be considered to be "Pf. or T^ . (7U?3) "lion an ass [the same in Construction], w. aff. and in Plu. declined like Nouns of the form 7fyB ; as nicn , &c. ; Plu. D^lDTJ . (7J*S) D1_ll a myrtle [the same in Construction] ; Plu. D^pin . XD'Zft. honey, gives w. aff. ^^. , &c. LETTER LVIII. 251 (^B) 333 * a thief, i.e. 333 (w. aff. U33 , &c.) ; Plu. DU33 (w. afF. ^333 , &c). na» « Sabbath, gives i.e. nattt , w . a ff. '•flStf, fcc. ; Plu. ninatf , i.e. n in227 . Nouns of this form having for their second radical a letter which does not admit Dagesh, compensate for this Dayesh by changing the Pathach of the first radical into Kawmets, which is also Permanent; as ^"V? « horseman, Plu. D*tl?nS . "When the second radical is n , the first radical takes Segot, which is also Permanent ; as ^n3 a coal, Plu. E^?ra . (7^S) T"1N:* a mighty one [the same in construction], (w. aff. T«!S. &c.); Plu. D^TIS, i.e. ^K (w. aff. When the second radical is a letter which cannot receive Dagesh, compensation for it is made by the Pathach of the first radical being changed into Kawmets, which is retained throughout the Declension ; thus, T"7 a strong one, Plu. C'S'Hy . pij/S) pirn* a chain [the same in Construction], Plu. nipirn (this Noun happening to take the Feminine Plural). (71J/S) TlSjtf* a pillar [the same in Construction], Plu. DH1E# . When the second radical is a letter that cannot receive Dagesh, compensation for this Dagesh is made by changing the Pathach of the first radical into Kate nuts, which remains throughout the Declension ; as, V^^ a diligent one > l' m - ^SHTin • (tyS) 122* a talent (money), i.e. 122 (w. afF. n33 , &c), Plu. Dn|5, i.e. n?3 (w. afF. n33, &c, djh?9, Di7i|3). * Nouns, wdiose first radical has a short Vowel followed by Dagesh, have that Vowel Permanent throughout the Declension (see Letter xix. § 22, Rule v.). 252 HEBREW GRAMMAR. (b%%) Dv\S* a dumb man [the same in Construction], Plii. D^Kf • "When the second radical is a letter that cannot admit Dagesh, compensation for this Dagesh is made by lengthening the Short- Cherik of the first radical into Tsayre which is Permanent throughout the Declension ; as, W 1D a deaf man, Plu. E^^HO ; S33 a throne, makes the Plu. riiSpS . (hfyS) "li23* a mighty man. Neither the Short-Cherik nor the Chowlem alter throughout this Declension ; except in the case of "liSV a bird, which in the Plu. gives D"H£).V , the Vowel point beneath the S being, of course, not Chateph-Kawmets, but Kawmets-C/iateph, i.e., Short Kaivmets. (See Letter vii. P. S.) [Having gone through the Declensions of those Nouns in which all three radicals, and those alone, make their appearance, we come now (1) to Nouns which take additional letters, besides their three radicals, — (2) to Nouns in which all the three radical letters do not appear, — and (3) Nouns in which the second, or the third radical is a quiescent letter. These are given here, in order to shew the forms by which they are technically designated, the chief object being to point out what letters in these Nouns are, or are not, radical : as to their respective Declensions, the requisite informa- tion on this head must be derived from a good Lexicon.] * Nouns, whose first radical has a short vowel followed by Dagesh, have that vowel Permanent throughout the Declension. (See Letter xix. § 22, Rule v.) j "">?)? a blind man, gives the Plu. n^l^V , and nD2 a lame man, gives Cnpp ? without the Dagesh of the second radical : liberty is taken with the Dagesh in these two cases, on account of the Shvah beneath the letter in which the Dagesh should stand. (Comp. Letter xvi. P. S. d). LETTER LVIII. 253 bO a> eo 5* d ^5 3 ■4-J 6 6 «8 • o «o SB pfil ■- e« 6 <4} MB CU to m 09 ^S rv ft pii' 3 r ^ 6 end • 6 ca CJ CJ I 5 co 8» co eo S5 £2 »1 «o e e <3 e « e «s H n s^ 1 « e H H >»•■ n M #-!•• Q n £> %- 5». pc- ^ C^ # # r n Oh n n r n n 0) CtH r n n r 1 - W O £ c r 1-5 ^3 0> +^ i-3 h3 *-> bi to < 1 OS fc tc O ■p B i— ( 'S H • -> O TAKING ADDI '•N • .N <^. ■ « O g <<> «»• O •to =o co co CO © <3 ^ handmaid ; disgrace ; instead of Short radical is Guttur * ^ =0 •^ =0 «o --« to CU ^* • *\ -- v. =0 a * CJ ft >i; %• » *^v ^V- c; #-V S & - 2 s c^ a * * • e* rv n n n r^v: •-* g 1 § n u FV n- P O ft n r l r F' r* rf c>-n % % Q v x> n n n r n n n n n tz r^ 01 • CI OJ »• n : r rr- Wf eot- we „„ .^< cm : ?i .. CN •• CO K nnrnnnnr: I-H I" — •• >— 1 ' ^- ' CI ■• ~l •■ -M •■ CO I- TO t- CO •■ n r: n n ci m- fi\ fix- rn-.rn fn> ci ^\" ^= ^v ^ ^A ^k ^\. r^ n rj^-p^r: n r n m»- £il /Hi fill ^jy &r ^t- t^ n n n -p 1 - 254 HEBBEW GRAMMAR. Q W D i— i H O «3 w H H W ►J < O o Q a i— < < H O o © CO CO s « « <8 CO CO co • co" to <■» CO co 8 <8 co 8 * r| " O n- p;: n: a c c c; E ^ co co 8 ?«. so J^> ~ £S K 5* CO c c; c, c %' O; rr,: £ g £ 8 co a** if- n - c £ Co © n £> m 3 r- X: •a c2 ca CO u C3 o S o o o c3 a o CO 1 e -8 CO 8 CO ^ CO cS --8 n.' ~ as-: n- £-• O' r* ^ c ^ £ E c. 8 «■<& 8 co r C5i O 5Si z G q !^ C «-H " 1— I '• ,_, •• J— I I— I ' rH • <— ' •"' «— I " I— I •• I— I " t— I I I— I * r— "' « :• « : e, ^^^"^ft CM p M v. •i •~ ?j 05 a e/5 s £ sj £ ^S ^ 05 >s *a s> s^ ~ 05 « « n n^ 5* rt-^T- ^ i> & ■fcf 6 • »\ 5*. =3 <» St 5i «s e i«0 «■ r r 1— r rz\y a- r* r C s-~^ ^-^ ^-^ <-^ •• *4 1 ■—1 1- 3 r ■> ^ !» O *-. C: w n ^3 civ. r-v ^v ^a ^ £a 256 HEBREW GRAMMAR. P W D i— i H O o W H H W ►4 O Q Q < I— I M < co P O s C ° =3 S? s 53 B e B 8 c s 5S b .9i « S S3 n, S3 &, S3 S3. Q so i •2, A <4i ^. So '•> B S $» ^ "7 B ^S cc •«>> ^^ b b .*j a. y c- S z, y pii fifrf* £];.&: a^ r »— < •• CM I- co CM CO co co co ■to B B *4 B b 9S» fl& '&•• *-!•- •f — r rr .22 OS b Q. Q. Q' %= *S' % *rr- CI.. »~v & a £ Q Q- Q' Q' ^i: ^' X # _ «j Cm O 8 Q. Q. Z £ a o - 3 -4-> 3 o o ■4-1 a 3 O o o cS c o r\» ?» © n CO s u u «ii c2 a en c C3 ••> 1 w -t-> IS > Si • * 5s s • CXI **N r ^ 9 1 > ■ * -«*j o 9 S3 -^ K^> £> ^ e S e »1 ow~K »> ?f *- ,: P -E^ Si see %. Y. %' rY; >t '&• r - ^; « ^ so I ca r y. , " so C> *3 Ss. « ^ Q C- r^ v G\ j^ -T-: 1- su CO c n SU y . n Q «• «■ Q tz n n c Q Nl- (Nl- -m : oi :• Cl OQfoOti eo i- rj :• P5 %' %: 3C' -^ »■ l ~* " co »• CO h r: h r: r n: c; c;- m- c; c; c; CM f « ! CM / ?i:- ~i n n n n c; Q t> #* n r n c; CA 5i. 5i: ii- CX Ci (A ^r-i- c c, 1 G- c;- /n CA fA c\. ^ w ^ ^v' n n n n fA fA VOL. II. 258 HEBREW GRAMMAR. NOUNS IN WHICH ALL THE THREE RADICALS DO NOT APPEAR. ( '"Hi/ (r. TIP) a congregation ; ( H7J/ , H J ?.) J -Kg ( r yy^ counsel, &c. ( 7JJD , J B) j^i^D (r. #£33) « planting. ( 'tki? , 3 ? p) y^ ( r - r^) a mwM? * ( ^D , 3 ' 2 P) "1^9 (r. "1^) « saw - (^1? , 35 ) 2 D) ^130 (r. 1/33) a fountain. (n^D, nje) njg»c (r. jna) a yiyst. (^iC , s 21 jo) 3^1D (r. 3^) a seaf, &c. (SjJiD , 3 r. i E) tt^RlO (r. £^) a snare, &c. rtyiC , 3 2 1 D) "10123 (r. "ID") correction, Sec. f^JTp', 3 '2 *»p) 11^5 (r. 1W) rectitude. ( hyn 3 2 e) #V£ ( r - -^) rt ^ w # s P reaa ' out > a couch, &c. (byin , 3 2 i ]n) 3£ ; in (r. 3ttP) aw inhabitant, &c. ( nSj/C , n 3 2 £) H^SC (r. ^Dj) a ruin, &c. ( njigD , n ; } ?. D) HD3D (r. ^Ji) a plague, &c. nn-!itt (r. ^-' , , or, according to some, 223), « pillar. (nSj/iE , H 3 2 i )0) nfchiD (r. ^H" 1 ) an inheritance, &c. (n^llQ , D J 2 i c) rntpiC (v. ID"*) a foundation, &c. (nSjJiE , n j ? i c) nyjgiB (r. \T) counsel, &c. LETTEB LV1II. 259 (njgin, rv^in) nnpin (r. ny) chastisement, &c. The Second Radical, whether dropped or retained, in the following forms, is a quiescent letter.* ( *72 , 3 1) 2% (r. 2W) a cloud, &c. j ""13 (r. 113) a stranger ; ^ ■ ' -' ( TT (r. Tir) <7>/ arrogant man, &c. c. ,U R ,, n j *>V a song ; v 7? ' J j rrfr talking, & , f Tf8 %A* ; P 1 *' 311 ) j Hi; fl *A™,&c. , ( pV& a street ; I 71J > ] J | nn spirit, &c. ( ^3, H ? J) HCj? (r. Dip) standing-corn, &c. ( H7| , H J l) rnj/ (r. T)J7) a testimony. ( PI^S , H 3 1 1) iTTtt> « S0«#. ( n5la , rifi i) nnip (r. Dip) sta*we. ( nS^D, II ;5 T l ) H£1D a whirlwind. (nSiS, n ?i i) nBG (r. KH3) sA«me, &c. ( n^2 , n 1 8 l ) nng (r. TljJ) a testimony. ( r6a, n il J.) nm (r. m3)re*f, &c, the Se utterance ; also, a thought, Sec. n 2 i) njttf a year, &c. •"* ? i) '"^5 a comer, &c. H J '*) H7J7 a burnt-offering, Sec. ft r 1) '"^ rt;i overthrow, Sec. , H 2 1 P) n.!3j?p possession, cattle, Sec. 71$ni2 a camp ; np_]?tt «133J \iwb TIEAri , and I cannot but feel pride, as well as pleasure, in your naming my recommendation as the cause of your having done so ; but the feeling uppermost in my mind is one of congratulation to your Grace on your acqui- sition of such invaluable Works; and of this I am sure, that when you will have read to some extent these masterly productions of those masterly Writers, you will feel that I neither have exaggerated already in having spoken as I have of their high Authority and unrivalled Excellence, nor do exaggerate now, when I say that no Hebrew Grammar, written in any other language, can be at all compared with these ; and further, that no one, who has not read, and cannot read these Grammars, has any claim whatever to be considered, or to consider himself, a Hebrew Scholar. With regard to the aid in studying these important Works, which your Grace does me the honour of requesting from me, I think that I cannot do better than give a List of the Grammatical Terms and Technicalities employed in them; such a List, therefore, will be appended to this Letter. But I must not forget that I have yet to fulfil a promise, long ago made, to give a detailed view of The Commemoration of the Virtuous Woman [Prov. xxxi. 10 — 31], upon which (since a Translation of it has already been offered in Letter xv., — which will, it is hoped, be referred to, — ) I have merely now to give some Critical and Explanatory Notes, in LETTER LIX. 265 addition to which all the Verbs will be analyzed, and those words also which cannot be found at once in a Lexicon in the form occurring- here. Before, however, proceeding to do this, I bog to offer the Hebrew Piece itself to your notice, written out in its Poetical Members, which will be seen to be chiefly Ternary, with a few Binary and Quaternary interspersed. The Alphabetical arrangement of its several Verses has already been noticed (Letter xv.). ■too DV3BO prn/i rfei i? H3 riss 11 t : - •• T - T t : v t t : jn-$n ate inn 1 ?!?! 12 rnga y$r}2 toyiy\ nniD rvtoKa nnvi u • t: t t : t piej-6 ioan pmso t : - , •_ ■ t ' t : ny? tu^ Dprn 15 •yiyi^a 1 ? phi innpm mfe no r ie ■• It • ■ v t t : t D"i3 rwBj maa naia ■ ■■ T "t I T jT V - ■ ; '. mm rij/a mjn n t : 2 t : t : t mnD aito-'O dd^e is . T ; -, • T -; T 266 HEBREW GRAMMAR. ilBhsa nnbu; nn» 19 t : • T VI I v t : t tv-: wb nfcna mss 20 •TV T : T T - I : v t t : • t v t: :bwn nn^a 1 ? ttrn-K 1 ? 21 V T • T " : T •T •••T T - T r6-nnfrj/ D'wq-io 22 t t : *r • - : - T : 1 t t : - : n^3 onwa mi3 23 t : - • t : t nbpfti njnfe^ HP 24 • -:- : - t : t *: - ntra 1 ? -nm-?iy 25 t : t t : \iim uvb pnfen-n n»aro nnns ma 26 t : t : t : t T njit^ 1 ?-^ iptrrnlrn nma niD^n rnaiy 27 t • -: t • b^h xb tvhyy orb) nn#R*i mn idp 28 t : - : - t v t 't n^mi n'Ti/a t : - :- t : - Vrt ifrj/ nto niaV 29 • T T T t t ••. r - • t : - : ^ ^am inn -)£# 30 t - : • * t : : • t nvp -nan nVisn 31 t vt • : • t : mfega ony^a m^mi LETTER LIX. 67 NOTES. Verse 10. D^BZ? pirrni Seeing that far beyond rubies. That the Prefix 1 sometimes represents seeina that, has been observed (Letter xlvi., § 13, I.). The Prefix D in the word D^SK? has here a comparative sense (Letter xxi., § 11). The word D^sjl occurs only in the Plural form ; opinions are divided with regard to its strict meaning, some thinking that it designates pearls, others corals, and others gems indiscriminately. As, however, the passage D\P33£ DV# 10"?*$ [Lament, iv. 7] must incontestably determine the colour of the CO^ to be red, I prefer following The Authorized English Version in this matter, in which the passage quoted is rendered They were more ruddy in body than rubies, in accordance with the meaning also assigned to the word in our present passage. This first Verse is plainly an exclamation of the Elcgist — " A Virtuous Woman (like the one we have lost) who, alas ! can find 1 Far above rubies would her value be ! " And then lie proceeds at once to lament over the Departed One, glancing rapidly over the several scenes and particulars of her life with that vivid flash of bright remembrance known only to a mind that has experienced that pang of parting, which the heart alone can feel, but " never tongue may tell." Verse 11. nCD3 Hath trusted (or, simply, trusted). A Past Tense, it will be observed ; in which Tense are like- wise most of the Verbs throughout the Piece; whence your Grace will now see for yourself that something relating to Time gone by must needs form the subject of the Poem; and it appears to me that any apparent difficulty arising, with regard to the view here taken of this Piece, must vanish in comparison with the insuperable diffi- 268 HEBREW GRAMMAR. cutties of translating, as is usually clone, so many Tenses in a manner altogether contrary to their true bearing, — difficulties which, from early bias, we have become accustomed to overlook. h^W in general signifies booty, spoil ; it is, however, usually taken here to represent gain, the sense of the passage being, that from the confidence reposed by the husband in so industrious and excellent a wife as the one about to be described, prosperity and every blessing could not but attend his family. Verse 12. in^DI . The Verb fej generally signifies to reward, to requite ; it is, however, also found in the sense of simply doing (good, or ill, to a person), as in ("Un ^10} 8*7 DK [Prov. iii. 30] if he have done thee no harm. Verse 13. iT§2 pan? tW-n And she wrought with [the'] willingness of her hands (i.e., with willing hands, — Letter xlvii., § 1, VI., N.B.). Here the Verb tytffil may either refer to the wool and the flax Objectively, when of course the Pronoun it or them must be supplied (Letter xlviii., § 15) ; or it may be taken as not referring to any Object, but simply and she wrought with willing hands, in the same Indefinite sense in which Jacob used the same Verb ."W [Gen. xxx. 30] "When (nfc#N) shall I work for my own house (or family) \ v ' The attributing of ^n willingness to hands is extremely Poetical, as we find it said of the sluggard [Prov. xxi. 25] ni^i/ 1 ? VT 13tfft his hands have refused to work, as though they had a will of their own ; and so Israel [Gen. xlviii. 14] VT n$ blty lit., gave (or impartedyintelligence-to his hands, as though his hands had themselves a will and intention to cross each other. LETTEH !.l\. 269 Verse 15. ^IQ 1' >'<['/ °f " wild beast generally, but sometimes, as here used simply for food or provision, as Wn?7 ll?3 TUP [^ s - cx i- ,r> ] HE hath given food to *Aewa that fear HIM. IW37 /'"'' ^' r household. IV2 generally means a Atmsi, but sometimes fAfi people 0/ a Aowse, i.e., a household, as HiH^riK 1^3 W31 ^5«1 [Josh. xxiv. 15] Bwtf / A7id wy /.'o//.s-e (i.e., household) will serve JE- HOVAH. pT\ lit., a statute., law ; also, as here, a rule or regula- tion, the sense being that she assigned to her maidens their several tasks. Verse 16. ITjiP HDPJ stands Elliptically for mfr ni:pb nDcr or PHfr rinpS n»»? sAe thought to V T ' : ' T : T V T - ' - T TIT «/ foiy a field. (Comp. Letter xlviii. § 3 — 5.] innjJfll . Ujh stands here for J13J? to bin/, a sense which Ben Zev also assigns to this Verb in the two passages, Cipn ^np 1 ? [2 Sam. iv. 6] [//At] traders in wheat, ]}1 frnp}^ [Nehem. v. 3] that we may buy corn, as The English Translation also renders it in this passage. JT33 "HBO lit., /Vflw f/t DV31 pWo When she sees that her traffic is prosperous, her lamp goes not out by night, she busies herself in her work night and day. The Verb QJ/lD , though primarily referring to the sense of taste, as [1 Sara. xiv. 29] HTH &y\ ESJ7J9 WDV& ^ Because I have tasted a little of this honey, sometimes refers also to perception of the mind, as nj»T HiCO \3 1N~n ICi^ lit., Taste ye (i.e., perceive), and see that Jehovah is good. H^v>3 In the night. This is the "Hp , the 2TO being T73 (see Note on njLfp] verse 16). Verse 19. ilH^U/ yT /«?r to^s s/^ put forth. Ty7W , though mostly signifying to send away, is sometimes used, in connexion with T , to express j?wft in g forth the hand, as [Gen. iii. 22], IT n 1 ?^") }$ /csf he put forth his hand, &c. Verse 20. The idea is, that though so busy with active duties, and though so intent on the well-being of her family, still she overlooked not the wants of the indigent, but that the same hand which held the distaff she opened wide to the poor, and those same hands that handled the spindle she stretched forth to the needy. Verse 21 . D"U&> Scarlet. The contrast of U^IW scarlet with jllL' snow is a figure employed also by Isaiah in the well-known passage [Ch. i. 18] W2 1 ?) &#$ 0^3 D^KEf] 1\T CK Though your sins be as scarlet, they shall be white as the sxow. Some, however, take here D\3$ as equivalent to D?3if' , and give it the sense twofold, i e., all her household 272 HEBREW GRAMMAR. were clothed with double- garments, but this clearly weakens the Poetry of the figure. Verse 22. D'HIPQ Embroidered-coverings, from 13") i.q. "T21 to spread out (the 2 and D interchanging from their both being Labial letters, — Letter xxxviii. P.S. e) ; this word occurs also [Prov. vii. 16] where it means coverings of a bed, but as it is here in parallel with n^137 ^ er clothing, it seems most natural to take it here as signifying coverings of the person, i.e., robes. Verse 23. As the wife so well managed the affairs of the household, and the husband had such full confidence in her, he was relieved from domestic care, and so was able to make himself useful to his nation, and became celebrated in her councils. D^ny&Q in the gates, i.e., in the assemblies and public councils. Affairs of importance and public matters were transacted in the Gates in ancient times, as we read [Deut. xvi. 18], TlW ^ 1*7 1W BnifW] QV5& Judges and officers shalt thou appoint for thee in all thy gates ; the public transaction of Boaz with Ruth's nearer kinsman [Ruth iv. 1 — 1 2] took place in the gate ; and Job, protesting his innocence by declaring that he never had oppressed the fatherless because he knew that he had so great influence with the judges as to fear no reproof from them, said [Ch. xxxi. 21], "If I lifted up my hand against the orphan, because I saw my help ("IJ7#5) in the gate, then," &c. Verse 24. ^D a linen vesture. This Noun is found in the Plural Number, D^Hp [Isaiah iii. 28]. "0£O3 i ? to the merchant ; lit., Canaanite, this people being noted merchants, their name at length became synonymous with merchant ; and so we find Isaiah using D'OJ/^S and CHHID merchants, in parallel as equivalent LETTER LIX. 273 in sense, in the passage |HN "H3DJ H^35 D^"!^ 'T"lHD [Isai. xxiii. 8] her merchants [are] princes, her ( ' \ \ a unites (or traffickers) [are the] honourable of the earth. Verse 25. Might and glory were her clothing. This is, of course, figurative. priori! And she smiled. phty means properly to laugh, but it is not restricted to laughing in derision, as it also expresses cheerfulness; thus [Eccles. x. L91 Dn 1 ? D^J/ pin&/ they make a feast for merriment ; and so, in this instance, the meaning is that she cheerfully regarded the approaching close of her days. The same remark applies also to the kindred Verb ph^ , as we perceive by comparing the pf}*]} [Gen. xvii. 17] referring to Abraham, and the \T\W pnVfi] [Gen. xviii. 12] and Sarah laughed ; to the former of these no reproof was given, and we know that Abraham's undoubting faith in the very particular referred to was counted to him for righteousness, while to Sarah's laughter The Searcher of hearts attached the blame of unbelief, and showed thereby the essential difference between the ph)$ of Abraham expressing simply jog and gladness, and the laughter of Sarah, which expressed her ridicule of the idea of a thing taking place so contrary to nature as that which was promised to her. Verse 27. ni^n [The] goings of This is the np , the 2TD being JliD^H — a word which cannot even be read (comp. Note on ^P2 , verse 16). mSvj^ EnS bread of idleness, i.e., bread eatex in idleness, as we find [Prov. ix. 17] D^rip CH 1 ? bread of secret-places for bread eaten in secret-places (Letter xlvii. § 1, VIII.). Verse 28. IT^S her children. The Noun ]2 a son, though limited in the Singular Number to a male child, VOL. II. T 274 HEBREW GRAMMAR. may be used in the Plural to express children generally, daughters as well as sons. fiV?Q?l n ^? for [ikN 1 ?] rffim [DjJ] nbj/3 her husband rose «wrf praised her, saying (Letter xlviii. §11 and 13). Verse 29. JTi33 ni3*1 Many daughters. From the Adjective's occurring here before the Noun, some have supposed that the passage stands Elliptically for b)H Ifrj/ [l^N] ni33 niBl Many [are the] daughters who have done virtuously, but for this surely we must have had ni33fi Definite ; it seems rather that this is an instance of the Adjective's preceding the Noun, as 12V72 little generally does (Letter xlviii. § 1); and so we find 3£'£ 3*1 [Isai, xxi. 7] great attention, 0^3 D^3"1 [1 Chron. xxviii. 5] many sons. The Noun fiiJ3 is used here for women generally ; as Hi33 HIN^ [Cant. vi. 9] daughters (i.e., women generally) saw her, &c. Tn ^ti'V have practised virtue. To illustrate this T T use of nt&'jy , we may instance [Ps. xv. 5], where, after the enumeration of several virtues, we read . . . H vtf ntity the doer of (i.e., he who practises) these things (shall never be moved); and so [Prov. xxi. 3] DS^pi npi)f Ht^Jg £Ae doing (or practising) of justice and judgment (is more acceptable to JEHOVAH than sacrifice). HibS by Prhy rwsi lit., but thou hast risen above t t % . • t : - : ' (i.e., surpassed) them all, compare [Deut. xxviii. 43], " The stranger who is in the midst of thee (^pbjj ^Ml) shall rise above thee (i.e., shall surpass thee in power). The expressed Pronoun JpX indicates great emphasis [Letter xlix. $ 10]. Verse 30. nj3# lit., falsehood, here used Adjectively for a vain [thing'] ; as [Ps.xxxiii. 17] D1DH ")££> Vain is the horse for safety ; and so 73H in the second hemistich here. LETTER L1X. 275 HiiT ruST H#K A woman fearing JEHOVAH. The word H#T is by some taken to be the Constructive form of the Noun HST fear: as nnD^ ; « handmaiden, t : • •' * t : • gives nnjllj^, and rnyp a commandment, gives rnyO; and the passage is therefore supposed to stand Ellipti- cally for illPP nKT [FT*? ")^N] H#N a woman to whom there is (/.<»., who hath) Me fear of JEHOVAH. The reason, doubtless, for this harsh Ellipsis having been devised, was the belief that of the Fern. Partic. HKT; the proper Constructive form should be, not riKT, but ruS!"P, as from the similar form HN£p one (/.) unclean we find D&'H nNCip [Ezek. xxii. 5] polluted (/.) of name ; but this does not appear at all decisive of the point in question ; Mere not Euphony to interfere, this would, without doubt, be the Constructive form of fttyV. j hut as the Plural Cy$n [men] willing gives the Constructive *rijn ^?n [Ps. xl. 15] lit., delighters of (i.e., delighted at) my evil, while the Plural &VCV [men] fearing gives, not \S"P , but \S*V in Construction, — as HIIT H*T [Ps. xxii. 24] fearers of JEHOVAH, owing to the interference of Euphony, — there seems no reason whatever to withhold us from supposing that the same in- terference would produce the Constructive form HKT , and not r^T 1 . for the Singular HtfT also. 7pr»rU1 a Hithpa-ul for a Niph-al [Letter 1. § 8], or it may perhaps be taken in its literal sense, she will render- herself-praisewokthy: the emphasis produced by the expressed Pronoun S'H will no doubt be observed. Verse 31. rpT "H3Q ^ ttfl Give ye to Iter of the fruit of her hands, i.e., Bestow on her those encomiums which her doings so well merit. D"Hj;^3 in the gates, i.e., the places of public resort (Compare the Note on this word, verse 23). t 2 276 HEBREW GRAMMAR. ANALYSIS OF VERBS, AND OF THOSE WORDS WHICH CANNOT BE MET WITH UNDER THE SAME FORM IN A LEXICON. [With regard to words with Prefixes, it is supposed that the simple forms of such words will now be easily recognized, so as to be found at once in a Lexicon]. Verse 10. i~^!St . The Constructive form of the Femi- mine Noun H^ a woman ; it takes Pronominal Affixes to its Constructive form, giving 7!^*? , ^Jplf'tf , &c. ; Plur. U l W\ (see Letter xix. P.S. c; also Letter xviii. § 20). We find, however, the form TWN for the Absolute Noun also [Psalm lviii. 9]. MW (r. N¥D to find). Fut. Kal, 3 Sing. Masc. This Verb is given (Letter xxxvii.) as the Standard of the Verbs K" 1 ? . n~OQ . Absolute form "OE , a Noun of the form v#2 ( 3 ?. }. ; see Table of Nouns, page 248), signifying a thing sold, or to be sold, also the price of a thing ; the Affix H t is the Possessive Affix for the 3 Sing. Fern., and, consequently, HTDO signifies her price. Verse 11. r\®2 It (m.) hath trusted. A Regular Verb, Past Kal 3 Sing. Masc, which form is by some made use of as the root (see Letter xxvii. § 3). H3 in her. The Ablative of K^H she (See Vol. i. page 151). n^j/3 her husband, the Nominative to the Verb ni£3 . The'Absoluteform is ^3 of the form h%% ( 3 ? \ , the two Segals being changed into Pathachs in consequence of the second radical being guttural, see Table of Nouns, page 248). This Noun declined with Pronominal LETTER L1X. 277 Affixes gives ^J£3 my, ^3 ( or nSj/Z* ) her, &c. ")Drn (r. "IDH to want, lack). Fut. A?// 3 Sing. Masc. for ipn] (the Pathach being here changed into Kawmets by the Pause, Letter ix. § 4 |) ; the i of the |JTN takes Segol instead of Short- Che rik in consequence of the first radical being guttural. Verse 12. ^nnhfc} (r. ^DJ). For the meaning of this word see Note on this Verse, page 268 ; Past Kal, 3 Sing. Fern, with Obj. AfF. 1H — him. ^D] [the] days of. Absolute form DV a day ; Plural U*iy , in Constr. Vff\ . As a Hebrew Noun in Construc- tion cannot have the Definite Article, it must be supplied in an English translation. n\Tl her life. Formed from the Plural Noun D"!"l life, in Constr. ^n ; with AfF. "»*n my, . . . , H S TI her, . . . Verse 13. n^lT She sought for (r. W~\l to enquire, seek for). Past Kal, 3 Sing. Fern. £'J/rn r/m/ she wrought (r. Plttftf to make, do, work, a Verb H"? ). Future JiTa/, 3 Sing. Fern, with 1 Conver- sivum, for fljpJPFfl : if not for the Guttural first radical, the form would be fetfjni like jSH] (for Djarn) a«d s/ie turned (see Letter xxxix. § 4, 7). IT&3 her hands. From the Absolute form ^3 a tod (lit., palm of the hand) ; Dual D*33 , which takes Affixes like the Plural form Dn^ (see Letter xix. § S), and gives therefore % 22 my, IT§3 her, &c. (See the observations on the words •'TSS ^^3 ^J^Dl in tlie Note above on this verse, page 268). * The Editions of The Bihle do not agree on this form, some civin^ always Shvah beneath the 2, and others giving sometimes a simple Shvah, and sometimes a Chateph-Pathaeh, though all agree in giving "•??? with a Chateph-Pathaeh. f Line 12 from the hottom. 278 HEBREW GRAMMAR. Verse 14. nwn she ivas (r. HYI to be, a Verb iT7). Past Kal, 3 Sing. Fem. r\i"3»| like ships of. From the Absolute form H^Nt , Plural hi^gt . The proper Vowel-point for the prefix 3 would, of course, be Shvah, but as this Shvah would here have to stand immediately before a Chatej)h- Kawmets, it is by assimilation changed into Kawmets (Letter xvii. $ 8, Rule iii.). Since the Feminine Plural form is the same in its Constructive as in its Absolute state (Letter xix. § 17), the context only can show, in any instance, whether the form be Absolute or Constructive : now here the context plainly shows HVOg to be in Construc- tion with the following word in ID ; consequently, the Construct state not admitting the Definite Article (Letter xviii. § 4), ni^KS must not be considered as equivalent to ni^SH^ . K'Qn she was wont to bring [lit., she used to cause to come], (r. N13 to come, a Doubly Irregular Verb, being XV and N' ,L 7 , Letter xlii. § 5). Fut. Hiph., 3 Sing. Fem. The Hebrew Language not having a word equivalent to the English word to bring, employs, as equivalent to it, the Hiph-tl of N13 , which expresses to cause to come. ncri7 her provision. From the Absolute form Dro bread (of the form ^;2 , 3 2 l ? see Table of Nouns, page 218) ; with Affixes ^En^ my, .... HEn 1 ? her, . . . Verse 15. D^rn Yea, she rose (r. Dip, a Verb XV). Fut. Kal, 3 Sing. Fem. with 1 Convers.; the Accent being drawn back to the Penultimate syllable through the influence of the 1 Conversivum, the Shurik of the Ulti- mate syllable is changed into Short- Kawmets (Letter xxxvi. § 4). TijEf3 in [its being] yet. The Particle ity yet, with the Prefix 2 in; the Substantive Verb must be under- LETT Kit LIX. 279 stood here either after the "Tty? , or between the 3 and the Til/ , so that the full expression would be either rfrh nvn tu/3 cpm , or n^? lij; nvns cpm. . t : - v: ; 'tt~ 7 t;- . 'tt }nrn and she gave (r. ]ro a Verb 3" 2). Fut. £a/, 3 Sing. Fern, with 1 Conversicum. The 1 here is unable to draw the Accent from the Ultimate to the Penulti- mate syllable on account of the Dayesh in the second radical (see Letter xxxv. § 3). PirPin for her house (or household). Absolute state JV3 (form 7?3 , 3 : ! , see page 214) ; in Construction JT3 , with Affixes \TV2 my, .... P!jT3 for, .... iVrnyib for her maidens. Absolute State nn>^ (form n9j/2> , n;?}; see Table of Nouns, page 253) ; Flu. ni~UJ3 , in'Constr. TSVXi} , and with Affix ">JTli"Uja »/y, .... iTJ^iiJt. ? Aer, .... Verse 11). HOD? s/>e contemplated [the purchase of] (r. CCT , a Verbofthe D^IS?). Past /la/, 3 Sing. Fern. Conjugated here regularly like 1p2 (Letter xl. § 3), though we find it in other places agreeing in Con- jugation with 22D the standard of the D^IM ; as 'TEj [Psalm xvii. 3], which is, of course, the First Person of the Past Kal. inEgljfl and she bought it (m.) (v. r\p^ , see Letter xxxii. § 5). Fut. Kal, 3 Sing. Fem. with 1 Convers., and the Obj. Aff. in it (».) referring to rniy # field, — a Masculine Noun, though it takes the Feminine mark of the Plural Hllt^ , of which the Constructive form T)Mip occurs [Neh. xii. 29] ; we find also Hip [as 2 Sam. i. 21] the Constructive of the Masculine Plural form, though D'Htp does not occur. — The Dagesh in the p of Tnnj^rn shows, of course, the omission of the first radical "7 , the Kawmets beneath the p being 280 HEBREW GRAMMAR. merely Euphonic in place of Shvah (comp. Letter xliii. §13). IT22. See the remarks on this word in ver.13, page 277. njycOJ she planted (r. I7C03 , a Verb, 3"S). Past lifaZ, 3 Sing. Fern. D"?3 . The Pause form of DH.3 « vineyard. Verse 17. n*1jn sAe girt (r. "Un, a Regular Verb). Past Kal, 3 Sing. Fern. iTjnD Aer /«'«,?. From the Absolute State D^nE) x v : t • T loins, a Dual Noun, with Aff. ^2P,D my, .... rpjflp r^^ni awd sAe strengthened (r. ^Dti). Fut. Pi-d/, 3 Sing. Fern, with T Conversivum ; the Accent here is not drawn back for the reason given above in the case of ]F\ry\ (ver. 15). '"^ftinf her arms. From the Absolute State J/1lt (forrn^S, 3 '2i, see Table of Nouns, page 250); Plu. D^'"IT and JTfont , the latter form giving (with Aff.) YJj/'-IT wiy, .... nV3JH? her, .... Verse 18. npj/2 AafA she perceived? (r. D^CO , a Regular Verb). Past Kal, 3 Sing. Fern. ; the second radical, being guttural, takes Chateph-Pathach instead of Shvah (Letter xxx. § 9). See the remarks above on this word in the Notes, page 270. mnD her traffic. From the Absolute State "inp , which does not occur, (form /#£) , 3 2 1 , never changing in Construction, see Table of Nouns, page 248, — the Pathachs are given here instead of Segols, on account of the guttural n — ) ; with Affixes 'HnD my, Pnnp Aer, .... Another Noun, of the form ~\T\p (^J/S , see Table of Nouns, page 245), must be assumed as the Absolute State (not in use) from which to obtain the Construct form "inp LETTER L1X. 281 occurring some few times, as ^D3 ~inp [Prov. iii. 14] : — this would give with Affixes ^~\T}P '»{>/, ^TJP her, &c, and consequently cannot be the Absolute State for the form Pnnp here. T\22\ used to go out [Letter xxix. § 1] (r. H2D, a Verb T\"% Fut. Kal, 3 Sing. Masc. H")3 her lamp. From the Absolute State ")} (form 75 , 3 1 j see Table of Nouns, page 259), with Affixes "H3 my, .... PITS Ae/-, .... Verse 19. ITT 1 /icr hands. From the Absolute State T , Dual D?T , with Affixes, "HJ my, PP^; 7/er, nn^ sAe j>M* forth, (r. n ; •&> , a Regular Verb). Past jPi-dl, 3 Sing. Fern. IT2D1 tfNt/ ftcr hands. See above, verse 13, page 277. IDJDin laid hold of (r. "Jen , a Regular Verb). Past JEaf, VPlu. ^Q. The Pause form of ^3 a distaff (form 7#B, 3 2 1 • S ee Table of Nouns, page 248). The Euphonic Dagcsh of the £) is taken out here, because the preceding word terminates in 1 and is closely connected with \?£ (see Letter xi. § 1). Verse 20. F1S3 her hand. From the Absolute State 15 , with Aff. ^22 my, P123 her, Plfcna she spread out (r. ttHB, a Regular Verb). Past Kal, 3 Sing. Fern. iTTl awrf Act hands. See under n n *T, in the pre- T VT : T . T J. ceding verse. TMT?V} she put forth. See under Hnyttf, in the pre- ceding verse. Verse 21. KTJ? she used to fear (r. NT , a Doubly Ir- regular Verb, being both v '£ and S"7 , Letter xlii. § 4). Fut. Kal, 3 Sing Fern. ; the F\ is deprived of its Euphonic Dagcsh on account of its being immediately preceded by a word terminating in a quiescent K (Letter xi. § 1). 282 HEBREW GRAMMAR. HITD 1 ? for her household. The analysis of this word is given above in verse 15, page 279; the force of the h is seen to be different in the two instances. Zbwft , for ihl&D , bv reason of the Pause. The force of the D is here on account of (See Letter xlvi. § 23). , nrV3 her house ( see fiivyj above, verse 15, page T 279). Wjh clothed-with (r. Utdh , a Regular Verb). Partic. Past Kal, Sing. Masc. The Kibbuts here supplants Shurik unaccountably (see Letter xxx. § 21). DW scarlet-garments. The Plural of "W . Verse 22. 0^310 coverings. A Plural Noun. nr»fel{ she wrought (r. ntty , a Verb IT 1 ?). Past i£a/, 3 Sing. Fern. nV fo Aer (or /or herself). The Dative of N\l sAe (see Vol. i. page 151). Verse 23. JHi3 well-known (r. I/T , a Verb *"£). Partic. iVipA., Sing. Masc. D^TJJ^S in *Ae ^afoff. From the Absolute State -|J7t&> (form ^J^ , 3 2 i , see Table of Nouns, page 248) ; Plu. BH%& . p6#3 her husband (see verse 11, page 276). The Participle JHiJ refers to this word. irO^S on his sitting (r. 2W , a Verb y 'S). Infin. £aZ, with 3 of vh52 and Possessive Affix i — his. ">3pX elders of. From the Absolute State |j?,J (form b^3 , 3 . 2 ] T ; see Table of Nouns, page 245) ; Plur. D"Oj?.T , in Constr. ^pT . IHSt the Pause form of JH$ Za??^. Verse 24. nni^JJ .sAe zwarfe (see above, verse 22). "DDfl] arcd sAe soW (r. 12D , a Regular Verb). Fut. Kal, 3 Sing. Fern., with 1 Convers. The Accent is not here drawn back to the Penultimate syllable, because, if LETTER L1X. 283 drawn back, it would have to pass over a Shvak (see Letter xxxv. § 2). n]P3 she (/are (r. |J"0 , a Verb 3"S). Past Kal, 3 Sing. Fern. Verse 25. pni^fVl and she smiled (r. pnifif , a Regular Verb). Fut. Kal, 3 Sing. Fem. with 1 Convers. (comp. Letter xxx. § 22). Verse 26. PP3 her mouth. From the Absolute State H3 ; with affixes "'S wiy, H" 1 ^ Aer, (see Letter xix. §21; Vol. i., page 118). nnJ13 she opened (r. PinD , a "Regular Verb). Past Kal, 3 Sing. Fem. rnirn and [the] law of From the Absolute State n-lin [i\ HT] (of the form HjLfln , D 2 i n ; see Table of Nouns, page 262); in Constr. rnin . Pni&' i ? /ur tongue. From the Absolute State \\Uh (of the form hfyS , 3 i 2 \ ; see Table of Nouns, page 246) ; with Affixes ^wb my, .... n:itt^ her, . . . Verse 27. rPQi¥ o»e (/.) watching (r. HDV, a Verb n" 1 ? ) Partic. Pres. Kal, Sing. Fem. The third radical H , instead of being dropped, is here changed into ^ (see Letter xxxix. § 1). niSvH movements of. A Noun, of which the Plural only is found in Scripture, the Singular of which may fairly be conjectured to be Hp"*/'!? (frequently used by the Rabbins), which would, of course, be of the form \iv$% ( n V 2 .] ; see Table of Nouns, page 253). The context shews HiDvfi to be here in Construction (Letter xix. $ 17). nrv2 her house. See above, verse 15, page 279. ^DSn tih she would not eat (r. "7DN a Verb K"B), Fut. Kal, 3 Sing. Fem. Verse 28. V2p r they rose (r. Dip, a Verb, V> ) Past Kal, 3 I'lu. (in. and/.), referring to 284 HEBREW GRAMMAR. PPJ3 her children. From Absolute State }3 (of the form J/§ ,21; see Table of Nouns, page 263), Plu. 0^3 , with Aff. ^| my, . . . rPJ3 //er, . . . mite'S?] and they pronounced her blessed (r. H^tf , a Verb, »"£)), Fut. Pi. 3 Plu. Masc. with Objective Affix n //er, and 1 Conversivum ; the Dagesh after the 1 Conversivum is dispensed with, because the letter following the 1 is ^ with Shvah (see Letter xxix. § 4). H7> T 3 her husband. See above, verse 11, page 276. See also Note on this verse, page 274. m77«T1 and he praised her (r. 7?n , a Verb of the D^l^^ , conjugated regularly like TpD ; Letter xl. § 3), Fut. Pi. 3 Sing. Masc. with Objective Affix PJ— Aer, and 1 Conversivum ; the Dagesh of the second radical (the characteristic of the Voice) is here omitted. (See Letter xl. § 14.) Verse 29. ni3"l many. An Adjective, Sing. Masc. 21 , (of the form 72, 31 _; see Table of Nouns, page 260), P13"1 Sing. Fern. ; Plu.— MH Masc, ni3"1 Fern. ni23 daughters. From the Absolute State D3 , Plu. nto .— 112^ fAey have done (r. nirj/, a Verb, rf7), Past ifaZ, 3 Plu. m. and /*. TH virtue. The Pause form of 7?n . TV!}} thou (/.) hast risen (r. n^J/ , a Verb, n"7), Past 76/Z, 2 Sing. Fern. H273 «M q/" them (/.). An Adjective, Sing. Masc. b'3 (of the form ?£ , 3 ' 2 ; see Table of Nouns, page 260), see the Declension, Letter xxii. 8 13. H2^3 stands here for \12 , the i"J being Paragogic ; as another instance of a Paragogic if occurring after a Possessive Affix, we may take n!IN;33 [Ruth i. 19] on their (/.) coming. The same form HJvS (for |72J all of them, /!, with Paragogic H) occurs Gen. xlii. 36. LETTER LIX. 285 Verse 30. PNT . See Note above on this Avoid, page 275. yjnnn she shall be praised (v. 77H , a Verb of the t - : ■ J- \ DvIS? ) Fut. Ilithj). 3 Sing. Fem. ; the Kawmets, in the final syllable, is produced by the Pause lengthening the Pathach which the second radical sometimes takes in the Ilithpa-al (Letter xxx. § 29). See Note on this word, page 275. Verse 31. IJJj! Give ye (m.) (r. ]H3 , a Verb, 2"D) ; Imper. Kal, 2 Pin. Masc. H 1 ? to her. The Dative of tf\T (Vol. i., page 151). iTT her hands. See above, on verse 19, page 281. ni77iT1 and they (m.) shall praise her (r. *7 7n, a Verb of the C^IS? , conjugated regularly like "TpEl ), Fut. Pi. 3 Plu. m. with T Conjunctive, and the Objective Affix H her. The 1 takes here Long-Chcrik, for the reason given, Letter xvii. § 5. □njL/tt'3 In the gates. See above, verse 23, page 282. !Tfetf/b her works. From the Absolute State H^gE (of the form H£DE , fl 2 l p • see Table of Nouns, page 2G1), Plu. D s £'J/.9 , with' Aff. tygD my, . . . iTfrJ/Q her. I return the lines of Herder, which your Grace condescended to forward to me with a desire that they might be translated into Hebrew, in order to shew the capabilities of The Language. I am most happy to obey your Grace's kind commands ; and only fear lest, in endeavouring to shew the capabilities of The Language, I shall but succeed in shewing, instead, my own in- capability of doing it justice. 286 HEBREW GRAMMAR. "Wie der Schatten friih am Morgen *Ist die Freundschaft mit dem Bosen, Stund' auf Stunde nimmt sie ab ; Aber Freundschaft mit dem Guten Wacliset wie der Abendschatten, Bis des Lebens Sonne sinkt. Herder. I • t t -•% • : - •• : - -: - Dnnv ny icop* 1 1P3 *n:p dk • t t: t •• i - I : • Iv - : • Vn r\'wyn wrr in en nan^ p ^ • t v -: - • ' - - . _ i .. W «3 iy bin l^n nnj; to LIST OF TECHNICAL TERMS USED BY HEBREW GRAMMARIANS. NtD373 Speech, or utterance. KCD3DH ^3 The organs of speech. Flltf (lit., a sign, or mark) a letter. Plu. nvms* . H3T\ -A. word. nmpa Points. ninan (lit., a moving) a vowel. n^lU JlJ/ian G^*» rt <7 re ^ moving) a long vowel. n^JOp Hj/l^n (lit., # 5m«/Z moving) a short vowel. n*7p n^2T\ (lit., « s%/<£ moving) a slight vowel, a vowel which comes in the place of Shvah. LITTER LIX. 287 K1^ n: aw -inw m prn boi *7p £01 ncowa n-nn raDTiD mnn p^DDE D£CO t?» Shvah. Quiescent Shvah. Moving Shvah. A quiescent perceived (in Pronuncia- tion), i.e., any letter heard in Pro- nunciation which has a Quiescent Shvah expressed or understood. A quiescent not perceived (in Pronun- ciation), i.e., any one of the letters i'1 nx when not heard in Pronun- ciation. Dagesh-forte. Dagesh- lene. A syllable. A simple syllable, i.e., a syllable which does not terminate in a letter per- ceived in Pronunciation, and is not followed by Dagesh-forte. A Compound Syllabic, i.e., a syllable which does terminate in a letter per- ceived in Pronunciation, or which is followed by Dagesh-forte. Accents. A Distinctive Accent. A Conjunctive Accent. Accent on the Penultimate. Accent on the Ultimate. Metheg. An Accent drawn back by reason of the to jidj f P roximit y of Ac - J cents. Mdkkiph. ^ae Tin** jidj : merely 288 HEBREW GRAMMAR. p^DE Mappik. JVttHii' mS A radical letter. JVWM2W ms A servile letter. r»QD13 m« A Paragogic letter. nWMl ms A Bageshed letter. Tl™ C2Si A letter without 2%e»A. Cty (lit., a wame) a Noun. DKl'D Dt£> A Noun Substantive. I^rn D££> An Adjective. mpo CB> } An Abstract Noun. "•lDHD D¥17 C^ -A- Noun Proper, i.e., a Proper iName. 'hh'D DVj/ Ciy A- Collective Noun. Fjijn c^ A Pronoun. D^TIJ mcty Synonymous Nouns. PimifiD Dt^ A- Noun having several meanings. D'^UDn The Pronominal Affixes : so called, because these Affixes are taken from the letters D "> 1 2 D H forming this word. nSj i-EM a Noun in the Absolute form. "pED Cty A Noun in the State of Construction. pan (lit., *Ae ftiuZ) Gender. "13? ^O Masculine Gender. H3p3 ^D Feminine Gender. -»Span The Number. TIT "IDDO Singular Number. or merely ^31 [ Plural Number. -pj-p Singular masculine. HTIT Singular feminine. D*2") Plural masculine, mm Plural feminine. LETTER MX. ■>;» mnD: nTrp nrou rrprr TTJ73 ")31Q The Dual Number. Third Person Singular masc. Third Person Singular fern. Second Person Singular masc. Second Person Singular fern. (lit., One speaking for himself) The First Person Singular. nCOi: C£> A Declined Noun. or merely H^J^J or merely ^'"OH or merely NISWH Vvran dit or merely yTL'^ v"7Kiy Dm 13^ Dm hed^ Dm \vmn "3 VOL. II. 'A form, ( e.g., i.e., ^Sd is of the (ht., A weight)]) form ^. nws ^b 'ty r?p"nf. i.e., HJJ7V is of the (lit., ^1 balance) y An Oblique Case. Declension. The subject of the sentence, i.e., the Nominative Case. The Predicate of the sentence. The Accusative Case. (So they say bWSn b)l miD n^, i.e., MK marks the Accusative Case). The Dative. The Ablative when indicated by 3 , as fl?33 in the house, 2"}J12 by the sword. The Ablative when indicated by D ; as rP3HD from the house. The 3 of Comparison. 290 HEBREW GRAMMAR. p-irrn , „ D mon t "D njhTn "n n^npn "n nbxvn "n nDTin "n •pann "i "TOp? i "i ppn *M &p¥on ^33 mm *B3 fy/a ioiy ^j/a KV? tya ^DPD bj/a iru; ^a marv^n tya mns v nvrhn ra non a"a ^m v 'a to rr to xrh to The £D which expresses Pre-eminence. The D which expresses Cause. The n which marks the Definite Article. The il which marks the Vocative Case. The H which expresses Interrogation. The H which expresses Surprise. The T Conversivum. The Conjunctive 1 . A Possessive Pronoun. A Relative Pronoun. A Demonstrative Pronoun. A Verb. An Intransitive Verb. A Transitive Verb. An Impersonal Verb. An Auxiliary Verb. The Substantive Verb. (lit., parents), a term applied to Active Verbs, also to the Long- Vowels. (lit., offsprings), a term applied to Passive Verbs, also to the Short Vowels. A Conjugation. A Voice. The Seven Voices. The Conjugation of the Regular Verbs. Verbs dropping the first radical ( 2 ). Verbs having the first radical N . Verbs having the first radical "• . Verbs having for their second radical a quiescent 1 . Verbs having for their third radical a quiescent X . LETTER LIX. 291 n"7 Tia Verbs having for their third radical a quiescent H . D^IDD Verbs Geminata, i.e., having the second and third radicals the same. miVpn ^IDJl Verbs which drop sometimes the first radical, sometimes the third, and sometimes both ; as, for example, |i"l3 , which gives ]D , DH2 , rifl . b$%n pa) or > The Kal Voice. bpn pn) hj&l P33 The Nipk-&1 Voice. ^2 pa) The P«-«/ Voice. "raan pa) ^3 pa The Pu-al Voice. VflRtfJ PJ2 The HiphSl Voice. %?pn pa The Hoph-al Voice. tearin pa) [ The Ilithpa-al or Reflective Voice. "innn pa J \S:nn pa The Conditional Mood. TipQ The Infinitive Mood. ]J2\ A Tense, nni; The Past Tense. \ Present Participle. cows wa) 7u/a ^iraj or 1 Past Participle. 33T10 Wa) ^liy Imperative Mood. Till/ Future Tense. HCWl "I3DO A Cardinal Number. HID "ISDO An Ordinal Number. mca Quantity. ¥ u 2 292 HEBREW GRAMMAR. avn nb^bw 2"r\n idko or or cyan rvto Dim rvto rorto nin pMpi plplD Quality. An Idea. Sentence, Proposition. Affirmation. Negation. An Affirmative Sentence, A Negative Sentence. A Parenthetic Sentence. A Verse of The Bible. A Verse requiring transposition. A Definition. Signification, Meaning. Particles. Prepositions. An Adverb. Poetry. Verse, or Rhyme. Grammar. A Grammarian. A Correctly Revised Copy. LETTER LX. 293 LETTER LX. I feel sure that as soon as your Grace shall see the words njhtt^n ^jyD The Fountains of Salvation, with which the accompanying sheets are headed, you will at once perceive that you have now arrived at that closing subject of your labours, to the reading and understanding of which your aspirations were at first directed, viz., The Fifty-third Chapter of Isaiah. Your Grace will find that the last three verses of Chapter lii. have been given here before the Fifty-third Chapter itself : but as the whole of Chapter liii. refers to The Person mentioned in the first of these three verses, my having introduced them will scarcely need an apology. What, however, I have really to apologize for is, — First, — For my having now and then, in the Notes, stated Rules, and quoted passages from The Bible, which have already been given at earlier periods of my instruction ; it was thought right to do this, in order to impress these Rules the better on your Grace's memory, and at the same time to avoid, in so important a subject, the interruptions that would arise from continual reference to preceding Letters: — Secondly, — For having occasionally, in the Literal English Translation, sacrificed the English idiom for the purpose of conveying more closely the strict meaning of the Original. But imperfect as I feel both the translation and the Notes to be, and unequal as I confess myself to the due treatment of so sublime a subject, I 294 HEBREW GRAMMAR. yet feel confident that I shall not appear to have exaggerated, when I said that those who could not see in it a most distinct and minutely circumstantial Prophecy of the Sufferings and Death of JESUS The Saviour of the world, must indeed be either really or wilfully blind : that it may please Almighty GOD to remove the scales from the eyes of the former, and to convert the heart of the latter, be the constant, fervent prayer of every Christian ! In this general prayer I doubt not that your Grace will most sincerely join. As to the humble individual who has had the honour and the pleasure of assisting you to read and understand the Sacred Words contained in the accompanying sheets, — bowed down, as he now is, by the weight of years, he begs to conclude the course of his instruction, by humbly offering up, to Him in Whom alone he can rest his hope of Salvation, the following prayer : — t : - -r : • ■•: - • t - " t rijrij rvnsn on ^ n* 1^5 by jjjna f#n by— iniato? b$l— wSjt; ru/T fttiK— nhbD ;rm xh— "wcon n« t^. _t T - ; - •• - t -: ^ny u/zi TTV3 8i "ipfi nrijt; ?Tri^T ^jS pa 13 n^K ^j ana I v t ; • I »• T - - : t t TtfWjn y^a THE FOUNTAINS OF SALVATION. LETTER L.\. 297 ISAIAH LII. ,,. : - v : - > ■■ ■ Kiwi DTP I : i- t : • - i v t < : it v -: i- — : dtk ^30 "ham IT t /■ : • «. -: I : d^I d;13 nr |3 15 oira aoSo reap* 1 1% T V T <- ■. I • -: it : • 1 : it 1 rt -:r CHAPTER LIII. a" t is : • 1 v v« iv >- : nrhn why rHm yrin T it : • J- « <.T ; ** ; ; vja 1 ? p:v3 bun 2 inn »Si i 1 ? "iitrrtf? AT T J ; v -J I ••• : : ~ : IV J - I : ;■•:•: D^K 'pirn n?33 3 J- -: r v : ' • a j • 1 : - >• ... • . T <...-. 2DS HEBREW GRAMMAR. sib: sin hhn p» 4 t t j ■• t t: '<"• T AT T : v." : - wiftfap y?K» Kim 5 •• t : • jt : : tT 1 : <- : lA-Ksru irmrm it t : • it I'-. -: i- wi?r\ |tfya m$s 6 ma "teTT 1 ? t^K a- t i : " : j' 1a roan nirrn ^- j» : • t i- • it ••. Ij' s : *••• ruj/3 aim frb 7 va-row ^i - : • j : ^Hv rots'? rifeo T " JV - V " t at : iv t i%' : I i" : • •• t : :va runa** tfn »t •.. t : • • v < « - a- : j- >. v : D^n jng© to? ■>§ : id 1 ? j/ja IT ^ -iV innp DWrna jw 9 at : ».• t v : T *T JT T | *=< LETTER LX. 299 r : (,t : ■ , : ^nn iK3i r^n ftlm io ■■iv : - If T T I- : - T T <• T ;nr n«T» A- t ' j- -: i- nirp pam : nbv iT»a it : • ;t : jf|fa nirp Ww teya n tf -it c : - : b'2D^ sin cniijn l : • J (.t ^:i- n&K nnn i^D3 rno 1 ? n-iyn " r : ' v. - I i v : *•■ : i - : In the following translation Italics are used, not to denote emphasis as in the Letters, but to point out the words not expressed in Hebrew which have to be supplied in English. 300 HEBREW GRAMMAR. CHAPTER LII. GOD Himself speaks, saying, 13. 14. 15. Han Behold b^tyl He shall be successful ^12]} viz., My Servant shall be successful. D1T He shall be exalted T X'^ and He shall be extolled H3J1 and He shall be high) (Eng., and shall be "TSD exceedingly. [ very high.) (Eng., Behold My Servant shall be successful in His Mis- sion. ) (i.e., Just as there have been amazed at Thee many.) njjtotj As 1JDQ2J they have been amazed !pjjjf at Thee C^P viz., many have been amazed, 15) (so nn^'P marred WR12 more than that of any man in^lD was His Visage, ilSil] and His form "03D more than that of any one of the sons of ( D"J§ man.) 1 3 So "1 (i.e., So shall the H;P shall He sprinkle nations whom He D?in nations D^"! many ; shall sprinkle be many ;) LETTER LX. 301 at Him they shall shut 0*070 * t : DiT£) their mouth viz., kings s/w// sh lit "•3 for "}#N that which i*9 not "1£D hath been told DH 7 to them V T IN"} they have seen j ")B\S1 and that which ift not Ij/q^ they have heard lijiSiin they have come to (Eng., AtlliM shall kings shut their mouth; absorbed, that is, in silent wonder at the un- expected and glo- rious exaltation of Him AY horn they had looked upon as debased to the lowest depths of humi- liation.) (En £>*' For such a thing have they seen as never hath been told them ; such, that is, as history had never known before.) (Eng., they have never heard of as having happened in the world) know [And thus tiiey think in silent wonder.] CHATTER LIU. 1 . ""D AVho [thus the kings and people revolve within themselves] I^Di^n could-havc-given-credencc 302 HEBREW GRAMMAR. UWQ99 to-the-report-we-have-heard (Hebr., to our hearing) jtfi"ip seeing-that The Arm (i.e., Power) of Hi IT Jehovah, 71? upon (Eng., unto) **D whom Jl]n7J3 has it ever been revealed to such an extent ? t t : • 2. tyl\ For He grew-up (viz., The exalted Person spoken of in the final verses of Chap. Hi.) p2V3 as the tender-branch VJ2>7 before Him (i.e., before God), &H&01. and as the stem fHNft that grows-up from a land of ) (i.e., from a HJV dryness, ) dry land) S7 ^ere was not ")Nh form i 1 ? to Him «7l nor was £/*ere "Tin beauty ; iriNHJ'] so-that-when we used to see Him &1} then there was no nS")£ comeliness IjTTDnj"] that we should desire Him. 3. n?35 He being despised /"ID! an( i destitute of (i.e., shunned by) D^K men, B^$ a man of II 13850 sorrows J/1T1 and known of (i.e., acquainted with) vh grief, (Eng., He had no form nor beauty ;) v "1^0051 — and as one hiding LETTER LX. 303 D\32 His face 13EC from us — Dr33 was despised, X 1 ?} and not } (Eng., and we did not ir^Q^n we did esteem Him ) esteem Him.) 4. p« But-vcrily 1^7n our griefs Nl.i He KfcO hath borne, T T ' 'O'QJOCI and as for our sorrows D73P He hath carried them (or, He hath taken them upon Him as a load) ; Unjtfl yet we inaDJtfn esteemed Him JLHJ3 one smitten H3p one stricken of (i.e., by) DVifyj GOD H3J/01 and one afflicted. 5. »ini Whereas He llTiD was wounded T irjyt^P on account of our transgressions, K31& crushed t \ : irriiji^O on account of our iniquities ; 1D1D the chastisement of (i.e., requisite for) MtyhU? our peace 1 vJJ was upon Him, in^nni and by His wound (i.e., by His being wounded) X3")3 it was healed) 137 to us. S ( En S"' we were healed.) 3Q4- HEBREW GRAMMAR. 6. 12^3 We all ]K¥3 like the sheep lyj/JH have gone astray, $*£ each-one l3"ffS to his own way 1^33 we have turned, • T HiiTI and Jehovah T ™ JP|9n hath caused to fall i3 upon HIM jijg H8 Me iniquity of 'l3v»3 us all. 7. fco? He was oppressed, Kin"] and He n^i being humbled K7J yet not | ^ng., yet would not open nrj^ would open V Hismout h); T»B His mouth ; ) n&3 like the lamb Did? to the slaughter SnV led, brnrn and as an ewe ^22ib before ITUi! her shearers n6hX2 dumb:— t t ,: v 1*71 so not | (Eng., so would not He nn?P. would He open I open Hlg mouth .) V3 His mouth. ) 8. "IV#P From confinement B3#WI and from judgment HP 1 ? was He taken, LliTTEU LX. 305 iliTPSI and as for His generation (i.e., as for His co-evals), *12 who (i.e., which of them) nrilfc^ could have thought "Q that -\Uy 'He was cut off pSD ' « from the land of D^n ' ' the living, yV'SD ' ' on account of the transgression of V3JE7 ' ' my people, JfJJ' ' ow account of the stroke ' V2h ' ' which was due to them : ' 9. n§T) ^* Den ifti VQ3 Yea it would have made (i.e, His genera- tion would have made) with J /E n g ej W ould have made His wicked men V ^ wickcd men)> His grave, ) (but with a rich man ?##.? Aw grave, in His deaths [i.e., after His death] ), not "I because that \ (Eng., not because-that He had done any wrong,) wrong He had done, yea there was not any deceit in His mouth. io. nirrn But Jehovah fan willed i^SI to crush Him, * These words are here transposed, to show better the sense. VOL. II. X 30(3 HEBREW GRAMMAR. ^nn He hath caused Him grief (i.e., hath put Him to grief; [declaring that] ) DK if \ D^'JH it (/.) will make (Eng., if His soul D&'N a sin-offering, } will make an 1&'D3 viz., if His soul will \ offering for sin.) make a sin-offering J T])^y[ then shall He see -i (i.e., He shall see a jn? a seed numerous Church Till?! which shall prolong which shall last for tPiy its days j ever) ^n"! and the purpose of \(i.e., of redeeming the njrrj jehovah, j world), iT3 by His hand \ (Eng., shall prosper by His my? shall prosper) hand, i.e., by His means.) [GOD HIMSELF here speaks again.] 11. >l~ty2 Because of the agony of 1#93 His soul H»T He shall see ]}2& that He will be satisfied ;* iJ^"13 by His knowledge (i.e., by reason of His knowing what shall be the result of His Sufferings and Death, He shall cheer- fully submit to them, — and by those sufferings, by that death) p^V. He shall justify, \, T? r™ -p. ,, '•" . ,„, j!. , J „ (Eng., Iheltighte- pnV viz., The Righteous-One, T & A , T & a L^.. -»«- « 7 ,A ous-One, My Ser- ^"-U/ ez; doms of the world will I D\Sn3 the great ) give Hmas Hisportion,) (Alluding to the victory and triumph over that " strong man armed ' the Arch-enemy of man- kind) ; D\pi^ msn yea, the mighty p3?JT He shall divide ibw as a spoil ; nnjn because "lfc'K that n^n He hath poured out rn.D"? unto the death itf32 His soul, rwSI and with D^tt^S transgressors H2D2 was numbered, »Sim whereas He XQrj the sin of Cin many XU/2 hath borne, D1I/t^S71 so that for the transgressors JPjISP He might make intercession. 308 HEBREW GRAMMAR. NOTES. Chapter lii. verse 13. b^l . The Hiph-el of this Verb (though in a few instances it has its proper Causative sense, as ?jT3t^S [Ps. xxxii. 8] I ivill make thee wise), is generally Intransitive,* being used sometimes in the sense of acting prudently (or wisely), and sometimes in the sense of being successful as [Joshua i. 7] 1^ ")& ; *? ^3 b^tyn ]V.dl in order that thou may est prosper wheresoever thou shalt go : it seems best to take this sense here, as expressing that He shall "prosper in the thing " to accomplish which He came into the world, so that this passage may agree with liii. 10, " The purpose of Jehovah shall prosper by His means." So the Chaldee Version gives, N)T#Zp ^2£ riw NH Behold, My /Servant Messiah shall prosper, rendering ^3^ by r6v: • ^211 My Servant, a Title applied to our Saviour by St. Matthew (xii. 18), quoting Isai. xlii. 1 ; it occurs also, as representing the Messiah, in chapter liii. ] 1 ; and St. Paul's words to the Philippians (ii. 7) furnish us with a comment upon the same Title when he says that " Christ being equal to the Father, yet took upon " Him the form of a servant, and was made in the " likeness of men." 7N£ H3J1 X&2] D1T. These three nearly synony- mous expressions, occurring one after the other, serve to express the highest degree of exaltation : so Kimchi tells us that every mode of expressing elevation is used rnjv tbvv p'pfl ipir>r>D 'pi Because His exaltation shall be an exceedingly-gi-eat exaltation. * See Letter xxviii. § 4. LETTER LX. 309 Verse 14. IQO^ . The Verb DD f # expresses an amaze- ment not by way of admiration, but of horror, as it was told Solomon [1 Kings ix. 8] that at the ruins of The House he had just built " every passer by (p"^1 Di£^ # ) shall be amazed and shall hiss. T9.I/. The Messiah, Who in the preceding and in this same verse is spoken of in the Third Person, is here addressed in the Second Person ; that this change of Person is frequent in Hebrew has already been noticed (Letter li. P.S. b) when we took as an example what Job, speaking of GOD, said [chap. xvi. 7], — vtt;/ hs niBttfn *a»^n nny ™ i -: t t • -: • t : v t r - I - Surely now HE hath wearied me out, THOU hast made desolate all my company. As another of the many instances of this occurring in all parts of The Bible, we may take [Ps. xviii. 29], — • : t - • - v: t • •• • t t - For THOU 'wilt light my lamp, JEHOVAH my G0Z> will make my darkness light. D18 \}3£ ilNhl irurje tf'W ^np ; p |3 . These words, breaking in upon the main current of the ideas, and forming a kind of episode to account for the amaze- ment described, must be considered Parenthetical ; they stand elliptically for •• : - • •• : - t t - : • I •• DTK \n "mho i-inti iw nnvn pi So marred (or disfigured) was His visage more than [the] visage of any man, And so marred (or disfigured) was His form more than [the] form of the sons of man. 310 HEBREW GRAMMAR. Verse 15. D\?1 D^i3 HP ]3 . This forms the Apodosis to the words D^n Sp^JJ IDP^ "1^**? of the preceding verse, so that leaving out for a moment the Parentheti- cal sentence, which breaks into the train of thought as explained above, we have the two Quaternary mem- bers — D"an rhy *)»£&> natoa • - l v t : t v -: - As there have been amazed at THEE many, So shall HE sprinkle nations many. [We might, perhaps, take "I ^3 here as the Relative Pronoun "lg>K with the Prefix 2 , and as signifying therefore As those who ; by supplying then the Substan- tive Verb before D^H in this line, and "l^N before, and TIT after, fl£ in the next, the whole sentence might be taken to stand elliptically for . - t I v^r : t v -: •* v -: - As those who were amazed at THEE were many, So also the nations whom HE shall sprinkle shall be many. A Construction somewhat similar to this is found in Isaiah lv. 10,11:— D?D#n ip ^n\ Df^n it. "i#*?a ^q K¥: -wg nm n;i^. ;a of which the usual rendering, viz., As the rain cometh down, and the snow from heaven, &c, So shall My word be that goeth forth out of my mouth, &c, appears somewhat harsh, from its expressing — according to its obvious sense — that The Word should be like the rain comes down^ which is scarcely intelligible ; the LETTER LX. 311 passage ought rather to be construed as though worded thus, — ^5 tsv: ifc'g ny*| irrn is As the rain, and as the snow which cometii down from heaven &c., So shall be My word which goeth forth out of my mouth, &c. . . .] It was necessary to dwell upon the relative bearing of these two members [Isai. Hi. 14, 15], because some have laid so much stress upon an apparent difficulty of reading them in connexion with each other as to urge this as an argument against taking the word HP as referring to " The Blood of Sprinkling ; " they therefore, for some reasons derived from the Arabic language, assume a sense of causing to leap to the verb, and then deny to The passage any reference whatever to The Messiah. nr_ He shall sprinkle [His blood]. The Hebrew verb n?2 signifies in the Hiph-cl to sprinkle— sometimes blood, sometimes oil, and sometimes water ; as it is here applied to One Who, in the next Chapter (verse 10), is described as about to offer Himself a Sacrifice, it is evident that the sprinkling lias reference, in this instance, to His Blood. Now, examples have been already given (Letter xlviii. $ 3 and 4), to show that words are often omitted in Hebrew, whenever, by their ellipsis, no ambiguity can arise, i.e., where the context distinctly points out the idea to be inferred, which the omitted words would serve to express. Thus, when the first king of the Israelites was to be anointed, GOD said to Samuel [1 Sam. ix. 16], " I will send thee a man from the land of Benjamin ( ^T\T}t'iy\ ) and thou shalt anoint him prince over My 312 HEBREW GRAMMAR. people," where it is not said |W5 inn^PI and thou shalt anoint him with oil, because it was well known that kings were anointed with oil; and it cannot be said that the verb Ht^D refers exclusively to oil, for we find 1^| ni^DI [Jer. xxii. 14] and painted with vermilion ; but since no ambiguity can arise from the omission, ellipsis is, as usual, employed here. D'2P D?1J HP. Some object to the translation HE shall sprinkle many nations, on the ground that the Preposition ^§ or l)j} must then have been expressed after HP • But even supposing, for an instant, that HP in this sense could not be followed by an Objective Case but must be construed with *?»* or IV , yet surely the omission of such a Preposition here could create no very great difficulty ;— for such Prepositions are often not expressed when they must needs be understood ; as, for instance, in JHJR Kin -)D# ibfb '5 [Job xxxvii. 6] For to the snow He saith, Be thou [on the] earth for n? ^ ^:> and so D *W ^^xl [ Isai - xli - 25 ] ^ wc? Ae $/««// come upon princes, on which Kimchi writes — i.e., that it stands for D^JP 7|7 NT1 , Jarchi commenting also to the same effect. So also THin ^H Wnri [Cantic. i. 4], which stands for VTTn i§ iffln ^^2H ZM the king brought me into his chambers, where 7N is omitted. But it is by no means impossible for DV to have after it an Objective Case ; for we find — u/i'pn rona ^a ns Din p mm v ) - t •* : v t - i ■ t • : [Levit. iv. 6 and 17] And he shall sprinkle [with some] of the blood the part-before [the] vail of the Holy- place, where "OS HK cannot surely be denied to be the Objective Case after Hjni. . LETTER LX. 313 tijiajprj w^v s ;t 7 ^ki itf") on^ i?p sb late *$. The Verb 122 in the Hiph-el signifies to tell, and may refer to events either past ox future ; thus [Gen. xxiv. 28], HSK n^ 1 ? "Urn rngan fnrvi ^4wZ Me damsel ran and told the house of her mother, where 122 is used to express her speaking of what had passed ; while, in [Gen. xlix. 1] t . ... T'. ;• -. .. -.- t T • - : i" will tell you what shall happen to you in the last days, it refers, of course, to futurity. Not so the verb T2D , which, when used in the acceptation of telling, declaring, narrating, can never be applied to the telling of future events : hence the words here Ttf"! Dr6 12D N*7 "JttfK T V T - \. V -; must be taken to express — Such a thing as history hath never told them, have they [now] seen, and the corresponding restriction must be laid upon the sense of the following clause IJJiann U'Cltf tfh IttfNI And such a thing as they have never heard [to have happened], they have [now] come to know. It was requisite to make this observation, since it could not be said that they had never heard the promise of a Saviour, One Who, by His precious Blood- shedding, should redeem Mankind, should give Peace on Earth, and gather into one all the nations of the world; their very words myqvb PP£H Vp Who could have believed the thing we have heard? with which the next Chapter opens, shew that the report had been heard, though from the unexampled wonders of so Mighty a Revelation, their hardness of heart would not allow them to believe in the Truth of the Divine Mission of Him Who appeared before them in so humble a manner. They say, " Who could have believed the report we have heard ] " — as St. Paul's quotation of the 314 HEBREW GRAMMAR. passage [Rom. x. 16] requires the sense to be, when he says, " But they have not all believed The Gospel, for Esaias saith, Who could have believed what we have heard ? " — But even more than this, the Prophetic anti- cipations of Him Who was to come were abundantly known from other parts of the Evangelical Prophet, from the inspired Songs of " the sweet Psalmist of Israel," and earlier still from the glowing language of the Dying Patriarch, who, in his parting Blessing pronounced upon the Fathers of the several tribes of his posterity, marked out the very line in which should appear the Prince of Peace, Who, under His blissful Reign, should gather all kingdoms, all peoples, and all tongues. And well we know, from abundant testimony to that effect, how general was the expectation, in all quarters of the known world, that a Mighty Prince was to arise in the East about the time that our Divine Redeemer came into this lower world, " took upon "HIM the form of a SERVANT, and was made in " THE LIKENESS OF MEN." Chapter liii. The three final verses of the preceding Chapter were spoken by GOD. In the first Ten verses of this Chapter the Prophet delineates the thoughts and feelings revolved in the awe-stricken, and possibly repentant, minds of those just above described as struck dumb with amazement at the wondrous Greatness and inconceivable Majesty of Him Whom they had seen to grow up in lowliness and humiliation, afflicted, and wandering to and fro, with no place where to lay His head, Whom they had seen taunted, reviled, insulted, — then crucified, and slain, — amid circumstances of the most extreme indignity, the utmost consummation of disgrace and shame. LETTER LX. 315 Verse 1. UflJ^Jtf 1 ? ]'£$? *Q . TFAo could Amu believed what we have heard? i.e., How was it possible for " natural man " to fathom the depths of this Mighty Mystery, how could his unassisted mind give credence to the announcement of so Incomprehensible, so Divine a Scheme \ The same Tense of the Hiph-tt of jEK occurs in this same sense in [Lament, iv. 12] p.N ^D WPgH tfo the kings of the earth could not have believed .... (that the adversary and enemy should enter the gates of Jeru- salem). WJflJP^ .* The Noun njJMZtf (from V12V to hear) signifies a report heard in all the places in which it occurs in The Bible, in contradistinction to Pn$P3 (from "ifeQ to give tidings) which designates a report spread or given, an annunciation ; Ijr^CiZJ must, therefore, be taken here as expressing the report we have heard, as "Ht [J°t> xxiii. 2] my blow implies, not the blow dealt out by me, but the blow I have received. Several other instances have been given [Letter xlvii. § 15] of the ambiguity to which Possessive Pronominal Affixes in Hebrew are liable, with regard to the subject to which they are to be referred, an ambiguity which the Context alone can supply the means of clearing up. nnbll ^D hjJ 7\\T\\ #i"ip. In these words they express the cause for the slowness of belief confessed in the opening member of the verse — Seeing-that The Arm of JEHOVAH, to whom hath it ever been revealed [in so remarkable a manner]. In this sense the passage must be taken, for " The Arm of JEHOVAH " had indeed been often revealed in crushing the enemies of His * For ttfllHBttn the Kibbuts supplanting the Shurih [Letter xxw § 21]. 316 HEBREW GRAMMAR. chosen people, but never before in effecting the wondrous Deliverance of all the families of man from the spiritual thraldom of the great enemy of souls. \9 bV for ^D b§ . We frequently find bV used for b$ , as TfijV hV Vv>?>nrn [l Sam. i. 10] And she [Hannah] prayed to JEHOVAH. Verse 2. VJQ 1 ? p2V3 ^] . This and the following verse, in describing the lowly appearance of The Mes- siah, continue the people's enumeration of reasons why they could not imagine that this w T as indeed The Christ. tyl] seeing-that He grew up, i.e., The Person at Whose Glorious exaltation thev marvelled, and were con- founded, — the "T3#, i.e., Who was described in the closing verses of Chapter lii. P2^2 . p2V (from pP to suck) primarily signifies a sucking-child, a suckling, as p2V jit#7 [Lament, iv. 4] [the] tongue of [the] suckling, and thence figuratively is applied to the tender branch of a tree, as sucking the sap from the parent trunk, as Wipy Wjl [Hosea xiv. 7] His tender-branches shall go forth ; in like manner, a branch or bough is sometimes expressed by ]2 as being the offspring of the tree, as fJpV mh ]3 [Gen. xlix. 22] Joseph is a fruitful bough. V12>? before HIM, i.e., before JEHOVAH, mentioned in the preceding verse. HJV ri§5 C&hfcOl and as the stem from a land of dryness, i.e., from a dry land (Letter xlvii. § 1, Rule v.) ; the words fTV fl^Q refer to p2V as well as to &H&, i.e., He was like the unpromising shoot and the ill-formed, shapeless stem of a tree that grows from a dry land. Tin K*71 ih "Itfh $h. The Substantive Verb »T.1 LETTER LX. 317 must be understood before 17 , as if there had been written 17 HJH "1SJ1 K7 , lit., there was to him no form, i.e., He had no form (Letter lvi. § 7, 8, 9). irncmi Hg-jO \kl] IHS-i:-) And-when we used to see Him (i.e., as often as we saw Him), f/'P . The force of the prefix D here, as in the word ir#(#f>$ of the preceding clause of the sentence, is on account of [Letter xlvi. § 23] , as PD ^VV ftJJlQ [Ps. cvii. 34] ox account of the wickedness of those that dwell therein. UQwIZ? 1D1D the chastisement (lit., of, i.e.) requisite for our peace ; as DJN&9 l^jt/i "13^ f [Gen. xlii. 19] the com of (i.e., requisite for) your houses (Letter xlvii. § 1, Rule 4). The remarks of the Hebrew Rabbi Solomon Jarchi on this passage may perhaps be interesting. He writes, — 320 HEBREW GRAMMAR. d5ii?p 5:5 oi5d nvci ipvp cp f>i?o "For He was chastised that there might be peace to all the world." Would that all Christian interpreters had agreed on such an exposition as that which is thus given by so eminent a Jewish commentator ! yfyy . The Substantive Verb ivas must be understood T T before this word. Vh KB")3 . The Niph-al ($%~$), followed by a Dative (1^), is used here Impersonally to express literally it was healed to as, i.e., we were healed. The Verb NiTI is used — I. In the sense of healing sickness or disease; as [Numb. xii. 13] H 1 ? S3 KD-I K) h$ O GOD, I pray, heal now her, as Moses prayed for Miriam on the occasion of her having been smitten with leprosy ; — II. In the sense of repairing, restoring a thing to its pristine state, as we read of Elijah's repairing the ruined altar of JEHOVAH [1 Kings xviii. ttO] DTIflfl nliT ri3TD ns HtTPl And he repaired the tv t : - : • v .. - : - altar of Jehovah which was broken down ; — III. In the sense which our passage requires, of restoring i.e. to a state of acceptance with The Almighty, and so to a healthful state of being, the repentant soul that had fallen by sin into that disease of which the end is everlasting death ; as [Isai. vi. 10] " Make fat the heart of this people, and make heavy their eyes, and shut their ears ; lest they see with their eyes and hear with their ears, and understand with their heart (i 1 ? N£)"y! 3^1) and should convert and be healed " (as our English gives it), i.e., should repent and turn from their evil ways, and so healing should be to them. LETTER LX. .321 Verse 6. i:\t/n IJ&3 V^3 . From the fact of the Noun in |&f 3 being in the Definite state, Kimchi supposes that the full expression would be, — ■ pm p?5 |'fi nub jfoa Like the sheep that have no shepherd. in allusion to Numb, xxvii. 17 and 1 Kings xxii. 17, where this full phrase occurs ; his words are, — inn '3 ,^'7'i q"ao pr»?3 ]6:: wp -p'?5 ,pm 'br> jfaa tiJ> wii pi?n i5 i»f)D pDir> pip ]fop "His wish is to say (i.e., he means to say), 'like sheep with- " ' out a shepherd,' therefore he said 1^? with a Pathach to the " 2 for the Definite Article; for that flock wanders, to which there " is no shepherd.'' The English idiom, however, will perhaps admit the Definite Article here without requiring any comment. f Z"$ . This word here signifies every one, each one ; as wDiS ,| 57 B^N [Exod. xii. 4] each man according to his eating. 13 Jft3£jn HE hath caused to fall upon Him. This Verb in the Kal has various shades of meaning ; as to meet a person, or reach a place, — to meet either in a friendly or in a hostile manner (the latter giving the sense to fall upon), — also, to make urgent entreat]) ; of the Tliph-cl we find only the significations — to cause to fall (i.e., to lay or place) upon (the sense required here), — and to entreat, to intercede (the sense required in the last word of this chapter). Verse 7. Vf& nr)^ K71 . Yet He would not open TTis mouth. The same words occur again at the end of this verse, and in each place the Verb should be taken either in its Frequentative or its Subjunctive Sense. VOL. II. Y 322 HEBREW GRAMMAR. npS$a rvifi ^b ^rrai biv msb n|>3. it will be observed that b2V refers to nfc>, and that HD^SJ t v ' t T : v refers to 7H1 ; so that a beautiful parallel results ; but the following words TS Htt\ N71 refer again to The Holy Being Whose sufferings are here described : the passage running thus :-— He was oppressed, — and He, though-afflicted, Yet would not open His Mouth ; As a lamb to the slaughter led, And as an ewe before her shearers dumb : — Yea-so — would not He open His Mouth. (for the Grammar of b2V and npS$j see below, in the Analysis). Verse 8. iTfa MJO . The Noun 111 signifies here the generation of a person, his coevals, contemporaries ; and so [Gen. vi. 9] it is said of Noah that he was perfect TATT? in his generations, i.e., among those of his time, his contemporaries. The Particle fiN (as stated Letter xlvii. § 8) is used not only as a mark of the Objective Case, but also as a sign of an Absolute Nominative ; as HTH "DTI n« ^?y2 J/T bx [2 Sam. xi. 25], which must, of course, be thus construed: — H-TH "Din Hitf as for this thine/ T2U!3 #T. ^ let *' not oe ev ^ ™ l thine eyes ; _ D?jgPf b$ fa} Tj2in ngl [2 Kings vi. 5], which must be construed /JHSn ru>"l and as for the iron. D?gn 7$ b%2 it fell into the, water ;— and so T^l r\2lb T1K ttfrn [2 Kings x. 15], which must be construed ^pil^ JHtf as for thy heart, l&l B^H zs it upright? and .... DDi" 1 ! Drpbjyp id *6 ijjtjn tie;/ n« nWa tfgn tie;/ n«i [Nehem.ix. 19], which must be construed jJJ/n TIEJt/ H§ LETTER LX. 823 as for [the] pillar of the cloud, £t2V2 DiT^E ID S> it departed not from them in the day-time, vxn IVty nsn and as for [the] pillar of the fire, Hjv3 [it departed not from them] by night .... Similarly our passage must be rendered, — And as for His generation {i.e., coevals) who could have thought, &c. The Verb ni!^ or JTJ^ signifies sometimes to speak, and sometimes to think ; but as the very same form (Pi-al) of this Verb is, in [Ps. exliii. 5] nni&'K ?pT flfeWDS , rendered in The English Bible by I will muse (i.e., meditate, or think) [upon the work of Thy hands], it was considered better to give the same sense to it here. V2 1 ) J/JJ ^SJ7 J/#§jp. The prefixed Preposition D in j/£^$p must be carried on in idea to the word J/ J 3 and supplied before it (Letter xlviii. § 11). Thus we find [Gen. xlix. 25], — Tun T3** ^8 t' v : : - : I • t •• •• ■pirn n^ { nai t ' v -: t • - - " : By [The] God of thy father, and may He help thee, Yea [by The] Almighty, and may He bless thee ; where the 12 of 7SD must be carried on in idea and supplied before fitf in H^l , the meaning being ^^ riNDI and by [The] Almighty, Sec; so again [Lament, iv. 13], — rpjnla ni:ig On account of [the] sins of her prophets, [On account ok] the iniquities of her priests ; where the 12 expressed before DNuin must be supplied before rn^ijU , the sense being ni3i££ by reason y 2 3~4: HEBREW GRAMMAR. of [thr~\ iniquities of, &c. ; and so, too, the words before us stand for — T - V * On account of [the] transgression of nay people, [Ox account of the] stroke [that was prepared for, or due] to them. The full form of the last member would be fob }i33 J/J|Z? ;— so we find [Prov. xix. 29] • t : • " - t Punishments are prepared for scorners ; in which instance the Verb 13133 they are prepared, is expressed ; but in [Prov. xxvi. 3] we have the Participle |133 three times understood, viz., — D^P3 1$ GDJJ&h "liDH^ 3££ DID^ £3ifc> which stands for — D^D3 13 1 ? |i33 BJL#] "li^n 1 ? {to J 3TO DID 1 ? |03 L2i^ A whip is prepared for the horse, a bridle is prepared for the ass, and so a rod is prepared for [the] hack of fools. ^Jl my people. The Possessive Pronoun my refers, of course, to one of the bystanders who is introduced by the words nniL^'! *>D who could have thought, &c. ift 1 ? , the Poetical form for DH7 to them, refers to ^ZDJJ iftgf people ; the Singular Noun of Multitude DJ7 being frequently used in a Plural sense, as [Isai. lx. 21] — pa it^T? DSty 1 ? D^p^y d^s ^jjgiKi And thy people [shall be] all righteous, they shall inherit the land for ever. (See the Analysis on the word io?). The whole verse under consideration should therefore be construed thus : — ■)¥#£ From confinement, BBltfJpZJfl and from judg- LETTER LX. 325 menf, Pig? was He taken; "nil H$1 and as for His coevals, — ^D /<7^ JH> ^ST He shall see a seed [that shall] prolong its days (a Church, that is, that shall last for ever and ever) ; the Relative Pronoun ~)&'N being understood before Tl^. [Letter xxiv. § 7]. For illustration of U*iy days, standing for "PuP its (in.) days, see above (p. 31 S) in the Note on D^S, verse 3 of this chapter. T\7p. ITS niiTJ l^ni and the purpose of Jehovah by His means shall prosper. The Mighty Scheme, i.e., of Human Redemption shall, by His means, be carried out, and successfully completed. GOD now speaks again Himself. — The Cup of Suffering has been drunk to its very dregs ; — The Righteous One has performed the Work that He had taken in hand to do ; and The Almighty Father of all concludes now this amazing Revelation of what should be the character of The Saviour's Life on earth, — what should be the close of That Life, — and what the wondrous circumstances attending that Mighty Event, — by the solemn words of the two following verses — the last of the chapter : — Verse 11. 1J£^3 IfcVD Because of the agony of His soul [since He hath not kept back his soul from death, there- fore] V2W n»T. The Conjunctive Accent Munach of n^-P renders it absolutely necessary to connect this word closely with the following word #2fe^ having the Zawkeph Kawtown to which the Munach serves as VntVft [Letter lviii. § 24] ; the prefix V) (the abbreviated form of ~ii£\x: [Letter xxiv. § 13] ) should be supplied before #3^1 , so as to produce V2&\& ^^")1 He shall see that He will be satisfied. It has been seen [Letter xlviii. § 4, Vol. ii. page 29] that the Verb UNI is often used elliptically for seeing LETTER LX. 829 one's desire; as ^fr? n«"l« ^jtt [Ps. cxviii. 7] and I shall see \jnu desire] upon mine enemies ; and so, perhaps, here there may be an ellipsis of IV^n II is desire, after the Avoid H$T i.e., He shall see His rfm're [to such an extent] that He shall be satisfied. Kimchi, supplying 31C0 after n$"P , and 13 after J/3t£n (to which last he adds the prefix U)) gives the full sentence 13 >'3& n .£> 31u3 nXT He s/<#// see happiness so as to be satisfied with it. But as in the preceding verse we have JH? H$T He shall see seed, i.e., a flourishing Church, spoken of as what should be a consequence of His persevering even unto death, it is perhaps best to supply J7TJ here after Htt"P , the idea being that now, when all has been fully accomplished, He shall see that seed, He shall see that widely-extended Church, — He shall see to His utmost satisfaction. D^n*? *$Jg p-HV P^V: ^12 . The Distinctive Accent Tever of p ,r IV forbids the union of this word with ^331 as an Adjective agreeing with the latter word ; and again ^3V has the Distinctive Accent Tipcha : so that these two words must be considered as Nouns in Appo- sition with each other, and each serving as a Nominative Case to p^V? . The Construction, therefore, should be p^V [The] Just-One, [even] ^2V. My Servant (see Note on this word, chap. lii. verse 13) injn3 by His knowledge, i.e., by reason of His knowing that it is The Will of JEHOVAH to afflict Him and put Him to grief (as stated in the preceding verse, which forms the groundwork of the present one), and by reason of His knowing that He should by His sufferings redeem all mankind from death, — by reason of His knowing all this, He shall make His soul an offering for sin, and so 330 HEBREW GRAMMAR. D^n_7 many i.e., shall cause to he accounted- righteous before GOD those multitudes who, but for His Atoning Merit, must have re- ceived the sinners' condemna- tion as their due. The h of ^2nb serves here merely as a mark of the Accusative Case [Letter xlvi. § 19] ; as [Levit. xix. 18] ^D2 ^1^ JJQH^I and tn0U s ^ a ^ l° ve ^W neighbour as thyself ; and the full expression of the ideas represented by this interwoven clause would be — By His knowledge shall [The] Righteous-One justify many : By His knowledge shall My Servant justify many. b'3U] Kin DnJijO . This is explanatory of the pre- ceding clause, He shall justify many, for He shall bear- the-burden-of their iniquities. The Emj)hasis caused by the Pronoun NTH being expressed before h'2D\ must not be overlooked — " The burden of their iniquities He, He, shall bear, for He alone can bear them " [comp. Letter xlix. § 10]. Verse 12. D'31? 1*7 p^X ]2) Therefore ivill I give Him the great as a portion. In the preceding verse we see W2T\ expressing greatness of multitude, its usual sense ; it here expresses greatness of dignity and power ; as D^l #i"rT£ [Job xxxv. 9] by reason of [the] arm of the mighty. The prefixed 2 of 0^*13 is Pleonastic, as we find it often used before an Accusative Case (Letter xlvi. § 14) ; as DYl 1 ?** J?#J3 13inS [Ps. 1. 23] i" will show him the salvation of GOD. The giving to Him the great-ones as His portion seems to refer to the extension LETTER LX. 331 of the Gospel Kingdom, which should ultimately include the greatest empires of the world within its pale ; and, at the same time, to declare that though" the people might rage and the kings take counsel together against JEHOVAH and against His Christ," yet the heathen should he ultimately " given Him for His inheritance,* " and the uttermost parts of the earth for his possession." ^V Pfol D^DIXg nsn and [the'] mighty He shall divide [as] a spoil. Death and hell shall be swallowed up in victory, and the Devil and his angels be despoiled of their dominion under the tyranny of which the fallen race of man was hopelessly enthralled. Before 77& ; the Preposition for or as must be under- stood, The mighty He shall divide for a spoil, or as spoil ; so [Ps. ii. 8] ^r^ri] DyiJ H3JJK1 and I will give the heathen \_for] Thine inheritance. itfStf ma 1 ? myn 1#« nnn Because that He hath : - v t - t "•■: .• v "J - - poured forth His soul to death : a similar expression occurs [Ps. cxli. 8] ^5)2 TJjHjl 7S pour not out my soul. H303 D^#5l n$1 and with transgressors was He numbered. Wilfully regarded by His enemies as one of the most degraded of deceivers, — despised, and outcast, — blasphemously accused even of casting out devils by the prince of the devils — The Saviour of Mankind might well be described as numbered with transgressors, inde- pendently of the final scenes of His life on earth when the malice of His persecutors attained its end by causing Him to die the death of the vilest criminal. KiPj &2~[ Ntpn SIH] Whereas He the sin of many bare. Not only was He without spot or blemish Himself but * Psalm ii. 8. "Ask of Mb and I will give Thee the heathen for Thine inheritance." 332 HEBREW GRAMMAR. He hath even cleansed the guilty consciences of us all " by bearing our sins in His own Body on the tree." jftjgj] Efy}$a2\ so that for the transgressors He might make intercession. The Definite Article in D^tpS71 may perhaps be intended to direct the attention to the word D^I^S just before mentioned, so that the clause may express — That He might make intercession even for those very (D\y#2) transgressors, among whom His enemies had classed Himself. The whole passage may be rendered in intelligible English as follows : — g£g° Small Capitals are used to mark Emphasis, — Italics for English words supplied, which are not expressed in The Hebrew. CHAPTER LII. [GOD speaks, saying], 13. Behold, MY Servant shall be successful : — HE shall be exalted, and shall be extolled ; And shall be high exceedingly. — 14. As those who have been amazed at THEE were MANY, (So marred was HIS visage more-than that of any man, And HIS Form more-than that of any of Man's children) — 15. So shall the nations HE shall sprinkle be many : At HIM shall kings be struck dumb with silent wonder, For such a thing as never hath been told them, have they seen, — And such-as they never have heard of, have they come-to-know ! — [Mute with Astonishment, they thus revolve within themselves :] LETTER LX. 333 CHAPTER LIU. 1. " Who could-havc-bclieved what-we-have-heard? " For The Arm of JEHOVAH, to whom hath it ever been so revealed ? — 2. " For HE grew-up as the tender-branch before HIM, " And as the root, out of a dry ground ; " HE had no form nor beaut v, iC And when we used to see HIM, then was there no comeliness that we should-desirc-IHM. 3. " Being despised and shunned of men, " A man of sorrows, and known of grief; " — And as one hiding his face from us — " HE ivas despised, and we esteemed HIM not. 4. " But-verily our griefs HE bare, " And our sorrows — HE carried them, " Yet we did esteem HIM " Stricken, smitten of GOD, and afflicted. 5. " Whereas HE was wounded for our transgressions, " Crushed on account of our iniquities ; " The chastisement requisite for our peace was upon HIM, " And by HIS being-wounded we were healed. 6. " We all, like the sheep, have gone astray, " Each-one to his-own way have we turned ; " And JEHOVAH hath caused to fall on HIM " The iniquity of us all. 7. " HE-was-oppressed, — and HE, though afflicted, " Would yet not open HIS mouth ; " Like the lamb to the slaughter led, 11 And like the sheep before her shearers dumb: — " Yea-so — would not HE open HIS mouth. 33 4 HEBREW GRAMMAR. 8. " From confinement and from judgment was HE taken, " And as for HIS generation, wliich-of-them could have-thouglit " That ' HE was cut-off from the land of the living' " ' For the transgression of my people 11 ' For the stroke due to them ! ' 9. " Yea they would have made with the wicked HIS grave, " (But no, HE was with a rich-man when HE died ! ) " Not because HE had done any wrong*, " Surely there was no deceit in HIS mouth : 10. " But because JEHOVAH willed to crush HIM, therefore hath HE put HIM to grief, (Declaring that) " If HIS Soul would make itself a sin-offering, " HE should see a seed " That should prolong its clays " And the purpose of JEHOVAH " Should in HIS hand prosper." [Then speaks JEHOVAH GOD Almighty.] 11. Because of the Agony of HIS Soul, HE shall see that HE will be satisfied ; By-reason-of HIS knowledge shall The Just One justify, Even My Servant shall justify many : Seeing-that their iniquities HE shall bear. 1 2. Therefore the great-ones will I give HIM-as-HlS- portion, Yea-and the mighty shall HE divide as spoil : * Or, Because-of NO wrong that HE had done. LETTER LX. 335 Even because that HE hath poured-out to the death — HIS Soul, And with transgressors was numbered ; Whereas HE the sin of many bare In-order- that for the transgressors HE might make intercession. ANALYSIS OF VERBS AND OF THOSE WORDS WHICH CANNOT BE MET WITH UNDER THE SAME FORM IN A LEXICON. [With regard to words with Prefixes, it is supposed that the simple forms of such words will now be easily recognized, so as to be found at once in a Lexicon.] CHAPTER LII. Verse 13. b^lpl ITe shall be successful (r. ^DtP Iliph., to be successful) Fut. Hiph. 3 Sing. Masc. (see Note on this word, page 308). "H3J; My servant. From the Absolute form !?# a servant (of the form *?#£ , 3 r. ? . , see Table of Nouns, page 248). With Aff. n:?J/ my, This is the Nomi- native to the Verb T3fe^ j an( i also to the three follow- ing Verbs : — D1")" 1 , iN&JI , and PDJ1 . O t * t • : * - t : D1T He shall be exalted (r. D1"l to be high, exalted, a Verb T'J7). Fut. Kal 3 Sing. Masc. NOT And He shall be extolled (r. $V2 to lift up ; a Doubly Irregular Verb, being both 2"D and N" 1 ?), Past Niph. 3 Sing. Masc, with 1 Conversivum. FnJ"! and He shall be high (r. H2J to be high), Fast Kal, 3 Sing. Masc, with 1 Conversivum. This Verb — having Mappik in the third radical (H), — does not belon a 5 336 HEBREW GRAMMAR. to the !T7 , but to the Regular Verbs (see Letter xxxviii. § 1). Verse 14. "I&'N? as. This Particle is formed by pre- fixing 3 to the Conjunction 1W$ (see also Note on this verse, page 310). 1EE&* they were amazed (r. DE£> to be amazed) , a Verb of the OOTIDS, Conjugated regularly like *Tp3 , Letter xl. § 3), Past Kal, 3 Plur. ?p5?j7 at Thee. The Preposition 7j/ upon, or at, is declined with Plural Affixes (Letter xix. § 23, Vol. L, page 121) — *hy r upon (or at me), ^vJJ ««pow (or «f) thee (?«.), V7^ wp^m (or fltf) /m?z, &c. 0^31 »wmy. — Adjective, 3"} Sing. Masc. (of the form 73 , 3 I ; see Table of Nouns, page 260), n|"l Sing. Fern., Plu. D\Zn Masc, ni3"l Fern. jnn^ ; D marred. Used here Adjectively for fiPI£>0 or nn^^ . Partic. Past Hoph. of nn&T , in Hipk, to destroy, mar. Ji^Nft more than [that of any] man. The Prefix D has here the sense more than (see Letter xxi. § 11). ^N"]?? His visage. From the Absolute State HKTIE) (form HjL^p , H J l p ; see Table of Nouns, page 261, — the D taking Pathach instead of Short- Cherik on account of the Guttural "1 — ). With Aff. \S"]Q my, .... inNlD his, .... [It will be perceived that, since the radical H is dropped when the word takes Affixes, the H of ininO belongs to the Affix, not to the root.] 1"1§JT) and His form. From the Absolute State l$h (of the form 7J/3 , :i J" ] ; see Table of Nouns, page 249). On account of the N , the Segol of the second radical is — in the Absolute State — here changed into Pathach, and the Chowlem of the first radical is retained in the LETTER LX. 337 Inflected forms "HNJH my, i~)Nh /3D to to//), Past Pw., 3 Sing. Masc. DiT7 to them (/«.). The Dative Plu. of N1H Ac (see vol. i., page 150). TfcO they have seen (r. HS"I to see, a Verb iT7), Past Kal, 3 Plu. TOE* fAey have heard (r. JfiDtt> to hear), Past /la/, 3 Phi/ VOL. II. Z 338 HEBREW GRAMMAR. U)i3J?n they have considered, known within themselves (r. |13 or p3 to understand, see Vol. i., page 328), P<25? Ilithp., 3 Plu. ; for 13jlt3,On , the Shvah being changed into Kawmets by the Pause. The Ilithp. of this Verb is used in the Intransitive sense to perceive, to know within oneself. In like manner the Verb ^/H gives the Ilithp. ni"^n^«3 [Gen. vi. 9] iVofl/i walked, in an Intransi- tive sense. CHAPTER LIU. Verse 1. PQ$n could have believed or given credence (r. |Dtf Hiph. to believe, to give credence). Past Hiph. 3 Sing. Masc, used here in a Conditional sense (see Note on this word, page 315; compare Letter xxviii. $ 13, Vol. i., page 202). UOJH2^7 to that we have heard. From the Absolute State njtnE^ a thing heard (of the form r6u'5 , H J T 2 1 ; see Table of Nouns, page 253), with Aff. V^JftDl^ w^i • • • ^nj/IDttf our, &c. The Prefix 7 takes Short- Cherik instead of Shvah, lest two Shvahs should come together at the beginning of a word. (See Letter xiii. § 2.) The Kibbuts here unaccountably supplants Shurik. (Letter xxx. § 21.) jUi"lp seeing-that [The] Arm of. From the Absolute State ifhj (of the form bfa, 3 * 2 j ; see Table of Nouns, page 250, also N.B. page 214). In Construction the same. The prefix T becomes 1 on account of the Shvah beneath the T (see Letter xvii. § 3). It has here the sense of seeing-that, ox for (see Letter xlvi. § 13, Rule I.). ^ph}2 it (/.) hath been revealed (r. n*7J , a Verb 1T7 ). Past Niph. 3 Sing. Fern., for nri/J^ , the Shvah beneath the 7 being changed into Kawmets by the Pause. Verse 2. 7JH seeing that He ^ra# wp (r. D7^ to #0 wp, LETTER EX. 339 a Verb iT7 ), Fut. Kal 3 Sing. Masc., with 1 Conversivum for H/Jpl , the *\ causing Apocopation (see Letter xxxix. §7) V piji^S. See Note on this word, page 31G. VIZ) before HIM (see under "Q97 , Vol. i., page 542). I 1 ? to Him. The Dative of Sin fte (sec Vol. i., page 150). inS"j31 and-when we-used-to-see Him (r. ntfl to 5^, a Verb H" 1 ?), Fut. jR«/ 1 Plu. with 1 Conjunctive and the Objective Affix 1H him. The fl of the root being dropped in the forms with Affixes, the H which appears here belongs to the Affix, not to the root. The Future here expresses Frequency of Past Action (see Letter lv. § 8). irnonjl that we should desire Him (r. "ICTI to desire), Fut. Kal 1 Plu. with 1 Conjunctive and the Objective Affix in him. The Future here is used in its Subjunc- tive sense (Letter xxviii. § 14 ; see Note on this word, page 317). Verse 3. HJ33 Being despised (r. D?2 to despise, a Verb IT 1 ? ), Fartic. Niph. Sing. Masc. blT}] and destitute of (i.e., shunned by). Absolute State 7111 , an Adjective of the form 7#2 , 3 r. \ (see Table of Nouns, page 245) ; in Construction 7"Tn , and, with the Conjunctive 1 , 7*111] — the 1 taking Pathach for the sake of Assimilation with the Ckateph-Pathach of the n (Letter xvii. § 6). — D^tf men. Absolute State L^K a man, the same in Construction; Plu. D^JN (in sublime language D^K). fiiZl&DQ sorrows. Absolute State ""llKipQ sorrow (of the form fy§D , 3 ' 2 \D; see Table of Nouns, page 256), Flu. DVjtoa and hi3ft?£;— the former with Affixes ir3*OQ our, &c. . . . J/TTl and known of, or by (r.I/T to know, a Verb v '2 ), z 2 340 HEBBEW GRAMMAR. Partic. Past Kal J71T, in the State of Construc- tion #VT!. The prefix "I takes here Long-Cherik, in accordance with the Rule (Letter xvii. § 5). *bh . The Pause form of ^»n grief (see Note on this word, page 318), Plu. wfrn and ubn , with Aff. lySn our, &c. . . . ••T T; 7 "irnp^Dl and as one hiding (r. 1DD) Partic. IJipA. Sing. Masc, with the Prefix D as, and the Conjunction 1 (which becomes 1 in consequence of being prefixed to a word of which the first consonant bears Shvah ; see Letter xvii. § 3). The second radical takes Tsayre here, instead of Long Cherik, as is frequently the case in the Infinitive and Future. (See Letter xxx. § 27.) 13/2)9. Here the Ablative Plural, from us, of *0tf (see Vol. i., page 148). ntZU . See this word above, at the beginning of this verse. im^n we did esteem Him (r. 3&TI), Past Kal 1 Plu., with Affix in him; the Kihbuts here supplants Shurik (see Letter xxx. § 21). Verse 4. I^n . See under vh in the preceding verse. K&'3 He &are (r. N^3 , a Doubly Irregular Verb, being both D"D and N" 1 ?), Past iTrti 3 Sing. Masc. W^fcODI • See under nill&rE in the preceding verse. The Conjunctive Prefix 1 becomes 1 before the Labial f2 (see Letter xvii. § 4). DJ73D He carried them (r. ^HD), Past 7fa/ 3 Sing. Masc, with Objective Affix D— them (m.). in33t^n . See this word in the preceding verse. JL7132 stricken (r. J/J3), Partic. Past iTtf/, Sing. Masc. H3D smitten of (r. POJ HapA. to sww'fe, Hoph. to be smitten ; a Doubly Irregular Verb, being both 2"2 and IT?) ; Partic. Iloph. T\$12 Sing. Masc, in Constr. H2E , the jStyjro? being changed into Tsayre (see Letter xix.§ 22, Rule IV.). LETTER LX. 8 1 1 H^l and afflicted (r. T\ty , Ft", to afflict, Pu. to be afflicted; a Verb TS'H), Partic. Pu-ul Sing. Masc. The Conjunctive Prefix "I becomes 1 before the Labial D (Letter xvii. § 4). Verse 5. v/h/Q wounded (r. 7Tn*, a Verb Y'J/), Partic. Pm. Sing. Masc. — I^J/tyap On account of our transgressions. From the Absoiute State J/tf§ (a Noun of the form ty% , 3 2 l ; see Table of Nouns, page 248), Plu. D^£ J 9 , with Affixes U-'fc'S my, . . . W$1ft% our, &c. The Prefix D has here the sense on account of (Letter xlvi. § 23). K3"ip crushed (r. S3! , in Pi. to c>W*, Pm. to fo crushed, a Verb K^), Partic. Pu. Sing. Masc. irniJlj/Q o;i account of our iniquities. From the Absolute State ]ii? (a Noun of the form b)}B , 3 " 2 \ ; see Table of Nouns, page .046) ; in Constr. j\g ,* Plu. ni3lg , with Aff. ^ni3i^ w*y, ... irnl3i^ our, DlTJTttlg (or Drp3i|?) tteir («i.), &c. The Prefix 22 has here the same sense as in ^U/'&'SE) , in this same verse above. "IDID chastisement of. From the Absolute State 1D1D [r. -ID" 1 ] (a Noun of the form tylD , 3 2 in ; see Table of Nouns, page 258), in Constr. 1D1E (see Note on this word, page 319). ^Ei^ our peace. From the Absolute State Dl 1 ?^ (a Noun of the form btyS , s " 2 \; see Table of Nouns, page 246), with Aff. V?fttf my, . . . I^fttf our, Sec. Vtyf upon Him. See under ?|^{7 , page 336 [Chap. Hi., verse 14]. * This is taken to be the root by Kimchi, Buxtorf, Ben Zcv ; — since the Pi., Pu., and Hithp. are the Bame for the V3> as they are for the D^DS Geminata (see Letter xl. § 9), one modern Lexicographer of Note takes the root here to be v7n , bis only reason being, as it would seem, a desire of differing from every one else. 342 HEBREW GRAMMAR. inn^nni and by His wound. From the Absolute State n"pn [for HTnn a wound (a Noun of the form nSu'S, H 3 1 2 l. S ee Table of Nouns, page 253)], with Aff. '•jh'jan my, . . . irn x 3n his, &c. The Prefix 2 takes a Pathach for the sake of Assimilation with the Chateph-Pathach beneath the n (Letter xvii. § 8, Rule III.), and the Conjunctive Prefix 1 becomes 1 before the Labial 2 (Letter xvii. § 4). N|"U it (m.) was healed (r. N£f) , Kal to heal, Niph. to be healed, a Verb N"?), Past Niph. 3 Sing. Masc. M) to us. The Dative Plu. of}** I (see Vol. i.,p. 148). Verse 6. IJt^S all of us. From the Absolute State 73 TV. J (or "73), properly a Noun, the whole ; very often used Adjectively for all, as here. With Affix Y}% the whole of me, . . . 12 73 all of us, &c. (see Letter xxii. $ 1 3). irjyn we have gone-astray (r. H^H to go astray, a Verb »T7), Past JTaZ 1 Plural. i3~n t ? to his [own~\ way. From the Absolute State TH (a Noun of the form 7#B, 32 1- see Table of Nouns, page 248), with Affix ^"l^ my, . . . i3~]"H his, &c. With the Prefix ) to. 1^33 we kw turned (r. H355 , a Verb JT7), Past .KaZ lVlu. jtpSQH HE hath caused to fall (r. J7J2 , iiaZ and JZrpA. to fall upon, also to entreat), Past Iliph. 3 Sing. Masc. 13 0ft Him. The Ablative of S1H Ae (see Vol. i., page 150). ]W. . See on the preceding page, under WJTtiijfS) (v. 5)' 1373 . See this word above, in this verse. TV. ' Verse 7. USZ2 He was oppressed (r. W22* to oppress, a Verb D"D) Past Niph. 3 Sing. Masc. * This word should be carefully distinguished from E733 to a/7>roacA. LETTER LX. 343 rnj/3 being afflicted (r. n:j; , a Verb H V), Partic. i\7/;/<. Sing. Masc., corresponding to H7J13 , the Guttural first radical taking Chateph-Pathacli, and the 2 of the Niph. then taking Pathach for the sake of Assimilation Avith the Chateph-Pathtich. Dftp) He //w/A/ qpew (r. nna), Fut. Kal 3 Sing. Masc. ; used here Subjunctively. V$ His mouth. See on page 337, under DIT^I [Chapter lii., verse 15]. 72V Z or fTO* to speak, also to meditate, think), Future Pi-al 3 Sing. Masc., used here Subjunctively. "ir^ He was cut off (r. "It J , Kal to cut, Niph. to be cut off ), Past Niph. 3 Sing. Masc. ^V my people. From the Absolute State CJLf (or D£) a people ; with Aff. "©If my, Sec. . . . fob for them (in.') The Poetical form for DH/ , Dative Flu. -of Sin />e (see Vol. i., page 150). In a few instances, iQ 1 ? may appear, at first sight, to stand for 1*7 ; but, on closer observation, it will always be found that this is not the case. Thus we find, Gen. ix. 25, 26, — : vr\$h iTir &12V my \v:3 in» tv: v : • • t -: •; •%•!--: T :i©7 "ny |^33 "•iti c^ \y?8 nirp ^ng Cursed [be] Canaan, a servant of servants shall he be to ms BRETHREN. Blessed be JEnovAn [The] God of Shem, and let Canaan be a servant ( ^/ ) to them, i.e., either to Shem s posterity, or to Canaan's brethren C^W7 in tne preceding verse), — the latter clause of Verse 26 being thus considered as equivalent to that of Verse 25. Thus Mendelssohn remarks on this word fob :— T rfvm) wwp) wton im oou vVi p?3 tra p»ai pci ftp jjsJ P7ip? piPPUD VPPi ll> "WPD IP , P'31 PPD PD IHfi i"")1 ( :"• V'U " ia? is in the Plural Number, being-equivalent-to, (lit., tike) Letter xxxvi. § 10. 346 HEBREW GRAMMAR. « Cnb . and the 1 is Paragogic, as [it is in] fo^n*! iBN30 " [Exod. xv. 17], Thou wilt bring them, [m] and Thou wilt plant " them : and he means to say to the seed of Shem, who were many ; " or [it may be] that it (the word ^/) refers to "^^f to ^ tls brethren, " mentioned in the preceding verse." Verse 9. ]$?! yea it (m.) would have made (r. ]T)2 , a Verb 3"D) Future Kal 3 Sing. Masc., with 1 Con- versivum; used here Subjunctively. The 1 Conversivum does not here draw back the accent because of the Dagesh in the T\ (see Letter xxxv. § 3). D^tth wicked (Plu. Masc.) ; an Adjective, used here Concretely, Sing. Masc, J7jh (of the form 7^2 , 3 2 l ; see Table of Nouns, page 245), Plu. DTfcH . i"13j? His grave. From the Absolute State "QP. of the form 7#2 , 3 \ \ ; see Table of Nouns (page 248), with Affixes , H3j? wy, . . . 1"Oj? ^is, &c VniD2 in His deaths. From the Absolute State mD, T V T » Flu. D\niD , found only in inflection, viz. ; — in Construc- tion, V}i£) [Ezek. xxviii. 10] deaths of; and here, VJHiD His deaths. The 3 is, of course, the prefixed Preposi- tion expressing in. For the reason of the Plural deaths being given, rather than the Singular death, see Note on this word, page 326. nWjJ He had done (r. «W , a Verb iT'7), Past Kal 3 Sing. Masc. VP3 in His mouth. See above, under D!T£) , Chap, lii., verse 15. Verse 10. fDH He willed (r. fan), Past Kal 3 Sing. Masc, of the form 7,1/2 (see Letter xxx. § 10). 1»yn to crwsA Him ( r. Km, a Verb N"7 ), Infin. Pw//, with Object. Aff. i him, for liO"! 1 ? , the Prefix 7 , — by which y^H is generally followed, as in .... UJTpn 1 ? PtfiT y%n 17 [Judg. xiii. 23] If Jehovah had willed to kill us, &c, — being here omitted. LETTER LX. 347 Ben Zev,mh.iB Lexicon*, well paraphrases thispassage — nanam ran ran worth v"- n rnrT ' Jehovah willed to smite IIi.u [with] a great anil grievous stroke. vOn He hath caused grief (r. i"l7n , Kal to feel pain or grief Iliph. to cause pain or grief a Verb H /), Past .HipA. 3 Sing. Masc, for H7£jn ; that the four letters 1 1 H iS are liable to interchange (i.e., to stand one for the other, as here "• for H ), has been mentioned earlier (Letter xxxviii., P.S. e, and xxxix. § 1). Now, the H being changed here into \ which could not be quiescent after Kawmets (Letter viii. § G), the Kawmets of the 7 is changed into Cherik. DtyJp it (f) will make (r. D1^ or CW ; Letter xxxvi. § 10); if Dlfr be taken as the root, t2fy$ will, of course, be Fut. Iliph. 3 Sing. Fern., — but if WU/ be the root, D^H will then be Fut. Kal 3 Sing. Fern. ; — the signification being in each case the same. iB^a His soul From the Absolute State Z%2 (of the form 7^9 , s J l. see Table of Nouns, page 248), with Aff. Vpa my, . . . i#S3 /"**, &c.— ilt'M is here the Nominative to the Verb D^U/JI . T n^H") He shall see. Fut. ifr*/ 3 Sing. Masc. (r. \11X1 , see on page 337, under 1^*1 Chap. lii. verse 15). — T")*£ it (m.) shall prolong (r. IIS, a Verb K"3, in Kal to be long, Iliph. to cause to be long, i.e., to prolong), Fut. Iliph. 3 Sing. Masc. ; that the Relative Pronoun H£'tf is understood before T")^ •, has been mentioned in the Note on this passage, page 358. D^ days. From the Absolute State UV a day, Plu. D^ . • T iT3 by His hand. From the Absolute form T a hand, with Aff. HJ my, ... IT £&, &c. The Prefix 3 expresses here Instrumentality (Letter xlvi. § 14). * Entitled " ffWlOTl ")S1M " Treasure of Roots. 348 HEBREW GRAMMAR. n^V? it (m.) shall prosper (r. rfe to prosper), Fut. Kal 3 Sing. Masc, for rh$\, the Pathach being lengthened into Kawmets by the Pause. Verse 11. bfiVD because-of [the] agony of. From the Absolute hft]J labour, sorrow, agony (of the form Sya, 3 ?1; see Table of Nouns, page 245), in Constr. htiy. . The force of the Prefix D is here because-of (see Letter xlvi. § 23). i& ! £3 His sow/. See under W22 , in the preceding verse. nKT He s/j«/Z s^e. See ibid. #3fe^ He will be satisfied (r. JfttP to 6e satisfied), Fut. jfa? 3 Sing. Masc, for #3^, the Pathach being lengthened into Kawmets by the Distinctive Accent Zawkeph-Kawtewn, as mentioned in the Marginal Note. irUH3 63/ His knowledge. From the Absolute State T\in knowledge, which, strictly speaking, is the Inf. Jirt/ of the Verb JtfT to A-rcow (see Letter xxxiv. § 8). "With Aff. tfljn wy,\ . . inyn Aw, &c. The force of the Prefix 3 is here Instrumental (Letter xlvi. § 14). p^*W He shall justify (r. p"TV Jia? to & lispljn y &c., &c., &c, seriously proposed as Standard Fohms in Grammars professing to teach Tbe Language of The HEBREW Bible! The only shadow of a reason that can be offered for this modern invention is, that vtDp is the Arabic and Si/riac standard ; but is that a reason for its being adopted as a standard of Hebrew ? Why should The Language of The Hebrew Bible be made the slave of these ? All the forms of each Participle, — except the Sing. Masc, — and likewise the Infinitives with Possessive Affixes, have unaccountably been omitted in the Stereotyped Tables ; they are here given, there- fore, in a Supplement. It will be perceived that the Verbs D^ 5 ^*? Geminata have been designated TH in these Stereotyped Tables ! Would the Hebrew Grammarians above-mentioned know what this means ? It will be observed that the Englished names of the Voices are spelt here in a manner slightly different from that given in this Work ; but it is hoped that this will not cause any serious inconvenience to the Reader. VOL II. A A 354 HEBREW GRAMMAR. Paradigm of Verbs in Kal. Regular Verb. Verb. Verb. Verb. Verb. Preter. Verb. 1 gutt, 2 gutt. 3 gutt. £ init. 11 Sing. 3 m. btap i- 't 172V 1- T p9T ' I - T 1- T m 3D i- 3£ nbttp it : 'it miss IT : IT 'it-.it it : it nafcp it :it H2D T 1- 2 m. t : F't t : i- t t ': i-t t : i- t /W33 t : i-t niao T 1 - 2f. nbtsp : : i-'t Rip? : : I- t : ': i-t : - 1- t MBfaa : : I-t niao i - 1 com • •■nbrsp • : i-'t • : i- t Vlp3tt • ': i-t • : I- t \ntM3 ■ :i-t Vlia? Plur. 3 com sibtap i : 'it I : it 'i-:it warn i : it •1^33 .123:0 yl2D i :it i : it * i- 2 m. Eflbttp EflT^ Df^P^T Dj-lpttJp D/=ia?aa IV : - : taniaD IV 2f. W^ti WT55 ?#,??$ 1#?fc$ 7£i#3 a iniao • IV 1 com ' «btap : i-'t : i- t •: i-t ws^y' •13^33 : i-t ^3iao i - Inf. abs. bittp 1 'T 1 T Ptyl 1 T tih'33 1 T aiaa 1 T Inf. const. bbp 1037 PV? ?b$ nift ab i Imperative Sing. m. btpp "ii?2 m 3>]D# tt?a 1- ab i f. ^i? H 79P '1— SI- I- : • s ^2 >ar? Plur. m. ^v srpap •ip.V.t I : • Ufa i : s»ab f . mbbp t : i ': naY»s t : i -: napst t': i- : t : I- : nattfa t ; i- na s aD T IV >. Future. Sing. 3 m. Vippi I -:i- P,??"! 1- : • i- • ab 4 - T T 3f. bbpn i -: i- V?]n Vf2wn wzr\ abn 1 T 2 m. bbptf 1 -: 1- P&Q yptin ttfan i- • aon 1 T 2f. ^bt?pn i" : - i- ''JOT? 1 ^kwf\ ^jua • 1 T 1 com. bbp« i v: iv pyitf i- : v 1- V aba 1 T Plur. 3 m. I^W i : -i- W i : : • i : • stab** 1 T 3f. nabbpn rmbrn mpBtn mvnwn mwm t : i ' ; • t : i -: i- t ': i- : • t : i- : • t : i- • na^aan t iv •-. : 2 m. ^bttpri I : - I- sipstn ' i -: : • i ; : * !Kp'|fl Jiabn 1 T 2f. robbpn naibyn mpmn na^iairn nattfan t : I ': • t : i -; i- t': i- : • t : i- : • t : I- ■ na^aon t iv ••• : 1 com. bbp3 i ': • i -:i- P£?3 BiaaJa i- : • t£>33 i- • ^T Fut. apoc. *W2 t-:i- Part. act. *>$> 1E9 I" Pp* spy a=P pass. 1 *m 1 T pjiyj 3HEB7 T B^3 »W PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 355 Paradigm of Verbs in Kal. Verb. Verb. Verb. Verb. Verb. Verb. Verl>. £ init. ^ init. S init. T med. ^ med. £ final. PI final. ■>a> - T 3&1 - T cp 'IT PIBp it't tf H20 IT T nba IT T nnba it : f? 4 1 9 f nap t : »l- ns:«a T IT T It t n^ba t r t rvba 1* T Wit o it t ^n>ba r t W3fi 1 't n 5X1 i : it >ba 1 T cripp DpNSO crvba «w •jnsi v p jrrba juseb ia^ba VfaM T t mitt?' 1 1 T rot9 V IV 3^5 Dii? it ; riba 1 T biptf nba i" : i* : • •ibDS i : • Vt 5 i : i : * 3 o 3 a "•aifl p i : • wren 1 T • "ba ^ba i : nabbs t : i -; na ? u? ^a^-l' , t a i-: naxap t : 'i nasi^a t iv : na^ba t iv : b3& 1" ,.. .. i~ • i- • 'IT ' r t it : • njfc 1™ zpn tth>n ata^n 'l T rw it : • nban b^n i- • i- Efctfljj rw it : • nban r : *?#€! ^T^n r : ■•awn • 'l T *w ^Prr'fl ^b-j"? bsw I** ante oH^y ata^N i- c^ips M T V2M 1 r t breoy nbas i : *©$! i : • i : 'l T w*a* Ft i : : * 'i : • nabstfn naatrn t : i- F " natzh^n nara^n nananpffl t : i- • : i- t iv ' : rrawson na s ban T lv : • T IV ; • nbprfn *3#£l i : i ■ • mug tt^afl 'IT !• T 1 : : ■ ^ban I : • t : i- n3»'T>n naat^n na^lMpn t : i- • t : i- • t iv • : nawsttfl nasban T iv : • t iv : • b,5rta b«s 1 T :atra nh>a i- • nta^a i- • sup 1 T A A 2 wpa 'l T 'l T cp 'IT a,7 TO I 3 if : • t«fa 1" T T nbaa I T nba IV ^ba 1 T 356 HEBREW GRAMMAR. Paradigm of Verbs in Niphhal. Preter. Sing. 3 m. Regular Verb. Verb. 1 gutt. bfcp3 ,_i. . TDV3 s f- nb^p3 rn»»a it : ': • it : viv 2 m, nbftp3 FnpVl t : i- ': • t ; I - v : i •.- 2 f- nbop? j-npsa. 1 com. v^btspa '•fi-nasa • : i- '• • • : I— /:iv Plur. 3 com. :ibl2p3 SfflBSa i : •: • i : viv 2 m. cnbtapa cm»ra iv : - •: • Iv : -v:iv 2 f- ?£)btop3 ty-ITB.2,5 l com. robtopzi fiai&sa Verb. 2 gutt. npu.3 'it-::- npsta t i ; i- : • 'I-::- B#i?ST3 l£ip2|a wip^ta Verb. 3 gutt. 2£ty*3 ni?X3273 it : : • m£t£?3 t : i- : * TWEBJa TOattfa i : : • E£lVtttZJ3 ]£19tttt?3 WEBB?? Verb. 2 init. t»'aa nj»a3 it : • t :i- • : : i- • Vlttfea • : !-■ Verb. H2D3 Tl-t m'2D3 t i - : niapa I- T srt&aa i : • oritpa? dpiapa ?CtZ?23 : I- • 5131203 I - : Infinitive. Imperative. Sing. m. f. Plur. m. f. Future. Sing. 3 m. 3f. 2 m. 2f. 1 com. Plur. 3 m. 3 f. 2 m. 2 f. 1 com. btoprr iftvn pv-tn ynwn ttfaan 2Bn ,..| T . ,.. T •• I ,.. T . I- T • I" T * I- • btopn I" It • ^btapn !• : 'it- nabtasn btap" 1 r-'T* brapn i-'t • b&pn i-'t • ^bopn I- : 'it- bttps F'tv ^brap> I :'it* sibopn I : 'it - nabtapn t : i--'t • myn py-tn vnuin w?zn nDrr I" T •• ' I" T • I- T • l r T • I" • "Hjasn *iy$*n ^^n ^aan ^aerr ,. : , T .. 'i--:|t • F : it • V :it • • i- • sTjajPU ^,-jn -iy'aj^«n -it^rr -lasr, na-tttsn nspy-Tn n32ttt2Jn natfaan na*»3&n t : I" t " t 1 : 1- t • t : I- t • t : I" r • t iv - • IP'S* py-v i ,.. T . statin 1- t • tt?23> ,.. T . IP. ipyn 1"* T " TO* ynwn 1- T • ii?33n l"T * ipv& OT* 1- T • ttfaan l"T • a&n i- • i* : it ■• ••ps-vi ' i— :it • r : it • ■»izr*aan l> :it • vpsn 1" T " pyw ' I" T V 1- T V E733W l"T V a&^ I : it •• WW" h —. it- ^£$1 I :it« ^2D H i- • n3*ro2n mpy-m rovtt^n T :l" t •• t':i t * t • t : I- t • natfaan t : I"t • na^asn T IV - * 1 : It ■• vrsm '1 -:it • i : it • siaJaan I :it • SI3JSJ3 naTpsjn t : I- t •• napy-w r'-.v' t • t : i- t • naawan t : r-T • na^asn T V |- ' 1*393 ps-ra 1 !••-,. 1- T • E7333 l"T • *& Fut. apoc. Participle. bfcpa ipsa ITv:iv p?w it : • traa IT* 2C3 IT T PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 357 Paradigm of Verbs in Nipiihal. Verb. Verb. Verb. Verb. Verb. Verb. £ init. *» init. ^ mcd. 5 med. £ iinal. 77 final. b3S3 i- v:iv 2tri3 csfea '1 T r*a N2B3 it : • nb33 it : • roaMb it : T '( T nwsoa it : : • nnbaa it : ; • r PDttfia t : r- nipswa t i ' : 5^ fD riS!i^3 t i - : • rvbaa T 1" • 1 Eppfta rripvjg — * ntf^sa f^aa nT vntriia • : I- i ■ : — vj • r* ; ■ vjsj ••Qt&ia i : ' 1 T ■np^N sibjq • cnaittjia iv : - Dpioipa BflNSaa iv •• : • Eft^?aa 7£QB?ia ipi-'Pa fps^na ,rrb33 wsajfa ^aia?ip3 i ' : whjsw i^Jzjj bssn r . T . tfiftti .^n W? ri>an bawn a^ri tf?* r - t • nban r 1 t * &c. *x$3P • 'i • p^- tas&n P : it • •'ban P T - I : it • •I • Q D : it • :iban 1 T * njaajvi naiafcpr t!'l ■ -51 a naMsan T IV T " nyban T IV T * bias* l~ T ™ ,.. T . Dfy; nr nba^ IV T * i t * cnpn nban IV T • g pa T . CJ^Jjl nbsn IV T • Vft& >aipn • 'i • *M2tf>PI i- : it • "ban P T • T3 r* t * nips ST N2EN l" T V nbss IV T V w siiaijf; I • It • 1 T * t : i" t • natftn t : M • T IV T • na*ban T 1 V T • i : it • I : it • Jibsn 1 T * nantfgpi t : r* t • n$?i?J? naHsna T IV T - na"ban T IV T • Bfa W nb:3 IV T* br baa ItV IV IT Cip3 >l T m KJPP nba; it : T 358 HEBREW GRAMMAR. Paradigm of Verbs in Pihel. Regular Verb. Verb. Verb. Verb Verb. P.RETER. Verb. 1 gutt. 2 gutt. 3 gutt. 5 init. TT- Sing. 3 m. Vfffl ,.. . ^TP.5 i- • i" • 25iD 2f. n,bfi? it :r* it : • nnnio it : 2 m. $m o TO H nDn2 t : 1- ** t : i- • l-S n> CTQ t : i- 2f. $?&i? J??23 ip¥$$ p : : i- 1 com. M?^l? • : I-" •>#¥|3# ^22iD Plur. 3 com. I : '• •1?"!5 i : * .■oaio I : 2 m. Dnbtsp D£?!3 iv : - • opaaiD 2f. \$7®P. 1/3515 Igtygitf }£iaaiD 1 com. ?obtap Miria . , W2W : i- " waaiD : i- Infinitive. VjiB *T$¥ TO Wf ^>3 aaio r* Imperative. Sing. m. ^p5 T$2 TO? 3?]2>tt? tt?23 2$o f. ^btap i-« VIS r : - &c. ^aaio Plur. m. Jibtsp i : - °P I :it i : - siaaio i : f. mbtsp t : i"t t : 1 — maaio t : i- Future. Sing. 3 m. *?pn) I" - : W, "SteW* tyy. aafo^ 3f. btspn UPW Vfttin &c. aaiotf 2 m. btapn i"'- : TOW yawn aaion i" : 2f. '"btapn 1" : '- : CTQ P : it : YfWtift virion 1 com. btspw P* TOiS sjaate aaiDW i" —. Plur. 3 m. ^121 13-13' 1 i :it : i : - : ^aaiD"' I : : 3f. nabtapn t : !•••-: t : i-t : t : i- - : rraaaiDfl t : i- : 2 m. sibtapn i : '- : ^"M i : ~ : •laaiDfi 2f. mbtspn t : I"'- : t : i-t : nar^ttJiji maaiori 1 com. Vjias tnaa 1 i-t : 3?£tt?3 3,3iD? Fut. apoc. Participle. btspft * T»5>» rnab rfttite I 0*3 3tt aab» PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 359 Paradigm of Verbs in PlHEL. Verb. V erb. Verb. Verb. Verb. Verb. £ init. Sor •^ nut. ^ med. t med. ji; final. ft final. ^ 2$? 3^1 cpip $3 ,.. . nba IT " -t (a . re C nnnip it : i t : i- ' it : • rwsB T ~ • (.. . rrba t r* * vnnnip 5" CO Tins'? *>rvba =i»»ip I : 1 i : ■ *V» ta^pDip crista crrba l$ T Sip 7ns?5tt 7/rba sespip WK^? W$3 bsw 2W> 3W cpi'p Jjtfs H£S riba b,2N 2$l a©2 q&ip «b r : - &c. &c. &c. na»aip t : i- ' &c. naN^a T IV - to na>ba i" -: as" Dpip^ cpipj-i jai^ nban &c. &c. &c. D»ipfl ^aaipn FT ' i EttipN naDDipfl t : i- ' : •ittpipn naaaipn t : i- ' : iS;c. S-!ittS t iv - : naNgan >ban r - : nbatf na^ban t iv- : nban i - : na^ban t iv - : nbaa ba> *??*?£ ^1P 3|& T Dpfrfc fttap t^SS n ( bap 360 HEBREW GRAMMAR. Paradigm o/" Pierfo m Puhal. Regular Verb. Verb. Verb. Verb Verb. Preter. Verb. 1 gutt. 2 gutt. 3 gutt. 5 init TT- Sing. 3 m. btsp 11337 Xfr "$"307 afea it--. aaio 1- 3f. nbtap it : '\ nans it : It ; V naaio 2 m. nbtsp t : i- '■•. H nana t : l- t : 1- ••. 1-1 on naaiD T : 1- 2f. ti 1 ?^ : : i- npati? c ft waaib : : 1- 1 com. M-iYfKI ^?"12 \n?at27 "•J-iaato Plur. 3 com. *Wl 5D-12 i : •1^52127 1 : 2 m. &$?&% □n?"]2 nnv^t? D^aafo 2f. )f??m li-P^a 7£)VEK7 IjEiaafe 1 com. »YW2 "1357a •"13VJ?^* "laaaiD Infinitive. ^n to u* a?23 aaio Imperative. - Sing. m. f. > None. Plur. m. f. Future. Sing. 3 m. btSjTj i- '•.. • ■vr. 1*5 r^j^» 1-"% -^ D l 3f. btapn i- '\ : 1^ E]Stt"n aaiDfl 2 m. btepi-i &c. tj^ 3?J3^ &c. 221'Dijl 2f. ^Iwn "■a-ian r : : W^Jf? ^aaiDi-i 1 com. ^5S n^s 2£$N 3 "3"tolS Plur. 3 m. •ib^. 1 : : «^9^ •laai'D* 1 : : 3f. n abtapn t : i- '•-. : mmhn t : 1- : t : 1- ••. : TOaaiDJjl 2 m. •irrpfl 1 • \ * •laaiDip 2f. n ab^pn t : i- '■•. : 1 t : 1- : n3i?ai27n t : 1- n : naaaiDn t : 1- : 1 com. V|«a i£? 1- ••. : aa-io? Put. apoc. Participle. btep>? *T!317Ka TJ-nata Sg^E K72?JP ^jyiDB PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 3G1 Paradigm of Verbs in Puiial. Verb. 5 Verb. < or ^ init. i- s ►1 g, p Verb. «j med. Verb. ? med. Verb. S filial. b^s ^:. 313* l-S i- • ?tt fr ■. nspip it : i it : \ 1 fa Oq riEsip t : I-. i 5^ O HMSO T P •■. tf~pip ct- ns*ja 'J-IBpip *J?Hj5t3 Wp&ip •flR □jrjEpip cpsgiq fgiiSBip Hpgq : i- ' son*N3 =»R DOip tala IT N Verb. f\ linal. nba IT V n>ba wba • I" \ «** riy>ji WR =»ifc i- •■. : i- ' : opipj-i flbj it ■•. : nba* iv •■.: nban iv s : &c. &c. &C. opipJ-i it s : iv s : *p»ipri gl *-* r : \ : >b:in r X : DOipM i- ■ -: fa NgES nb:s iv s-t ^ i : ' : rofcpipn t : I- ' : *DDlp$ naipaipn t : i- ' : tssfm i : \ : t iv •-. : t iv -s : 1RI n^ban t iv \ ; ^W? s#S IT ' »3P?o 4* 362 HEBREW GRAMMAR. Paradigm of Verbs in Hiphhil. Regular Verb. Verb. Verb Verb. Verb. Preter. Verb. 1 gutt. 2 gutt. 3 gutt. 5 init. •n- Sing. 3 m. P v: iv 1 ,. ; . _ ,. . . tt^an 1* * spn 2f. nVtaprr t r ': • t p v:iv t i - : • ntt^an t r • H2DH T I" " 2 m. nbtspn t : i-': • t :i-vslv cfo t : i- : • mttjan t : i- • niaon t i • -; 2f. ^btopn ri7».)?rr nsptpn nttfan : : i- • 1 • "! 1 com. "vyibppn • : 1- v: IV vnyptpn "/wan • : i- • vniapn Plur. 3 com. siVtapn r v:iv i* : • •"ittrarr i- • •ispn 2 m. Eflbapn D£H»i?n cn^tpn E£it??n cniapn 2f. ?^b^pn TftTOgfJ )nvipwn lftVpSft ^riiapn 1 com. ^b^pn : i-v: iv ?SV^U •m ; an : i- • laiaorr i • -: Infinitive. b^pn i* ': - ,. _. ,_ i TpfU H^an i" T Imperative. Sing. m. btopn c j. - "Ttt3>n ,.. _. ,_ m? vpwn E$? npn F 1 T f. • i* ': - >TP*D • r -: i- ' r : - ^an • i* - >2Dn • 1" T Plur. m. stVtaprr i" ': - &c. r : - sit^an r - ^2DH 1 • T f. mbttpn t : i"': - nrrayn t :i — : i- namdn t : I- : - mttfan t : i" - ns^apn t iv • -: Future. Sing. 3 m. b^p> ,. i. - T P^,- P^T! 5">poyS p - 2P^ 1" T 3f. b^ppn ?>?p2?n F - apn 1" T 2 m. b^pn r ': - Tpsn p -: i- &c. ^ptpn r - 1" T 2f. ^Vppn '•"ppsn ^an • p - • r* t 1 com. b^pN TpSH I s -: i- p - 2PH 1" T Plur. 3 m. •"iVppi 1' -: I- wptft p - Ft 3f. nabtapn t :i--: I- t : i- : - naoJan ■tip- H3>3Pn t iv • : 2 m. ^ppn ^"PpSE! Wpp$3 sia?^jg I" T 2f. nabtspn t : i-': - t : !■•-: i- t : i- : - nattfan t : i" - na^pj-i 1 com. Vttp3 r '; - TBOT 1" -; - FP^2 KT23 2P3 P'T Put. apoc. br^p^ mw psr »aa^ H?a* — Farticiple. • V»$ja T , '?5l? P^T'? yptt^P H?^19 3p9 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 363 Paradigm of Verbs in HlPHHIL. Verb. Verb. Verl). Verb. Verb. Verb. & bit. < or •) Ullt. 1 nied. s med. S final. n final. Vptfn 1- l* D^jjn. W N^an nban it : ■ nrrann T I* na^n T I* " rnpan t F : • nnbsn it : : • £ finjsh'n nata s n t : P •• t 1 'r-: re rttrean T 1" rvban T !• ; • -1 rini^in T^p'n n^ro t-t- O rwspn ,.. i . rpban 6 "•flaaJin • : i- v-n^n rni^pn "•tfw&on vjsjfl Zi Wflfin ws&n r : " ^b2H i : ■ taf-jaaJin cnataTT IV : - cnin^pn enssan cp^ban j$a®*in )jgWB jnia^prr ||3W Ip^n siaat&in : i- !03ta>n •laia'pn I H -: Wtfjgan wban ,.. . . b^pwn 3>B|in a^n cpn van H^Bfj ribarr bawn i"-:i- aojfri ata^n i,.. T ran nban &C. • i* >a>wa • 'l-T • r : - ^l? 2 ? i* i" " vsKm •i* t P : - ^90 naattfirr t : (*" rraataTi t : i" " naaprr t : 'r - T naNS&n t iv : - na^ban t I v : - ^» a^Bfi? 'IT rw Wp?l nb2> zrunn 3*pV2l wjRpjg nban &c. a^t&in a^n D N pn '!• T WJHMS nbari ly&Jfai •Q s a*n i* ■ '(• T WJPM3 *J99 rrpis a^s Vt CO N^aN nJ?3N sia'^ 13 s p\i '|'T WJRK *te naattjfri t : i" t : \" n:apn t : V-t nassan t iv : - na^ban t iv : - Q^ttjin Vt wjjari ^ban naariin T : i rmtrn t : r* •• rraonn t : 'i-t nakreaw T IV na^ban t iv : - a"»p5ia ,. .. D s p3 'l-T WJRH n^aa b3*o !•• -:i- i- 3a ,, ' , '•.•it ,.. . _ ba* VI V Vawa a^tp'ia SPfPO a^fta rpO ^^5 nban 364 HEBREW GRAMMAR. Paradigm of Verbs in Hophhal. Preter. Sing. 3 m. 3 f. 2 m. 2f. Regular Verb. Verb. 1 gutt. Verb. 2 gutt. btaprr invri nym i- ': t i-t:It ' i- : t nbpVi"! rnnvn mvtn It : ': t It : t It 'it-:: t nb^prr n"Tp!&n pipytn t : i-': t t :i- t:it t ': P- : t nbtapn mnsrr nnvtrt t : : i-t: it ":"':" i- : t 1 com. tjnbiapn ww»n vtrrarn • : l- ': t • : i-t: it • ': r : t Plur. 3 com. ribttpn .vrnsn sinsTn i : ': t i : t it ' i -: : t 2 m. nnbftpn nmnsn DfipSTn iv : - : t iv : -t: it IV '; - : t 2 f. ]£ibtopn ^riiavn JJ-jpsyn l com. utoapn wiosn }3pi?Tn : i-': t : I- t: it ': I-: t Verb. Verb. Verb. 3 gutt. 5 u^ "17 Sttttfrr tt>'an DD?in i- : t i- >. i- nsnttfrr rroan nao^n it : : t it : ••. t i- t : i- : t t : i- •.. t i - iwatin nttfan niacin : - i- : t ::!-••. i - • : I- : t •:!-•■. • i - T : : t i : \ F nnvnwn cf-ittfan cniapnn ]piV»pn ^ntran jjpiapsin Infinitive. bp;?n i- t: It PJSTn 1- : t E72H i- ••. 1- Imperative. - Sing. m. f. > None. Plur. m. f. Future. Sing. 3 m. i- ': t 1KW i-tmt m 1- : T 8?V i-\ 3D^ i- 3f. btapji i-': t i-t: it TOW I- : t ir??ri np^n 2 m. btspn i- ': t i-t: it ww? i- : t tt>ja£] npin 2 f. "»btap/n 1' : ': t r : t it 'i--:: t r : : t ^an ^2DW 1 com. btapH i-': t i-t: it ptfTH • i- : t satp'w I- : t B^aM 1- Plur. 3 m. nbtap^ i : ':t 'HWit 'i—.: t I : : t I :••. •12p-Y> 3 f. r T3b^pn t : i- ': t t : i-t: it t'II- : t t : i- : t nattfan t : I- ••. rwaovi T IV - 2 m. :)b&pn f : ': t sniasn I : t it 'i -:: t lypt&jl •1tZ72n JfipVI 2f. r Tabtapn t : i-': t t : i-t: it t's i- : t t : i- : t nattfan t : i- x na^ovi 1 com. b m i-t:it P*!? B£#3 12723 i-\ np^3 Fut. apoc. Participle. ^m itt: it POT It : t ttfatt IT '•. an PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 3G5 Paradigm Verb. Verb. S bit. ? or t\ init. bssn a^n nt^n roafan -I mann t : i- rottnrr 'Aanfan • : i- Dj-jaahn ty-paton of Verbs in Hophiial. Verb. Verb. Verb. ^ lncd. % med. £ final. n (0 DpJin • : 'i- scan-in It : •■. nwson it : : •-. t i- : •.. I- : x vwson it*2ian D£iH3&n jnNSSn 13»2ttn Verb. f\ final. nb:in it : t rrnbnn it ; : t rrbm t !■• : T i" : t • r* : t ibsn i : t crrbarr IV ": t 7jTb:n scban bDsn aalin sain Dpm pin Msan 'i- it : •.. rib^n bss> a»V i-t:it i- safari i- ^a?m i* : na?is i- n3aa?in t : i- naaann T : i- aafaa a&.v &c. □pv IP* it : ••. nbs> iv :t tapin it : ■-. nbsn iv : t dpin &'C. it : ■•. nbsn iv : T >ppin Hi \ ^bs/n r : t CPjlS It : .■•. nb:N iv : t siapsp i : ^V^ ib;p i : t naepifi t : >i- t r? : x n3"b3n t iv : t ibjjw !lS2»n ibarj 1 : T roan-vi t : 'i- rowsan t iv : •.. t iv : t N2B3 it : \ nb:3 iv : t *» a #»» IT ^o tt» it : v nb>o 366 Paradigm of Regular Verb. PRETER. Verb. 1 gutt. Sing. 3 m. bwpnn T$?On 3 f . nbtspnn it : I- : • 2 m. nbtspnn 5 t : i- '- : • cm 2 f. nbtapnn sr 1 com. ^nbtapnn Plur. 3 com. .ibtannn I : '- : • 2 m. cnbtspnn iv : - ' - : * 2 f. ]nb^pnn l com. sobtepnn HEBREW GRAMMAR. Verbs in Hithpaiiel. Verb. Verb. Verb. 2 gutt. 3 gutt. 5 init - Tnann nbann traanrr 1 1" t : • i- - : • r-- : nznann npy>anri it :Tt : • it : - : • nmann nnbann t : i- t : * t : i — : ■ flyison nnbann •*ns-isirin Nfinbann • : i- t : • •:!--:• sisnann nnbann i : it : • i : - : • SJ-Piann nnnbann ^n?"i2nn ^nnbann snmann wnbann CTC t Verb. tr TT bbiann ,.. . . nbbiann it : : ■ nbbiann t : i- : . nbbiann \nbbiann ^bbia-n EPibbiaorv ?nbbiann vbbiann Infinitive. Imperative. bcspnnn^vnn TTarin nbannttfaann. bbiann sing, m. Plur. m. f. Future. Sing. 3 m. 3f. 2 m. 2 f . 1 com. Plur. 3 m. 3 f . 2 in. 2 f. 1 com. Fut. apoc. btapnn ijasnn I-'- : • r- - : • >btapnn Jibtspnn nabtapnn t : !■•'- : • btepnn btapnn &c. r-i- : • >b&pnn |. : l_ : • nabtapnn t : i -1 - : • •ib^pnn. nabispnri - : I"'- : • bfcpha •13-iann i : it : • namann t : i-t : • i ,.. T . . Tpann i ,.. T . . ••anann r : it : • • l"T : v sp-ian'' i :it : • naa-iann Jimann I :it : • naD-iann t : i-t : • &C. i |.. T . . nbann ttfaann ^nbann &c. sjnbann i : - : • nanbann t : I- - : • nba/r njjaj^ nbann I — : • n]banj?i ^ nbann nbans sinban'' i : - : • nanbann nnbann nanbann nbana to crq ►t bbiann ^bbiann ^bbiann i : : • nabbiann bbian" bbiann bbiann i" : • >bbiann i- : : • bbiantf $?&**?• nabbiann t : i- : • nbbiann nabbiann t : i- : bbiana Participle. btaprm lEsntt Tparra nban» rraanp bbianp !••'- : • !••-:• I I"t : • i — : • i-- : r I I TARADIGMS OF VERBS. 3G7 Paradigm of Verbs in Hitiipaiiel. Verb. Verb. Verb. Verb. Verb. Verb. Verb. S iaita < ink. bann i- - : • &c. &c. &c. sisptaipfln 1 : • : • na&oipnn t : 1- ' : • &c 1 : - : • nawsonn t iv - : • s»Y»ann na^banrr t 1 v - : • ^syo": nt^rp i" - : • ceiprp csipnn )$sry\ Msian'' v* - : • Hscnn nbn: nbann iv - : • &c &c. &-c. oaipnn Mscnn nbann -1 o • «1 o "I >~t n t 71 ^paipnn cairns awoiprp 1 : ' : * natapipnri stac-ipnn 1 : ' : ■ rrappipn/n 1:1-' : • Dttipna 5* V : - : • w^ens \" - s v wgan* 1 : - : • naMsonn t iv - : ■ siM^nnj? nawsonn t iv - : • waona l 71 - : • "^ann nbanw iv - : v nban^ 1 - : • na^bann t 1 v - : ■ •ibann na^bann T IV - : • nbin? b^wna ngfcnp crania caipna p.-ianp s^anc nbanp 368 HEBREW GRAMMAR. CI f'j n a Dh d- d-. Q" n n n Q '- a C n r a FVr w *\" rn- J^ ^ J^ J^ rr it. rr rr r r + r ' r w 3 O i— i P i <1 f P-i i H H 1 w H s Ph o 02 H H 3 & H O Jzj 3 (S Ph H ^ Hi Ph P m »Ji Z II Z* ri>- rT Z* .X .X .Z .Z _ n: n- n- n- £ .r- .r* 4> .r* * n c & z n C n± ra- 'Br *&. *£:• *&•• '£ n rtf rt- n- n H ^ a F n- •r» .ri .n .ri £ •§' « S € m c £ a q M I H" CO - Z- z>- zr n n zr n J3- IT z C r. n n c rr rr rr rr u us a- a r - a r ff r rr gr rr n f> n n n r •^~ ■ a C zr n rr c nn ri" n.« r\" r\ r\ r\ r\ rr rr rr rr C D C PS .El. r o .o. .m •O fi' lii" fir ri r 1 - !-:• r- r n c IJ Oh in- m- el- rr gr rr gr r r*- r* r c o c be c 9 »-HJ X bo .a 02 E s SUPPLEMENT TO THE PARADIGMS. 369 ne rv rv rv I.I Hv D' 1). li' .K. n r-i- H r-i U n ri r p.. fl.. rj . £).. c .. •D .D .O .D .D n f\ t\ n n n rir n=- n- n r- C £j £ p p p a .() .D jj .n r> i\y n- (i n rv- IV n n II r rv rv rv rv .r. rv rv- rv- rv« i J^: ^i- J^ J^ n r: D c p- P; pp ri' rV rv rv J.-:- J>h J>J> n n &£ P : P: P;P; rv n/ rv n/ ,f>:. ^>h J> J> u c h-i MH Ph I— I ! co W « Ph W HH o HH H P5 < Ph rv P" Mi- X rv P o. rv P- P" Mi- Mi- Z- X r •*— LI C nt- rv rv. rv ri ri ri r^ •#"- •/- •*— '*- D C- fl. P n n n n 'i- •/- •#- •#— n /> n- n n li c rr- rv- rV- ri:- x: x;- x; x=: ni- nt- r> fii- i-3 «1 W CO W Pi w PL, I— i o I— I H P" P 1 » X P fer- Xh n P- P • P' P' M M X- X r •/- LI C D C P p- p- P • P •■ el ri n. .ri jm. '£■■ p- 'pVp-'p.. <= C PC P P P • P» P, n n»- rfc n n p p p p • p X' X' X' X' Xi n: %-x- r-v- n-- n-. I D PL) H CO P- p •a/SH"&"&i-*a^ n n^ n n n n q li c p x fi; p • p p '1/ x •' x r\h ni- iv- r-ii- n*- a /nt- r^iH /nh rv- I- r •*- v ~ a c p p p p p rn rti m rv ni rv rj.. rj:- n-- r^-- P P ; P •; P ; P-; rv rv n.' n-- n/' grit- rji- rV- itii- r^f > a 3 to n- n- rv n- rv CI- CI" O" f.1" CI" ri- r^ r^- ri- ri- r r*- r : - r r C C 6 *£ p p- p p p • Cli Cli CI' CI' CI' f£i ri- ri- ri- ri- r r*- r : - r r p- p • p • p- p ci x cv c\-' ev c\' ri r-i- ri i-i- fit- r r»- r-- r - r f= c h '£ CO VOL. II. 3 E S be .5 B B 3 s s *-> 370 HEBREW GRAMMAR. a p- fl fl fl f»: O- O- n fl Plv n m n n r fl fl A fl *r »r *r rr Di- D" C D' n pit- r-i- n n n q a- a- p- a- O- D- D D • q q q q •j— ./— ./— •/— n: n n n ■ n i> rv n p> n.. A' A" q c h F i w Ph >— i w I t H Ph W a Ph S Ph A' A- M- X 53: r a A' A q A' 13' A" A x- x a q A • p • a • At- A- A a q a p p p p •r~ •/— •*- •#- •#— n rt- i-' n- n T~ *" C '*~ 1 q n fli P> P< P> A' xi- xr xr xr xi rv n- rv- n- n- a q A' A' fl» A' A' a /n. j-.v #n:- /n- /^. q p q 3 to A' J3 1 A' A' A' r.> ci" in- a- ci- ri r- a* (2i ki r r t-> r r r r 1 - v- r- r *-■> ^1 Ph o K I H GO n:- n- n W n c a q h-5 Ph hH o l-H / ' s H J> J3»- «•■ flf fl*- Ph XV Xw Xi- XW XV ^ Dh Of PI:- rit- ni- Ph J^ JvJ-- jr % -^ n q a q fl' fl' f i fl- mv- fni- rih »nv- *£j -&h •fci-a q a q fli-T^T^ fl>- flt- el- ci • c»: C1 • Cl- r^- i~ y ri. ri*" r^J- i- r 1 - r= r- r q q r •#- d q s "»% = s "^ bit a : r fl- fl- a- a- q- q- q q *ni /ni r\\ r*> ^:- JM- J>J> q q a q a- a- fl- fl- q q i^ Q fl- fl' p> p* *fl: fei- tt-ta X x 1 - X- X q r t- n r- fl- p- fl- fl- fl-. q q q q q • n n n t n 'f- t- T~ T- '*~ P- fl " fl:- J3" fl •• a fli- fl:- fl P r ~ ^ &'q a a- a- a- a- q q- q- q- q *- i ^- i #■ i *- i *- i •&: •£•£:•&•&" n it- n:- n n r- ^ o 'q a- a- a- a a- q c q q q- X' X' X' Xi X' n: M- M:- Fl- PV- r- q h'ti a- n a- a- a- q q q • q q •• ni ni m ni r\\ rv. m- n:- r\- n- r- c a £ fl- JD- fl. fl- fl- O' Cli CI' Cl' Cl' rd Pi- I2i- rr' n. - r n- r:- r~ r q q oq B. cu a to 3 SUPPLEMENT TO THE PARADIGMS. 37 L CO W M i— i p^ fa < > p— i CO CO W CO CO O Ct- D r> Oh D" Oh D D- n- LV rl- l> n- n n- n f1v l> n n- ri n ri rt n Hh ri! n- ri Hh f1v *~ Iv~ r^ *" n rv- D n : . LI r— o h u M M |H h %- M M *- O O O O o e o o O o D n LV O' rv D- D/ D' D- Ox G LV n- PI- ft n mi- ri; n-- p\.. Hv Plv r IT 1=" •#— ll n H:- ri:. LI #n- (If.. JTJ.. «!»•• n.. #*.. r\- /n-- ri-. rv. *H-« 4^ 4 s 4 s 4 s 4 s 4 s _r^ 4 s 4^ 4^ •/— •^~ •r~ •r~ •#— *^~" •/- •/- •r- •r- Q C" Q c; L> Q C c- o O- r r r^ •#- n n 1! #— IT j> J3v O" o>- Oh j> J> J> O" fl- J3 flv J> M» W" Mv M" M« M- *,,.. M- m>- W- M»- M» M" X- x v acv 3D X Xv X: XV Zi' xr xv Xv 3> *~ r r !=■ •r- n fi:- O:- u li rv n:- D r— P- rx HL n. rx n_ n. a rr r? «T rr /r #7- i3 o o : JJ'- » r rr 1^ •r- H n n. r^. rx fl« jj- flv Of n:- rt- LI #^— a *— CJ •-3 a -3 H i— i h-f CO W Pm 9 > •& n n- n- n- rt-- ar Xv X; X>- Xv X>- X»- X»- i3 n.. n>- rv- n» n-- n n- ,jn. ^.. r j^.. jm 4^ 4^ 4 s1 r r rr pr •«- n ^ a- •9- •a- *& n- n n- n n; e e^ e rt. H: LI r— D *~ 0) XV Xv XV Xv x>- Xv nv n-- nv n-. n- n.. ^JN.. ^/N.. ^.. JN.. ^Nf Jf^V n: ru- n- r\.- fj *~ Ll □ — — a- #n- r\' /^- /^- /n- rv &•• "fi" •£i- •jj- -£J- •a c- C 15 e L%>- L%: r IT r^ •/- n r 1 r\. r\- /n- r\. S *ti- & 'fi.. 15" L%-- c- l^v n:- n=. u »~" LI r— B o O Civ Civ r r>- civ .civ ;i n, * a £1- •£lv t> Civ Civ fi- rr nt r^- r — r |S" r r 1. r-- rv- i> n : . a *~~ Ll ■*■ #^ a b :J nnaan KEY TO THE EXERCISES. KEY TO THE EXERCISES. {£S5° Tho English Idiom will be entirely sacrificed to the Hebrew Idiom throughout the Key. EXERCISE I. This is now bone of my bones, and flesh of my flesh ; She shall be called Woman, because she was taken out of Man. — Thy people shall be my people, and thy God my God. — Drink, and I will give thy camels drink also. — Blessed is he that blesseth thee, and cursed is he that curseth thee. — All the rivers run into the sea ; yet the sea is not full. — To everything there is a season, and a time to every purpose. — In thee and in thy seed shall all the families of the earth be blessed. — Blessed is he that considereth the poor. — By the rivers of Babylon we sat down and wept. — Favour is deceitful, and beauty is vain, but a woman that feareth the Lord, she shall be praised. EXERCISE II. A chief. — And a chief. — In, or with a chief. — As a chief. — To, or for a chief. — From a chief. — And in, or with, a chief. — And as a chief. — And to, or for, a chief. — And from a chief. — The chief. — And the chief. — In, or with, the chief. — In, or with, the chief. — As the chief. — As the chief. — To, or for, the chief. — To, or for, the chief. — From the chief. — And in, or with, the chief. — And in, or 376 HEBREW GRAMMAR. with the chief. — And as the chief. — And as the chief. — And to the chief. — And to the chief. — And from the chief. — Whether a chief ? — Whether as a chief ? — A slave. — The slave. — And to, or for, the slave. — And to, or for, a slave. — From the slave. — And from a slave. — As the slave. — And as the slave. — And as a slave. — Whether a slave ? — Whether in, or with, a slave ? — A wise man. — To, or for the wise man. — And from a wise man. — And as the wise man. — Service. — To, or for, service. — And the service. — And in, or with, the service. — And from service. — Whether service ? — And as the service. — An inheritance. — The inheritance. — To, or for, an inheritance. — As an inheritance. — From an inheritance. — And in, or with, an inheritance. — And an inheritance. — A bee. — And a bee. — As a bee. — To, or for, a bee. — From a bee. And from the bee. — Whether as a bee ? EXERCISE III. : pygyi : (P¥j£ or) wpnb : ^3 : vy%\ : pVp T : r>yp T 5n : (rvfr? or ) P¥j??? * PVIJ91 •' V^tl^ : WffiQ :(py$?3 or) pygnto :py)?n©i : (u/^tihi or) uhxrfn : t^K^i : tf'W : b^kh : t^K : (t^am or) i^^nm : t^n^i : ta^n : u/^xhn \ • t / -t: ■ t •■ • t -: • : - : ^isa : ^isnai : "twoi : Vnrfjn : (^Vi or) • v: v • v; t •• • v: •• • •■•: v «! \ •:: t : / : VnKan : fyifts or) 'mxna • vs v -: " '•" t / • v: t . T *T T • T : " T : ttb^rai : 03*735 : tz/3-r 1 ? : 0373 : 0373 : Bttn t^^f?) or) t^rnnbi : (1^3^33 or) 037531 • See Letter xvi. P.S. (d). KEY TO THE EXEECISES. 377 EXERCISE IV. [The] voice [is the] voice-of Jacoh, and [the] hands [are the] hands-of Esau. — What shall- 1 -liken to thee (f), daughter-of Jerusalem ! — O deaf-men, hear-ye : and O blind-men, look-ye. — [Whether] thy voice [is] this, my son David? (i.e., Is this thy voice ?) — This now is hone of my bones, and flesh of my flesh. — Open to me, my sister, my companion, my dove. — And-thou (m.) Bhalt-gather thy corn, and thy new-wine, and thine oil. — Cause- thou (y;)-me-to-sip, I pray, a little water from thy (f) pitcher. — And-she-let-down her pitcher upon her hand. — And-she-said, Also for thy (m.) camels I-will-draw. — Thy (/.) people [shall be] my people, and thy God [shall be] my God. — Death shall- separate between me and between thee (f.) (i.e., between me and thee). — My friend (or, my love) went down to his garden. — And Abraham stretched-forth his hand, and took the knife, for-the-purposc-of slaying his son. — No, for thy (/.) son [is] the dead-one, and my son [is] the living-one. — My son, attend-thou (m.) to my words, incline thine ear to my sayings. — And Noah came, and his sons, and his wife, and [the] wives-of his sons, with him into the Ark. — [The] whys of Zion [are] mourning, .... her priests [are] sighing, her virgins [are] afliicted. — On account of this was our heart faint (or, our heart hath-become faint). — Thou (f) art our sister. — Behold, as [the] eyes-of servants [are] towards [the] hand-of their master, as [the] eyes-of a maidservant [are] towards [the] hand- of her mistress, so our eyes [are] to (or, towards) JEHOVAH our GOD. — Lift-up thy (f) eyes round about, and see. — And kings shall be thy (f) nursing-fathers, and their princesses thy nursing-mothers. — For My thoughts [are] not your (»?.) thoughts, nor [are] your ways My ways. — And they shall wash their (m.) hands and their feet. — And the handmaidens drew-near, they and their children. — A woman-of virtue (i.e., a virtuous woman) is [the] crown-of her husband. — Hear [0] daughter, and consider thou( > /'.), and incline thy (/.) ear, and forget thy (/.) people, and [the] house-of thy (/.) father, and (or, so) shall the king delight-in thy beauty, for He is thy Lord, and bow-thyselt'-down to Him (i.e., worship Him). — For not like our Rock is their (/;/.) rock. — And-he-dreamed, and behold a ladder placed on the earth, and its top reaching to the Heaven. — As the waters that [are] poured out towards the earth. — When (or, if) thou (wi.)-shalt do that which is good and that which is right in [the] eyes 378 HEBREW GRAMMAR. of JEHOVAH thy GOD.— [0] Jehovah our GOD, how excellent is Thy Name in all the earth ! EXERCISE V. jirpTn 1 ? :Diii :miT3 si-Tina rirrlne i^ih I v •• : t t : : T : T T v : I . - . : ■WJ1131 •* l?fl1na£i J 1313? : 113^1 • "'IIP f ^ : maai : wrnnsai : [TAina 1 ? J vvinas : jrnflinaSn : vninaan t " : - irpptorfa : v^S : Drpflfta : vrvi^ipi : irrji^a:? ir^-inn : i^n? : w^n 1 ? : finnan : "^nto Da'tonS : vSj-iqi : v^no : p'to-m : Dmfon : "to-ia EXERCISE VI. My doctrine shall drop as the rain, my speech shall distil as the dew. — Like rains upon [the] grass, and like showers on [the] herb. — Fair as the moon, clear as the sun. — If (i.e., Though) your (m.) sins should be like the scarlet, they shall be white like the snow ; if (i.e., though) they should be red like the crimson, they shall be like the wool. — And the serpent was subtle more than (i.e., more subtle than) every beast of the field. — Like the good oil upon the head. — A name is good more than (i.e., better than) KEY TO THE EXERCISES. 379 good oil. — Andl will give to tliem (/«.). . . a name good more than (i.e., better than) sons and daughters. — "Which* are to he desired more than (i.e., more to be desired than) gold, and than much fine gold; and sweet more than ( i.e., sweeter than) honey and [the] dropping of honey-combs. — Better is a meal of green-herh and love therewith, than a stalled ox and hatred with it. — Behold, my thousand [is] the poor [one] in (i.e., the poorest in) Manasseh, and I am the young [one] in (i.e., the youngest in) [the] house of my father. — And there shall be, as the people so the priest, as the servant so his master (Letter xix., P.S. (a).), as the maidservant so her mistress, as the purchaser so the seller, as the lender so the borrower. — Flies of death (i.e., dead fiies). — Men of number (i.e., numbered men, answering to our phrase € /j.) God. — I to-day have begotten Thee (m.). — I [am] not inferior to you (Hebr., than you, m.). — Eyes have I been * Letter xvi., P.S. (a). 380 HEBREW GRAMMAR. to the blind [man], and legs to the lame [man was] I. — Thou hast divided, by Thy strength, [the] sea. — Who hath told to thee (m.) that thou [art] naked ? — Our sister art thou, be thou (/.) (i.e., become thou) into thousands of myriads (Hebr., myriad, Letter xxii. § 7, Rule iv.).— And he said, Who [art] thou (/.)? — Say-tkou (/.) respecting-me, My brother he [is] (i.e., he is my brother). — She gave to me of (Hebr., from) the tree, and I did eat. — [The] daughter of a king [is] she. — Jehovah [is] for me, I will not fear, what can man do to me ? — He will deliver me because [He is] delighting in me. — By Me kings will reign. — To Me [belongs the] world and the fullness thereof. — A sister [there is] to us, a little-one (i.e., we have a little sister). — She hath been righteous more-than I. — And Jehoshaphat said to [the] king of Israel, I am as thou art, my people as thy people, my horses as thy horses. — We [are] Thy people, and [the] sheep of Thy pasturage. — [As for] us-all, sons of one man [are] we, true men [are] we. — And Jacob their (m.) father said to them, Me have ye (m.) bereaved. — Witnesses [are] ye (m.) (i.e., ye are witnesses). — Ye (f) know that with all my strength I have served your father. — Children I have reared, and have brought up, and they (m.) have rebelled against Me (Hebr., in Me).— And the handmaidens drew- near, they (/.) and their children. — For thou (m.) art as Pharaoh. — Lo, the man hath become as one of us (Hebr., from us). — Truly to God [is] my soul looking-in-calm-resignation, from Him [is] my salvation. EXERCISE IX. : *on inninn : Kin ttth : via »in : imii \n : Dn?K on : nfe \m : tfaaa d^k irivon : lanax ornaan : »\i ti^dh : ni^na t - -: : - -: • t — : • • t - -: : : K\n ■sfrHinn : sin nninn : $$ KEY TO THE EXERCISES. 381 : nb $im ns : h n:n; n*n : *b io» mn w s a$ urug : n 1 ? j$nj iris : *^ wnaa wmg ins : pS laflj do : c? 1 ? i-idd \n : ^ : ]nS 130; uroa : bp6 jmari 15 : Dpn^ w^n MIJ3B : inns mn en : tain nftjo s\n : ^ nan sin : unm Mp $Aw nns : pns TOna ^s rnnis nm sin s:if sin : ^nis ina sin : (or oriiK) enns : t Tjrris mr?» urns : inis : ia Ktpn ps : |na nnnp ps : m ]w ps : ?|? yah P» : "a npnj; ps : na ^ pg :daa pas ps :|aa narp ps : iaap njAa iv$ pyn : na$ip rrjjyri wj ^s ums : i3E£ npnv nns : ^sa sin prn ^ : - -: v • t • : - t t - • ' t t n^iS ivan : ?jaa nna -i$ ; s & ; \s\n : D2,p i:>;e& ; : enp Dnnupa lama : |aa bui * Or, elegantly X lengthened by Pause (Letter xxiii. § 1). t Or^jnto lengthened b> Pause. 382 HEBREW GRAMMAR. Kin \s : niDD -nann hx : ^to rrnjp ^» t t • : - : - ■ t v : . -. ngm : iaiD| T#y Kin ds : inioj ^iia iin ^to ^3 :]niD? w*n aft pjloa ktt ^p : DpiOp 121D3 13712^ 0*13^ J IPllSJ EXERCISE X. The man who has-consumed-us and who formed-a-malicious-plan f or us . — And the damsel who shall-he-pleasing in [the] eyes of the king shall-be-queen instead of Vashti. — And God remembered Noah and every (Hebr., all the) beast, and all the cattle which [was] with him in the ark. — A land which Jehovah thy God [is] caring- for ; continually [are the] eyes of Jehovah thy God upon it (/) — Let- me-feel the pillars upon which the house resteth (Hebr., [is] firmly placed). — And the woman whose son [was] the living (one) said. — Whose mouth hath spoken vanity, and their right-hand [is] a right hand of falsehood. — In whose hands [was] wickedness, and their right-hand was-full-of bribery. — And-they-shall-call-out before him, Thus shall be done to the man in whose glory the king [is] delighting. — For I know [that] whomsoever thou-(»a.) shalt bless, [he is] blessed, and whom thou-shalt-curse he-will be accursed. — Go-ye (?n.) to Joseph, what he-shall-say to you, ye-shall do.— That which ye (m.) will bake, bake ye ; and that which ye will boil, boil ye. — For whom- soever Jehovah will-love He-will-correct, even-as-a-father a son he- may-delight-in. — And the olive-tree said to them, Should-I- hold-back my fatness, with which (Hebr., which hy me) they-(m.)-are-wont- to-honour (Hebr., they will honour) God and men? — I-have-estab- lished My Covenant with them (m.) to give to them [the] land of Canaan, [the] land of their sojournings, in which they-sojourned.— For the place upon which thou (m.) art standing, it (m.) [is] Holy ground (Hebr., ground-of Holiness). — For they (m.) [are] a perverse generation (Hebr., a generation of perversenesses), children in whom, [there-is] no faithfulness. — My God, my Eock, in Whom I-will- trust. — And-there-shall-be a great cry in all [the] land of Egypt like which there has not been. — So shalt-thou-(m.)-do according-as thou- hast-spoken. KEY TO THE EXERCISES. 383 EXERCISE XL : tlaaSa ittte ViTan ns\i : win nate tSi t : • v -: t - v v t t : - t v - : idj/h : rb$ aa -i& ; k ^»n : Tpa -i£ ; N ai?Kn nn» ■)#« HBan : vbv nm ivx &\on : Dvn T - V -: T ' - T T - T "J : f?an nn*bv W "i&to d^-idh : rrtw nni^ 1 ... v - ... •• -; I _ ly v -: • T - T V T nan iit ; » -nj/n : l^ek nahR nna i#r nttfKfi T • V "I •• • T V T T • - V; V V -: T • T Bh» ba : m naSo i$» tj/h : D^ya in iniR t t t : - t v -: *» T •-«=... : vs»a D*n nn nate ^ : la ma tDau/a late t - : ... ... -j T ... T _ . ... -. fh) irn ^ nttfiji nana : wed f^dr iv$ n$n : 'rt'R mi "laiR -i& ; k R^aan : inba mm t •• • t : •• - -: -: • t - t v j • tWT ")#R nwxn : in tfiR nnufr iwx jraan t : t v -: t ■ t -: v : • v -: "= . T - : pit EXERCISE XII. This [is] my God, and-I-will-glorify-Him ; [The] God of my father, and-I-will-extol Him. — This [is] the gate of Jehovah (Ilebr., belonging to Jehovah) ; righteous-men shall enter (Hebr., come) into it. — Until Thy people shall-pass-over, O Jehovah, until that people shall-pass-over, [whom] Thou-hast-gotten. — Thou hast guided in Thy loving-kindness that people [whom] thou hast redeemed. — This one (/.) [is] saying. This [is] my son the living [one], and thy son [is] the dead [one], and this (/.) is saying, No, but thy son [is] the dead [one] and my son [is] the living [one]. — These three [were the] sons of Noah, and of these (Hebr., from these) all the earth was-overspread. — And as to my daughters, Whall shall I do to them (Hebr., to these)? — These [make mention] of the chariots (Hebr., ix the chariot) and these of the horses, but we will make mention of [The] Name of Jehovah our God. — Behold, this dreamer (Hebr., man of dreams) [is] coming. — What shall be done to the man who shall smite this Philistine? — Respecting laughter, 1 said, [It is] 3S4 HEBREW GRAMMAR. mad ; and respecting mirth, What [good is] this (/.) doing ?— This [thing] will I bear in mind (Ilebr., / will put to my heart), therefore •will I wait (or hope). — A brutish man will not know, and a fool will not understand this [thing].— This day will Jehovah deliver-thee- (;«.)-over into my hand.— On that day shall this song be sung. — In those days there-was-not a king in Israel. — "What have I done to thee (>«.), that thou hast smitten me these (Hebr., this) three times ? In that day shall Jehovah be One and His Name One. EXERCISE XIII. : rfnra na? : mn nj/an : -#3 rn : igan pit v ■• t :. " T : kipipi nssn : mn -issn : pn rrftirqin Dn3»n n^» : n3»»i nr : -)3« nr • T ■ T V " T - T V T v •• t • t • t : - : a\nn n-ij/an : Mrn proan : ninyan n->K : rfwn rn-u/an : t^ n»a nate nnj/an nw tf?g : Tyn nr inw nr : orn ifcna nttfK nftin^n n^g ^n Di s 3 law :3fc£ c^? tnp nn ^ nin^ : rvftingn p •• T • T • T : mi/an nsr t -: - - : pn rrhj/an EXERCISE XIV. Who [is] like Thee among the gods, O Jehovah, who is like Thee Glorious in Holiness !— And-she-said, Who would-have-said to Abraham [that] Sarah should-have -given -suck-to children.— Who KEY TO Till-: EXERCIf 385 bath-ascended [toj heaven, and descended, who hath gathered [the] wind in his fists, who hath-bound-up [the] waters in a garment ' llelir., in the garment), who bath established all , r tlie] ends of* [the] earth ? — To whom [is] woe, to whom [is] wretchedness, to whom [are] contentions, to whom [is] babbling, to whom [are] wounds without-cause, to whom [is] redness of eyes ? to those-who-stay-late over the wine, to those coming for-the-purpose-of-inquiring-after mixed-liquor. — Whom bave-I-oppressed, whom have-I-ruined, and from whose hand have-I-received a bribe? — Jehovah [is] my light and my salvation, of whom shall-I-be-afraid ? Jehovah [is] the strength of my life, of whom shall-I-be-in-dread ? — And-he-said, Whose daughter [art] thou {/.) ? tell I-pray to me. — And the king said, Ask thou (in.) whose son [is] this youth. — Who [is] this ( f.) that-is-looking-forth as [the] morning-dawn, beautiful as the moon, bright as the sun ? — And Judah said, What shall we say to my lord, what shall we speak, and how shall- we-justify- ourselves ? — And he said, O Lokd (Hebr., my Lord) JEHOVAH, by what shall-I-know that E-shall-possess-it (f.) ? — By what should this [man] reconcile-himself to his master ? — How-many [are] my (Hebr., to me) iniquities and -ins ? My trespass and my sin cause- Thou me to know. — What shall-I-return to Jehovah ! — How beautiful [are] thy (f.) footsteps in the sandals ! — How goodly-are thy tents, O Jacob, thy habitations, O Israel ! EXERCISE XV. n? no : n^K ip : rf?a ^p : n»T ^p : nj ^p in rptyy ivs ncson ntn : ntoo nr : im t • i v -: v - - •' -: - v i : t : ng ]$$ *>nh : nin n?an w) : onypg rviniKn : n-nn ^o n« : rwn niton wh : n-\s\n nnfrn t : - •■ v v - v t - • : -.• •• T T - : mn nnnn n« nj/ottf \bo : nn ^o na ... T T - V T t - 1 ' • - T Dipan »-iia no : ypitf "03* no : n*h nms no It- t - - •' " T V V T - T : ?pfiatfno wou/ "rfco ni.T ?pfetf;o iSij no : nm I v : : - ' : t : t : ' v -: - : t v - VOL. II. C C 386 HEBREW GRAMMAR. EXERCISE XVI. Thirty years old [was] David on his reigning (i.e., when he was made king), forty years reigned he.— And Athaliah [was] reigning over the land. — And now, behold, I know that thou (m.) shalt surely reign. — I have rejected him from reigning over Israel. — Shalt thou (hi.) indeed reign over us, whether shalt thou indeed rule over us (lit., in, or on, tis) ? — And Jehovah repented that He had caused Saul to reign (i.e., had made Said king ) over Israel. — [One] guarding [the] simple [is] Jehovah. — And he shall be like a tree planted by (Hebr., upon) streams of water. — All these [were] men- who-drew sword (Hebr., drawers of sword). — And his sword drawn in his hand. — And [the] name of Aaron thou (m.) shalt write upon [the] rod of Levi. — If [it be] good to the king, let it be written to destroy them (m.). — Before Jehovah, for He [is] coming for- the purpose-of-judging the earth. — May Jehovah judge between me and thee (m.) (Hebr., between me and between thee). — Judge ye (m.) I-pray between Me and My vineyard (Hebr., between Me and between My vineyard). — On his being judged may he come forth wicked. — Speak thou (m.) to [the] sons of Israel. — We cannot speak to thee (m.) evil or good. — Behold this [is he] coming, leaping upon the mountains, skipping upon the hills. — Then shall [the] lame [man] leap like the hart. — For I was indeed stolen from [the] land of the Hebrews. — Who [is] this (/.) coming-up from the wilderness, . . . perfumed-with myrrh and frankincense ? — And Jehovah cast upon them (m.) great stones from the heaven. — And Me thou (m.) hast cast behind thy back. — Thou (m.) hast been cast-out from thy grave like an abominable branch. — In that day shall the beautiful virgins faint. — On their swooning like the wounded (sing.) in [the] wide-streets-of the city. — With GOD walked Noah. — For [the] people's having- willingly-offered-themselves (Hebr., on the-willhigly-offering-themselves-of [the]] people) bless ye (m.) Jehovah. KEY TO THE EXERCISES. 387 EXERCISE XVII. I v i v : - • t t : •• - : : : ■ : no'pn nn^ dji hid 1 ? : n^ ^c 1 ? eh»S ift dk : ny-r Hip 1 ? Ml np 1 ? : nn^n k^] nnb^n k*7 T>^ ^n»3 : vnin Dans ns^ DD3 vnna t • t : •• - : v t • : - t EXERCISE XVIII. And they (m.) heard the voice of Jehovah God walking in the garden. — And Jehovah hearkened and heard, and there was written a book of remembrance. — And I wrote in a book and sealed [it]. — And the thing was investigated, and was found-out. — Hearken ye (m.) unto me, and God will hearken unto you. — And I will remember My covenant which [is] between Me and you (m.) (Hebr., between Me and between you). — And thou (m.) shalt spread abroad westwards, and eastwards, and northwards, and southwards, and all [the] families of the earth shall be blessed in thee and in thy seed. — And ye (>«.) shall say unto him, Thus hath said thy son Joseph. — And ye (m.) shall observe this thing. — For ye (m.) are passing-over the Jordan for the purpose of coming to possess the land, .... and ye shall possess it (f) and shall dwell in it. — What wilt Thou give unto me, seeing that I [am] going childless? — And Jehovah [was] going before them, in-the-daytime in a pillar of cloud. — And he [was] standing near them (m.) under the tree.— When their (/».) soul poured itself forth (Hebr., on ihe-pouring-forth-itself of their soul) into [the] bosom of their mothers. — What shall we say, and how shall we justify ourselves? — [Is] not David hiding himself with us ? — [Am] I my brother's keeper (Hebr., Whether [the'] keeper of my brother am I?). — Shall [The] Judge of all the earth not do justice ? — My brethren I [am] seeking. — Thou art ruling over (Hebr., in) [the] pride of the sea. — Blessed [is] thy (f.) counsel, and blessed [art] thou (/.) — And I will bless her. — May the Angel, that [hath been] redeeming me from all evil, bless the youths. — And all [the] nations of the earth shall bless themselves in thy (»t.) seed. — May Jael be c c 2 3S8 HEBREW GRAMMAR. blessed above (Hebr., more than) women. — Bless, O my soul (/.), Jehovah ; and * forget not all his benefits. — May [The] Name of Jehovah be blessed. EXERCISE XIX. • : • t : I v ■ j : - : ' EXERCISE XX. And they (m.) mingled themselves among the heathen, and they learned their (m.) works.' — And I will sprinkle upon you (m.) pure water, and ye shall be pure. — And Jehovah passed before him and proclaimed. — And I passed by thee (/.) — And it shall be on the day that ye (m.) shall pass over the Jordan. — And I will fetch a morsel of bread, and refresh ye (m.) your heart ; afterwards ye (m.) shall pass on. — [There] shall not be found in thee (m.) [one-(w.)]-causing his son or his daughter to pass through (Hebr., in) the fire. — And they (m.) shall f heap up corn under the hand of Pharaoh, [for] food in the cities ; and they shall keep [it]. — And the children of Israel cried to Jehovah. — For Jehovah [is] knowing [the] way of righteous- men. — I arose for the purpose of opening [the door] for my friend. — And it came to pass, on her making-haste for the purpose of fleeing, that he fell and was made lame. — [The] house of [the] wicked shall be destroyed, and [the] tabernacle of [the] upright He (i.e., God) will cause to flourish. — There will I cause to spring up a horn for * See Letter xxviii. § 11. f i.e., and let them (m.) heap up (see Letter xxviii. § 10). KEY TO THE EXERCISE8. 389 David. — [When] the sua sliall rise, they (to.) will be gathered together and will lie down in their dens. — [When] Thou shall send forth Thy Spirit they (to.) will be created. — We will bring to remem- brance thy (m.) affections. — I will rejoice, and I will exult in Thee, I will hymn Thy Name, O Most High.— Firm [is] my heart, O God, firm [is] my heart, I will sing, and I will hymn. EXERCISE XXI. t v t : : : • - t : v t : : • . • ; ; T - . : irmn n»tf : vvnn noato : Tim nib^a t t . •••.■:-. •• . T : Tn:n EXERCISE XXII. An open sepulchre [is] their (to.) throat. — Light [is] sown for the just-man ; and fur [the] upright of heart, joy. — Thou (>».) shalt surely let-go (Hebr., send away) the dam, and the young (Flur.) thou mayest-take to thee. — If thou (to.) art not sending-away My people. — And it came to pass on Pharaoh's sending-away the people (Ilebr., on the sending away of Pharaoh the people). — How didst thou (/«.) not fear to put forth thy hand for the purpose of destroying [the] anointed of Jehovah ? — Ileal me, Jehovah, for my bones are (Ilebr., were, or //arc been) troubled. — And my soul is (Hebr., has been) troubled exceedingly. — A time to plant, and a time to uproot [that which is] planted. — A time to slay, and a time to heal. — And thou (/«.) shalt eat, and shalt be satisfied, and shalt bless JEHOVAH thy God. — And Sarah [was] listening at-the-door-of the tent. — Hast thou not heard, my daughter ? — It (to.) shall be placed ( Hebr., caused to stand) alive before JEHOVAH. — And the king was Stayed-up 390 HEBREW GRAMMAR. (Hebr., caused, or made to stand) in the chariot. — Behold, his head [shall be] cast to thee (m.) over the wall. — Every place on which (Hebr., which on it) [the] sole of your (?n.) foot shall tread, to you have I given it (m.). — Upon [the] old-lion and adder shalt thou (m.) tread ; thou shalt trample-upon young-lion and dragon. — Cease ye (m.) to do- evil, learn to do-good ; seek ye [after] justice. — They taught My people to swear by Baal. — Truth they (m.) will not speak, they have taught their tongue to speak falsehood. — For thou wilt not leave (i.e., give over) My soul to [the] pit ; Thou wilt not suffer Thy pious-(o7- holy- one)-to see corruption, — Thy (m.) friend, and [the] friend of thy father, thou shalt not forsake. — For she is-wont-to-leave on the earth her eggs, and in (Hebr., upon) [the] dust is-she-wont-to-warm [them]. — For God doth know (Hebr., is knowing) that in [the] day of your (m.) eating of it, then * your eyes shall be opened. — And the eyes of both of them were opened. — In his sin shall he die, and all his righteous- nesses which he hath done shall not be remembered. — How great-are (Hebr., were) Thy works, O Jehovah, very deep-are (Hebr., were) Thy thoughts. — Wonderful [are] Thy works, and my soul knoweth (Hebr., is knowing) [it] very [well]. EXERCISE XXIII. iEtah : ^n^2 n^ v^-on : -lyj nn'i t^K pa T l .- •• • : - • v -: v • : • •■ t« TV" : t " T ! " - T^r PI' ^ EXERCISE XXIV. To the altar he shall not approach. — Who hath a law-dispute (Hebr., [?s] a man of words, or matters) let him approach to them (m.). — Approach thou (m.) ; fall upon him (i.e., kill him). — Give- * i here signifies then. KEY TO THE EXERCISES. 301 place to me where I may dwell (Ilebr., draw \_back~\ * for me that I may sit down), — AndJudah approached to him. — Ami also the priests that are approaching to JEHOVAH shall sanctify themselves. — And the handmaidens drew near, they and their children. — And Leah also drew near and her children. — And Jehovah God planted a garden in Eden. — A time to plant, and a time to uproot [that which is] planted. — Take to thee (/«.) of all food. — Take to me a heifer three- years-old. — Take for yon (///.) seven bullocks. — Speak thou (m.) to [the] children of Israel that they may take for me a heave-offering. — And Jehovah God caused a deep Bleep to fall upon the man. and he slept ; and He took one of his ribs and closed up Ih-.h instead thereof. — [Is] thy (./•) taking my husband a little thing that [thou shouldest think] to take also [the] mandrakes of my son ? — Arise ye (m.), move ye, and pass ye over [the] river Arnon. — And Abraham journeyed from thence. — And Moses caused [the] children of Israel to journey from [the] Red Sea. — On [the] falling of thy (m.) enemy do not rejoice. — And Abraham fell upon his face and laughed. — And he passed-over before them, and bowed himself to the earth seven times until his approaching even-to his brother. — And they («/.) shall not approach to me for the purpose of ministering to Me, or for the purpose of approaching near all my holy-things. — Until [the] day of JEHOVAH'S giving rain upon [the] face of the ground. — And also I have established .My covenant with them (>«.), to give to them [the] land of Canaan. — Thou (m.) shalt surely give to him, and thy heart shall not be (i.e., let not thy heart be) displeased on thy giving to him ; for because-of this thing Jehovah thy God will bless thee. — Better [is] my giving her to thee (»>•), than my giving her to any other man. — And he told not to his father and to his mother what he had done. — It hath surely been told to me, what thou (/.) hast done with thy mother-in-law. — Declaring His words to Jacob, His statutes and His judgments unto Israel. — Oh my Loud, f mayest Thou open my lips, so that my mouth may declare Thy praise. * n$i stands here for i"wbn n$ draw away, or draw lad; (comp. Gen. xix. 9). \ See Letter xix. P.S. (a). 392 HEBREW GRAMMAR. EXERCISE XXV. To eat much honey [is] not good. — And Jacob vowed a vow, saying, If God will be with me, .... and will give me bread to eat, and a garment to put on. — And Jehovah God laid-a-command upon the man, saying, Of every tree of the garden thou mayest freely (or indeed) eat. — And Abner called-out to Joab and said, Shall [the] sword devour for ever ?— Of [the] fruit of [any] tree of the garden we may eat. — And he refused and said, I will not eat. — Will I eat [the] flesh of strong [bullocks], or [the] blood of rams will I drink ? — Shall women eat their [own] fruit ? — And thou (m.) take to thee of all food that is-wont-to-be-eaten.— For the-purpose-of-making-a-dis- tinction-between that which is unclean, and that which is clean ; and between the beast that [is] eaten, and the beast that may not be eaten. — [One] eating my bread hath raised up against me [his] heel. — For Jehovah thy God [is] a consuming fire, a jealous God. — It (/.) [is] a hind devouring its inhabitants.— In order that they (m.) may see the bread which I caused you (m.) to eat in the wilderness. — And I will cause those-(m.) -afflicting thee (/.) to eat their [own] flesh. — And thou (/».) shalt eat and shalt be satisfied, and shalt bless Jehovah thy God. — And if the servant shall indeed say, I love (Hebr., have loved) my master, my wife, and my children. — If thou (m.) shalt say in thine heart, These nations [are] numerous.— [In] every [thing] that Sarah shall say to thee (>.), listen to (Hebr., in) her voice.— Thus shall ye (m.) say to my lord, to Esau. — All my bones continually-say, O Jehovah, who is like unto Thee ? — Now shall it be said, with-regard-to Jacob and with-regard-to Israel, What hath God wrought ?— And she said, May I {i.e., let me) now glean and gather among the sheaves after the reapers. — And he gathered up his feet into the bed, and expired, and was gathered to his people.— And he said to them (>«.), I [am on the point of] being gathered to my people. — And his hand [was] taking-hold-of [the] heel of Esau.— A snare shall take hold of [his] heel. — And I took- hold of him and slew him. — And I said, O my Lord Jehovah, forgive now. — For him whom Jehovah will love, He will correct.* — And Isaac loved Esau, .... but Rebekah [was] loving Jacob. — And a false oath (Hebr., oath of falsehood) ye shall not love. — But [the] way of [the] wicked Bhall perish. — So may all Thine enemies perish, O Jehovah, but those loving Him [shall be] like [the] rising of [the] sun in his might. * See Letter Iv. § 2. K I.Y TO THE I \I INCISES. 393 EXERCISE XXVI. Sit thou (/«.), I pray [thee], here. — Come thou (f.) down, ami sit upon [the] dust, O virgin-daughter of Bahylon (Ilehr., virgin-qf daughter-of Babylon). — Arise thou (>«.), I pray [thee], sit, and i:u of my venison. — Sit ye (m.) here with the ass, and I and the lad will go yonder (Ilebr., as fur as there). — For Solomon thy (/.) son shall reign after me, and he shall sit upon my throne. — A house shalt thou (m.) build, but thou shalt not dwell in it. — Let the damsel dwell with us [some] days, . . . afterwards she shall go. — A land not inhabited. — In [the] best [part] of the land cause thou (?n.) thy father and thy brethren to dwell ; let them dwell in [the] land of Goshen. — And he caused [the] children of Israel to dwell there. — Shall I go and call for thee a nursing woman from-among the Hebrew-women, that she may suckle for thee the child ? — And [the] daughter of Pharaoh said unto her, Go thou. — A bird of the heaven will (or may) carry the report, and a winged thing will (or may) tell [the] matter. — And Pharaoh awoke, and behold [it was] a dream. — And the thing was pleasing in [the] eyes of Pharaoh. — And she adorned her head. — And Thou saidst, I will surely do well to thee (Hebr., with thee). — And they (m.) went-forth for-the-purpose-of going to [the] land of Canaan. — I have remembered for thee (f.) [the] kindness of thy youth, [the] love of thine espousals, thy going after Me in the wilderness, in a land not sown. — Blessed [be] thou of (Hebr., to) Jehovah, my daughter ! thou hast shewn greater goodness at last than at first (Hebr., thou hast catised thy latter kindness to be better than the firmer) in not going after the young men, whether poor or rich. — I will pour-out My spirit upon thy (m.) seed. — And he placed the rods which he peeled in the troughs. — Is it to bend-down his head like a bulrush, and [that] sackcloth and ashes he should spread out ? — And these [are] the nations which Jehoa ah left, for-the-purpose-of- trying by them Israel. — JEHOVAH hath become-known, II 1-; hath executed judgment, in [the] work of his-own-hands hath [the] wicked-man been-snared. — And [by] My Name Jehovah / was not known to them (///.). — And by what will it be known now that I have found favour in Think eyes, [even] I and Thy people ? Is it not by Thy going with us ? — And the tiling became- known to Mordecai, and he told [it] to Esther the queen. — And Jacob dwelt in [thi'] land of [the] sojournings of his father. — And Jacob 394 HEBREW GRAMMAR. was-left by-liimself, and a man wrestled with him till [the] rising of the morning-dawn. — For-the-purpose-of-causing [the] sons of men (Hebr., to [the] sons of the mail) to know His Mighty-deeds. — Son of man, cause Jerusalem to know her abominations. — And thou (/«.) shalt-make-kuown to them (m.) the way in which they shall go. — Multitude of years will make [men] know wisdom. — And he took [the] elders of the city, and [the] thorns of the wilderness and the briars, and he taught (punished) witli them [the] men of Succoth. — And there-stood not a man with him, on Joseph's making himself known (Hebr., on [the~\ making -himself -knoivn-of Joseph) to his brethren. — And she called his name Joseph, saying, May Jehovah add to me another son. — He made it a testimony in Joseph. — To it there-is-nothing to add, and from it there-is- nothing to take-off. — O man of GOD, the king hath said, Come-down. — The lad will not be able to leave his father. — And we said, We shall not be able to go-down. — [The] souls of [the] needy He will sa ve. — And all this assembly shall know that not by sword and by spear will Jehovah save. — And Jehovah said to Joshua [the] son of Nun [the] servant of Moses, saying. — And they dwelt in booths, for [the] children of Israel had not done so since [the] days of Joshua [the] son of Nun. — Save Thy servant, Thou my God ! — Behold, how good and how pleasant [is the] dwelling of brethren, even [their dwelling] together. — One [thing] have I asked of (Hebr., from) Jehovah, it will I require, even my dwelling in [the] house of Jehovah all [the] days of my life. EXERCISE XXVII. And there-arose not a prophet any-more in Israel like Moses. — And behold my sheaf arose, and also stood-upright. — Son [is] dishonouring father, daughter [is] rising-up against her mother, daughter-in-law against her mother-in-law. — [One] moving and wandering shalt thou (w.) be in the earth. — I arose to open [the door] for my love. — And there-will-arise seven years of famine after them (/.). — Return thou (m.), and abide with the king. — Return thou (/.), return, O Shulammith ; return, return, that we may look at thee. — Abide thou (/.) a widow [in the] house of KEY TO THE EXERCISES. 395 thy father.— Thou knowest (novisti) my down-sitting and mine uprising. — Women [thai are] at-ease, arise ye, hear ye my voice. — [_ In the] midst of [tin*] eight I will arise for-the-purpose-of-giving praise to Thee. — I will arise now, and will-go-round in the city. — A prophet will / raise-up lor them «///.) from [the] midst of their brethren like thee (///.). — Ami he arose ami went to the place [of] which (ioi> spake to him. — And Jehovab raised up a saviour (Ihlir., one saving) for the sons of Israel. — And she arose while-yet [it was] night, and gave food for her household. — And Tnou hast established Thy words for Thou [art] righteous. — And Reubi □ returned to the pit. — And he brought-bacfc all the substance ; and also Lot his brother, and his suhstance he brought-back. — And he turned-aside for-the-purpose-of seeing [the] carcase of the lion. — And Noah removed [the] covering of the Ark. — [He is] confirming ( I [ebr., making to stand) [the] word of His servant, and [the] counsel of His messenger He will establish, Who [is] saying resjiecting Jerusalem, She shall be inhabited, and respecting [the] cities of Judah, They (_/'.) shall be built, and, Her (viz., Jerusalem's) desolate- •places I will raise-up. — And 1 will establish My Covenant with you (m.) — Let my enemy be as a wicked man, [and let him that is] raising-himself-up-against-me [be] as an iniquitous-man. — They had only just set the watchmen. — My Covenant he hath broken. — He hath broken covenant. — Jehovah hath broken [the] counsel of [the] heathen. — And thou (m.) shalt frustrate for me [the] counsel of Ahithophel. — They have broken Thy Law. — Thou didst divide (Hebr., break) [the] sea by Thy Power. — And all [the] cattle of Egypt died, but of [the] cattle of [the] children of Israel died not one. — And the Philistines saw that their mighty-man was-dead, and they fled. — And it-came-to-pass on the-going-forth-of her soul, for she died, that she called his name Benoni (i.e. } son of my sorrow). — Give thou (///.) to me children ; and if not, I (f.) [am] dying. — Lest the evil should ov< rtake me, and I should die. — Would-that we had died in [the] land of Egypt ! — For in [the] day of thy (/;/.) eating of it thou shalt surely die. — And Abraham expired, and died, in a good old-age. — And Jehovah smote Nabal, and he died. — Evil shall slay a wicked-man {i.e., the wickedness of the wicked shall be his own destruction). — And they (///.) fell before Jonathan, and his armour-bearer was slaying after him. — And the ! whom he slew on his dying were more than those whom he slew in his life. — And Thou wilt kill this people as one man. — And I 396 HEBREW GRAMMAR. will kill thy (/.) root with famine. — And it shall be [that], him escaping from [the] sword of Hazael shall Jehu slay, and him escaping from [the] sword of Jehu shall Elisha slay. — And he slew on that day eighty-five men (see Letter xxii., § 7, Rule IV.). — They (to.) were slain in [the] days of harvest. — Fathers shall not be- put-to-death on account of children, and children shall not be-put-to- death on-account of fathers ; they-shall-be-put-to-death each-man for his own sin. — If thou (to.) art not delivering thyself to-night, to-morrow thou [wilt be] a-dead-man (Hebr., one (to.) slain). — In- order-that thou (f.) mayest remember and mayest be ashamed. — I was-ashamed and also was-confounded, because I bare [the] reproach of my youth. — Jacob now shall not be ashamed, and his countenance now shall not be pale. — All worshippers-of a carved-image shall-be- ashamed. — The morning became-light, and the men were-sent-away. — See ye (to.) now, that mine eyes have-become-light because I tasted this little honey. — And it shall be just-as Jehovah rejoiced over you (m.) to-do-good-to you, and to multiply you ; so will Jehovah rejoice over you, to-cause-you-to-perish, and to destroy you. — And I will-be-glad in Jerusalem, and will rejoice in My people. — Rejoice ye (to.), and be glad, for-ever-and-ever. — And I will sustain thee (to.) there. — I will sustain you (to.) and your little-ones. — And they (to.) told to her, and the queen was-grieved exceedingly. — My priests and my elders have-expired in the city. — [The] Almighty will not pervert justice. — And I will-be-an- enemy-to thy (to.) enemies. — And the waters increased and bare-up the Ark, and it (f.) rose above the earth. — And Thou hast exalted my horn like [that of] a unicorn. — Extol ye (to.) Jehovah our God. — Attribute greatness ye (to.) to Jehovah with me ; and let us extol His Name together. EXERCISE XXVIII. God hath found-out [the] iniquity of thy (to.) servants. — And the dove found not a resting-place for [the] sole of her foot. — For thou (to.) hast found favour in Mine eyes. — For I have not found in thee (to.) evil. — And they (to.) went three days in the wilderness, and found not water. — If ye (to.) had not ploughed with my heifer, ye would not have found-out my riddle. — Lest ye (to.) should say, We KEY TO THE EXERCISES. 397 have found wisdom. — And they (m.) were-weary (or, laboured in vain) to find the door. — And he said to bis Lad, Run, find now the arrows. — Find ye (/.) rest. — I [am] rejoicing because of Thy Word, as [one] finding great spoil. — If thou (in.) shalt find [any] man, thou Shalt not salute him. — And .die said, May thy (m.) handmaiden find favour in thine eyes. — And they (///.) said, Thou (m.) hast saved-onr- lives, may we find favour in [the] eyes of my lord. — The man in whose hand the cup has-been found, he shall be to me a servant. — There shall not be Pound in thee [one (in.) ] causing his son or his daughter to pass into the fire. — Perchance then-shall be found there ten ; — and He said, I will not destroy for-the-sake-of the ten. — If the thing-stol o shall indeed be found in his hand, .... he shall repay twofold. — Thou (/.) hast been found-out, and also laiddiold-of. — Then was I in his eyes like [one (/.) ] finding peace. — And-also for-to-morrow I [am] invited to her together with the king. — And he gave to them (in.) a place at [the] head of those invited. — Thy (in.) name shall not be called any-more Jacob. —And I have not been invited to come to the king. — And they (in.) read in [the] book of [the] law of Jehovah their God. — And Goo said, Let the earth produce grass. — These [are] the generations of the heavens and the earth on their (in.) being created. — And the man and his wife bid themselves (Hebr., and lie hid himself [yiz.~] the man and his wife). — Shall [any] thing be too hard for (Ilebr., from) Jehovah ?— For [as to] this commandment which I [am] commanding thee (in.) to-day, it is not too hard for (Hebr., from) thee. — Wherefore have ye (m.) come to me seeing that ye hate (Hebr., hare hated) me? — Thou hast hated all workers of iniquity. — He turned their (m.) heart to hate His people. — One hating gifts shall live. — If there should be to a man two wives, the one beloved, and the [other] one bated.— [The] fear of Jehovah [is the] hating-of evil. — Hate ye (m.) evil, and love ye good. — Thou (;//.) shalt not hale thy brother in thy heart.— Arise, O JehOI am, and let Thine enemies be dispersed, and let those hating Thee flee before Thee.— Cause-thou-(/.)-me-to drink, I pray, a little water, for I am thirsty (Hebr., I have been thirst//). — IIo ! every one thirsting, come ye (Hebr., go ye) to the waters. — My soul thirsteth (Hebr., thirsted) for God, for [The] Living God. 398 HEBREW GRAMMAR. EXERCISE XXIX. And she said, Glory hath departed from Israel. — Judali hath gone into captivity by reason of affliction. — And thou (m.) shalt migrate from thy place to another place. — And [the] channels of waters were seen, and [the] foundations of [the] world were discovered. — One (m.) going talebearing [is] revealing a secret. — Plead thou (m.) thine [own] cause with thy neighbour, but [the] secret of another reveal not. — There was a man a Jew .... who was led-captive from Jerusalem with the body-of-captives that was- led-into- captivity with Jeconiah king of Judah, whom Nebuchadnezzar king of Babylon took- captive. — A fool will have no delight in understanding, but in his heart's discovering-itself (Hebr., in the discovering itself of his heart). — Be ye (»?..) fruitful, and multiply, and replenish the earth. — Die thou (?n.) in the mountain whither thou (m.) [art] going-up. — Who [is] this (/.) coming-up from the wilderness ? — And behold angels of God ascending and descending. — And behold seven cows coming-up from the river. — And God saw their (m.) works that they turned from their evil way. — And all their (m.) substance, and all their little-ones, and their wives, they took-captive and despoiled. — And he showed them (m.) the king's son. — And they (m.) went-up from Egypt and came to [the] land of Canaan. — And they (m.) caused Joseph to go-up out-of the pit. — How much better is it to get wisdom than gold, and to get understanding to-be-preferred (Hebr., being preferred) above silver ! — [The] doing-of righteousness and judgment is-preferred by (Hebr., to) Jehovah above sacrifice. — On [the] day when Jehovah God made (Hebr., on [_the~\ day of [_the~\ making of Jehovah God) earth and heaven. — In Thee my soul hath trusted. — On-account-of these [things] I (f) [am] weeping. — Rachel weeping over her children. — And Israel shall surely go-into-captivity from his land. — [The] increase of his house shall depart. — And he led Israel captive into Assyria. — If Jehovah will not build a house, its builders have laboured in it in-vain. — And Noah built an altar to Jehovah. — And he turned this way and that, and he saw that there-was-no-man, and he smote the Egyptian. — And he caught three hundred foxes, .... and made [them] turn tail to tail. — And God made the firma- ment. — Who shall ascend into [the] mount of Jehovah ? — And now let thy (ra.) servant abide I-pray instead-of the lad a servant to my lord, and let the lad go-up with his brethren. — And Manoah took [the] kid of the goats, and the offering, and offered KEY TO THE EXERCISI IS. >!) [them] up upon the rock to Jehovah. — And it came to pass on [the] going-up of the flame from-upon the altar towards the heaven that [the] angel of Jehovah ascended in [the] flame of the altar.— [The] heart of an intelligent [man] will get knowledge. — And Joseph bought all [the] land of Egypt. — And Jehovah had respect to Abel ami to his offering, but to Cain and to his offering He bad not respect. — And [the] anger of Jacob burned against Rachel.— And He hath caused 1 1 is wrath to burn against me. — Can a man walk upon the burning-coals and his feet not be scorched ? — I have surely waited-for Jehovah. — Wait for Jehovah, be strong, and He shall make-firm thy heart. — Let it (w.) look for light, and let there be none ; and let it not behold [the] eyelids of [the] morning-dawn. — Open Thou mine eyes that I may see wonderful things from Thy law. Command thou (m.) [the] children of Israel, and thou shalt say unto them. — And the heavens and the earth were finished, and all their (m.) host, and God finished on the seventh day His work which lie made. — And the fowl shall multiply on the earth. — He shall not multiply (Hebr., cause to be many) to himself horses. — And He hath increased (llebr., caused to increase, or be great) in [the] daughter of Judah lamentation and wailing. — And he commanded them, saying. — And I have done so as I was commanded. — Lie upon thy (>w.)bed and feign- thyself-sick (lit., make thyself sick). — And let man and beast cover themselves with sackcloth. — And she took the vail and covered herself. — Be Thou to me a strong rock (Hebr., rock of strength). — Be thou (>«.) lord over thy brethren, and let [the] sons of thy mother bow-themselves-down to thee. — Thou art our sister, become (Hebr., be into) thousands of myriads. — Let Reuben live, and not die. — And Jacob lived in [the] land of Egypt seventeen years. — For He spake, and it came-to-pass ; He commanded, and it stood-fast. — And God said, Let there bo light, and there was light. — Hath a people heard [the] voice of God speaking out of [the] midst of the fire, as thou hast heard, and lived? — And they {in.) declared to him, savi Joseph [is] yet living. — Let the earth bring-forth living soul. — And they (l».) went-down, and all that belonged to them (Ilel)r.. which was to them) living into the pit. — For not like the Egyptian women [are] the Hebrew women, for they [are] lively. — Ho ! the multitude of many peoples, [who] like the roaring of the Beas, are-continually- roaring. — And I turned and came down from the mountain. — And we turned and journeyed into the wilderness. — And she went and wandered in [the] wilderness of Leersheba. — And Jehovah saw that 400 HEBREW GRAMMAR. great [was the] wickedness of man. — And I lifted up mine eyes and saw in a dream. — And the woman saw that the tree [was] good for food. — And Jehovah appeared to him in [tin-] oakgroves of Mamre. — And I appeared to Abraham, to Isaac, and to Jacob.— That-wllicb. God [is] doing He hath showed Pharaoh. — On his showing [the] riches of [the] glory of his kingdom. — Thou (m.) wast shown [it] that thou mightest know (Hebr., for-the-pnrpose-of -knowing) that Jehovah He [is] God. — And all the people shouted, and said, May the king live. — -And now let Pharaoh look-out a man intelligent and wise. — Look not at wine when it shall-sparkle-with-red. — And he said to Jehovah, Turn not to their (m.) offering {i.e., accept it not). — In another generation let their (?».) name be blotted out. — Fret not against the evildoers. — Let not thy (m.) heart swerve to her ways. — And Esau lifted-up his voice and wept. — And he drank of the wine and was drunk. — And he shall have-dominion from sea to sea. — And he fought against Israel and took-captive some-of-them (Hebr., took captive from him a captivity). — And also he drew-indeed-water for us and watered the flock. — May God enlarge Japheth, and dwell in [the] tents of Shem. — My heart hath not been proud, nor have mine eyes been lofty. — Because that thou (m.) hast-become-lofty in stature. — For [as the] heavens are (Hebr., have ever heen) higher than the earth, so are (Hebr., have-ever-been) My ways higher than your ways. — Before destruction [the] heart of man is-usually-haughty. — Make-high that-which-is low, and make-low that-which-is high. — They (m.) saw, so they wondered. — If oppression of a poor-man .... thou (m.) shalt see in the province, wonder not at the matter. — My soul hath thirsted for Thee, my flesh hath longed for Thee. — And he shall bow-himself-down at [the] threshold of the gate. — And thou (rn.) shalt worship before Jehovah thy God. — Hear, [0] daughter, and consider, and incline thine ear, and forget thy people and thy father's house, so shall the king delight-in thy beauty, for He [is] thy Lord, and worship thou Him. — Thou (m.) shalt not bow-thyself-down before (Hebr., to) another god. — And behold the sun and the moon and eleven stars making-obeisance to me. — And they rose-early in the morning and worshipped before Jehovah. — And Abraham bowed-himself down before [the] people of the land. — And she fell upon her face and bowed-herself-down to the earth. — Come ye (m.) let us worship and bow-down, let us kneel before Jehovah our Maker. — Extol ye (m.) Jehovah our God and bow-yourselves-down before (Hebr., to) His Holy Mountain ; for Holt [is] Jehovah our God. KEY TO THE EXERCISB6. 40] EXERCISE XXX. After these [things], on [the] becoraing-calm-of [the] wrath of the king (i.e., when the king's wrath Income cairn). — And God caused a wind to pass over tin- earth, and tin- waters subsided. — Lit., And I will cause-to-be-still from against Me [the] murmurings of [the children of Israel {i.e. I loill still the murmurings of the children of Israel, which they murmur against me). — And ye (m.) shall go-round the city. — Lit. [It is] enough for you (/«.) to go-round this mountain, (i.e. Ye have gone round this mountain enough). — Go ye (m.) round Zion, and encompass it (f). — And on the seventh day ye (»/.) shall go-round the city seven times. — And we went round Mount Seir many days. — He turned towards the West side (Ilehr., to [the] quarter of the West). — And the mourners will go-about in the street. — I will wash niy hands in innocency, and I will go about Thine altar, O Jehovah. — And they (m.) journeyed from the mountain Ilor (Ilebr., from Ilor the mountain) .... for the purpose of going-round [the] land of Edom. — Thou hast caused their (/;?.) heart to turn back- again. — And I will turn-away (Ilebr., cause to turn) My countenance from them (/«.) — Turn-thou-(/!)-away thine eyes from me (Hebr.,from before mc). — And [though] he [be] a valiant man, whose heart is as [the] heart of the lion, he will become altogether faint. — The earth shall be utterly emptied and utterly spoiled. — And all [the] host of the heavens shall be dissolved, and the heavens shall be rolled [together] as the scroll. — And the king did not hearken to the people, for [the thing] was occasioned by (JELebr., from with) God. — Thou hast divided (Hebr., broken) [the] sea by Thy power. — It is time for Jehovah to act, they have broken Thy law. — Behold, I am (Ilebr., hare become) vile, what answer shall I return to Thee ? — They were swifter than eagles, they were mightier than lions. — Afterwards Job opened his mouth, and cursed his day. — A judge thou (m.) shalt not revile, and a chief among thy people thou shalt not curse. — For I know (Hebr., knew, now) thai whomsoever thou (m.) shalt bless, [he is] blessed, and whomsoever thou shalt curse, he shall be accursed. — And he said before (Hebr., to) the eyes of Israel, " Sun, stop thou (/».) in Gibeon, and [thou] moon in [the] valley of Aijalon." — And the sun stopped, and the moon stood-still. — Let not [the] pupil of thine eye cease [from weeping]. — Stop ye(*».) until our approaching to you. — And that year was finished. — And money failed in (Hebr., from) \ OL. II. D !) 402 HEBREW GRAMMAR. [the] land of Egypt. — Sinners shall be consumed from the earth. — To curse mine enemies have I called thee (?«.). — Neither curse him at all, nor bless him at all [Letter xxviii. § 9]. — And the man inclined- his-head-reverentiallv, and bowed himself to Jehovah. — And I in- clined-my-head-reverentially, and bowed myself to Jehovah. — And they (m.) said, There is peace to thy (m.) servant, our father ; and they inclined-reverentially-their-heads and bowed themselves. — Roll ye (/«.) to me this-day a great stone. — And Amasa [was] rolling himself in blood (Hebr., in the blood) in [the] midst of the highway. — And Jacob approached, and rolled away the stone from upon [the] mouth of the well. — And God caused the people to go-round [by the] way of the wilderness. — Who hath measured [the] waters with the- hollow-of-his-hand ? — And I will recompense (Hebr., mete-out) their (;».) former work into their bosom. — And they (m.) measured with the omer. — And it-came- to-pass, when man (Hebr., the man) began to multiply upon [the] face of the ground. — They began to offer up burnt-offerings to Jehovah. — If from [the] seed of the Jews [is] Mordecai, before whom thou hast begun to fall, thou shalt not prevail over him (Hebr., to him), but shalt surely fall before him. Then it-was-begun to call upon [the] name of Jehovah. — Cry-out- for-joy, and sing-with-joy thou (f) inhabiting Zion. — Sing-with-joy and rejoice, O daughter of Zion, for behold Me coming. — Sing-with- joy [ye] heavens, for Jehovah hath done [it] .... for Jehovah hath redeemed Jacob. — Then shall leap like the hart a lame [man], and [the] tongue of a dumb [man] shall sing-for-joy. — My tongue shall sing Thy righteousness. — Come ! let us sing to Jehovah, let us shout-for-joy to [the] Rock of our salvation. — Then shall sing-with- joy all [the] trees of [the] forest. — Praise (thou/.) thy God, O Zion. — I am -ever-crying-out, Praised [be] Jehovah ! — Let them praise [the] Name of Jehovah, for His Name alone is exalted. — Let every thing that breathes (Hebr., Let all the breath) praise Jehovah : Praise ye JAH [Hallelujah, Letter xl. § 14.] EXERCISE XXXI. Thou (»?.) and all thy friends to whom thou hast prophesied in falsehood. — And they (m.) saw, and behold he prophesied with the prophets. — Prophesy thou (m.), and thou shalt say, Thus hath said Jehovah — And he prophesied in the midst of the house. — Let not KEY TO THE EXEB< I8ES. 403 i kiah deceive you. — Lift thou (/«.) up now thine eyes, and see. — Arise thou (/'.), lift ii[» the lad. And he lifted up bis eyes and saw. — Fill thou (m.) [the] sacks of the men with food, as-much-as tin v shall hi: able to carry. — And [the] land of their (/«.) sojourning, was not able to bear them. — And [some] of her blood gushed-out upon the wall. — And he shall sprinkle of the blood seven times before Jehovah. — So shall He sprinkle many nations. — And he st< od in a narrow place where there was no way to decline to the right- hand or to the left. — Stretch-out thy (/«.) hand over the sea. — Gel thou (m.) wisdom, get understanding, . . . and decline not from [the] words of my mouth. — And Aaron stretched-out his hand. — And the she-ass saw me, and turned out of the way (Hebr., declined) before me. — They hearkened not, nor inclined their (ni.) ear. — And JEHOVAH shall stretch out His hand, and the helper shall stumble, and the helped shall fall. — And he bowed (Ilebr., caused to incline) [the] heart of every man of Judah. — Cause my heart to incline to Thy testimonies. — Incline ye (m.) your ear, and come ye unto Me. — And the hail smote in all [the] land of Egypt all that was in the field, both man and beast (Hebr., from man even to beast), and every herb of the field the hail smote. — And [the] king of Israel said to Elisha on his seeing them (m.), Shall I indeed smite [them], my father? And he said, Thou shalt not smite [them] ; [art] thou smiting those whom thou (»i.) hast taken captive with thy swoid and with thy bow ? set bread and water before them, and let them eat, and let them drink, and let them go to their master. — And on David's returning (Ilebr., on the ret '// mi ng of David) from smiting the Philistine, then Abner took him and brought him before Saul. — And the sun smote upon [the] head of Jonah. — Set ye (m.) Uriah in the front of the hottest battle (Hebr., against the front of the strong battle), and ye shall turn back from behind him, that he may be smitten, and may die. — The barley was smitten, .... but the wheat and the spelt were not smitten. — Ephraim hath been smitten, their root hath dried up. — And behold, thy (/«.) servants [are] smitten. — And [the] officers of [the] children of Israel were smitten. — Try now thy (»/.) servants ten day-.— And to thy (m.) handmaid [then 1 were] two sons, and they strove both of them in the field. — And behold two men, Hebrews, striving. — Dathan and Abiram .... who strove against Moses and against Aaron in the congregation of Corah. — One (m.) hasting to be rich shall not be innocent. — Why D 1) 2 40-A HEBREW GRAMMAR. should living man complain ? — The morning shone, and the men ■were sent away. — And Joah and his men went all night, and morning-arose-npon-them (Heln\, and it became light to them) in Hebron. — Perhaps the woman will not be willing to go after me. — If ye (?«.) will be willing and will obey, [the] good of the land shall ye eat. — And Saul adjured the people. — And they (m.) baked the dough which they brought out from Egypt. — Every offering which shall be baked in the oven. — When your fear shall come (Hebr., on the coming of your fear) like a storm, and [when] your calamity shall arrive like a whirlwind. — At [the] time of evening, at [the] time of [the] going-forth of the women-drawing-water. — And [the] sons of Benjamin were gathered-together .... to go forth to the battle with [the] sons of Israel. — Now arise thou {m.\ go-forth from this land. — Go ye (/.) forth, and see, [O] daughters of Zion. — Let not a man go-out from his place on the seventh day. — When thou (aw.) shalt go-out to the battle against thine enemies. — His spirit will go forth, he will return to his earth. — And the women went-out from all [the] cities of Israel. — Let not thy (m.) heart be hasty to utter (Hebr., cause to go out) a word before God. — And now go thou (an.) ... . and bring-out My people [the] sons of Israel from Egypt. — And God said, Let the earth bring-forth living soul. — And I called for a drought upon the land, and upon that which the ground bringeth-usually-forth. — And she was brought forth from-among the people. — They have cut off in the pit my life, and have cast a stone upon me. — Stranger, fatherless, and widow, ye (m.) shall not oppress. — Behold [the] Assyrian [was] a cedar in Lebanon, .... and he was beautiful in his greatness, and in the length of his branches. — And I put .... a crown of beauty on thy (/.) head, .... and thou wast exceedingly beautiful. — And Elisha said, Shoot thou (m.), and he shot. — He shall surely be stoned, or shall surely be shot. — Good and righteous is Jehovah, therefore He will instruct sinners in the way. — And he drove (Hebr., led or conducted) all his cattle .... in-order-to come to Isaac his father to [the] land of Canaan. — Enter thou (an.), and all thy household into the ark. — And Noah entered into the ark. — The king Ahasuerus commanded (Hebr., said) to bring Vashti the cmeen before him, and she came not. — And Cain brought of [the] fruit of the ground an offering to Jehovah. — And Abel, also he brought from [the] firstlings of his flock and from [the] fat of them (f). — KEY TO THE EX] RCI8E8. 105 What have I sinned against thee (m.) (Hebr., to thee) thai thou hast brought upon me and upon my kingdom a gnat Bin ?— Who is this coming from Edom ?— Behold, Rachel his daughter coming with the Hock. — While he was yet speaking with them (///.), then behold Rachel came with the flock. — And he said to him-who was over his house, Bring the men into the house. — And the nan feared because they were brought [into the] house of Joseph — Behold I will bring (Hebr., behold Me bringing) to-morrow [the] locust into thy border. — And they (m.) said, On account of the money that returned into our sacks at the first, we [are] brought [hither. — Like a dream shall he fly-away, .... and be chased-away like a vision of night. — Lament ye (/«.), for near [is the] day of Jehovah. — Awake ye (m.) drunkards, and weep ; and lament all ye drinkers of wine. — Therefore shall Moab lament. — Jehovah hath frustrated [the] counsel of [the] heathen, He hath disallowed [the] thoughts of the peoples. — And Joseph was not able to restrain himself. — And we said unto my lord, The lad will not be able to leave his father. — We shall not be aide to sec [the] face of the man. — And Samuel feared to tell (Hebr., was afraid of telling) the vision to Eli. — For I feared lest thou (m.) shouldest take violehtly-away thy daughters from me. — Many shall see and shall fear, and shall trust in Jehovah. — Jehovah is my Light and my Salvation, of whom shall I be afraid ? — For with Thee is the pardoning (i.e., to Thee belongs pardoning) in-order-that Thou mightest be feared. — And Aaron shall put his two hands upon the head of the living goat, and shall confess over it all [the] iniquities of [the] sons (or children) of Israel. — I said, I will confess my trespasses (Hebr., with reference t<> my trespasses) to Jehovah. — Now will I praise Jehovah. — Pr ye (/».) [The] God of Gods, because for ever is His Mercy. EXERCISE XXXII. Behold, not God had sent him (i.e., it teas not (,'<>.), and He lifted them up and carried them all [the] days of old. — Jehovah guided me to [the] house of [the] brethren (i.e., kindred) of my master. — She conferred-upon him good and not evil all [the] days of her life. — A path [which the] bird-of-prey hath not known (Hehr., known it), and [the] eye of [the] vulture hath not beheld it. — And she did according to all that her mother-in-law commanded her. And Jacob knew not that Rachel had stolen them (m.). — Shew me (Hebr., Cause thou (/.) me to see) thy countenance, cause me to hear thy voice. — I would strengthen you (m.) with my mouth. — And Esau ran to meet him, and embraced him, and fell upon his neck and kissed him. — Arise thou (m.) anoint him, for this [is] he. — Nay, my lord, hear me. — Forsake her not, and she will keep thee (m.) ; love her, and she will preserve thee. — Extol her, and she will exalt thee (m.) ; she will honour thee if thou wilt embrace her. — And thy (in.) heart shall-become-high, and thou shalt forget Jehovah thy God Who brought thee out (Hebr., that [teas] bringing thee out) from [the] land of Egypt, .... Who caused thee to eat (Hebr., that [teas] causing thee to eat) Manna in the wilderness. — I said in my heart, " Go-to, I will try thee (m.) with mirth." — Thou hast deprived me of my heart, [0] my sister, [0 my] bride !— I have-taken-hold-of him, and I will not let-him-go. — The watchmen that [were] going-round the city found me, they smote me, they wounded me. — [Art] thou (m.) thinking to slay me ?— Upon [their] hands they (m.) shall bear thee, lest thou shouldest dash thy foot against the stone. — Then shall they (m.) call-upon me, but I will not answer ; they shall diligently seek me, but they shall not find me. — He shall bruise thee (m.) [as to the] head, and thou shalt bruise Him [as to the] heel. — [As to] one- tliat [is] trusting in Jehovah, mercy shall encompass him. — This [is] my God, and I will glorify Him ; [The] God of my father, and I will extol Him. — And he took Rebekah, and she became to him a wife ; and he loved her. — Give ye (in.) to her of [the] fruit of her hands, and let her [own] works praise her in the gates. — For His angels He will command respecting thee, to keep thee in all thy ways ._And He placed him in [the] garden of Eden, for-the- purpose-of tilling it (/.), and for-the-purpose-of keeping it. — Whose the sea [is] (Hebr., Which to Him [w] the sea), and He made it : and [the] dry-land His hands formed.— Surely, shall [the] work say with-regard-to its Maker, He made me not ? — [The] Spirit of God hath-made me. — Thy hands have made me. — And / will make thee (m.) into a great nation, and 1 will bless thee. — Is-there a KEY TO THE EXEECI8E8. III? place [in] thy (/.) father's house for as to lodge? — And do1 with you (/«.) alone [am] / making this covenant, .... hut with [him] that is here, .... and with [him] that is-not here with us to-day. — If thou (to.) art sending our brother with us, we will go-down ; . . . . hut if thou art-uot sending [him , we will not go-down. — And now, if ye (/».) are acting-with ( Hebr., doing) kindness and truth towards my master, tell-ye me (Hebr., /" me). — Although ye {>n.) may make- many prayers (Ilehr., multiply prayer), I am-not hearing. — Of the cattle that [was] clean, and of the cattle that was-not clean .... two [by] two they came unto Noah. — And tliou (to.) shalt be confident that there ia hope. — Verily Jehovah is in this place ! — How awful is this place! this is none other than [The] House of GOD, and This is [The] Gate of Heaven ! PS AMI Lxvn. 1 May God be-merciful-to us, and may He bless us ; May He cause His Countenance to shine upon us. Selah. 2 That TnY way may-be-known* upon the earth, Among all heathen, Thy Salvation. 3 Let peoples praise Thee, God, [Yea] let [the] peoples, all of them, praise Thee. 4 Let nations rejoice, and SHOUT-with-joy ; For Thou wilt judge [the] peoples righteously, And [as for the] nations on the earth, Tuou wilt guide them, Selah. 5 Let peoples praise Thee, God, [Yea] let [the] peoples, all of them, praise Thee. 6 Earth hath yielded her produce, — God, our God, will bless us. 7 God will bless us, And all [the] uttermost-parts of [the] earth shall fear Him. PSAL.M CXXI. I will lift up mine eyes to the mountains! — From whence can-come my help ? — My help [cometh] from Jr.n<>\ vn Maker of Heaven and Earth. * Heir., For-the-purpose-of-knowing on the earth Thy way, — i.e., in order that men in all the earth may know Thy way. f This is by some supposed to refer to the mountains of Jerusalem, according to what we find in Psalm cx.w. 2, — 408 HEBREW GRAMMAR. 3 He will not suffer thy foot to totter *, Thy Keeper will not slumber : 4 Behold, neither slumber nor sleep Will Israel's Keeper. — 5 JEHOVAH [is] thy Keeper, JEHOVAH [is] thy Shade at thy right-hand f 6 By day the sun shall not smite thee, And [the] moon [shall not smite thee] by night. May JEHOVAH preserve thee from all evil, May He preserve thy soul : May JEHOVAH preserve thy going-out and thy coming-in From-henceforth, even for ever. -r • T • V * — T i Dbij? ij?i nn»o ytssh ran rrirpi x - : T - ■• -: • T t- As for Jerusalem, Mountains are round about it So Jehovah [is] round-about His people, henceforth, even for ever. This Psalm, which is headed by the inscription nibrab Tip , and the thirteen following Psalms — with the One-Hundred-and-Twentieth preceding it — which are headed by the words nfoan vp , are supposed, some of them to have been uttered by the Israelites who used to go up to Jerusalem " three times a-year " to The Worship of Jehovah ( rrttoo being so taken from ribj? to go up, which is always the expression used for the journey to Jerusalem from neighbouring parts), and others by those who went up from Babylon with Ezra to rebuild The Temple (as we find, Ezra vii. 9, bisp to ; ot td> vm this [was] [the] leginning of the going up from Babylon). — If so, this Psalm may be considered to be composed of four parts, each comprising two verses, the first two verses being uttered by one of the company, fatigued, perhaps, with the journey ; the next two verses (viz., 3 and 4) by one of his companions, to cheer him and give him confidence ; the following two verses (viz., 5 and 6) by another, taking up the same strain ; and then the last two verses (viz., 7 and 8) by a third, whose words of blessing form a good conclusion to the Psalm. * Literally, He will not give-up thy foot to the tottering. f Literally, at [the] hand of thy right [side]. KEY TO PHB EXERCISES. 10!) NUMBERS VI. 24—26. May Jehovab bless thee, and may Hi: keep thee : — May JEHOVAH cause 1 1 is Countenance to shine upon thee, and may He be-gracious-to thee : — May Jehovah lift-up His Countenance upon thee, And may He give thee peace. EXERCISE XXXIII. d^k \m:n ivx ns ins^n 12 sib no^n " " " : : - • v -: v : : • 1 •• •.• t : t • rust "np^n tihr; :jn bso uv vinyi tihn xb &nn : ^?8 Dn:n;!p Dni» tf\yD# : Tiivp J |!T^_} EXERCISE XXXIV. rn« : nj_^pc_> ^ : n^bh nvsn : tea n^n no# : nfiinjg rrftfrn : ana ifta/i j -i-he : \yh&2 bip 1 ? n:yny : n#a rnin np? : )svn na EXERCISE XXXV. : ^8 nb^ji] : t6k *n»$1 : 13$? ring nh^ 410 HEBREW GRAMMAR. EXERCISE XXXVI. bx ti -\2i®2 ivx run nisn bx inia i^Wn t : t : • - v -: v - - v ■ : irjrr ^bna '•rm : T??PP J??^? : ta inStfri EXERCISE XXXVII. 1niK Djn*r3Gt/i : pipy} npi -i;anj npi i»»: no .... .... T .. • : - t • • : "S . - : - EXERCISE XXXVIII. ny ^ : ityn ^ "ib^S dd^k Tin^^ -i#k imn "■ "-: - - •• ■;•■-. • : - t v -: t t - n$ ^3 tfin : wi 13^1 jKvn iptp'n hjjjppi *]DNn : n:im ^ : pan EXERCISE XXXIX. • t - v r v • s "1 t t - v v : - ~: - xwb : mtik n« vrnln -iew ^ jna irrn :t - -.-•-: v • - • — - t-: ■nai yijg ^ ^i^n te*i : in 1 ? row a 1 ? n:p*nD¥H * Or Ptcs? Euphonically. KEY TO THE EXERCISES. 411 v : v t - v 1 1 v • - ... i - . •;. . T T : p|D| D'nfejn naps ia -i#g pyn EXERCISE XL. : ia^ inia 2^1 -fan na np^i nfron 3^1 • : V T - V V - t- • - t : - - T t - man rw Jhm Bh» na 13 m*i n'^ nb ia*i • : -; - - • 1 • • : - - T 1 ... . - T V EXERCISE XLI. n$-i i3H» ah« rs : ?rt» ni.T pik-u a 1 ? no# : t ■ ■ 1 •• 1 ... •• T . t : • EXERCISE XLII. by^ : ^n nih \a ukxn n« niptfn 1 ? snm - . - t 1 - : T - t - - : • - T • - v t : - I v: v - t t - .- -ktk te : irto jfiDtt' n 1 ?! dv dv vto mala vrn ... -: t tv" - t : t .. T . _ . • : - : tyjrri fft^i npx • See Letter li. G. t By Pause for rra»i (see Vol. i., page 345). 412 HEBREW GRAMMAR. EXERCISE XLIII. IP f?) "i#8 te : -irrpn ^ whj] ^ n# n^ ^ ,th tf? : 12b inia wrn aten ffy -laftja D^pri TT t: '" " " " '' : DHii rp^i *»n^ : rrirw 1 ? d^qi tegS nrh |ha : ?|T5 lyrp ri£ ^rgi Dpris r&fiK n^K3 EXERCISE XLIV. : v^nS rrnb tela »*7 : njrjOT ^ *n Dip n^p 1 ? d^'7 pte I* 7 ? • 1^38 n$ w^pn ins: EXERCISE XLV. Bh»m :rwn "Win n» rnfcw ^ rvw n ? ♦ aft dk i3"n nirr n^vnn ryb ^inp nxri^p : tetf'1 v 1 ?** t^3!i J Hv>ppn KEY TO THE EXERC18E8. 413 EXERCISE XLVI. ^93 Tinhttfri no : t# nai nw "niUW D^"!3i/ ens; nafi : trrfrs 1 ? ^nin ^ ^onn noi ns wii id 1 ? : psn n« t^iin 1 ? rwn inan n» : : I v t t v • : v - t t - t t : : • - t ■■ t- : ••- I •.- t t : hvz i^an -itste n»i idk la&i -)#« ns EXERCISE XLVII. ikti : inn dgarn yg^n : rp;i&> tifrrw je^i I v t t t : : • - T t v -: ii33 Tip : onis Fhxn xb torn : DS^ao wba EXERCISE XLVIII. nyivn notf*i : mm nj/it^ ns ism inimri ^r : t • - t : - ; •• ; ~- t " r*v : #3#« *338 ca rt« iota : i 1 ? yaahi ^ T: - • T • T - T " T ^ - T "- : nnsnp 1 ? ^n ^s : bb ^ae rto »*?i ^3 dviSk r T»: • * " ' -: •• : ■ t ■ : • v: ityj? : vn\s-i tih) vnynu/ sb : 'ggD 1 ? n& ■»&$( : to ii/ottfi \s-i : n«? KXERCISE XLIX. •• : t - •■ - t • ..- t -*t • t : ■ -it: rwT nm« : nT3 nanm BiDsn mvi : irranaro t : - t t - I VT 1 t I v v " t : - : ** : t - : t 414 HEBREW GRAMMAR. ty : vaao n*\pb tei» *6 : "sao sin prn o ■ -: t t • 't - • v • ' t t : Dtf "•nt^i inn #*h ^k EXERCISE L. nttfKii ms ; n *ft ^is :ia nnbnb bm *bm T • T - V T • : nsfibu; ianm ^ tej; iste nam riki : nD^ t : : - : -t ; •■ • t : ■ •• • : v •• t v v t nsS *b n&y nnx naa dsi : ^:a ^ bsm iTa T T V T " T T - : T T - V T T : ■^ ^ : ai#» "i#$ lit; nb nj"rb# : D\*n ^ : d^b spnajtr nsni : v.fc on d^j/de EXERCISE LI. nnfctttt dk rwa nn\nj d» rusnKi *u nibs t : vv • t t : : • • v : v : t t : •• aiapp t#n iK-ii i^an : m,n r6in$n naginn naripnft uvn *y\&nj ^a : *h ^fy 1^5 "Okap? Ik Titf : ng¥R ?p5?81 ^1^ ?pSg : nirp r6naa : ibv 13 nfr EXERCISE LIE ibn na ^ m-iapi n^in mriRn rm hps 1 v v t : '• : - t -: t v I; • : w miR Da *ok p*i¥ "nj/tf ^ inna : r\i tv t t 1 v •.■••-:-• : ■ tfh m^Vi m ^"lp" 1 nfe' 1 : ^nrta ^i-id' 1 rriW> ns vt - : t • - : • •• - - : ■ ■ •• I - : nans on^a ^ ^ wottf : ^ana ■• - -: • • : : • • t t : * Or ic:, as it is sometimes anomalously found in The Bible. KEY TO THE EXERCISES. 415 EXERCISE LIU. t : - - t : •• — ; t : : • : I- ■ : ^m\s-i tit?) ^wj^t Kb : pinna nn^ri n^ njn nab : cnn:: *on v» j/t sbi : wva *:nan tt -tt: • • ^ -t : » T s : n:& J D^bttf nt ■spr^r *jw nnaana ns -it • : v ' • : - : • -: - ta - : : - EXERCISE LIV. : wi$te rra *yana rvbba : bran nov toa^a : Bhin ta ?tb -ia#n : bton jw nnm ana • * t • i v ' : v t • • - t * * t : n'0 ■»}£ -)&$ ng iBni 'bx i^nn : &$h 'any? ^ EXERCISE LV. : -in#n niby ti; iay ah» paim rab nro*i anbttfN Kb natf*i : "in#n nby ^ ^nbttf ia&i i - ; •■ - -: -.- - - t - t t • • " : - ia:m inpaHi v-isiv by b&*i . ^m-a ck «j EXERCISE LVI. ^i Dp*n : yj" sbi ny" tfb : tan ^ianan nab '••••- aa ato 41 6 HEBREW GRAMMAR. EXERCISE LVII. : DM^a lao* 1 ^ : lasna ^i YtfnrnK : v-nn t : v : - • v : - : • : - -: t t -. : nrrto t nam *mi : tew ts nva v^k "id&i t : t •• • : v t v:v I • ■• : t •• t : ^hi Tip EXERCISE LVIII. n» '•warn d^jjcm -i£ ; k rvWgn n# ^JHai mm myan n** ^ nnp : Dntopn -late niaysn : irttfiD dhS dpi : nnnp 1 ? ma $7 : nate 1 ? - • •.• t 'vt- r : I- : t t t • : : ww ittf»a W : y#ia"i laj/^in : w yttfin EXERCISE LIX. •■ t" : •• t : • t " 't • • : '•":• : tin tid «a "»a^vn : spayS main nnia • t - • t .... - i v : - : t : - t EXERCISE LX. te : d^jd ink iW^fii J Darina^ i^ nb n^n t • t t I v : - - V : " -: " : : - - : r\B0 i£5Dw omp te : nanaa nanvn ^ t t : v v • t -: t t t : ■ " • • ••*: • frjm -i& ; k ■sftpn nj : ins t^tfa "68 Dfl?D*»i : nnfra is># T^na *7l»ri : h$; vw KEY TO THE EXERCISES. 417 EXERCISE LXL : nbsbft rrttfM rrfjrttt rrteN nbra rim rva ... T . _ T . T T - .. . i T ^ : rhs'vn n^sa tivi p^ aitt kvo dik n#a • vt;- t>--i t'«t tt tt ■•;- toV 1 t Tins : 1*ni:i3 nc^ Was d 1 ?^ inks : •* t •• -: t : - •• t : t : •■ t t "rnx rni •g ^n D5 fp nD 1 ? 1 ? in^n nm na# TV • •• - - I •••• v •/ T T V T " T T Vui ninnv iSmrv d^ji 1 ? dp^i di 1 ?^ : Dm&6 ' t t : a- - : • t : - : lv v t t ■.•":• -: : • ■•• • t t -: - I- I T v: v ' t : - : *• t :'-: T t -; - T : T ■ tt: :- : I r •• : d-ivik ion oran« 13 ijdS i^ov ift -)t#n iin T T • T T -: " T • V T I : iE 1 ? nonaS Drarw 13 jS^q 0^1*7 lm* s^ t v : - : t t -: - v v t •• : ; • te : D0&2 wb^ DiTTita ^ n*yto Din 1 ? wnfcn t : - ■ t : t • : I -: : • li" 1 ^ "ona : Tiia EE&y "»3 cnn worn email 1 : •■ •' : ' t : t ; • v t : t : • v •• : vixn 2ip2 n:nn pn 13 id 1 ? mp I V T T Wvi t t I t t -It • (continued in the next exercise.) EXERCISE LXII. (continuation of the preceding.) EFaas : ^aft Tn«n nS ia twa*? wan d^jbs - - .... t V T .. I .. • T - " T - • - - inaiDfl ono BBhjgfc Dirqtf p 1a io^ na-n nyjog : iriEj/ 1 ? ^n oa pnfc^ -man nek* rw : tdti to nnzpfe : D?zp ^§ Tin *j#n pjg dj i># j/Dnri y^-i p DJT3* rria 1 ? nn law itftta cnu Rian ^ 1 " i t : t : • v -; - t •» t • TOL. II. E E 418 HEBREW GRAMMAR. E'T^ ^fan ^a bis : njtfp^ Dnniipfr Da on 1 ? rnnrj laajyir n'a : d.t^ napi ^ igpK ;a ^ ^niKfen in: : D^nn nis nosn i;/ laiyrv ni> on^n ^ ^a Diratf ib airn inj# Da : rn/jn |^i nj£ "^n aat^ H£, iinta ^ injno : nana inn** n\mn ^a inino : riBhio d.-6 ,n\nn Dniaa m»an "oi i£^ ]ir mris t t v t v : • t -: •••••':• • : : ' t -. - ny niaa or6na \nm Diraa 1 ? Dirfrj/a iis^ dpi Da ih ntogi h$$ ^aaa ibip vm jep ra : jinrjK Tft aaah s ;t ? n#s ^ asa^ v 1 ?;/ infra : D-nin^n naop - : • -; - - : • t t t : • : - - . vty itraa *]** : in^aE nb>a Dy napa Kin Da t't : - ' - t ; • t t • v'v - : vzjyjyD p¥# dj; via$/ ima; kS n^^ ^ Sagn EXERCISE LXIII. m "»a : ?pta ^at^a Tas a 1 ? nEkn ^a Dan rte ^con 1 ? nn D^oa n^ rw nan'? nm nitfn 1 ? Tax a 1 ? riE^ : K£>n ^ D^anai ra V nEfta nix#iDa nina?? ?p$ "lan? ^r\-f]v ni^a njftgni Kim T?na -\)£'m x¥3 fin : irjjn bnp r ^am? Mni cn^Diaa nnnon ^a niaan ^j/in njai rnxn a^a nzaco • t : * : ..- ; , t:t • - v t T ■" : ■ t nnraft ^oa : itnp niahna mnaK imn xh *oi •stiFD aaariD Dam an 1 ? afrrr naanS xanna tibi njgjp ]\^ 15 V»p|0 i^t ^a : Tj;a ^m ^7 rrj^jj : xan^i Kin diti; ^a j;t tish dji i 1 ? "n^ vaa 3^ n^i onia ty^a »1H iTm to 1 ? oan naai T T T T KEY TO THE EXERCISES. 419 ■»3 £ ; i3^ lffiD3 Bh« tf? "E : T»5 nn^ itSl pinna -)£ ; *o bnpn iinq n§3iv o nr njoi -,##3 13T : n^n^a ddi:b Dyn aaan^ r f : • ■ t tt ••-: (CONTINUED IN TIIE NEXT EXERCISE.) EXERCISE LXIV. (continuation of the preceding.) D^nn afti nnaa nana ^ tint^n n^nn nan •• - : • : t : t t : t I t - •„• v - -; •• • t t - - t : • T :t •• : - : ..»-.... rgwi tfjn : n^a ^ nclv kS moDi wva T -: t v t ^ t t v : - 1 • t : i/aon aft aicsn nnm ike ifcna vw nirs-i ... _ t": : I • » t 11331 Is "i^§ Wl mn Vnnn k 1 ? : d*t« ^30 n*o npnn na n^nnn ^ raatwn D^aKi d^k ... . i T . T T . ... ... T .. . _ . . T .. . . .... n&'Tn nx n^nnn rf? p-in : nai^n nnanafl T v t • v: V ' v v - t - T T : ina ns ji^nn ^inn tfn d^jk] D^rfrg rrcpfrsn ^o 1 ? nsnn n&nn s ;t ? : pa %nn ia nate aicsn nny^ nisnn 1 ? n:a^n man tihi niay rf? cva t t . ' t - : tt:- t;t : t : n^D? Kin n\T> ns 1 ? niaian tfw : r?Wa •• : v : • t t : t : - - he 1 ? : nsroi rm ■vaVi noni; D^nab nno it tt t • : - - "= - - : t:t • t : - •• ■ t f:t s 1 ? ns&i Tna-r 1 ? cscvn ty into vm* tih r - • - tt: tt : - ..... ^ T . I • - W£ ; yn^ to HPS? '? : irnps 1 ? D^rmn ^ inp 1 ? 15 ^p!?p^i n-\v) n;y H^? : ^- T i3n ' ^P^ 1 C V ns 1 ? p dsi : ^n* im»x t 7 ! i vim 1 ? d^» ikdjp t t ' •• • : •• -: t : • : it :' • • : i * E E 2 420 HEBREW GRAMMAR. ivx a^io n\T nato Dv>aa va nna"> ^ nr v -: • : v : • t t : •• • • - : • v vbsn bx aana sin nr n^ : iaia^a nta rs • •• - v t : v v t t : • t • . ■ • : i^y bv Taa irnv 1 ? ia ins nirm EXERCISE LXV. S^aa nha 1 ? to 1 ? nVi n-rn Tin 1 ? ^1*6 ^ T t : - : • • v : : t • t • v: v naaa "«a ^wn rm^ noan iai oa p : va *?ipa ftip ri^ni iai^? ai6a 15 |it&$ *ra;?ai n§ \$ D^n naT D?nafr pra : Tpn nnn bn^prt ddk nan *7aa n»a : Dj/ia "hbk ia tran sviva •• T " " T T " T " .. - . I .. , I . ^a fin iaa;n irwa'? fy£fr bh : p» aria jn nana V? n\n ia ^ w n^aai nms Saa ~ t - •: tt '« * 't' 7 tt: t- tt ia ip)W pnv infra Bh^ iro; n'a tihn j njn ta 1t# ntfjNfr rnrn phy : i 1 ? pny"; j/Dfr'n te n^pa »ini np/a yzri t^j : vSy ^fe^ na iTa» Djn itf*n nayb ona may ana ^i djj ^rm t : t t " • •• tt -: •• : t : b2'yn npi^p aico pfc : nygte a# n^ *toj jnai jrj! ^ Npn Sa :nnain yn&p aico pgi anp^ ift j/aai in ia j/ip xb p by nb#: rf? nirp ^[i-ia *p"j#S ft no* 1 vyf te : ftntj? : laaina dti 1 ?** a^a nny nna KEY TO THE EXERCISES. 121 EXERCISE LXVI. : D^jr Diny 12 t^» Sa *%h naS tzvn Sn rrp) *\) nvr ]^ trja r# di; n,nna n^n Sk isiy nasn inSiKiri nvp_ }a ia^a rn»? ^a mn inna 1^ jn &$) ^3 ^ ^i/v no : nng dj D?r\yn0 n,Ep bsw tihni n#aa ?|S nvn tf?n \S nS T»n» ns ft itjt "i^» in : It nnia Sj; t v * : ■ -.•-:■•• t - - - ■nasai ma ^a w nts^ n& ; s ^a ns 1t c^a&'n • : t : t : • : v - v s I - t • : - San ja jrhr t^tf n ? sn'pn Sk ' w#3 arnn D^Sn ran ^a nS Sa*p 12 T&tya nnnn Ski ira ■ t -: • - 'at - ' v • t : - : • - : t : niEa ncfrn Stf : hSd' D^aSs aS c:i nn*n S^an - ; - I •• - ; *t; " -: tt- • • nvfti nvi» onasin crsai ma: iaSa «Sn tttk - v t : t : - • t • - • - - : t t •.. -: I ; ■ nbSn TbSi D^an nanS nan Sk : teDS" 1 kS : . t : ■ t -; ■• : • : T - I- T" kveS jnri \v^ aio np.S n,S n\T ^12) vnhfn ■»a T^PT "nan natcto Sk : mj/n HpiM ^»a in ninS nm» D3 nbSn dhbi cnaso nri en dj *- - t t - - : ■ '■• •• T ~; • : t : tosh Sy nan ytfnSi noan EXERCISE LXVII. ntfa yn nnx naSS ?kb mn n« aw Sa Bhva Tnotf Sy dp^ p t^ ^d inia r^rr kS . . T t : - '■• ' •- • t t' -t Sk : RNi nSjN rf?n ia inni icgta pg n#$ : Taix cnaa idm nsi San *yan S^a «n tdji a^n^ ^a ^» Sa ^:a ins^a ittfaa n^nj^a c ;> by na i-a^S : ia pog »S ^\sai }iK?S p^noa A'22 HEBREW GRAMMAR. : nD^ai rVriK aeon ^a nNfrVi aia sb j/t ^ 3 tjajp ?l£ 5 ?>a n# i^n n$j jt/hr #•>»£ pnnn ty "^na jwfi ni.^n pni ^a nyr ^^m pi V53 : naiDi npp Di^ ^35 tftfn %y mairai D^na nsTn m^am D->a ^n van^a naya T#ya - : ■ : -: t : • T \ -: T - v "t t • ~ ■: : wtfiii dj/ ^Toa pai mara niaa ps ^aa : ni.T jin inifega ^ ^» jiaa naa^ i^na dj a^n : n^y mina mm D^Dan nana Dv>;/nn : n^i I : "» - : t • t : • t -: •• : • : ' - : • t : "wann ni.T n^Tai *\±rhv ^afoa a^¥ vm •• t : t : - : • : 'ay t : ••. •• : : I- • - t : : ina^in DTaa ran nn bzv vxi onn noann ... . . . 1 .. _ . . . T T . T _ hy_ prnpn nnaia^i *]aa ^/aa natpjpn a\n n-£rnn Dipp ^1 ia-na f »] &£] tey b£ : pirip ^a iflai^a ^ cos 1 ? ldn 1 ? ^h t#i Na; xh i^^n ria^ia' 1 niaa innnw rbv ni.T pm na nom ^n : t • -: - : t t t : ■ •• : - -: - t - : D"m mo Tan \ibp ni^n tyn i^ ni.TD s a • - : V t t : I It ■•■ T " t t : DiTfego in^y: fapnrn d^v ^8 noyri ni.T nrip : itey ^aft ip^n nn nja-u'a -1^ n&y ^a t^ ^afc tea nrw nto tikvd nm ibxb ia^a no^ T T-~T "TT ••• " • : ft 2-\x) rnan ^a j/t tih) D^n n$-ji$ Da •a^p laaJT in^i ft "i#k *?a ng 2\jg\ cojt/p nty naao ttfiDri bx ^nafta Da ?jrvnaa nb# : ip^n T9J T1^ r *$ ♦ TTV KEY TO THE EXERCISES. 423 EXERCISE LXVIII. iWa ^i iafc^a Waa ^ "ity« Bh»n nate t t : ■*: : • -: ■ T •• : - vvtfs 21 ia uj/' 1 s ;i ? i^» i^kpi nttfK : ipkn & t t : -: - -: ■ i •• : »~ : • bmn niiT nana : vrtS»a nbao irwT«in *ft warn . . T . : • t : • • t t -: - ^na \ja riEi^ : wd^ pm rma rfzi/ai p*nv ||. ... . . . _ . . . _ | T _. . .- ; V T i ' * ~ -)EKh h$ : -lnsr. ^ sprra dW?i sprfrjj ntyn .. _ . _ | .. T . .... | v ~- ... _; - aia hjdi ^rfta n» ■ngK 13 yva n» -ibs st 7 raSa wiw/ oa an ^■^ i2s ; n ^ : nrinsa ^ fwr • T • - t -: - t • v : • ^ :jn jhk tf? coiB# "?a obifa -i#jn pn vfewoa ib d-?&6 nim wa sin bp: d*t« niD3 i f ji iD3 niabn nana^n mv K'aa ^ : varnai -v : - t : - t • TT : * t t s • : mico ova ">3 : irmrwa unv Bh» ty7j/o b^ t : • • -: - : : t • .... - T . niabn ds tk ovai nay ittte rrijnn ronatstfi : t > v -: t t t : - t • -late wi ^ nam rf? ^ liw nbr : water. .... I ... _ ... ■• : - : • t t v t • man -irw vg c3 ns.n noian by ^n nns vt- "-: • - - tt-:t - - t " man ova vbn: •>» "E nrrnia ^t ria vopa v t - : - : • • t -: - t t t t : nhi] p TJa? ">a : biK# oy nngi rna \p ix i-iiasa ?pbi/ man n« film mv tfbn ifra ba : t : • v t v t - t : t ■ -: t t t ibayi ib;^ ona ijjjn f# ^3 : roan nio ^ ^a tory p ma irrna'n pv nwr onni p»b dts ^t fyb *?3 ^3 : sa -riTi ^h tin dts* tt":- t ■ t :'•• TT niab niat^na a^ ; n dik *ivftn : vt ib^a natoa t t t •• : t t -: t v -: - 424 HEBREW GRAMMAR. naian anfci nniD svd' 1 noan t&hn ^ : heh t : : t t t : t ■■ • t ••■ : - : t v : : - t I •• - t \, -: - — " bx nma unaaai n 1 ?^ dot nWn rrirbn ^ T •• i - : ■ t:tt t tt" :- ^ - : • : t ■ t : t v *• ; I •• t : • - '/,:•:- r iy n^n? pann ]a ipgj Dipoa nra : fr»njj ??Sn« nj/pm : nana n^vm nmnn n^» todnji • : t t t : 1- t : t t : t t t t : - - t v •■ I : t v: v dji : w*n w hi vbr\ m'v ^na-rai nSiaaa - . iv- •• : t 1 • t t t ••::-: t : • : DtfaaS tfaa \sv^ n^aay nnm n^»va idh^ spaa t : - : v : : • t t -: - - : T • : v: v » v t n^D^n non^i anno dev W? dh^i tt 1 ? nn\m t : • : •••-:-; •• t •• : v t ; < : t : t : : mp ova EXERCISE LXIX. ^ai pais ^isn n« *na D^anan at^ \vby bx iiSD *ni3i nzitn niiT ph^ : oaso -iv 1 nvta nato : t : t ; • t : ' v v •- - t v -: jjrwiDi nri; DTfta p« "pnj^ai iriDa mv pa D^po sin ra nnai iianai vaa 'y/ba Wo sim 1 *-: t:* t--: •• ; ni« pa h^yi inaia^ai d^/ ^5 Kin : Dip^ te ^91 ^ >vw~)b P1V r^ NE*? 1 ? ninco pa ytfrb *?a iniST: *6n :^o^i ^ in^nn ^ai vninwii rrjfrn ^ by pnai Ian*?"" n^y i^1»i rvhinn inniaa dvj; nap? ^p : nna s^ orj© nb^ ^p ivr njpn ^n i 1 ? iin -lino nfr;/ ntfs vni^aai N t t v -; T ; : • ; -lKte vniN L ^ lan noi vfewe ibi: no : n^nn • -: t : . • - - t -: - : t - t • ^a yi:) px onoi ^pinS ]\^ Dirfe; : n^i ^a KEY TO THE EXERCISES. 425 : pir v? vnictym rbpvnb nmm *\pb noDnn ^b I • T • t ••. -: - : v It : • : T '- : t : t - innnx ni yitin ow ivp sin no cnx pi .... ... W _ ; . T _ ). _ y T | .. pnuoi ftnp ids |n : njrn |3 nytfzn ^-inpi n^ Din in»m laps D^otfn p : izsrp rib vn:^i -: I v t t : • - t - I •• - ■ t : n-pi vnv ca nj] p»3 Dino N3V p : v^i - -t: v - I • - : t t : I •• t : - : wd) v% by] urn v$ ^ it?! 1 ? H"]n; EXERCISE LXX. in^ "lin"? nil p?© 1 ? Dpb;n ni.T ^9 D^ico xb vTDn nao^i it-p inmnji inpny : lTria^ T ._. ._. ._ T . It:- t ::• niir w : man" 1 in^nnn ^ w fcfti W 1 : D"»DBh tna ^ im'n ,i^^ aafw ^ mm im^rr • t t : I v %• - : t ; • • t : - : - : pa npn ps ini nrr^i isn nbi: nirp nnm \3 vst 1 by nimp^ vyy : ray "TJ3D ipd: nan d^s "»3 : lftbi/D nasi Toms b^k 1 ? 1^ n'nji b^ inn^ ipiv v'wyn bi coatfa ^trioi mrrt t: t:- I : t T ■C; _ t t : ■ ••: t- ons\n ns snn sin : ps ^npa t^rino vcoatfc T T T V T T I V T " ; I- • T t ; : 1^53 nijoi i3^ nivi:b3 Snarp 1 ? inrw n^^n© in p&m n#N ns iaru c ; \st tt^s ^ab msni D*nn ) : - » -: v t • • t • •• : • v t - : • - - in: onM$ E3 D^n d^di nnp^ cste : ft -in:r n#N3 rh»i ?tt n 1 ?^ on« p nnsi v>^ DvftN.n ...... ..... 1 :T _ . TT 1 ... t - : tt : • v: t nnp Dippg 7b$b ? I??^3 "ibka "*£ : 1(^93 n 3$fi T2P ^d ra : D'ijbjjn ^9^9 sans Dtth nrps ::' ian s ;; 7.n : in?^ Dinaa ^ n'pp: ^ v:a^ ^^ 426 HEBREW GRAMMAR. . • ^ — — t • • ■ •• tt •*-;—: t — : - • v: t •• : • • t t ■• • t • : . ' . . • tv I v t t : • ■ ■ v: t •• : • ... hzn niipiDi fix ^??k niK&ari nu^rn D^ni3|n ^ P5j ^d :toK pn Diva irrj^ip ihdot ivirn nam >6 -ifca w : ntf n^^n t^ K3 ,) ••di ovi^n v : • t t • •• - ~ • : - t • . t ■•di ^n tea 110^3 ^ vkro prr *6 -ifca nSl 1311 ^vi ,) toaafoi dtp ^di d^Ii/d irv-q "O in-?nn ADDENDA. LETTER V. (Page 18 of Vol. I.) Some of the letters of the Alphabet occur sometimes in a lengthened form, as — ^ for K I for 1 -| for 1 n for n H for b □ for D The letter V , here called Tsadik, should, perhaps, rather be called Tsadi, as Kimchi, Buxtorf, and Ben Zev call it. To those who puzzle themselves to find out a meaning for the name of each letter, the appellation Tsadik would possibly be the more acceptable of the two. LETTER XVII. § 8 (Page 93 of Vol. I.). The b takes sometimes a Euphonic Kawmets ; as [Gen. i. 6], " And let it be making separation ( D^7 D^D P3 ) hetween water and water." where D\p7 stands for D?C? ; — and so [Lament, i. 1], DD 1 ? nrpr) she hath become tributary, where Dfch stands for DD 1 ?? 1 LETTER XXI V. In Exercise x. (page 105 of Vol. i.) the passage [Exod. xi. 6] nVij n?y> nrvm t 'tt : t : t : T T : • t v -: occurs, where we have the Masculine Pronoun in £3 4;2^ HEBREW GRAMMAR. agreeing with the Feminine Noun HjJJJV • Such anoma- lies as this must doubtless be perplexing to the Hebrew student at first, but it will be well to become reconciled to them in time, as they are of not un frequent occurrence in The Bible. Thus we find [Gen. xxxii. 9], — 1,12m nnsn ron^n % w& Kia; d« T • : - - T Y-:-- ." T T If Esau shall come to the one company, and shall smite it ; where the Masculine Affix in in?!"!"! refers to the Noun n:np which the Feminine Numeral nnx shows to be here Feminine. LETTER XLVIII. (Page 46 of Vol. II.) P S. (e). The Demonstrative Pronoun TX\ is sometimes given pleona'stical'ly after 7112 and nab . as, ■«» ^p"? ^711? n| TO [Gen. xxvii. 20] Hoiv hast thou hastened to find, my son? (i.e., hoio quickly hast thou found!) and ^f? bHBfril HT nipb [J ud . xiii. 18], Why shouldest thou ask for my name? P.S. (f). As I may perhaps hereafter have no opportunity of speaking again of the Numbers of Nouns, I may mention here that we sometimes find the mark of the Dual affixed to Nouns having the Feminine Plural termination Hi — ; as DMShn "p2 [I sa j. xx ii. n] between the two walls, from TOn a wall. Sometimes the Dual mark is affixed to numerals to denote so many fold ; as BNTO?tp [Gen. iv. 24] sevenfold, DW2T1H [2 Sam. xii. 6] fourfold. SUPPLEMENT TO PARADIGMS.— Page 371 of Vol. II. ?P!pM ) So we find *|3Dt2>3 [Deut. vi. 8] on thy (m.) Dp'npDi > lying down, D35P8J3 [Levit. xxiii. 39] on P"1p^3 ) your (in.) gathering, where the Dagesh in the third radical seems to show that the form is in each case borrowed from the Infinitive Absolute (viz., 22$ ADDENDA. 429 and ^DX respectively), and not from the Infinitive Con- structive ; for since, in the latter case, the Kawmets beneath the first radical would be a Hyp nj^31jl Slight Vowel, the second radical could not then legitimately have a quiescent Shva/i, and, consequently, the third radical could not have its Euphonic Dayesh. INDEX OF TEXTS* REFERRED TO, OR EXPLAINED, IN THIS WORK. [Independently of the Hebrew Exercises, which are entirely taken from The Bible.] Genesis. Genesis. A j. r~ -\ r " "s Chapter. Verse. Vol. Page. Chapter. Verse. Vol. Page. i. 1 i. 44 (bis), 46 (bis), ii. 2 i. 419. 125. 4 ii. 67, 68. ii. 49, 57. 6 i. ' 213. 2 i. 45 (bis), 46, 55 ii. 132. (bis). 13 i. 170. ii. 50. 17 ii. 22, 95. 3 i. 220,417,420. 19 ii. 153, 161 ii. 93, 96, 138. 20 ii. 42. 4 i. 46. 23 i. 122. ii. 92, 93, 158. ii. 198. 5 i. 50, 143. 25 i. 92. ii. 92, 93, 230. iii. 1 ii. 34. 6 ii. 159. 3 i. 210. 7 i. 45, 55, 242. ii. 95. 11 i. 134. 4 ii. 70. ii. 59, 94. 5 i. 223. 12 i. 46. ii. 78, 124. 14 i. 45. 6 i. 418. ii. 125. ii. 8, 10. 15 ii. 125. 8 ii. 54. 20 ii. 94. 10 ii. 66. 22 i. 420. 12 ii. 55. ii. 20. 15 ii. 159. 24 ii. 94. 16 ii. 8. 26 i. 47. 17 ii. 153. ii. 94. 18 ii. 125. 27 i. 55. 21 ii. 81. 28 i. 45. 22 ii. 271. 30 ii. 15. iv. 2 i. 533. 31 i. 135, 144. ii. 49, 71. ii. 30. 4 i. 417. * The Books of The Bible are here arranged according to their order in the HEBREW. INDEX OF TEXTS. 431 Genesis. > ^ Chapt er. Verse Vol. Pa R e. Chapter. ■-> V..I. Page. iv. 5 ii. 30, 61. xi. 7 ii. 101. 8 ii. 9. xii. 1 i. 508, 512 9 i. 201. ii. II. ii. •1, 78. 2 i. 00. 10 ii. 58. ii. 102. 1 1 ii. 124. 3 ii. 120. 23 ii. 198. 1 i. 306. 25 ii. 37, 42. 12 ii. 12 1. 26 ii. 40. 13 ii. 125. v. 1 i. 198. 1G ii. 156. 4 ii. 53. xiii. 10 ii. 150. 4—21 i. 1 16. 12 ii. 59. 8 ii. 138. xiv. 10 i. 89. 23 ii. 53. ii. 31. vi. 3 ii. 125. 16 i. 325. 5 i. 418. XV. 2 ii. 78. y ii. 322, 338. 10 ii. 57. 10 i. 113. 13 ii. 157. 11 ii. 50. 17 ii. 21. 14 ii. 125. xvi. 1 i. 132. 15 ii. 13. ii. 156. 16 i. 56. 8 ii. 78. 17 i. 106. 14 ii. 56. 18 ii. 125. xvii. 2 ii. 31. 21 ii. 126. 17 ii. 273. 22 ii. 111. 20 ii. 8. vii. 4 ii. 126. xviii. 1 i. 418. 19 ii. 31. 4 ii. 27. viii. 1 ii. 7,23. 6 i. 220, 306. 5 i. 534. 7 ii. 81. 7 i. 294. 12 ii. 10, 273. ii. 160. 18 i. 92. 10 i. 1 II. 21 ii. 3. 13 i. 325. 22 ii. 234. ii. 38. 25 ii. 6. 15 i. 210. 27 i. 17. 17 ii. 126. 33 ii. 53. 22 i. 93. xix. 8 i. 152. ix. 1 ii. 17. 9 ii. 70. 5 ii. 23. 17 ii. 56. G ii. 57. 20 i. 2(10. 13 ii. 126. ii. 163. 11 ii. 56, 59, 126. 23 ii. 21. 15 ii. 17, 42, 126, 158. 21— i. 536, •"'.'! 7 16 ii. 42, 126. 21 ii. 51. 20 ii. 34. 26 ii. 158. 21 i. 419, 422. XX. 2 ii. 8. 25 ii. 32. 5 ii. 8, 39. 27 i. 420. 6 ii. 43. ii. 103, 105. 9 ii. 70. xi. 4 i. 20 1. 13 i. 152, 153. ii. 01, 161. ii. 8. 7 i. 465, 533. xxi. 24 i. 2 11. 43.2 HEBREW GRAMMAR, Geni SSIS. Page. Genesis. X Chapter. Verse. Vol Chapter. Verse. Vo: Page. xxi. 14 i. 417. XXX. 42 ii. 133, 156. 16 ii. 95. xxxi. 6 ii. 60. 17 i. 210. 10 i. 418. xxii. 2 i. 159. 28 ii. 65. 16 ii. 44. 30 i. 205. xxiii. 7 ii. 52. 42 ii. 76, 81. 11 i. 506. xxxii. 4 i. 210. 13 ii. 134. 5 i. 276. 17 ii. 13. 6 ii. 20. xxiv. 5 i. 536, 537. 11 i. 90, 239. 7 i. 209. ii. 142. 13 ii. 55. 13 i. 308. 14 i. 160. 15 i. 143. 26 i. 461. 16 i. 143. 28 ii. 313. 18 i. 176. 55 i. 145. xxxiii. 4 i. 505. ii. 54. xxxiv. 11 i. 200. 58 ii. 4. 29 i. 383. 61 i. 30G. ii. 229. 65 i. 171. XXXV. 18 ii. 163. XXV. 16 ii. 45. xxxvi. 1 i. 171. 28 ii. 49. xxxvii. 3 ii. 80, 81, 230 32 i. 216. 4 ii. 153. xxvi. 3 ii. 97. 8 ii. 5. 5 ii. 49. 11 ii. 49. 13 ii. 160. 16 i. 534. 27 ii. 7. 22 ii. 95. 29 ii. 72. 26 i. 58. xxvii. 1 ii. 10. 28 i. 391. 20 i. 220. 29 i. 325, 524. 22 ii. 34. 33 ii. 70. 34 ii. 68. xxxix. 6 ii. 16. 36 ii. 56. 9 i. 163. 38 i. 90, 91, 422. 14 i. 210. xxviii. 12 ii. 53. 23 i. 524. 13 i. 160. xl. 10 i. 140. 14 i. 55. 12 i. 140. 16 i. 524. 14 ii. 61. 17 i. 524. 15 ii. 69, 76. 2C ,21 ii. 128, 130. 23 ii. 81. xxix. 2 ii. 77. xli. 1 i. 216. 3 ii. 77, 132. 3 ii. 53. 5 ii. 5, 13, 78. 23 i. 133. 6 ii. 39. 26 i. 135. 8 i. 35. 33 i. 420. 9 ii. 53. 35 i. 200. 10 i. 455. 37 ii. 61. 16 ii. 156. 40 ii. 19. 26 i. 203. 45 i. 55. XXX. 2 i. 417. 57 ii. 162. ii. 61. xlii. 1 ii. 6G. 25 i. 307. 9 i. 153. 30 ii. 268. 13 ii. 40. INDEX OF TEXTS. 43-S Gen ESIB. ' -\ Verse. Vol Page. Exodus. Chapter. Chapter. Verse. Vol • Puge. xlii. 16 i. 90, 210. ii. 6 ii. 153. 18 i. 96, 170. 12 i. •J 1 7, 524 19 ii. 14, 31U. 14 i. 202. 22 ii. 5, 22. 17 ii. 144. 28 i. 161. 21 ii. 45. 35 ii. 56. iii. 2 i. 242. 37 ii. 57. ii. 343. xliii. 2 ii. Ml. 5 i. 256. 10 i. 171. ii. 55. ii. 76. iv. 1 ii. 52, 60. 11 ii. 27. 3 ii. 157. 15 i. 58. v. 13 i. 479. 16 i. 161. vi. 3 i. 418. 18 ii. 37, 234. ii. 36. xliv. 2 ii. 15. 7 i. 211. 4 i. 308. vii. 2 i. 210. 8 i. 203. 19 ii. 158. xlv. 4 i. 159. 20 ii. 7. 10,1 328. ix. 20 ii. 17. 16 ii. 13. xi. 7 i. 162. xlvi. 3 i. 294. ii. 158. 4 ii. 54, 70. xii. 4 ii. 321. xlvii. 9 ii. 17. 11 i. 211. 10 ii. 49. 17 i. 211. 13 ii. 155. 18 i. 145. 16 i. 294. 19 ii. 7. 18 i. 461. 34 ii. 160. 28 i. 418. xiii. 10 ii. 20. xlviii. 1 ii. 56. 13 ii. 59. 7 ii. 40. xiv. 3 i. 210. 11 i. 395. 9 ii. 21. 14 ii. 65, 268. 10 ii. 21,51. 15 ii. 71. 21 ii. 117. 19 ii. 79. 29 ii. 7. xlix. 1 ii. 313. 31 ii. 21, 60. 8 ii. 40, 197. XV. 1 ii. 78, 109. 11 i. 214 (bis). 2 i. 508. ii. 22, 182, 227. 5 i. 136. 16 ii. 197. ii. 9. 19 ii. 197. 6 i. 41. 21 i. 240. 6—8 ii. 184. 22 ii. 53, 316. 9, 10 ii. 176. 25 ii. 35, 323. 9 i. 508. 1. 24 i. 197. ii. 48. ii. 69. 10 i. 508. 25 i. 199. 13 i. 15,16 ii. 55. 182. Exodus. „A_ 16 i. 162. ■~( 17 ii. 316. i. 6 ii. 21. 21 i. 327. 10 i. 294. xvi. 16 ii. 44. 22 i. 56. 20 ii. 116. ii. 4 i. 294, 295. xvii. 12 ii. 53. VOL. 11. F F 434 HEBREW GRAMMAR. Exodus. A Chapter. Verse. Vol. Page. xviii. 26 i. 209. ii. 141. xix. 3 ii. 51. 12 ii. 70. 13 i. 294. ii. 70. XX. 3 ii. 156. 3- —16 ii. 95. 8 i. 199. 10 i. 146. 11 i. 325. xxi. 4 i. 92, 122 ii. 60, 156 11 ii. 30. 15 i. 92. 28 i. 106. ii. 18. xxii. 23 ii. 7. 24 ii. 23. xxiii. 10, 1 ii. 99. XXV. 31 i. 464. xxvii. 3 ii. 59. xxviii. 2 i. 134. 17 ii. 17. xxix. 40 i. 145. xxxii. 9 ii. 16, 21. 32 ii. 155. 34 i. 211. xxxiii. 9 ii. 133. 11 ii. 232. xxxiv. 7 ii. 70. XXXV. 5 ii. 1 53, Numbers. Leviticus. A. iv. 6. ii. 312. 17 ii. 312. 26 ii. 232. ix. 22 ii. 116, 117 X. 3 i. 461. ii. 191. xi. 23 i. 105. xiii. 37 ii. 232. xvi. 29 i. 145. xviii. 27 i. 171. xix. 18 ii. 9, 330. 28 ii. 325. XX. 9 i. 416. xxiv. 10,11 i. 132. 16 i. 146. XXV. 12 ii. 232. 21 i. 394. 39 ii. 60. Chapter. Verse. Vol. Page. vi. 12 i. 144. vii. 13 ii. 15. 78 i. 147. 89 i. 224. ii. G7. ix. 10 ii. 77. 18 ii. 77. 20 ii. 142. xi. 12 i. 91, 96. 15 ii. 71, 144. 31 ii. 24. xii. 1 ii. 54. 13 ii. 320. xiii. 18 i. 91. ii. 21. 19 i. 95. xiv. 16 i. 294. 22 ii. 31. 35 i. 462. XV. 5 i. 145. 21 ii. 232. 31 ii. 69. xvi. 15 i. 420. xvii. 28 i. 465 (bis). ii. 5. XX. 5 ii. 155. xxi. 1 i. 422. 4 i. 459. 12 ii. 142. xxii. 4 ii. 14. 6 i. 162. 33 i. 202, 537, 538 xxiii. 7 ii. 164. 10 i. 145. 12 i. 162. 19 ii. 7, 157, 317. 21 ii. 182. 23 ii. 231. 24 ii. 231. 25 ii. 71. xxiv. 3 i. 244. ii. 22. 5 —7 ii. 185. 17 ii. 48. XXV. 17 ii. 68. xxvi. 55 ii. 18. xxvii. 17 ii. 321. XXX. 12 ii. 53. Deuteronomy. ii. 1 i. 117. iii. 11 ii. 6, 15. iv. 10 ii. 72. [ii i ii aOHOMl . Chapter. Verse Vol. Page. iv. 33 i. IIS. 42 ii. 157. V. 1 ii. 21, 140 vi. .'i —9 ii. 122. 18 i. 91. vii. 8 ii. 10, 72. 12 ii. 79. viii. 10 i. 507. ii. 3. IX. 7 i. 201. 15 i. 117. 21 i. 461. xi. i. 533. 13 ii. 56. 15 ii. 8. 22 i. 236. ii. 72. xii. 20 ii. 104. xiv. 22 ii. 69. xvi. 1 ii. 68. 18 ii. 272. 20 ii. 32. xvii. 8 ii. 159. xix. G ii. 232. xxi. 18 ii. 156. XXV. 1 ii. 65. xxviii. 43 ii. 274. 68 ii. 21. xxxi. 4 ii. 80. 18 ii. 69. xxxii. 1- —4 ii. 186. 4 ii. 19. 10 i. 512. ii. 84, 100. 18—2 ii. 194. 42 ii. 196. xxxiii. 1 i. 90. xxxiv. 8 i. 462. JOSHUJ i. i. ~~b i. 102. 7 ii. 308. 9 ii. 6. 18 i. 1 10. X. 12 ii. 78. 24 i. 244. ii. 3. xxi. 42 i. 325. xxiv. 15 ii. 269. JlDGES. .. A i. 28 ii. 01. NDEX OF TEXTS. .1 t i . , * /* "N Chapti i . . Ym! Pa iii. 12 ii. 1. iv. I'D ii. 21 ii. 110, 117, 20! v. 3 ii. 177. 7 i. 163. 10 ii. 10. 23 ii. 71. 25 ii. 177. vi. 17 i. 163. 19 ii. 57, 153. 20 i. 171. vii. ■_'.-. ii. !). viii. 1 i. 364. 3 i. 239. 21 ii. 55. ix. 8 i. 199. 10 i. 244. 11 i. 130. 38 i. 197. xi. 25 ii. 31. xiii. 17 ii. 11. ii. 17,. 19 i. 417. ii. 54. 20 i. 117. 23 ii. 346. xiv. 8 i. 325. 14 ii. 200. 18 i. 134 (bis), 175 ii. 200 (bis). XV. 4 i. 417. 10 ii. 200. xvii. 3 i. 212. ii. 1 11. xix. 13 i. 294. XX. 15 i. 243. _ ■» r ^ 1 Samuel. i. 10 ii. 310. 11 ii. 22, 12 ii. 05. 11 ii. 0,0. 22- -2 1 ii. [89. ii. 1 ii. 181. 3 ii. 0!). 9 i. 102. 24 ii. 157. 27 i. 394. ix. 15 ii. 1 ">!>. 10 ii. 311. x. 13 i. 172. F I 2 435 436 HEBREW GRAMMAR. 1 Samuel. r~ N Chapter. Verse. Vol. Page. X. 14 i. 418. 24 i. 420. xii. 17 i. 210. xiii. 13 ii. 22. xiv. 29 ii. 271. 30 ii. 6. XV. 22 ii. 58, 201. 33 ii. 201. xvi. 12 i. 50G. 18 ii. 14. xvii. 15 ii. 160. 47 i. 307. 50 ii. 155. xviii. 8 i. 143. xix. 11 i. 533. 23 ii. 160. 24 ii. 56. XX. 25 i. 306. 28 i. 205. xxi. 5 ii. 14. 16 ii. 5, 66. xxii. 8 ii. 318. XXV. 22 ii. 42. 27 ii. 54. xxviii. 3 ii. 7. 15 ii. 61. 2 Samuel. i. 21 ii. 16, 279. 22- —24 ii. 189. ii. 5 i. 240. iii. 6 ii. 159. 11 ii. 72. 30 ii. 9. iv. 6 ii. 269. 11 i. 133. vi. 22 i. 446. ix. 2 ii. 38. X. 12 i. 243. xi. 23 ii. 322. xii. 9 ii. 57. xiii. 3 ii. 34. 5 i. 420. ii. 66. 8 ii. 59. 18 ii. 77. 39 ii. 37. xiv. 2 ii. 66. 5 ii. 30. 14 ii. 76. 20 ii. 34. xvi. 13 ii. 59. 2 Samuel. . A Chapter. Verse. Vol. Page. xvi. 20 ii. 161. xvii. 10 i. 437. xviii. 22 i. 354. 25 ii. 160. xix. 14 i. 276. XX. 9 i. 276. 10 i. 197. xxii. 37 i. 543. 41 i. 269. 1 Kin ,. A ss. ii. iii. 16- -28 167. vi. 38 i. 145. viii. 27 ii. 32, 76. ix. 8 ii. 309. xii. 4 i. 446. XV. 5 i. 162. xvii. 15 ii. 54. 18 ii. 46. xviii. 17 ii. 68. 30 ii. 320. xix. 11 ii. 24, 64. XX. 18 ii. 51. 22 i. 243. 27 i. 243. xxii. 4 i. 153. 17 ii. 321. 2 Kings. A i. < i. 13 533. ii. 10 i. 242. ii. 65, 343 iv. 19 ii. 45. 25 i. 171. 29 ii. 270. 32 i. 242. 41 i. 294. v. 26 i. 90. vi. 5 ii. 18, 322 13 i. 534. 21 ii. 327. ix. 1 ii. 270. X. 15 ii. 322. xi. 4 i. 418. 14 ii. 45. xix. 7 i. 211. xxiii. 13 ii. 13. Ibaiaii. A ii. i. 3 177. 11 ii. 140. 18 ii. 271. INDEX OF TEXTS. 437 Isaiah. Isaiah. * * r \ Chapter. Veise. Vol. ! Chapt jr. Verse. V.,1. Page. iii. 15 ii. 46. lii. 14 ii. 309, 336. 17 ii. 197. 14, 15 ii. 311. 23 ii. 272. 15 ii. 310, 337, 343. iv\ 1 ii. 64. liii. 1 ii. 301, 315. v. 7 ii. 197. 1,2 ii. 338. 9 ii. 154. 1—3 ii 297. vi. 2 i. 10.-). 1—7 ii. 333. ii. 110. 2 ii. 316. 4 ii. 110. 2,3 ii. 302. 9 ii. 71. 3 ii. 317, 339. .10 ii. 320. 4 ii. 318, 340. vii. 14 i. 366. 4,5 ii. 303. ix. 5 ii. 82, 97, 123. 4—9 ii. 298. xii. 3 ii. 14. 5 ii. 319,341. xvii. 12 i. 415. 6,7 ii. 321, 312. xviii. 2 i. •164. 6—8 ii. 301. xix. 3 i. 465. 8 ii. 322, 344. xxi. 7 ii. 274. 8—12 ii. 334. 12 i. 415. 9, 10 ii. 305, 346. xxiii. 8 ii. 273. 9 ii. 325. xxiv. 2 i. 135. 10 ii. 308, 327. 3 i. 437. 10—12 ii. 299. 9 i. 161. 11 ii. 306, 328, 348. 19 ii. 70. 12 ii. 307, 330, 349. xxvi. 10 i. 197. liv. 1 i. 465. xxvii. 11 i. 294. lv. 1 i. 56. xxxiii. 1 i. 465. 6 ii. 178. 7 i. 415. 9 ii. 143. xxxiv. 4 i. 438. 10, 11 ii. 32. XXXV. 6 i. 145. ii. 310. ii. 85. Ix. 1 ii. 183. xxxvii. 21 i. 198. 21 ii. 324. czxviii. 1 ii. 30. lxiii. 1 i. 175. 15 i. 175. ii. 15. 19 ii. 32. 1,&C. ii. 166. xl. 3 ii. 111. Ixiv. 4 ii. 1 1 6. 26 ii. 231. lxv. 17 i. 2 11. xli. 4 25 ii. ii. 80. 312. 21 ii. 160. xlii. 1 ii. 308. JeHKMIAH. 24 i. 171. X 1" \ xliii. 4 i. 163. i. 12 ii. 65. 25 ii. 39. ii. 11 ii. 163. xliv. 23 i. 465. 31 i. 91. xlvi. 8 i. 489. ii. 21. xlvii. 13 i. 162. v. 22 ii. 6. xlix. 3 i. 160. vii. 32 ii. 151. 1. 8 ii. 232. viii. 22 ii. 5. 10 i. 201. xiv. 5 ii. 68. 26 i. 281. xxii. 14 ii. 3 1 2. li. 12 ii. 45, 56. 15 ii. 80. 19 ii. 45. xli. 5 ii. 15. Hi. 13 ii. 308, 335. xliv. 29 i. 315. 13- -15 ii. 297, 300, 332. xlix. 35 ii. 64. 438 HEBREW GRAMMAR. EZEKIEL. > Chapter. Verse. Vol. Page. i. 2 i. 144. 14 n. 160. 11. 2 ii. 67. XI. 16 n. 27. xvi. 5 i. 243. XIX. 3 n. 59. xxn. 5 n. 275. XXIV. 3 i. 294. XXVI, 2 l. 438. 7 ii. 32. XXV111. 10 n. 346. XXXI. 6 n. 20. XXX11. 32 i. 242. XX XVI. 35 i. 171. xli. 7 i. 465. HOSEA. XIV. 4 7 i. ii. Amos. 220. 316. 481. vi. 8 i. 395. vii. 14 ii. 157. Jonah. * V i. 7 i. 176. iii. 3 ii. 31. 10 ii. 229. Nahcm. >■ r > ii. 11 i. 438. 11 AT.AKKUK. A r •> iii. 3 n. 178. 11 ii. 37. Haggai. ii. 8 i. 152. Zechariah. i. 9 u. 15. iii. 9 l. 1 ().->. iv. 7 n. 31. xiii. 4 i. 472. Malaciii. A- Chapter. Verse. Vol. Page, i. 2 i. 276. iii. 6 ii. 146. Psalms. 1. ii. 111. iv. v. vi. vn. ix. 6 ii. 2, 3 ii. 5 ii. 6 ii. 7 ii. 8 ii. 10 i. 12 ii. 3 i. 5 ii. 9 ii. 7 1 i. ii. i. i. ii. ii. 9 11 4 10 ii. 1 i. 7 i. 16 ii. 19 ii. xiii. 4 ii. XV. 5 ii. xvi. 2 ii. 5 i. xvii. 3 ii. xviii. 26 i. 29 ii. 33 ii. 41 ii. xix. 1 —2 ii. 8- -10 ii. xxii. 24 ii. xxiii. 1 —5 ii. xxiv. 10 ii. xxvii. 8 ii. XXX. 10 ii. 12 ii. xxxii. 2 i. 8 ii. xxxiii. 6 ii. 9 i. 17 ii. XXXV. 1 i. 5 i. xxxvii. 1 i. 21 i. 58. 37. 85. 15, 22. 9. 331 (bis). 201. 16. 152. 37, 113. 156. 473. 229. 508. 295. 42. 29. 83. 327. 91. 83, 176. 35. 36. 274. 37. 244. 279. 224. 309. 3. 19. 186. 187. 275. 188. 45. 167. 4. 176. 161. 308. 7. 417. 274. 197. 134. 420. 133. 52. INDEX OF TEXTS. ■MV l'SALMS. A chapter. Verse. Vol. Page. .wxix. •> i. lu7. xl. 10 i. 198. 15 ii. 275. xli. 10 i. 160. xlii. 3 ii. 113. 5 ii. 1 12. xliv. 11 ii. 9. 12 ii. 14. 23 ii. 14. xlix. 8 ii. 70. 1. 23 i. 509, 512. ii. 330. li. 9 ii. 181. 16 i. 445. 17 i. 56. lv. 13 ii. 66. lvi. 12 i. 203. lvii. 2 i. 415. Iviii. 8 i. 464. lix. 17 i. 327. lx. 4 i. 415. lxiii. 4 i. 513. lxv. 11 ii. 177. lxvii. 5 ii. 158. lxxii. 8 i. 422. lxxiv. 12 ii. 22. 13 i. 1 1.'.. 16 ii. 156. lxxviii. 26 i. 306. lxxx. 11 ii. 31. 14 i. 331. lxxxi. 5 ii. 20. 6 i. 307. lxxxiii. 5 ii. 10. lxxxv. 14 ii. 20. lxxxviii. 11 ii. 6. Ixxxix. 12 i. 152. 51 ii. 27. xcii. 6 ii. 143. 12 ii. 29. 16 ii. 157. xciii. 3 ii. 191. xciv. 1 ii. 195. 3 ii. 195. xcv. 1 ii. 161. ciii. 3, 5 ii. 21, 227. civ. 33 —35 ii. 178. 29 ii. 221 (bis) cvi. 14 ii. 31. cvii. 16 i. 211. ;:i i. 134. ii. 319. cix. 13 i. 420. 28 i. in;. Psalms. f— \ Chapter. Verse. Vol. Page. Cxi. 5 ii. 269. cxii. 10 ii. 52. cxiii. 9 ii. 227. cxiv. 3, 5 ii. 4. cxv. 16 ii. 13. cxviii. 7 ii. 28, 329. 18 i. 211. 23 ii. 10. 25 ii. 184. 28 ii. 193. cxix. 18 i. 420. 117 i. 506. cxxi. 2 ii. 10. 6 i. 508, 512. cxxx. 6 ii. 72. cxxxi. 2 i. 240. cxxxiii. 1 i. 176. cxxxv. 17 ii. 154. cxxxvii. 5 ii. 29. cxli. 8 ii. 331. cxliii. 5 ii. 323. cxlv. 17 i. 132. Proverbs. ii. t i. 2 229. 10 i. 480. 23 ii. 58. 28 i. 509, 513. 31 ii. 269. ii. 7 ii. 16. iii. 12 ii. 139. 13 i. 161. 18 ii. 14, 53. 30 ii. 268. iv. 4 ii. 162. v. 4 i. 134. 6 ii. 14. vi. 10 ii. 27. 30 ii. 6, 56. vii. 16 ii. 272. 19 i. 524. 23 ii. 162. 25 i. •122. viii. 1 ii. 1 11. 17 i. 276. 24 ii. 15 1. 27 i. 459. ix. 5 ii. 7. 17 ii. 16, 273. X. 1 ii. 39, 318. 2 ii. 50. xi. 1 ii. I.'). 1 ii. 20. 14 ii. 151. 440 HEBREW GRAMMAR. Proverbs. , r ol. Page. Proverbs. , *" V Chapter. Verse. Vol. Page. Chapter . Verse. ' xiii. 1 ii. 35. xxxi. 10—13 i. 77. 7 i. 198. 10—31 ii. 264. 8 ii. 326. 12 ii. 277. XV. 6 ii. 36. 12, 13 ii. 268. xvi. 16 i. 134, 395. 13 ii. 15. xvii. 16 ii. 155. 14 ii. 278. 28 ii. 34. 14—16 i. 78. xviii. 6 ii. 141. 15, 16 ii. 269. 19 ii. 28. 16 ii. 279. 23 ii. 140. 17, 18 ii. 270, 280. xix. 4 ii. 19. 17—21 i. 79. 29 ii. 324. 19—21 ii. 271, 281. XX. 14 ii. 31, 140. 22—24 i. 80. xxi. 3 i. 395. ii. 272, 282. ii. 58, - 274. 25—28 i. 81. 23 i. 201. ii. 273, 283. ii. 179. 29 ii. 27, 284. 25 ii. 268. 30 ii. 66. 29 i. 133. 29, 30 ii. 274. 30 ii. 154. 29—31 i. 82. xxii. 5 ii. 184. 30, 31 ii. 285. 13 ii. 48. 31 ii. 275. 14 ii. 72. Job. 19 ii. 40. •i r • \ xxiii. 22 i. 171. i. 2 i. 143. ii. 162. 2—6 ii. 88. 31 i. 420. 4 i. 213. ii. 158. ii. 52, 77, 132. 34, 35 ii. 164. 5 i. 209. xxiv. 16 ii. 31. 11 ii. 90. 17 i. 205, 241. 13 ii. 54. 24 ii. 140. ii. 1—6 ii. 89. 28 ii. 23. 2 i. 534. XXV. 14 ii. 154. 5 ii. 90. 16 ii. 270. 10 ii. 91. 20 i. 327. iii. 3—5 ii. 101. 27 ii. 58. 20 ii. 56. 28 ii. 28. iv. 19 i. 161. xxvi. 3 ii. 324. v. 2 i. 395. 4,5 ii. 8. 5 i. 160. 12 ii. 271. 15 ii. 162. 14 ii. 33. 23 ii. 20. 27 ii. 183. vi. 13 ii. 5. xxvii. 8 ii. 32. 20 ii. 53. 12 ii. 48. vii. 9 ii. 52. xxix. 1 ii. 39. viii. 3 i. 90. 9 ii. 196. 6 ii. 15. XXX. 15 i. 29 1 . 11 ii. 5. 25 ii. 179. ix. 14 ii. 100. 27 ii. 155. 21 ii. 41. 30 i. 135. 33 ii. 154. xxxi. 3 i. 395. xi. 7 i. 90. 4 i. 395. 15 ii. 10. 10, 11 ii. 267, 276. xii. 24 ii. 38. INDEX OF TEXTS. 441 Job. ol. i. Page. 91. Chapter. Verse. V xiii. 25 xiv. 10 ii. 116. 11 ii. 52. XV. 35 ii. 68. xvi. 4 i. 524. 7 ii. 85, 309. 12 ii. 179. 17 ii. 19, 162, 326. 18 ii. 180. xix. 6 i. 48. 11 i. 417. 16 ii. 9. xxii. 19 ii. 52. 21 ii. 72. xxiii. 2 ii. 315. 9, 11 ii. 23. xxiv. 18 i. 446. 21 i. 295. xxv i. 4 i. 176. xxvii. 6 ii. 10. 18 i. 161. xxviii.12- -15 ii. 189. 14 ii. 48. 24 ii. 84. xxix.14 — 18 ii. 180. xxx.29— 31 ii. 181. xxxi. 21 ii. 272. xxxii. 1 —6 ii. 90. 6 ii. 58. XXXV. 9 ii. 330. xxxvi. 5 ii. 38. 26 ii. 326. xxxvii. 6 i. 422. 6 ii. 312. 21 ii. 24. xxxviii. 12 ii. 65. 20 ii. 14. 26 ii. 38, 157. xl. 4 i. 55, 446. ii. 9. 8 ii. 65. 12 i. 513. 20 ii. 20. 25 ii. 5. xli. 9 ii. 66. xlii.l- -10 ii. 89. 8 ii. 90. 9 i. 213. 15 ii. 54. 16 ,17 ii. 89. The Soko op Sol OMON. i. 505. r i. 1 TlTF. SONO OP SOLOMON. / "^^ Chapter. VeTM. Vol. Page. i. 2 ii. 85. 2—4 ii. 192. 4 ii. 312. 5 ii. L95. 6 i. 163 (bis). 8 ii. 41 (bis). 9 ii. 227. ii. 1, 2 ii. 164. 11 ii. 41, 52. 17 ii. 231. iii. 3 ii. 164. iv. 6 ii. 41. 8 ii. 195. 9 i. 508, 510. 11 ii. 183. v. 2, 3 ii. 192. 8— 10,&c. ii. 165. 10—16 ii. 43. 14 ii. 27. vi. 1 ii. 165. 9 ii. 144, 274 viii. 6 ii. 19, 31. Rtjth. A / ^ i. 1 i. 198. ii. 67. 8 ii. 144. 9—22 ii. 145. 12 i. 294. 13 ii. 61. 17 ii. 158. 19 ii. 284. ii. 3 ii. 59. 6 ii. 3. 8 i. 244. 9 ii. 6, 130. 14 ii. 131. 17 ii. 17. 18 ii. 39. 21 i. 544. iii. 1 ii. 8. 2 ii. 163. 7 i. 244, 541 15 i. 294. ii. 161. 16 ii. 44. iv.l— 12 ii. 272. Lamentations. A i. 1 i. 134. 1,2 ii. 190. i. 395. 442 HEBREW GRAMMAR. Lamentations. Chapter. Verse- i. 2 4 8 9 14 16 ii. 1 11 12 13 15 ill. 1, 8 2 21—29 66 IV. 1 4 7 9 12 13 ECCLESIASTES. * . 1. ii. iv. v. vii. viii. ix. XI. xn. 3 4 9 9 Esther. 11. iii. iv. Vol. Page. ii. 157. 14. 31. 158 16. i. 415. u. ii. ii. ii. n. ii. ii. ii. ii. ii. ii. ii. l. i. ii. i. i. 9 1 9 4 12 ii. 18 26 1 12 l. i. ii. i. ii. 17 ii. 1 ii. 19 ii. 20 ii. i. ii. i. i. ii. 1 i. 10 ii. 20 i. 8 i. 4 i. 198. 241. 68. 3, 190. 4. l. i. ii. ii. ii. ii. 24. ii. 30. 191. 13. 06. 316. 267. 16. 315. 323. 162. 107, 508, 512. 160. 134. 163. 19. 276. 364. 58. 163. 343. 58. 27. 273. 183. 422. 183. 501. 197. 58. 170. 232. 524. 524. 329. Esther. Chapter. Verse. Vol. Page. v. 1 ii. 103. viii. 6 ii. 69. ix. 12,16 ii. 69. Nehemiah. V. 3 n. 269. Vlll. 17 i. 308. IX. 19 n. 322. X. 33 i. 145. X!l. 29 n. 279. 1 Chronicles, . A r *\ 11. 32 ii. 157. XV. 27 i. 331. XXI 1. 4 ii. 154. XXV1U. 5 ii. 274. 2 Chronicles. a , X. 15 438. XV. 8 1, 243. XXXIV. 7 1, 241. NEW TESTAMENT. St. Matthew. , » r^ i. 21 i. 308. xii. 18 ii. 308. Romans. a. 16 ii. 314. 1 Corinthians. xvi. 22 PuiLirriANS. 422. ii. 7 ii. 308. Hebrews. * XII. 2 ii. 306. Revelation. . * 8 ii. 147. CORRIGENDA. VOLUME I. Page Line For 10 3 from bottom n 16 2 from bottom ht 26 3 from bottom german 44 2 from bottom dele long 45 6 from bottom vowel 89 18 TjVnn 116 8 from bottom TCTM 120 3 from bottom 1 UUL UlilJ- l>HU >_ \ gular affixes 136 146 1 of Exercise 2 of Exercise 10 b&3 after^? 164 6 T 175 5 from bottom ^P 177 5 from 5 from bottom bottom fpribaofo '" t : • 192 6 from bottom 3TJ2913 215 8 from bottom nnM 219 5 mjugatii Read in ht e German accent in the Singular, generally with Sin- gular affixes ; and in the Plural, always with Plural affi Vol. i., p. 541). read [also ?Ty3 ?f^b3tt?B T " Vui 444 HEBREW GRAMMAR. Page Line For Read 225 last line onsan t : - o*wan * t : " 227 3 page 137 page 208 234 12 from bottom T vhw T 246 8 from bottom page 137 page 208 252 9 •robi - T ■ t : 254 7 from bottom page 137 page 208 267 6 from bottom nabarj nattfan t : - ■% 271 4 of Exercise nanam t : - • - T 7^?^l 272 1 74, 74 73," 73 >» 5 • T T 284 8 from bottom snn sin 5> 7 from bottom ■anaa t : * " ->a"rcaa t : * - 292 9 from bottom to the letters liTN , f to the letters IJT'N ( (as well as H & ID), 310 12 ■na> ■nab 320 3 from bottom Conjugation Voice 327 5 from bottom 2 Sing. Masc. 2 Plu. Masc. 340 4 from bottom msn , man t : ' man, man 346 8 from bottom nan") e nan*! 365 2 from bottom lflNjip 1£NS» 378 5 from bottom riwsizJ T. ** T T "* T 397 5 from bottom br_ bp^ 401 1 nbaa n*>«? 404 last line. niban nibap 411 8 from bottom ni s n ni s h 416 6 — J T ni s n ? ni^n 420 5 nbnnm nbnnm 421 4 "Sh bn' : 424 4 nitf? nby 435 6 from bottom dele &c, &c. 443 9 from bottom ■r 1 • ■ nxaoipnn 446 8 V 'V ' 449 7 from bottom criiaipa 452 4 ^anion ■•aiatojg 454 6 from bottom fniapn •jrriaprj 459 5 from bottom Pl"j ' ppn ' 466 3 from bottom cnttfan ♦ t ; • t : • 467 12 from bottom t t •■. : nnbsD t t ••. : CORRIGENDA. i Pago Lino For Read 469 10 llipli. Hithp. >> 18 homer omer. 491 8 of Exercise tr?n Win T " 498 5 TO mRf 503 11 inTpwj VTTjron 505 3 from bottom Miffl^. ^■^ 525 2 from bottom tpWtth tfyufo^ 549 1 and 2 hand not hand lay not 563 7 from bottom j lest 1 I, ( lest 1 1? VOLUME II. 58 5 from bottom na^n rrisnrr 89 9 of Hebrew *vii ??.! 107 6 from bottom T rrtoa - T 119 2 nms noiM 121 6 from bottom Is. vii. 18 Is. ix. 5 178 6 from bottom tv: v 2-13?."; 188 8 mobs v t : T *." t : - 200 9 Djriann DJ-ittfnn 202 2 from bottom Pij?!0n flftVnn 206 9 from bottom T rib^ >5 6 from bottom, Insert EB7 before 1*f 2N 207 5 from bottom nine* T T 244 10 • t : • "•nb-ja 268 16 n^23 TV - T V - 274 14 from bottom r\wy nizto 298 3 VijatfD sinSnttfn 323 last line riiaiv ' ni:iy 325 7 lE^I lEiji 328 4 from bottom P2ii>»ii7 S2H?*B5 337 20 D^abo ■ T ' 348 11 nN"T! nsT|' 370 2 ntosoo nws$& 445 44t) Lino 373 1 384 6 from bottom 410 last line 412 2 from bottom 413 4 416 7 419 2 55 3 428 3 from bottom HEBREW GRAMMAR. For nnpEn Read marc T T t " : "121'' T T {£j=> Should any object to the manner in which the word after is divided into syllables on page 14 of Vol. I. — considering the more correct division to be aft-er (from the old word aft), — the word alter may be there used for the illustration instead of after, the / being changed into /. In the sheet containing the sixteen pages 337 — 352 of Vol. II., the Vowel-points of several words are not marked in ink, though the marks of the type are visible on the paper : it is hoped that this accident has not occurred in many copies. FINIS. Macintosh, Printer, Great New-street, London. UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY Los Angeles This book is DUE on the last date stamped below. " FEB 2 3 | ft tift 021994 * IflQi 315 uc SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY mill ml ill II llll llll AA 000 719 662 9 3 1158 00670 2335 i i ii